MX-B402 | MX-B402SC Operation Manual

OPERATION GUIDE
Search based on
what you want to do
Search using the
table of contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
COPIER
PRINTER
MAKE A COPY
PRINT A DOCUMENT
SEND A FAX
FACSIMILE
SCANNER / INTERNET FAX
DOCUMENT FILING
SYSTEM SETTINGS
SCAN AN IMAGE /
SEND AN INTERNET FAX
SAVE A JOB AND
REUSE IT LATER
MAINTAIN
THE MACHINE
TROUBLESHOOTING
About Operation Guide
MAKE A COPY
Conserve
2010/
Reduce copy
mistakes
04/04
Add the date or
page numbers
Assemble output
into a pamphlet
Other convenient functions
Make a copy of this
type of original
Make a copy on
this type of paper
Conserve
Copy on both sides of the
paper
Copy on the front and back
of a card
Copy multiple pages on
one side of one sheet of
paper
Reduce copy mistakes
Print one set of copies for
proofing
Make a copy of this type of original
More original pages than
can be loaded at once
Bulky original (shadows
appear at edges)
Mixed-size originals
Make a copy on this type of paper
Envelopes and other
special media
Transparency film
Add the date or page numbers
Add the date
04/0
2010/
Add a stamp
4
Add the page number
9
10
11
ABCD
EFG
Add text
Assemble output into a pamphlet
Create a pamphlet
Create a blank margin for
hole punching
Staple output
Other convenient functions
Functions used for specific purposes
z Make a copy of arranged photos
z Make a mirror-image copy
z Copy onto the center of the paper
z Make a negative copy
Convenient functions
z Give priority to a copy job
z Check the status of a reserved job
z Copy a thin original
PRINT A DOCUMENT
Conserve
Print without a
computer
Print on this type
of paper
Add text or an
image
Other convenient functions
Print attractive
output
Assemble output
into a pamphlet
Conserve
Print on both sides of the
paper
Print multiple pages on one
side of the paper
Print without a computer
FTP
Print a file on an FTP
Print a file in a USB
memory device
Print a file in a network
folder
Print a file stored in the
machine
Print attractive output
Print matching the size of
the paper
Adjust the brightness and
contrast
Bring out faint text and
lines
Select the print mode
Adjust the line widths of
CAD data.
Assemble output into a pamphlet
Create a pamphlet
Staple output
Create a blank margin for
hole punching
Print specific pages on the
front side of the paper
Print on this type of paper
Envelopes
Transparency film
Print specific pages on
different paper
Rotate the image 180
degrees
Add text or an image
Add a watermark to print
data
Overlay a fixed form on the
print data
Overlay an image on the
print data
Other convenient functions
Correct the size or orientation of the print data
z Enlarge or reduce the print image
z Print a mirror-image
Security is important
z Print confidentially
z Print an encrypted PDF file
Functions used for specific purposes
z Print an "invoice copy"
z Create a large poster
Convenient functions
z Give priority to a print job
z Store frequently used print settings
z Store a print job
SEND A FAX
Conserve
Send this type of
document
Save trouble
Security is
important
Other convenient functions
Prevent transmission to
the wrong destination
Send a clear
document
Conserve
Send when the rate is
lowest
Relay a transmission
through a branch office
Check received data before
printing
Send this type of document
Bulky original (shadows
appear at edges)
More original pages than
can be loaded at once
Original printed on both
sides
ID card or other card
Prevent transmission to the wrong destination
Check the destination once
more before sending
Check the log of previous
transmissions
Check the result of
transmission
Send a clear document
Adjust the exposure
Adjust the image quality
Specify the size before
sending
Send without shadows at
the edges
Save trouble
1
2
3
XXXX-6789
XXXX-9874
XXXX-4567
XXXX-5432
XXXX-9999
Store frequently used
settings
View the transmission log
Send to multiple
destinations
XXXX-6789
XXXX-9874
XXXX-4567
XXXX-5432
XXXX-9999
Easily specify an address
(search number)
Security is important
Check the destination once
more before sending
Print protected reception
data
Send a document at the
other machine's request
Send confidentially
Initiate reception of a
document from a sending
machine
Other convenient functions
Convenient management functions
z Forward a received fax to a network address
z Print a list of addresses
Convenient functions
z Send a thin original
z Select a transmission destination from a global address book
z Give priority to a transmission
z Use an extension phone
z Check the number of pages for the original then send
SCAN AN IMAGE / SEND AN INTERNET FAX
Send a clear
image
Send this type of
document
Save trouble
Scan from my
computer
Other convenient functions
Prevent transmission to
the wrong destination
Send a smaller
file
Send a clear image
Adjust the contrast or
image quality
Adjust the resolution
before sending
Send without shadows at
the edges
Suppress the background of
a transmitted document
Send this type of document
Bulky original (shadows
appear at edges)
More original pages than
can be loaded at once
Original printed on both
sides
Original with background
Prevent transmission to the wrong destination
Check the result of
transmission
Check the log of previous
transmissions
Send a smaller file
Send at low resolution
Compress a file before
sending
Reduce an image before
sending
Send an image in black &
white
ID or other card
Save trouble
1
2
3
aaa@aa.aa.co
bbb@bb.bb.c
ccc@cc.cc.co
ddd@dd.dd.c
eee@ee.ee.co
Store frequently used
settings
View the transmission log
Send an Internet fax from a
computer
Send to multiple
destinations
aaa@aa.aa.c
bbb@bb.bb.
ccc@cc.cc.c
ddd@dd.dd.
eee@ee.ee.e
Easily specify an address
(search number)
Other convenient functions
Convenient management functions
z Forward a received fax to a network address
z Print a list of transmission destinations
Convenient functions
z Scan a thin original
z Select a transmission destination from a global address book
z Send at a specified time
z Give priority to a transmission
z Send in USB memory mode
z Original Sheets Before Transmisson
z Send the original while removing the colored portions
z Blank page skip
SAVE A JOB AND REUSE IT LATER
Search for a file
Organize my files
Save an important
document
Print a batch of
files
Search for a file
abc
Search for a file using a
keyword
Search by checking the
contents of files
Organize my files
Delete a file
Delete all files
Periodically delete files
Change the folder
MAINTAIN THE MACHINE
Clean the
machine
Replace a toner
cartridge
Replace the
staple cartridge
Replace the toner
collection container
Clean the machine
Clean the document glass and
automatic document feeder
Clean the main charger of
the photoconductive drum
Clean the original feed
roller
Clean the bypass feed
roller
Clean the laser unit
ABOUT OPERATION GUIDE
There are two ways to search for a topic in this guide: you can use an "I want to..." menu, or you can use a regular table
of contents.
The following explanation assumes that Adobe Reader 8.0 is being used (Some buttons do not appear in the default
state.).
Return to top page (
)
Return to previously displayed page (
Search based on what you
want to do
)
Search using the table of
contents
Menu page
Table of
contents page
Body page
i
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Click a button below to move to the page that you wish to view.
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1)
(5)
Return to top page button
(2)
(6)
Back one page button
Forward one page button
Displays the next page.
(4)
Contents button
Displays the contents of each chapter.
For example, if the current page is a page in the body of
the printer chapter, this button shows the contents of the
printer chapter.
Displays the previous page.
(3)
Adobe Reader Help button
Opens Adobe Reader Help.
If an operation does not proceed as expected, click this
button to start over again.
Return to previously displayed page button
Displays the page that was displayed before the current
page.
• If a button does not appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help to display the button.
• Caution when printing
If all pages are printed, the menu pages of the "I want to..." menu will also be printed. To print only the pages that contain
the explanation of a function, specify a page range.
ii
MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THE MACHINE
Operation manuals in PDF format (this manual)
The manuals in PDF format provide detailed explanations of the procedures for using the machine in each mode. To
view the PDF manuals, download them from the hard drive in the machine. The procedure for downloading the manuals
is explained in "Downloading the Operation Guide" in the Start Guide.
1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
This chapter provides information, such as basic operation procedures and how to load paper.
2. COPIER
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the copy function.
3. PRINTER
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the print function.
4. FACSIMILE
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the fax function.
5. SCANNER / INTERNET FAX
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the scanner function and
the Internet fax function.
6. DOCUMENT FILING
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the document filing
function. The document filing function allows you to save the document data of a copy or fax job,
or the data of a print job, as a file on the machine's hard drive. The file can be called up as
needed.
7. SYSTEM SETTINGS
This chapter explains the "System Settings", which are used to configure a variety of parameters
to suit the aims and the needs of your workplace. Current settings can be displayed or printed out
from the "System Settings".
8. TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter explains how to remove paper misfeeds and provides answers to frequently asked
questions regarding the operation of the machine in each mode. Refer to this manual when you
have difficulty using the machine.
Printed manuals
Manual name
Start Guide
Contents
This manual contains instructions for using the machine safely, describes preparations that must be
made before using the machine, and lists the specifications of the machine and its peripheral devices.
iii
ABOUT OPERATION MANUAL
This manual explains how to use the MX-B402/MX-B402SC digital multifunctional system.
Please note
• For information on installing the drivers and software cited in this manual, please refer to the Start Guide.
• For information on your operating system, please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function.
• The explanations of screens and procedures in a Windows environment are primarily for Windows Vista®. The screens may
vary depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.
• The explanations of screens and procedures in a Macintosh environment are based on Mac OS X v10.4 in the case of Mac OS
X. The screens may vary depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.
• Wherever "MX-xxxx" appears in this manual, please substitute your model name for "xxxx".
• Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the manual, please
contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect or other problem
is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• Aside from instances provided for by law, SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during the use of the product or its
options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for any damage that occurs due
to use of the product.
Warning
• Reproduction, adaptation or translation of the contents of the manual without prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under copyright laws.
• All information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Illustrations and the operation panel and touch panel shown in this manual
The peripheral devices are generally optional, however, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment.
The explanations in this manual assume that 500 sheet paper feed units (total of four trays) are installed on the MX-B402.
For some functions and procedures, the explanations assume that devices other than the above are installed.
The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine
due to product improvements and modifications.
Icons used in the manuals
The icons in the manuals indicate the following types of information:
Warning
This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of human death or injury.
Caution
This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of human injury or property damage.
This alerts you to a situation where
there is a risk of machine damage or
failure.
This provides a supplemental
explanation of a function or procedure.
This explains how to cancel or correct
an operation.
This indicates the name of a system setting and provides a brief
explanation of the setting.
When "System Settings:" appears:
A general setting is explained.
When "System Settings (Administrator):" appears:
A setting that can only be configured by an administrator is
explained.
iv
CHAPTER 1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
This chapter provides information on basic operation procedures, how to load paper and machine maintenance.
• PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE
DOCUMENT GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND
DOCUMENT GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SIDE AND BACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
1-3
1-5
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
PERIPHERAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
FINISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
• PART NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
• SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
1-6
1-7
1-8
FINISHER SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
TOUCH PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
• STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
• SYSTEM BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
BUSINESS CARD FEEDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
• Business card feeder specifications . . . . . . . . . 1-48
SHARP OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
• APPLICATION COMMUNICATION
MODULE (MX-AMX2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
• EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE
(MX-AMX3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF . . . . . . . . . 1-15
• ENERGY SAVE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
• [POWER SAVE] KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
USER AUTHENTICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
• AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER. . . . . 1-17
• AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME /
PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
REPLACING SUPPLIES AND
MAINTENANCE
HOME SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES. . . . . . . 1-52
REMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE. . . . . . 1-23
REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION
CONTAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
ITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOG . . . . . . . . . 1-24
REPLACING THE STAPLE CARTRIDGE IN
THE FINISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
LOADING PAPER
REGULAR MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER . . . . . . . . . 1-27
• NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS . . . . . . 1-27
• USEABLE PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
CLEANING THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
• LOADING PAPER AND CHANGING THE
PAPER SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
CLEANING THE BYPASS TRAY ROLLERS. . . . . 1-65
CLEANING THE MAIN CHARGER OF THE
PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
CLEANING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER ROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
CLEANING THE LASER UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70
LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY . . . . . . 1-33
• IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING THE
BYPASS TRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
CLEANING THE PT CHARGER OF THE
PRIMARY TRANSFER BELT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
ORIGINALS
PLACING THE ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
• PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER . . . . . . . . 1-37
1-1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
ENTERING TEXT
FUNCTIONS OF THE MAIN KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
• ENTERING TEXT FROM A KEYBOARD . . . . . 1-78
SOFTWARE SETUP
BEFORE INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . 1-79
SETUP IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . 1-80
• OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION
SCREEN (FOR ALL SOFTWARE) . . . . . . . . . . 1-80
• INSTALLING THE PRINTER DRIVER /
PC-FAX DRIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81
• INSTALLING THE PRINTER STATUS MONITOR . . . 1-100
• INSTALLING THE SCANNER DRIVER . . . . . 1-101
• CHANGING THE PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-103
SETUP IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT . . . . 1-107
• MAC OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107
• MAC OS 9.0 - 9.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113
REMOVING THE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-116
1-2
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
This section provides basic information about the machine. Please read this chapter before using the machine.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
EXTERIOR
(1)
(2) (3) (4)
(5)
When using the
MX-B402SC
When a finisher is installed
(6)
(1)
(7)
Automatic document feeder
(8)
(6)
Main power switch
This is used to power on the machine.
When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this
switch in the "on" position.
☞ TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 1-15)
(7)
Handle
Grasp it when moving the machine.
This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both
sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
(2)
Front cover
Open this cover to replace a toner cartridge.
☞ REPLACING SUPPLIES AND MAINTENANCE
(page 1-52)
(3)
Caution
Operation panel
The main unit is extremely heavy, and thus
two people are required to do the work. When
lifting the main unit, grasp the handles on
each side firm
This is used to select functions and enter the number of
copies.
☞ OPERATION PANEL (page 1-8)
(4)
Output tray (center tray)
Output is delivered to this tray.
(5)
(8)
Finisher*
This can be used to staple output.
☞ FINISHER (page 1-45)
Bypass tray
Use this tray to feed paper manually.
When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11" or A4, be
sure to pull out the bypass tray extension.
☞ LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-33)
* Peripheral device.
1-3
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
When using the MX-B402SC
(9)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(11) Tray 2/Tray 3/Tray 4
(When 500-sheet paper feed units are installed)*
Keyboard (MX-B402SC only)
This is a keyboard that is incorporated into the machine.
When not used, it can be stored under the operation
panel.
☞ ENTERING TEXT FROM A KEYBOARD (page 1-78)
These hold paper.
For 500-sheet paper feed unit combinations, consult your
dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
☞ TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 (page 1-30)
(10) Tray 1
(12) USB connector (A type)
This holds paper.
☞ TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 (page 1-30)
Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB
memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
* Peripheral device.
1-4
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
INTERIOR
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
Toner collection
container removed and
main charger cover open
(19)
(20)
(13) Developer cartridge
This contains the developer that is necessary to transfer
the toner to the paper.
When replacing the drum cartridge, the developer cartridge
must be removed before the drum cartridge is replaced.
☞ REPLACING SUPPLIES AND MAINTENANCE (page 1-52)
(21)
(22) (23)
(18) Paper reversing section
This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open
this part to remove a paper misfeed.
☞ REPLACING SUPPLIES AND MAINTENANCE (page 1-52)
(19) Main charger cover
Open this cover to clean the main charger.
☞ REPLACING SUPPLIES AND MAINTENANCE (page 1-52)
(14) Drum cartridge
This contains the photosensitive drum that is used to
create images for copying and printing.
☞ REPLACING SUPPLIES AND MAINTENANCE (page 1-52)
\
(20) Toner collection container
This collects excess toner that remains after printing.
☞ REPLACING SUPPLIES AND MAINTENANCE (page 1-52)
(15) Toner cartridge
This contains toner for printing. When the toner runs out
in a cartridge, the cartridge must be replaced.
☞ REPLACING SUPPLIES AND MAINTENANCE (page 1-52)
Your service technician will collect the toner collection
container.
(21) Toner collection container release lever
(16) Fusing unit
Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto
the paper.
Turn this lever when you need to release the toner
collection container lock to replace the toner collection
container or clean the laser unit.
☞ REPLACING SUPPLIES AND MAINTENANCE (page 1-52)
Caution
(22) Paper tray right side cover
Open this to remove a paper misfeed in trays.
☞ 8. TROUBLESHOOTING "REMOVING MISFEEDS"
(page 8-10)
The fusing unit is hot. Take care not to burn
yourself when removing a paper misfeed.
(17) Right side cover
Open this cover to remove a misfeed.
☞ 8. TROUBLESHOOTING "REMOVING MISFEEDS"
(page 8-10)
(23) Right side cover release lever
To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to
open the right side cover.
☞ 8. TROUBLESHOOTING "REMOVING MISFEEDS"
(page 8-10)
1-5
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND DOCUMENT
GLASS
Automatic document feeder (MX-B402)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Automatic document feeder (MX-B402SC)
(1)
(1)
(8)
(2) (3) (9)
Paper feed roller
(6)
This roller rotates to automatically feed the original.
(2)
Document feeding area cover
(7)
Original guides
(8)
(7)
Scanning area
Document glass
Document exit area cover
open this cover to remove an original misfeed.
(9)
Original exit tray
Original exit tray 1
Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
(5)
(6)
Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot
be fed through the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE DOCUMENT
GLASS (page 1-41)
These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly.
Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
(4)
(10)
Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned
here.
Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean
the paper feed roller.
☞ 8. TROUBLESHOOTING "REMOVING MISFEEDS"
(page 8-10)
(3)
(5)
(10) Original exit tray 2
Document feeder tray
If originals are not delivered to original exit tray 1 after
scanning, they are delivered to this tray.
Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be
placed face up.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
1-6
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
SIDE AND BACK
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
(4)
USB connector (A type)
Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB
memory to the machine.
For the MX-B402, this connector is not initially available
for use. If you wish to use the connector, contact your
service technician.
(2)
Caution
This connector is for use only by service
technicians.
Connecting a cable to this connector may
cause the machine to malfunction.
LAN connector
Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the
machine is used on a network.
For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
(3)
Service-only connector
Important note for service technicians:
The cable connected to the service connector
must be less than 118" (3 m) in length.
USB connector (B type )
Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
A computer can be connected to this connector to use
the machine as a printer.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
(5)
1-7
Power plug
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
OPERATION PANEL
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
JOB STATUS
SYSTEM
SETTINGS
PRINT
IMAGE SEND
READY
DATA
LINE
DATA
LOGOUT
HOME
(7)
(1)
(5)
Touch panel
(6)
(7)
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
)
[HOME] key
Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently
used settings can be registered in the home screen to
enable quick and easy operation of the machine.
☞ HOME SCREEN (page 1-22)
(8)
IMAGE SEND mode indicators
• LINE indicator
This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax
or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of
an image in scan mode.
• DATA indicator
This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot
be printed because of a problem such as out of paper.
This lights up when there is a transmission job that has
not been sent.
[JOB STATUS] key
Press this key to display the job status screen. The job
status screen is used to check information on jobs and to
cancel jobs.
For details, see the chapters for each of the functions in
this manual.
(4)
[CLEAR] key (
Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
Press this key to display the system settings menu
screen. The system settings are used to configure paper
tray settings, store addresses for transmission
operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine
easier to use.
(3)
Numeric keys
These are used to enter the number of copies, fax
numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are
also used to enter numeric value settings (except for the
system settings).
Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display.
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of
operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected
item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you
perform an operation.
☞ TOUCH PANEL (page 1-10)
(2)
(8)
PRINT mode indicators
• READY indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
• DATA indicator
This blinks while print data is being received and lights
steadily while printing is taking place.
1-8
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
(9)
JOB STATUS
SYSTEM
SETTINGS
PRINT
IMAGE SEND
READY
DATA
LINE
DATA
LOGOUT
HOME
(10)
(9)
(12)
(13) [STOP] key (
[START] key
(10) [LOGOUT] key (
(14) (15) (16)
)
(14) [POWER SAVE] key (
)
) / indicator
Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off
mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key (
) blinks when the machine
is in auto power shut-off mode.
☞ [POWER SAVE] KEY (page 1-16)
Press this key to log out after you have logged in and
used the machine. When using the fax function, this key
can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial
line.
☞ USER AUTHENTICATION (page 1-17)
)
(15) [POWER] key (
When using the copy function, press this key to use a job
program. When using the fax function, this key can be
used when dialing.
(12) [CLEAR ALL] key (
(13)
Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an
original.
Press this key to copy or scan an original.
This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.
(11) [#/P] key (
(11)
)
Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
☞ TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 1-15)
(16) Main power indicator
)
This lights up when the machine's main power switch is
in the "on" position.
☞ TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 1-15)
Press this key to return to the initial operation state.
Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that
have been selected and start operation from the initial
state.
1-9
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
TOUCH PANEL
This section explains how to use the touch panel.
• To enter text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-76).
• For information on the screens and procedures for using the system settings, see "Common Operation Methods"
(page 7-4) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
Using the touch panel
Example 1
(1)
COPY
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
Job status screen.
Print Job
Job Queue
(2)
Scan to
Fax Job
Sets / Progress
Status
1
Copy
020 / 001
Copying
2
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
3
Computer01
Beep
002
/ 000
Waiting
4
0312345678
001 / 000
Tone
Waiting
Spool
Job Queue
Complete
1
1
Detail
Priority
(3)
Stop/Delete
(1) Mode select keys
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and document filing modes.
(2) Settings for each function are easily selected and canceled by touching the keys on the screen with your finger.
When an item is selected, a beep will sound and the item will be highlighted to confirm the selection.
(3) Keys that are grayed out cannot be selected.
If you touch a key that cannot be selected, a double beep will sound.
Example 3
Example 2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(4)
Cancel
Margin Shift
OK
Special Modes
OK
Special Modes
(2)
OK
Erase
Pamphlet Copy
Transparency
Inserts
2in1
Card Shot
Stamp
Image Edit
Sharpness
File
Quick File
Margin Shift
Down
1
Right
Left
Side 1
1/2
Job
Build
Side 2
(0~1)
inch
1/2
(0~1)
inch
2
Up
(1) If the initial state of a key in a screen is highlighted,
the key is selected. To change the selection, touch
one of the other keys to highlight that key.
(2) The
keys can be used to increase or
decrease a value. To make a value change quickly,
keep your finger on the key.
(3) Touch this key to cancel a setting.
(4) Touch the [OK] key to enter and save a setting.
(1) Some items in the special modes screen are selected
by simply touching the key of the item.
To cancel a selected item, touch the highlighted key
once again so that it is no longer highlighted.
(2) When settings extend over multiple screens, touch
the
key or the
key to switch through the
screens.
1-10
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Example 4
2-Sided Copy
Plain
81/2x11
Output
1. 81/2x11
2. 51/2x81/2
3. 81/2x14
4. 81/2x11
Exposure
Auto
OK
Function Review
Special Modes
Margin Shift
Shift:Right
Front:1/2inch/Back:1/2inch
Erase
Edge:1/2inch
1
1
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
Paper Select
Original
100%
Auto
8½x11
Plain
When at least one special mode is selected, the
key appears in the base screen.
The
key can be touched to display a list of the
selected special modes.
Example 5
OK
Copy Ratio
8½x11
8½x14
5½x8½
8½x11
100
64%
Zoom
77%
%
129%
5½x8½
Enter value via the 10-key.
8½x11
1
2
100
Cancel
100%
Auto Image
(50-200)
OK
XY Zoom
Touch a numeric value display key to directly enter a
value with the numeric keys.
Press the numeric keys to enter any numeric value
and then touch the [OK] key.
The touch panel (screen) shown in this manual is a descriptive image. The actual screen is slightly different.
System Settings (Administrator): Keys Touch Sound
This is used to adjust the volume of the beep that sounds when keys are touched. The key touch sound can also be turned
off.
1-11
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
STATUS DISPLAY
When the base screen of a mode appears, the right side of the touch panel shows the machine's status.
The information shown is explained below.
Example: Basic screen of copy mode
Copies in progress from tray 1.
Ready to scan for next copy job.
Job Status
Interrupt
(1)
MFP Status
Job Status
MFP Status
Special Modes
020/015
Plain
81/2x11
1. 81/2x11
2. 51/2x81/2
3. 81/2x14
4. 81/2x11
Exposure
Auto
Maintenance
Information
DC DC DC
2-Sided Copy
Copying
Output
020/015
DC
DC
DC
Waiting
DC
DC
DC
File
Quick File
020/015
Waiting
Copy Ratio
100%
Original
Paper Select
020/015
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Waiting
(2)
(1)
(3)
Display selection key
The status display can be switched between "Job Status"
and "MFP Status".
If the job status screen is displayed, the status display
automatically changes to "MFP Status".
(2)
(3)
"MFP Status" display
This shows machine system information.
"Maintenance Information"
This shows machine maintenance information by means
of codes.
"Job Status" display
This shows the first 4 print jobs in the print queue (the job
in progress and jobs waiting to be printed). The type of
job, the set number of copies, the number of copies
completed, and the job status appear.
Jobs cannot be manipulated in this screen. Jobs can only
be manipulated in the job status screen.
For details, see the chapters for each of the functions in
this manual.
1-12
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
SYSTEM BAR
The system bar appears at the bottom of the touch panel.
The items that appear in the system bar are explained below.
MFP Status
Special Modes
020/015
Plain
81/2x11
1. 81/2x11
2. 51/2x81/2
3. 81/2x14
4. 81/2x11
Exposure
Auto
2-Sided Copy
Copying
Output
020/015
Waiting
File
020/015
Quick File
Waiting
Copy Ratio
Original
100%
Paper Select
020/015
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Waiting
Tray1
(1)
(1)
(2)
When a base screen other than that of image send mode
appears, the number of the tray being used to feed paper
appears during paper feeding. The color appearing in the
job status display depends on the job status as indicated
in the table below.
The job status display can be touched to show the job
status screen.
Job status display
The jobs in progress or reserved are indicated by icons.
The icons are as follows.
Print job
Copy job
Scan to E-mail
job
Scan to FTP job
Scan to
Network Folder
job
Scan to
Desktop job
Fax
transmission
job
Fax reception
job
PC-Fax
transmission
job
Internet fax
transmission
job
(Including
Direct SMTP)
Internet Fax
reception job
(Including
Direct SMTP)
PC-I-Fax
transmission
job
Broadcast job*
Inbound routing
job
Scan to HDD
file print job
(3)
Job status
display
(2)
Machine Configuration
Green
A print, scan or other job is being
executed normally.
Yellow
The machine is warming up or on
standby, or a job is being canceled.
Red
A paper misfeed or other error
condition has occurred.
Gray
The machine has no jobs.
Icon display
This icon appears when data is being sent or
received.
This icon appears when fax, scan, or
Internet fax data is stored in the machine's
memory. When data to be transmitted is
stored,
appears. When received data is
stored,
appears. When both data to be
transmitted and received data are stored,
appears.
Metadata send
job
This icon appears when a service technician
has activated simulation mode.
* This appears in a multi-mode broadcast job.
This icon appears when a USB memory or
other USB device is connected to the
machine.
1-13
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
This icon appears when the data security kit
is being used.
The icon appears when the machine is
communicating with an external application.
(3)
Brightness adjustment key
Touch this key to adjust the brightness of the touch
panel.
When touched, the following screen appears next to the
key.
Touch the [+] key or the [-] key to adjust the brightness.
When finished, touch the brightness adjustment key
again to close the screen.
1-14
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF
The machine has two power switches. One is the main power switch on the left side of the machine, and the other is the
[POWER] key ( ) on the upper right side of the operation panel.
Main power switch
When the main power switch is switched on, the main
power indicator on the operation panel lights up.
[POWER] key
Main power indicator
"On" position
T
"Off" position
[POWER] key
Turning on the power
Turning off the power
(1) Switch the main power switch to the "on"
position.
(1) Press the [POWER] key (
power.
(2) Press the [POWER] key (
power.
(2) Switch the main power switch to the "off"
position.
) to turn on the
) to turn off the
• Before switching off the main power switch, make sure that the DATA indicator for printing and the DATA and LINE
indicators for image send are not lit or blinking on the operation panel.
Switching off the main power switch or removing the power cord from the outlet while any of the indicators are lit or blinking
may damage the hard drive and cause data to be lost.
• Switch off both the [POWER] key (
) and the main power switch and unplug the power cord if you suspect a machine
failure, if there is a bad thunderstorm nearby, or when you are moving the machine.
When using the fax or Internet fax function, always keep the main power switch in the "on" position.
Restarting the machine
In order for some settings to take effect, the machine must be restarted.
If a message in the touch panel prompts you to restart the machine, press the [POWER] key (
and then press the key again to turn the power back on.
) to turn off the power
In some states of the machine, pressing the [POWER] key (
) to restart will not make the settings take effect. In this case,
use the main power switch to switch the power off and then on.
1-15
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
ENERGY SAVE FUNCTIONS
This product has the following two energy save functions that conform to the Energy Star guidelines to help conserve
natural resources and reduce environmental pollution.
Preheat Mode (Low power mode)
Preheat mode automatically lowers the temperature of the fusing unit and thereby reduces power consumption if the
machine remains in the standby state for the interval of time set in "Preheat Mode Setting" in the system settings
(administrator).
This keeps the fusing unit at a lower temperature and reduces power consumption while the machine is on standby.
The machine automatically wakes up and returns to normal operation when a print job is received, a key is pressed on
the operation panel, or an original is placed.
Auto power shut-off mode (Sleep mode)
Auto power shut-off mode automatically shuts off power to the display and the fusing unit if the machine remains in the
standby state for the interval of time set in "Auto Power Shut-Off Timer" in the system settings (administrator). This
mode provides the lowest level of power consumption. Considerably more power is saved than in preheat mode,
however, the wakeup time is longer. This mode can be disabled in the system settings (administrator).
The machine automatically wakes up and resumes normal operation when a print job is received or when the blinking
[POWER SAVE] key ( ) is pressed.
[POWER SAVE] KEY
Press the [POWER SAVE] key ( ) to put the machine in auto power shut-off mode or wake it up from auto power
shut-off mode. The [POWER SAVE] key ( ) has an indicator that indicates whether or not the machine is in auto power
shut-off mode.
When the [POWER SAVE]
key ( ) indicator is off in the
standby state
The machine is ready to be used.
If the [POWER SAVE] key (
) is pressed when the indicator is off, the indicator will blink
and the machine will enter auto power shut-off mode after a brief interval.
When the [POWER SAVE]
key ( ) indicator is blinking
The machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
If the [POWER SAVE] key (
) is pressed when the indicator is blinking, the indicator will
turn off and the machine will return to the ready state after a brief interval.
[POWER SAVE]
key / indicator
T
1-16
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
USER AUTHENTICATION
User authentication restricts the use of the machine to users that have been registered. The functions that each user is
allowed to use can be specified, allowing the machine to be customized to meet the needs of your workplace.
When the administrator of the machine has enabled user authentication, each user must log in to use the machine.
There are different types of user authentication, and each type has a different login method.
For more information, see the explanations of the login methods.
☞ AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER (see below)
☞ AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME / PASSWORD (page 1-19)
AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER
The following procedure is used to log in using a user number received from the administrator of the machine.
OK
User Authentication
Admin Login
When controlled by user number
Enter your user number (5 to 8 digits)
with the numeric keys.
Each entered digit will be displayed as " ".
1
1-17
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
OK
User Authentication
Touch the [OK] key.
After the entered user number is authenticated, the user count
screen will appear briefly.
Usage status: used/remaining pages
Black-white : 87,654,321/12,345,678
Admin Login
2
When page limits have been set in "Pages Limit Group List" in
the system settings (administrator), the number of pages
remaining will appear. (The remaining number of pages that the
user can use in each mode (copy, scan, etc.) appears.) The
amount of time that this screen appears can be changed using
"Message Time Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
When the user number is an 8-digit number, this step is not necessary. (Login takes place automatically after the user
number is entered.)
When you have finished using the
machine and are ready to log out, press
the [LOGOUT] key ( ).
LOGOUT
3
• However, note that the [LOGOUT] key (
) cannot be used to log out when a fax number is being entered in fax
mode, as the key is used for fax number entry.
• If a preset duration of time elapses after the machine is last used, the Auto Clear function will activate. When Auto
Clear activates, logout takes place automatically. However, when PC Scan mode is used, logout does not take
place when the [LOGOUT] key (
) is pressed and Auto Clear does not operate. Change to a different mode on
the machine and then log out.
If an incorrect user number is entered 3 times in a row...
If "A Warning when Login Fails" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the machine will lock for 5 minutes if
an incorrect user number is entered 3 times in a row.
Verify the user number that you should use with the administrator of the machine.
The administrator can clear the locked state.
This is done from [User Control] and then [Default Settings] in the Web page menu.
1-18
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME / PASSWORD
The following procedure is used to log in using a login name and password received from the administrator of the
machine or the administrator of the LDAP server.
OK
User Authentication
Login Name
User Name
Password
Auth to:
Login Locally
When controlled by login name and password
(Different items will appear in the screen when LDAP authentication is used.)
User Authentication
Touch the [Login Name] key or the
key.
OK
If the [Login Name] key is touched, a screen for selecting the
user name appears. Go to the next step.
If the
key is touched, an area for entering a "Registration
No." appears [---].
Use the numeric keys to enter your registration number that
has been stored in "User List" in the system settings
(administrator). After entering the registration number, go to
step 3.
Login Name
User Name
1
Password
Auth to:
Login Locally
(A)
(B)
Back
Device Account Mode User Selection
6
12
18
Select the user name.
(C)
User 0001
User 0002
User 0003
User 0004
User 0005
User 0006
User 0007
User 0008
User 0009
User 0010
User 0011
User 0012
1
Admin Login
2
Direct Entry
2
ABC
All
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
User
(D)
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
(A) [Direct Entry] key
Use this key if you have not been stored in "User List" in
the system settings (administrator) and are only using
LDAP authentication.
A text entry screen will appear. Enter your login name.
(B) User selection keys
Touch your user name that has been stored in "User List"
in the system settings (administrator).
(C) [Back] key
Touch this key to return to the login screen.
(D) Index tabs
All users appear on the [All] tab. Users are grouped on the
other tabs according to the search characters entered
when each user was stored.
LDAP authentication can be used when the administrator of the server provides LDAP service on the LAN (local area
network).
1-19
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Touch the [Password] key.
OK
User Authentication
A text entry screen for entering the password will appear.
Enter your password that is stored in "User List" in the system
settings (administrator).
Login Name
User Name
User 0001
Password
Auth to:
If you are logging in to a LDAP server, enter the password that
is stored with your LDAP server login name.
Each entered character will be displayed as " ". When you
have finished entering the password, touch the [OK] key.
When authentication is by LDAP server and you have different
passwords stored in "User List" in the system settings
(administrator) and in the LDAP server, use the password
stored in the LDAP server.
Login Locally
• When a LDAP server has been stored, [Auth to:] can be changed.
• If you are logging in using a user selection key...
The LDAP server was stored when your user information was stored, and thus the LDAP server will appear as the
authentication server when you select your login name. Go to step 4.
3
• When logging in using the [Direct Entry] key...
Touch the [Auth to:] key.
User Authentication
OK
Login Name
User Name
Direct Entry
Password
Auth to:
Login Locally
Select the LDAP server and touch the [OK] key.
OK
Authenticate to:
Login Locally
Server 1
Server 2
Server 3
Server 4
Server 5
Server 6
Server 7
1-20
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
User Authentication
OK
After the entered login name and password are authenticated,
the user count screen will appear briefly.
Login Name
User Name
Touch the [OK] key.
User 0001
Usage status: used/remaining pages
Black-white : 87,654,321/12,345,678
Password
Auth to:
Login Locally
4
(Different items will appear in the screen when LDAP
authentication is used.)
When page limits have been set in "Pages Limit Group List" in
the system settings (administrator), the number of pages
remaining will appear. (The remaining number of pages that the
user can use in each mode (copy, scan, etc.) appears.) The
amount of time that this screen appears can be changed using
"Message Time Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
When you have finished using the
machine and are ready to log out, press
the [LOGOUT] key ( ).
LOGOUT
5
• However, note that the [LOGOUT] key (
) cannot be used to log out when a fax number is being entered in fax
mode, as the key is used for fax number entry.
• If a preset duration of time elapses after the machine is last used, the Auto Clear function will activate. When Auto
Clear activates, logout takes place automatically. However, when PC Scan mode is used, logout does not take
place when the [LOGOUT] key (
) is pressed and Auto Clear does not operate. Change to a different mode on
the machine and then log out.
If an incorrect login name or password is entered 3 times in a row...
If "A Warning when Login Fails" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the machine will lock for 5 minutes if
an incorrect login name or password is entered 3 times in a row.
Verify the login name and password that you should use with the administrator of the machine.
• The administrator can clear the locked state.
This is done from [User Control] and then [Default Settings] in the Web page menu.
• When LDAP authentication is used, the [E-mail Address] key may appear, depending on the authentication method. If the
[E-mail Address] key appears in step 3, touch the key.
A text entry screen will appear. Enter your e-mail address.
OK
User Authentication
Login Name
User Name
User 0002
E-mail Address
Password
Auth to:
Server 2
System Settings (Administrator): User List
This is used to store names of users of the machine. Detailed information such as the login name, user number, and password are
also stored. Ask the administrator of the machine for the information that you need to use the machine.
1-21
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
HOME SCREEN
When the [HOME] key is pressed on the operation panel, the home screen appears in the touch panel. Mode selection
keys appear in the home screen. These keys can be touched to open the base screen of each mode. The [My Menu]
key can be touched to display shortcuts to functions stored in "My Menu".
1st screen
2nd screen
(2) (3)
(1)
(1)
COPY
COPY
App 01
IMAGE SEND
App 02
DOCUMENT
FILING
App 03
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
Home Screen
App 04
Total Count
Address Control
Document Filing
Control
Paper Tray Settings
My Menu
04/04/2010 11:40
(4)
(1)
(5)
(5)
Mode select keys
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send,
document filing, and Sharp OSA modes. Key names and
images can be changed. (1st screen only)
(2)
(3)
(6)
Title
Shortcut key
A registered function appears as a shortcut key.
The key can be touched to select the registered function.
(7)
[My Menu] key
Touch to go to your my menu screen. Key names and
images can be changed.
(4)
(7)
This shows the title of the my menu screen.
Background Image
Background image of the home screen. The background
image can be changed.
(6)
User name
This shows the name of the logged in user.
The user name appears when user authentication is
enabled on the machine.
Application Keys
It is possible to display a combined total of eight Sharp
OSA application shortcuts and my menu shortcuts.
Shortcuts to functions can be registered as keys in the my menu screen. When a shortcut key is touched, the screen for
that function appears. Register frequently used functions in the my menu screen to quickly and conveniently access
those functions. When user authentication is used, the my menu screen of "Favorite Operation Group" can be displayed.
Use the Web page to configure the following settings:
• Changing the name of the home screen key, changing the image, storing an application key
• Storing keys that appear in the my menu screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): My Menu Settings
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - [My Menu Settings] in the Web page menu.
• System Settings (Administrator): My Menu List
When user authentication is enabled, a my menu screen can be set for each "Favorite Operation Group List".
Registration is performed in "My Menu List" in [User Control] in the Web page menu.
1-22
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
REMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE
The remote operation function allows you to operate the machine from your computer.
When this function is added, the same screen as the operation panel screen appears on your computer. This allows you
to operate the machine from your computer in the same way as if you were standing in front of the machine.
The machine
Your computer
Operation panel
Operate the
machine using
your computer
screen.
Network
The remote operation function can only be used on one computer at a time.
How to use the remote operation function
Before using this function, set "Operational Authority" to "Allowed" in "Remote Software Operation" of "Remote
Operation Settings" in the system settings (administrator).
☞ 7. SYSTEM SETTINGS "Remote Operation Settings" (page 7-68)
To use the remote operation function, the machine must be connected to a network and a VNC application must be
installed on your computer (recommended VNC software: RealVNC).
The procedure for using this function is as follows:
Example: RealVNC
Connect from the computer to the
machine.
(1) Start the VNC viewer
1
(2) Enter the IP address of the machine in the
"Server" entry box.
(3)
(2)
(3) Click the [OK] button.
Follow the prompts on the operation panel of the machine to permit the
connection.
2
When the machine is connected to the remote software,
appears on the system bar of the machine's touch panel.
If you wish to disconnect, exit the remote software or touch
.
Use the operation panel in the same way as you would on the machine. Note that a key cannot be held down to continuously
change a value being entered. For detailed procedures, see the chapters for each of the functions in this manual.
System Settings (Administrator): Remote Operation Settings
Set the operation authority for the remote operation function.
These settings can also be configured in the Web pages. Click "System Settings", "Operation Setting" and then "Remote
Operation Settings" in the Web page menu.
1-23
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
ITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOG
The machine records the jobs that are performed in the job log.
The items recorded in the Job Log can be viewed by saving the file using "Job Log" - "Save/Delete Job log" in the Web
page. The log can also be shown in the Web page using "View Job Log ".
The main information that is recorded in the job log is described below.
• The file saved using "Save/Delete Job log" always records usage based on fixed items regardless of which peripheral
devices are installed and the purpose of the log, enabling easy totaling when machines have different configurations.
For this reason, items may appear in the log for functions that are not available on the machine.
• In some cases, job information may not be correctly recorded, such as when a power failure occurs during a job.
Item name
Main items
Description
Job ID
The job ID is recorded.
Job IDs appear in the log as consecutive numbers up to a maximum of
999999, after which the count resets to 1.
Job Mode
The job mode, such as copy or print.
Computer Name
The name of the computer that sent a print job.*
User Name
The user name when the user authentication function is used.
Login Name
The login name when the user authentication function is used.
Starting Date & Time
The date and time the job was started.
Completing Date & Time
The date and time the job was completed.
Black & White Total Count
For a print job, the total count is recorded.
For a send job, the number of transmitted black & white pages is recorded.
When a broadcast transmission is summarized, the total number of
pages is recorded.
For a scan to HDD job, the number of stored black & white pages is
recorded.
Full Color Total Count
For a send job, the total number of transmitted full color pages is
recorded. When a broadcast transmission is summarized, the total
number of pages is recorded.
For a scan to HDD job, the number of stored full color pages is recorded.
Count according to size
Counts by original/paper size in color mode and black & white mode.
Number of sheets
according to size
Indicates the sheet count by paper type.
Invalid Paper Count(Black
& White)
Indicates the black & white invalid sheet count.
Number of Reserved Sets
Number of specified sets or reserved destinations.
Number of Completed
Sets
Number of completed sets or number of destinations to which
transmission was successfully completed.
Number of Reserved
Pages
Number of reserved original pages of a copy, print, scan job, or other job.
Number of Completed
Pages
Number of completed pages of a set.
Result
The result of a job.
Error Cause
When an error occurs during a job, the cause of the error.
1-24
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Item name
Print Job Related Item
Image Send Related Item
Document Filing Related
Item
Common Functionality
Detailed Items
Description
Output
The output mode of a printed job.
Staple
The status of stapling.
Staple Count
The staple count.
Printer Tone
The tone used for a print job.
Direct Address
Address of an image send job.
Sender Name
Sender name of an image send job.
Sender Address
Sender address of an image send job.
Transmission Type
Transmission type of an image send job.
Administrative Serial
Number
Administrative serial number of an image send job.
Broadcast number
Broadcast number of an image send job.
Entry Order
Reservation order for broadcast transmission of an image send job. For a
serial polling job, this is used to correlate communication with printing.
File Type
File format of an image send job.
Compression
Mode/Compression Ratio
Compression mode and compression ratio of the file of an image send
job.
Communication Time
Indicates the communication time of image send jobs.
Fax No.
Indicates the stored sender's number.
Document Filing
A log is kept of document filing usage
Storing Mode
The save mode of document filing is recorded.
File Name
Files saved using document filing and file names stored using retention
print are recorded.*1
Data Size [KB]
The file size is recorded.
Color Setting
Color mode selected by user.
Special Modes
Special modes selected when the job was executed.
File Name 2
Records the file names of print jobs.*1
Original Size
Size of scanned original.*2
For a document filing print job, the paper size of the file.
Original Type
Original type (text, printed photo, etc.) set in the exposure settings
screen.
Paper Size
For a print job, the paper size.
For a send job, the transmitted paper size.
For a Scan to HDD job, the paper size of the stored file.
Paper Type
The paper type used for printing.
Paper Property: Disable
Duplex
Indicates that duplex was disabled in "Paper Type".
Paper Property: Fixed
Paper Side
Indicates that fixed side was specified in "Paper Type".
Paper Property: Disable
Staple
Indicates that stapling was disabled in "Paper Type".
Duplex Setup
Indicates the duplex setting.
Resolution
Indicates the scanning resolution.
1-25
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Item name
Machine Item
Description
Model Name
Indicates the model name of the machine.
Unit Serial Number
Indicates the serial number of the machine.
Name
Indicates the name of the machine that is set in the Web pages.
Machine Location
Indicates the installation location of the machine that is set in the Web
pages.
*1 In some environments this is not recorded.
*2 "Check Size" and "Card Size" are recorded as Custom size (MX-B402SC Only).
1-26
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
LOADING PAPER
IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER
This section provides information that you should know before loading paper in the paper trays.
Be sure to read this section before loading paper.
NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS
The names of the trays are as follows.
Bypass tray
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
USEABLE PAPER
Various types of paper are sold. This section explains what plain paper and what special media can be used with the
machine. For detailed information on the sizes and types of paper that can be loaded in each tray of the machine, see
the specifications in the Start Guide and "Paper Tray Settings" (page 7-14) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
Plain paper, special media
Plain paper that can be used
• SHARP standard plain paper (21 lbs. (80 g/m2)). For paper specifications, see the specifications in the Start Guide.
• Plain paper other than SHARP standard paper (16 lbs. to 28 lbs. (60 g/m2 to 105 g/m2))
Recycled paper, colored paper and pre-punched paper must meet the same specifications as plain paper. Contact
your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department for advice on using these types of paper.
* The "lbs." (g/m2) units used in these explanations indicate the weight of the paper.
1-27
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Types of paper that can be used in each tray
The following types of paper can be loaded in each tray.
"–" in the table indicates "cannot be used".
Tray 1/Tray 2/Tray 3/Tray 4
Bypass tray
Plain paper
Permitted
Permitted
Pre-printed
Permitted
Permitted
Recycle Paper
Permitted
Permitted
Letter head
Permitted
Permitted
Pre-punched
Permitted
Permitted
Color
Permitted
Permitted
Heavy paper*1
–
Permitted
Labels
–
Permitted
Transparency film
–
Permitted
Envelopes
–
Permitted
Thin paper*2
–
Permitted
*1 "Heavy paper" is heavy paper up to 110 lbs. index (209 g/m2).
*2 Thin paper from 13 lbs. to 16 lbs. (55 g/m2 to 59 g/m2) can be used.
Print side face up or face down
Paper is loaded with the print side face up or face down depending on the paper type and tray.
The loading orientation of punched paper, letterhead paper, and pre-printed paper differs from that of other paper.
For details, see "Example: Placement orientations of punched paper, letter head paper, and pre-printed paper" (page
1-29).
Trays 1 to 4
Load the paper with the print side face up.
However, if the paper type is "Pre-Punched", "Letter Head" or "Pre-Printed", load the paper with the print side face
down*.
Bypass tray
Load the paper with the print side face down.
However, if the paper type is "Pre-Punched", "Letter Head" or "Pre-Printed", load the paper with the print side face up*.
* If "Disabling of Duplex" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), load the paper in the normal way (face up in
trays 1 to 4; face down in the bypass tray).
1-28
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Example: Placement orientations of punched paper, letter head paper, and pre-printed paper
This explanation assumes that "Disabling of Duplex" is not enabled in the system settings (administrator).
A
When using the MX-B402
Original glass
A
A
Document feeder tray
When using the MX-B402SC
Pre-punched (Left binding)
Letter head
Pre-printed
ABC
A
-1-
CBA
A
Tray 1 to 4
A
-1-
Load the paper print side down
with the punch holes to the front
and the top edge to the right.
Load the paper print side down
with the letter head (top edge) to
the right.
Load the paper print side
(pre-printed side) down with the
top edge to the right.
A
ABC
A
Bypass tray
-1-
ABC
A
-1-
Load the paper print side up with
the punch holes to the front and
the top edge to the left.
Load the paper print side up with
the letter head (top edge) to the
left.
Load the paper print side
(pre-printed side) up with the top
edge to the left.
Paper that cannot be used
• Special media for inkjet printers
(fine paper, glossy paper, glossy film, etc.)
• Carbon paper or thermal paper
• Pasted paper
• Paper with clips
• Paper with fold marks
• Torn paper
• Oil-feed transparency film
• Tracing paper
• Thin paper less than 15 lbs. (55 g/m2)
• Paper that is 57 lbs. (210 g/m2) or heavier
• Irregularly shaped paper
• Stapled paper
• Damp paper
• Curled paper
• Paper on which either the print side or the reverse side has
been printed on by another printer or multifunction device.
• Paper with a wave-like pattern due to moisture
absorption
Non-recommended paper
• Iron-on transfer paper
• Japanese paper
• Perforated paper
• Various types of plain paper and special media are sold. Some types cannot be used with the machine. Contact your
dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department for advice on using these types of paper.
• The image quality and toner fusibility of paper may change due to ambient conditions, operating conditions, and paper
characteristics, resulting in image quality inferior to that of SHARP standard paper. Contact your dealer or nearest SHARP
Service Department for advice on using these types of paper.
• The use of non-recommended or prohibited paper may result in skewed feeding, misfeeds, poor toner fusing (the toner
does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed off), or machine failure.
• The use of non-recommended paper may result in misfeeds or poor image quality. Before using non-recommended paper,
check if printing can be performed properly.
1-29
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4
LOADING PAPER AND CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE
A maximum of 500 sheets of paper from size 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to size 8-1/2" x 14" (A5 to A4) can be loaded in trays 1 and 2.
A maximum of 500 sheets of paper from size 7-1/4" x 10-1/2" to size 8-1/2" x 14" (B5 to A4) can be loaded in trays 3 and 4.
Pull out the paper tray.
Gently pull the tray out until it stops.
To load paper, go to step 3. To load a different size of paper, go
to the next step.
1
Do not pull hard on the tray. This may cause failure.
2
A
Adjust the guide plates A and B by
squeezing their lock levers and sliding
them to match the vertical and
horizontal dimensions of the paper to be
loaded.
B
The guide plates A and B are slidable. Slide each guide plate
while squeezing its lock lever.
• Be sure to place the guide to match the size of the paper. If the guide is not placed correctly, paper skewing or
misfeeds may occur.
• The loaded paper should not go higher than these protrusions.
Fan the paper.
Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned,
multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.
3
When handling paper, take care not to cut yourself on the edges of the paper.
1-30
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Insert the paper into the tray.
Load the paper with the print side face up. The stack must not
be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 500 sheets).
Indicator
line
4
• If paper is loaded higher than the line, paper misfeeds may occur.
• When pushing in a tray, take care that your fingers do not become pinched in the tray.
Gently push the paper tray into the
machine.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.
5
When pulling out a tray after paper is loaded, do not pull hard. The tray may be damaged, the machine may topple,
and injury may result.
If you loaded a different type or size of paper than was loaded previously, be sure to change the "Paper Tray Settings"
in the system settings. If these settings are not configured correctly, automatic paper selection will not operate
correctly and printing may take place on the wrong size or type of paper, or a misfeed may occur.
Caution
If children are present, ensure that the children do not sit or play on a tray that has been pulled out.
Sitting on a tray may damage the tray and cause the machine to topple, resulting in injury.
Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.
System Settings: Paper Tray Settings (page 7-14)
Change these settings when you change the size or type of paper loaded in a tray.
1-31
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
MX-CSX1 (tray 2)
MX-CSX2 (tray 3, tray 4)
Paper sizes
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 7-1/4" x 10-1/2",
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"*, A4, B5, A5*, 16K
Paper weight
Plain paper (16 lbs. to 28 lbs. (60 g/m2 to 105 g/m2))
Paper capacity
500 sheets (21 lbs. (80 g/m2)) x 1 tray
Paper types
SHARP-recommended plain paper, recycled paper, and colored paper
Automatic paper size detection When "Auto-Inch" detection is selected:
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 7-1/4" x 10-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"*
When "Auto-AB" detection is selected:
A4, B5, A5*, 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")
Power supply
Supplied from the machine
Dimensions
21-1/16" (W) x 17-1/4" (D) x 4-13/32" (H)
(535 mm (W) x 438 mm (D) x 112 mm (H))
(not including adjuster)
21-1/16" (W) x 17-1/4" (D) x 4-21/64" (H)
(535 mm (W) x 438 mm (D) x 110 mm (H))
(not including adjuster)
Weight
Approx. 15.0 lbs. (6.8 kg)
Approx. 12.3 lbs. (5.6 kg)
* Only MX-CSX1 can be used.
1-32
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY
The bypass tray can be used to print on plain paper, envelopes, label sheets, and other special media. Up to 100 sheets
of paper can be loaded (up to 40 sheets of heavy paper) for continuous printing similar to the other trays.
Open the bypass tray.
When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11" or A4, be sure to
pull out the bypass tray extension. Pull the bypass tray
extension all the way out. If the bypass tray extension is not
pulled all the way out, the size of the loaded paper will not be
correctly displayed.
1
Do not place heavy objects on the bypass tray or press down on the tray. The bypass tray may be damaged, the
machine may topple, and injury may result.
Set the bypass tray guides to the width
of the paper.
2
Insert the paper along the bypass tray
guides all the way into the bypass tray
until it stops.
Load the paper with the print side face down.
3
• Do not force the paper in.
• If the bypass tray guides are set wider than the paper, move the bypass tray guides in until they correctly fit the
width of the paper. If the bypass guides are set too wide, the paper may skew or be creased.
Caution
If children are present, ensure that the children do not sit or play on a bypass tray that has been
pulled out. Sitting on a tray may damage the tray and cause the machine to topple, resulting in
injury.
1-33
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING THE BYPASS TRAY
• When using plain paper other than SHARP standard paper or special media other than SHARP-recommended
transparency film, or when printing on the reverse side of previously used paper, the paper must be loaded one sheet
at a time. Loading more than one sheet at a time will cause misfeeds.
• Before loading paper, straighten any curling in the paper. If curled paper is not straightened, a misfeed may occur.
• When adding paper, remove any paper remaining in the bypass tray, combine it with the paper to be added, and
reload as a single stack. If paper is added without removing the remaining paper, a misfeed may result.
Inserting paper
Place paper in the horizontal orientation.
Inserting transparency film
• Use SHARP-recommended transparency film. When using
transparency film, place the film on the bypass tray with the rounded
corner at the left front. This ensures that the print side faces in the
correct direction.
• Do not touch the print side of transparency film.
• When loading multiple sheets of transparency film in the bypass tray,
be sure to fan the sheets several times before loading.
• When printing on transparency film, be sure to remove each sheet as it
exits the machine. Allowing sheets to stack in the output tray may
result in curling.
1-34
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Loading envelopes
When inserting envelopes in the bypass tray, place them aligned to the left side in the orientation shown below.
Only the front side of envelopes can be printed on. Be sure to place the front side face down.
When loading envelopes, load one envelope at a time.
• Do not print on both sides of an envelope. This may result in misfeeds or poor print quality.
• Some operating environments may cause creasing, smudging, misfeeds, poor toner fusing, or machine failure.
Restrictions apply to some types of envelopes. For more information, consult a qualified service technician.
Important points when using envelopes
Envelopes that cannot be used
Do not use the following envelopes. Envelopes misfeed, and smudges may result.
• Envelopes with metal clasps
• Plastic hooks, or ribbon hooks
• Envelopes closed with string
• Envelopes with windows or backing
• Envelopes with an uneven front surface due to embossing
• Double-layer envelopes
• Envelopes with an adhesive for sealing
• Hand-made envelopes
• Envelopes with air inside
• Envelopes with creases, fold marks, torn or damaged envelopes
• Envelopes with an incorrectly aligned corner gluing position on the back cannot be used as creasing may result.
Can be used
Cannot be
used
Print quality on envelopes
• Print quality is not guaranteed in the area 13/32" (10 mm) around the edges of the envelope.
• Print quality is not guaranteed on parts of envelopes where there is a large step-like change of thickness, such as on
four-layer parts or parts less than three layers.
• Print quality is not guaranteed on envelopes having peel off flaps for sealing the envelopes.
1-35
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Fusing unit pressure adjusting levers
In some cases damage to the envelopes or smudging may occur even if envelopes within the specifications are used.
This problem may be alleviated by shifting the fusing unit pressure adjusting levers from their "normal pressure position"
to the "lower pressure position". Follow the procedure on the this page.
Open the right side cover
While pushing up the open/close lever on the right side cover,
gently open the cover.
1
Move the fusing unit pressure adjusting
levers (two) to the lower pressure
position as shown.
B
A
Lower pressure position
2
A
B
Normal
position
Close the right side cover.
3
A
B
Return the lever to the normal position
when finished feeding envelopes.
4
Caution
The fusing unit is hot. Take care not to burn yourself when operating the fusing unit pressure adjusting levers.
Be sure to return the levers to the "normal pressure position" before printing or copying on paper other than envelopes.
Otherwise, fusing problems, paper misfeeds, or equipment failure may occur.
1-36
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
ORIGINALS
This section explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder and on the document glass.
PLACING THE ORIGINAL
PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER
This section explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder.
Allowed original sizes
Minimum original size
Maximum original size
Standard sizes
5-1/2" (height) x 8-1/2" (width)
A5: 148 mm (height) x 210 mm (width)
Non-standard sizes
(Minimum size that can be specified manually)
MX-B402:
1-sided scanning: 4" (height) x 3-1/2" (width)
(100 mm (height) x 89 mm (width))
2-sided scanning: 4" (height) x 5-7/8" (width)
(100 mm (height) x 148 mm (width))
MX-B402SC:
2" (height) x 3-1/4" (width)
(51 mm (height) x 85 mm (width))
Standard sizes
8-1/2" (height) x 14" (width)
A4: 210 mm (height) x 297 mm (width)
Non-standard sizes
(Maximum size that can be specified manually)
Copy mode: 8-1/2" (height) x 14" (width)
216 mm (height) x 356 mm (width)
Image send mode: 8-1/2" (height) x 19-5/8" (width)
216 mm (height) x 500 mm (width)
When the original is a non-standard size, see the appropriate explanation below for the mode you are using.
☞ 2. COPIER "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE" (page 2-29)
☞ 4. FACSIMILE "IMAGE SETTINGS" (page 4-45)
☞ 5. SCANNER / INTERNET FAX "IMAGE SETTINGS" (page 5-54)
Allowed original weights
MX-B402
MX-B402SC
1-sided scanning
9 lbs. to 32 lbs. (35 g/m2 to 128 g/m2)
9 lbs. to 75 lbs. (35 g/m2 to 280 g/m2)
2-sided scanning
13 lbs. to 28 lbs. (50 g/m2 to 105 g/m2)
13 lbs. to 75 lbs. (50 g/m2 to 280 g/m2)
• For the MX-B402SC, when scanning originals from 34 lbs. to 74 lbs. (129 g/m2 to 280 g/m2), select "Heavy
Exit" for the original exit place.
• To scan originals from 9 lbs. to 14 lbs. (35 g/m2 to 49 g/m2), use "Slow Scan Mode" in the special modes.
Scanning without using "Slow Scan Mode" may result in original misfeeds.
When "Slow Scan Mode" is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible.
1-37
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Useable card specification
MX-B402SC Only
Please use cards that conform to ISO 7810 ID-1/ID-2 types.
ID-1
ID-2
Size
2 1/8" (height) x 3 3/8" (width)
(54 mm (height) x 86 mm (width))
Thickness
1/32" (0.76 mm) ± 1/64"(0.08 mm)
Material
3" (height) x 4 1/4" (width)
(74 mm (height) x 105 mm (width))
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyvinyl acetate (PVA/PVAC)
• Cards with embossing cannot be scanned.
• Cards that are hard and difficult to bend may not feed well.
• If the card surface is soiled with oils (finger oil, etc.), wipe it off first before scanning.
Originals that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder
Do not use the following originals. Original misfeeds, and smudges may result.
• Transparency film
• Tracing paper
• Carbon paper
• Thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbon
• Originals to be fed through the feeder should not be damaged, crumpled, folded, loosely pasted together, or have
cut-out holes
• Originals with multiple punched holes other than two-hole or three-hole punched paper
• Originals that have been scanned multiple times in the automatic document feeder and have become creased or
folded.
• Originals that have absorbed moisture and become soft.
1-38
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
When using the MX-B402
Make sure an original does not remain
on the document glass.
Open the automatic document feeder, make sure that an
original is not on the document glass, and then gently close the
automatic document feeder.
1
When closing the automatic document feeder, take care that your fingers do not become pinched.
Adjust the original guides to the size of
the originals.
2
Place the originals.
Indicator
line
3
Make sure the edges of the originals are even.
Insert the originals face up all the way into the document feeder
tray.
Insert a number of originals that does not exceed the indicator
line on the document feeder tray.
Up to 50 sheets can be inserted.
Be sure to remove originals that have been finished scanning
from the original exit tray.
• Do not insert your hand into the document insertion opening in the automatic document feeder.
• If originals are placed higher than the line, misfeeds may occur.
• Before inserting originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips.
• If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink or pasteup glue, wait until the originals are dry before making
copies. Otherwise the interior of the document feeder or the document glass may be soiled.
• When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that
the punched edge is at a position away from the feed slot of the
document feeder tray.
Feed slot
1-39
Hole
positions
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
When using the MX-B402SC
Make sure an original does not remain
on the document glass.
Open the automatic document feeder, make sure that an
original is not on the document glass, and then gently close the
automatic document feeder.
1
When closing the automatic document feeder, take care that your fingers do not become pinched.
Adjust the original guides to the size of
the originals.
2
Place the originals.
Indicator
line
3
Make sure the edges of the originals are even.
Insert the originals face up all the way into the document feeder
tray.
Insert a number of originals that does not exceed the indicator
line on the document feeder tray.
Up to 100 sheets can be inserted.
Please remove originals that have finished being read with the
automatic document feeder from the original output portion’s
upper exit or heavy exit. Heavy paper (34 lbs. to 75 lbs.
(129 g/m2 to 280 g/m2)) and plastic cards can be output only on
heavy exit.
• Do not insert your hand into the document insertion opening in the automatic document feeder.
• If originals are placed higher than the line, misfeeds may occur.
• Before inserting originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips.
• If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink or pasteup glue, wait until the originals are dry before making
copies. Otherwise the interior of the document feeder or the document glass may be soiled.
• When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that
the punched edge is at a position away from the feed slot of the
document feeder tray.
Feed slot
1-40
Hole
positions
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE DOCUMENT GLASS
This section explains how to place the original on the document glass.
Allowed original sizes
Maximum original size
Standard sizes
8-1/2" (height) x 11" (width)
A4: 210 mm (height) x 297 mm (width)
Non-standard sizes
8-1/2" (height) x 11-11/16" (width)
216 mm (height) x 297 mm (width)
When the original is a non-standard size, see the
appropriate explanation below for the mode you are
using.
☞ 2. COPIER "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE"
(page 2-29)
☞ 4. FACSIMILE "IMAGE SETTINGS" (page 4-45)
☞ 5. SCANNER / INTERNET FAX "IMAGE
SETTINGS" (page 5-54)
Open the automatic document feeder.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face down in the left center position of the
document glass.
Document glass scale
mark
2
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
(A5)
B5
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
All originals should be placed in the left center position.
Align the middle of the original with the tip of the
mark.
Close the automatic document feeder.
3
After placing the original, be sure to close the automatic
document feeder. If left open, parts outside of the original will
be copied black, causing excessive use of toner.
1-41
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Placing a thick book
When scanning a thick book or other thick original, follow the steps below to press the book down.
(1) Slightly lift the left and right sides of the
automatic document feeder.
The automatic document feeder will rise.
(2) Slowly close the automatic document
feeder.
Caution
• Close the automatic document feeder slowly. Abruptly closing the automatic document feeder
may damage it.
• Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the automatic document feeder.
• Do not press hard on the automatic document feeder. This may cause failure.
1-42
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
This section describes the peripheral devices that can be used with the machine and explains how to use the finisher, as
well as Sharp OSA (application communication module and external account module).
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
Peripheral devices can be installed on the machine to increase its range of functionality.
The peripheral devices are generally optional, however, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard
equipment.
(As of July, 2010)
Product name
Product number
MX-CSX1
500-sheet paper feed unit
MX-CSX2*
Description
Additional tray. A maximum 500 sheets of paper can be loaded in each
tray.
Business card feeder
MX-BTX1
MX-B402 only
This feeder attaches to the automatic document feeder and is used to
automatically scan business cards.
Finisher
MX-FN12
Output device that enables the use of the staple function and offset
function.
Barcode font kit
AR-PF1
Adds barcode fonts to the machine.
XPS expansion kit
MX-PUX1
The machine can be used as an XPS compatible printer. For details,
consult your dealer.
To install this kit, a 1 GB expansion memory board (MX-SMX3) is
required.
Expansion memory board
MX-SMX3
This expands the memory that can be used on the machine.
Internet fax expansion kit
MX-FWX1
Enables Internet Fax.
Facsimile expansion kit
MX-FXX3
Adds a fax function.
Application integration
module
MX-AMX1
The application integration module can be combined with the network
scanner function to append a metadata file to a scanned image file.
Application communication
module
MX-AMX2
This allows the machine to be linked over a network to an external
software application.
MX-B402SC is included as standard equipment.
External account module
MX-AMX3
This is required to use an external account application on the machine.
MX-B402SC is included as standard equipment.
1-43
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Product name
Product number
Sharpdesk 1 license kit
MX-USX1
Sharpdesk 5 license kit
MX-USX5
Sharpdesk 10 license kit
MX-US10
Sharpdesk 50 license kit
MX-US50
Sharpdesk 100 license kit
MX-USA0
Description
This software enables integrated management of documents and
computer files.
* Can be installed on the MX-CSX1.
1-44
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
FINISHER
The finisher is equipped with the offset function, which offsets each set of output from the previous set.
In addition, each set of sorted output can be stapled.
PART NAMES
The following parts can be accessed when the finisher is open.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(4)
Output tray
Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray.
The tray is slidable. Extend the tray for large output
(8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", and
8-1/2" x 13-2/5" sizes).
(2)
(5)
(3)
Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed, replace
staples, or remove a staple jam.
(4)
Staple case
This holds the staple cartridge. Pull the case out to
replace the staple cartridge or remove a staple jam.
Lever
Use this to move the finisher in order to remove a paper
misfeed, replace staples, or remove a staple jam.
Front cover
(5)
Staple case release lever
Use this to remove the staple case.
Use caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place, as the tray may move up and down.
SUPPLIES
The finisher requires the following staple cartridge:
Staple cartridge
(approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x 3 cartridges)
MX-SCX1
1-45
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
FINISHER SPECIFICATIONS
Model
MX-FN12
Paper sizes
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 7-1/4" x 10-1/2",
5-1/2" x 8-1/2", envelopes, A4, B5, A5, 16K
Paper weight
Thin paper (15 lbs. to 16 lbs. (55 g/m2 to 59 g/m2)), plain paper (16 lbs. to 28 lbs. (60 g/m2 to
105 g/m2)), heavy paper (28 lbs. bond to 110 lbs. index (106 g/m2 to 209 g/m2))
Modes
Non-sort, offset sort, staple sort
Allowed paper sizes for offset
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 7-1/4" x 10-1/2", A4, B5,
16K
Offset distance
1" (25 mm)
Tray capacity*1
Non-stapling*2:
280 sheets (20 lbs. to 24 lbs. (75 g/m2 to
90 g/m2)) (8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2",
8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11",
7-1/4" x 10-1/2", A4, B5, 16K)
150 sheets (20 lbs. to 24 lbs. (75 g/m2 to
90 g/m2)) (5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A5)
Power supply
Supplied from the machine
Dimensions
When tray is folded up:
18-45/64" (W) x 13-7/64" (D) x 6-7/32" (H)
(475 mm (W) x 333 mm (D) x 158 mm (H))
When tray is extended:
20-19/32" (W) x 13-7/64" (D) x 6-7/32" (H)
(523 mm (W) x 333 mm (D) x 158 mm (H))
Weight
Approx. 19.8 lbs. (9 kg)
Stapling*3:
1 to 10 sheets per set: 30 sets
11 to 30 sheets per set: 10 sets
(8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 7-1/4" x 10-1/2", A4, B5,
16K)
Stapler section
Allowed paper sizes for
stapling
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 7-1/4" x 10-1/2", A4, B5,
16K
(Stapling at one position at front of paper.)
Maximum number of sheets for 30 sheets
stapling*3
*1 The maximum number of sheets that can be held varies depending on ambient conditions in the installation location,
the type of paper, and the storage conditions of the paper.
*2 Up to 20 envelopes can be output.
*3 The maximum number of sheets for stapling assumes a paper weight of 24 lbs. (90 g/m2) and includes two cover
sheets of 28 lbs. bond to 110 lbs. index (106 g/m2 to 209 g/m2).
Special media such as transparency film and label sheets cannot be stapled.
1-46
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
BUSINESS CARD FEEDER
This feeder attaches to the automatic document feeder and is used to automatically scan business cards.
MX-B402 only
Open the original guide to the maximum
width.
1
Place the business card feeder on the
document feeder tray.
(1) Place the business card feeder in the center
of the document feeder tray.
2
(2) Gently press down on the business card
feeder.
You will hear the feeder click into place.
• When you have attached the business card feeder, enable "Business Card Scan Option" in the system settings
(administrator).
• When scanning business cards, it is convenient to use "Business Card Scan" in the special modes for copying and
scanning.
Load the business cards.
3
Make sure the edges of the cards are aligned evenly.
Insert the cards face up all the way into the business card
feeder.
After using the business card feeder, lift
the feeder to remove it.
4
You will hear a click sound as the feeder is released. Store the
feeder in its storage pocket.
System Settings (Administrator): Business Card Scan Option
Specify whether or not the Business Card Scan function is used.
1-47
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Business card feeder specifications
Model
MX-BTX1
Sizes
2" x 3-1/2" to 2-11/64" x 3-19/32"
(51 mm x 89 mm to 55 mm x 91 mm)
Thickness
0.004" to 0.008" (0.1 mm to 0.2 mm)
Business card*
Scanning
Single-sided (face-up)
Capacity
Stack height 9/64" (3.5 mm) maximum
Dimensions
4-17/32" (W) x 3-15/32" (D) x 63/64" (H)
(115 mm (W) x 88 mm (D) x 25 mm (H))
Weight
Approx. 0.09 lbs. (40 g)
* Device may be unable to correctly feed and scan the business card depending on the business card's condition,
material, form, and fabrication method.
1-48
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
SHARP OSA
Sharp OSA (Open Systems Architecture) is an architecture that enables external applications to be directly connected to
a digital multifunction machine over a network.
When a digital multifunction machine that supports Sharp OSA is used, the operation panel controls and functions of the
machine such as scan send can be linked to an external application.
There are two types of external applications: "standard application" and "external account application". An "external
account application" is used for centralized account management of a multifunction machine on a network. A "standard
application" refers to all other applications.
APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (MX-AMX2)
For model MX-B402SC, this is included as standard equipment.
When a previously registered standard application is selected in the Web pages of the machine, the machine retrieves
the operation screen from the registered URL. Control of the operation screen is performed by the standard application,
and Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder, and HTTPS transmission can be executed.
Standard application setup
To enable a general application in the Web pages of the machine, click [Application Settings] in the administrator menu
frame, and then [External Applications Settings] and [Standard Applications]. Configure settings for the standard
application in the screen that appears.
Selecting a standard application
The procedure for selecting a general application that has been enabled in the Web pages of the machine is explained
below.
COPY
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
Ready to scan for copy.
0
Special Modes
1
Plain
81/2x11
Touch the [Sharp OSA] key in the mode
select keys.
If no standard applications have been stored in the Web pages,
the key cannot be touched.
2-Sided Copy
Output
1. 81/2x11
2. 51/2x81/2
3. 81/2x14
4. 81/2x11
Exposure
Auto
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
Original
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
1-49
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Select the standard application.
Select External Application
If two or more standard applications have been stored in the
Web pages, the screen to select the standard application will
appear. Touch the standard application that you wish to use.
If only one standard application has been stored in the Web
pages, connection to the standard application will begin.
App 01
App 02
App 03
2
App 04
App 05
App 06
App 07
App 08
The machine connects to the standard application.
3
The message "Connecting to the external application." appears while the machine communicates with the standard
application.
The mode select key cannot be used during scanning.
EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (MX-AMX3)
For model MX-B402SC, this is included as standard equipment.
An external account application can be used in "external authentication mode" or "external count mode". When external
authentication mode is used, the login screen is retrieved from the application when the machine is started. When a job
ends, a job notification screen is sent to the application to enable counts to be kept for each authenticated user.
When "external count mode" is used, the login screen is not displayed when the machine is started. Only a job result
notification is sent to the application. User authentication by the external account application cannot be used, however,
the external account application can be used in combination with the internal account function.
External account application setup
To enable an external account application in the Web pages of the machine, click [Application Settings] in the
administrator menu frame, and then [External Applications Settings] and [External Accounting]. Configure settings for
the external account application in the screen that appears. The setting change will take effect after the machine is
restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF" (page 1-15).
Operation in external account mode
The two modes for using an external account application operate as explained below.
External authentication mode
When the [Enable Authentication by External Server] checkbox is selected in "External Account Setting" of "Sharp OSA
Settings" in the system settings (administrator), the machine enters external authentication mode. When the machine is
powered on in external authentication mode, the machine accesses the external account application and displays the
login screen. The login screen also appears when the [Call] key is touched to run a job in the job status complete screen.
(The login screen does not appear if the user has already logged in by the normal method.)
The [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed while the login screen appears to show the job status screen. To return to the
previous state, press the mode select key.
• The user control function of the machine cannot be used in external authentication mode.
However, "User Registration", "User Count Display", "User Count Reset", "User Information Print", and "The Number of
User Name Displayed Setting" can be used.
• The mode select key cannot be used while the login screen appears.
1-50
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
If login fails
If the login screen fails to appear or the application does not operate correctly, the machine may also stop operating
correctly. In this event, it is recommended that you quit external account mode from the Web pages of the machine. For
more information, see [Help] in the Web pages.
If it is necessary to forcibly terminate external account mode using the operation panel of the machine, follow the steps
below.
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key and change "External Account Setting" in the system settings (administrator). The
setting change will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING THE POWER ON
AND OFF" (page 1-15).
External count mode
When only the [External Account Control] setting is enabled in "External Account Setting" of "Sharp OSA Settings" in the
system settings (administrator), the machine enters external count mode.
Unlike external authentication mode, when the machine is started in "external count mode", the login screen of the
external account application is not displayed. Only the job result is sent to the external account application. External
count mode can be used together with the user control function of the machine. (External count mode can also be used
when the user control function is disabled.)
1-51
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
REPLACING SUPPLIES AND
MAINTENANCE
This section explains the procedures for replacing supplies such as toner and staple cartridges and routine
maintenance.
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES
Be sure to replace the toner cartridge when the message "Change the toner cartridge." appears.
In copy mode
Ready to scan for copy.
(Prepare a new one.)
When this message appears, replace the toner cartridge.
If you continue to use the toner cartridge without replacing it, the message below will appear.
When this message appears, printing will not be possible until the toner cartridge is replaced.
Change the toner cartridge.
OK
To view the approximate amount of toner remaining, continually touch the [COPY] key during printing or when the machine is
idle. The percentage of toner remaining will appear in the display while the key is touched. When the percentage falls to
"25-0%", obtain a new toner cartridge and keep it ready for replacement.
Open the front cover.
1
1-52
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Pull the toner cartridge toward you.
2
Take out the new toner cartridge, hold it
with both hands, and shake 5 or 6 times
horizontally.
3
• When shaking the toner cartridge, be sure to shake with the protective material inserted in the cartridge. If you
shake the cartridge after removing the protective material, toner may spill out.
• Shake the toner cartridge only in the horizontal direction. If shaken in any other direction, toner may collect in one
part of the cartridge.
Insert the new toner cartridge
horizontally and push it firmly in.
4
Close the front cover.
5
• After the toner cartridge is replaced, the machine automatically enters image adjustment mode. Image adjustment
will not take place if the cover is not closed.
• Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the cover.
Caution
• Do not throw a toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.
• Store toner cartridges out of the reach of small children.
1-53
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
• Store the box that contains the toner cartridge horizontally; do not store it standing up. If the toner cartridge is stored
standing up, the toner may solidify inside the cartridge.
Store the toner in a location that is cooler than 104°F (40°C). Storage in a hot location may cause the toner in the cartridge
to solidify.
• If a toner cartridge other than a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge is used, the machine may not attain full quality and
performance and there is a risk of damage to the machine. Be sure to use a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge.
• Keep the used toner cartridge in a plastic bag (do not discard it). Your service technician will collect the used toner
cartridge.
• To view the approximate amount of toner remaining, continually touch the
[COPY] key during printing or when the machine is idle. The percentage of toner
remaining will appear in the display while the key is touched. When the
percentage falls to "25-0%", obtain a new toner cartridge and keep it ready for
replacement. When the remaining toner falls to "25-0%", output images may be
faint or partially missing when an original or image with dark colors is copied or
printed.
1-54
Total Count
00,000,000
Toner Quantity
100-75%
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION
CONTAINER
The toner collection container collects excess toner that is produced during printing. When the toner collection container
becomes full, "Replace used toner container." will appear. Follow the procedure below to replace the toner collection
container.
It is also necessary to remove the toner collection container in order to replace the transfer unit. Refer to the procedure
below to remove the toner collection container when replacing the transfer unit.
Toner may spill when the toner collection container is replaced. Before replacing the toner collection container, take
measures such as placing covers on and around the machine to prevent soiling.
Open the front cover.
1
1-55
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Release the used toner collection
container.
(1) Make sure that the part indicated in the
illustration has stopped in the correct
position.
Correct
position
2
After machine operation stops suddenly due to a power
outage or other reason, the part will stop in the correct
position unless an attempt was made to remove the toner
collection container.
If the part has not stopped in the correct position, close
the front cover, turn on the power, and then follow the
correct procedure to turn off the power. After the power
has been turned off correctly, start again from step 1.
Incorrect
position
(2) Turn the toner collection container lock
lever to the right until it is horizontal.
(3) Tip the toner collection container forward.
Grasp the top right of the toner collection container with
your right hand and support the bottom left with your left
hand, and slowly tip the container toward you.
Remove the toner collection container.
3
• If the toner collection container is tipped forward too far, it will not be possible to remove it.
• Do not point the holes down as used toner will spill out.
• Hold the container by both hands and lift it up slowly.
• Do not discard the toner collection container. Place it in a plastic bag and keep it until your service technician comes
to perform maintenance. Your service technician will collect the toner collection container.
1-56
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Install the new toner collection
container.
(1)
(2)
4
Insert the container from above at a slant. (The direction
opposite to when you removed it.)
Turn the lock lever on the toner
collection container to the left.
Turn the lock lever to the left until it stops.
5
If the lock lever does not turn, check if the toner collection container is installed correctly. In particular, make sure that
the top left corner of the toner collection container is correctly in place.
Close the front cover.
6
Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the cover.
Caution
• Do not throw the toner collection container into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.
• Store the toner collection container out of the reach of small children.
• Toner may spill when the toner collection container is replaced. Take measures so that there will be no problem if toner
spills on the machine, around the machine, or on your clothes.
• Do not touch the part soiled with toner of the removed toner collection container. If you accidentally touch the toner,
immediately wash your hands.
1-57
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
REPLACING THE STAPLE CARTRIDGE IN
THE FINISHER
When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the procedure below
to replace the staple cartridge.
Open the cover.
1
While pressing the lever over to the left,
slide the finisher to the left until it stops.
Gently slide the finisher until it stops
2
‘
3
Lower the staple case release lever and
remove the staple case.
Pull the staple case out to the right.
Remove the empty staple cartridge from
the staple case.
4
Gently grasp the right side of the staple cartridge as shown and
lift to the left and up. The lock will release easily. After the lock
releases, continue lifting the staple cartridge to the left and up
to remove it.
• Even whe‘‘n a message appears in the operation panel, staples may occasionally remain in the staple cartridge.
• If staples remain, the lock will not release easily. Forcing the lock to release may deform the staple case and staple
cartridge, causingw failure.
1-58
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Insert a new staple cartridge into the
staple case as shown.
Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.
5
Replace the staple case.
Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
6
Slide the finisher back to the right.
Gently slide the finisher back to the right until it locks into its
original position.
7
Close the cover.
8
‘
Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the cover.
Make a test print or copy in staple sort mode to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
1-59
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
REGULAR MAINTENANCE
To ensure that the machine continues to provide top quality performance, periodically clean the machine.
Warning
Do not use a flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical
components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result.
• Do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents to clean the machine. These may degrade or discolor the
housing.
• Use a soft cloth to gently wipe off dirt from the area on the operation panel with a
mirror-like finish (shown at right). If you use a stiff cloth or rub hard, the surface may
be damaged.
The area with a mirror-like finish is
the area that is
.
1-60
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
CLEANING THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER
If the document glass or document backplate sheet becomes dirty, the dirt will appear as dirty spots, or black or white
lines in the scanned image. Always keep these ‘‘parts clean.
Wipe the parts with a clean, soft cloth.
If necessary, moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent. After wiping with the moistened cloth,
wipe the parts dry with a clean dry cloth.
Document glass
Document backplate sheet
When wiping dirt off the machine, do not press down hard on the machine. This may damage or deform the machine.
Scanning area
‘‘
Before using the automatic document feeder, please clean the glass surface with the provided glass cleaner.
If dirt on the glass cannot be removed, wipe it off using a soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent, then
wipe it dry with a dry cloth.
Dirt streaks may appear on copies caused by dirty glass in the scanning area.
Provided glass
cleaner
Scanning glass
The glass cleaner is only provided on the MX-B402SC.
1-61
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
CLEANING THE MAIN CHARGER OF THE
PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUM
If black or white lines appear even after you have cleaned the document glass and automatic document feeder, use the
charger cleaner to clean the main charger.
‘‘‘
1
2
Press the [POWER] key ( ) on the
operation panel to turn off the panel
power, and then switch the main power
switch to the off position.
Open the front cover and remove the
toner collection container.
☞ REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION
CONTAINER (page 1-55)
1-62
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Release the lock levers and open the
main charger cover.
☞ REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES (page
3
1-52)
Remove the charger cleaner.
(1)
(2)
4
(1) Flip down the charger cleaner lock (A) in the
direction of the arrow, and lift the left end of
the charger cleaner.
(2) Move the charger cleaner to the left and pull
it out.
(A)
Clean the main charger.
(1) Gently push the charger cleaner all the way
in.
(2) Gently pull the charger cleaner out.
(3) Repeat the above (1) to (2) three times.
5
• Take care not to let the tip of the charger cleaner become soiled by toner.
• Clean with the mark (
) on the charger cleaner facing down.
• Holes to be cleaned by the charger cleaner are indicated by labels similar to (A).
(A)
• Do not use the charger cleaner for any purpose other than
cleaning the main charger.
Position of mark
Replace the charger cleaner in its
original position.
(2)
6
(1)
Insert the tip of the charger cleaner in toward the right and then
press down on the end of the charger cleaner. The charger
cleaner will lock into place.
1-63
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Close the main charger cover and rotate
the lock levers in the direction of the
arrows to lock the cover.
☞ REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES (page
7
1-52)
Install the toner collection container.
☞ REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION
(1)
8
(2)
CONTAINER (page 1-55)
Close the front cover.
9
Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the cover.
Turn on the power.
10
Switch the main power switch "ON" and press the [POWER]
key (
) on the operation panel to turn on the operation panel
power.
1-64
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
CLEANING THE BYPASS TRAY ROLLERS
If you find that paper fed from the bypass tray misfeeds or is soiled by the roller, remove and clean the roller. If misfeeds
or soiling continue to occur, replace the roller.
Before starting, remove the paper from the bypass tray.
Press the [POWER] key ( ) on the
operation panel to turn off the panel
power, and then switch the main power
switch to the off position.
1
Remove the roller cover from the bypass
tray.
2
Place your fingers behind the
pull straight toward you.
marks on the roller cover and
Marks
To clean the rollers, wipe each roller
with a clean cloth.
3
Caution
When cleaning the rollers, be careful not to injure your hands.
Do not touch the surface of the roller if your hands are dirty.
• When you replace roller, go to the next step.
• If the dirt is difficult to remove, moisten the cloth with a small amount of water or neutral detergent, and then wipe
with a clean, dry cloth until no moisture remains.
Attach the roller cover on the bypass
tray.
4
(1)
(2)
(1) Tilt the front of the cover slightly to attach
it.
(2) Press the cover onto the bypass tray so that
it locks into place.
1-65
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Turn on the power.
5
Switch the main power switch "ON" and press the [POWER]
key (
) on the operation panel to turn on the operation panel
power.
1-66
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
CLEANING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER ROLLERS
If you find that originals fed through the automatic document feeder misfeed or are soiled by the rollers, remove the
rollers and clean them. If misfeeds or soiling continue to occur, replace the rollers.
Before starting, remove any originals from the automatic document feeder.
Press the [POWER] key ( ) on the
operation panel to turn off the panel
power, and then switch the main power
switch to the off position.
1
When using the MX-B402
2
Open the document conveyor cover on
the automatic document feeder.
When using the MX-B402SC
1-67
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
When using the MX-B402
To clean the removed rollers, wipe each
roller with a clean cloth.
When using the MX-B402SC
3
Caution
When cleaning the rollers, be careful not to injure your hands.
Do not touch the surface of the roller if your hands are dirty.
• If the dirt is difficult to remove, moisten the cloth with water or a neutral detergent. After wiping, wipe the roller dry
with a clean cloth and go to the step 10.
• When you replace roller, go to the next step.
When using the MX-B402
Close the document conveyor cover on
the automatic document feeder.
When using the MX-B402SC
4
Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the cover.
1-68
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Turn on the power.
Switch the main power switch "ON" and press the [POWER]
key (
) on the operation panel to turn on the operation panel
power.
5
After turning on the power, make sure that an error message regarding replacement of the roller does not appear.
1-69
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
CLEANING THE LASER UNIT
When the laser unit inside the machine becomes dirty, line patterns may form in the printed image. Follow the steps
below to clean the laser unit.
Identifying white lines caused by a dirty laser unit
• White lines always appear in the same place.
• The white lines are parallel to the direction of paper feeding.
Direction of
paper feeding
White line
• White lines appear not only on copies but also on print jobs from a computer. (The same lines appear on both copies and
print jobs.)
‘
1
2
Press the [POWER] key ( ) on the
operation panel to turn off the panel
power, and then switch the main power
switch to the off position.
Open the front cover and remove the
toner collection container.
☞ REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION
CONTAINER (page 1-55)
Remove the cleaning tool for the writing
unit from the front cover.
3
1-70
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Make sure that the cleaner at the tip of
the cleaning tool is not dirty.
4
Cleaner
If the cleaner is dirty, remove the cleaner and replace it with a clean one. For the procedure for replacing the cleaner,
see steps 5 through 7. If the cleaner is not dirty, go to step 8.
Pull out the replacement cleaner from
the toner collection container.
5
Remove the dirty cleaner.
Firmly grasp the tool close to where the cleaner is attached.
Use your other hand to press down on the hook that secures
the cleaner and remove the cleaner.
6
Return the removed cleaner to the toner collection container.
Attach the new cleaner to the cleaning
tool.
7
Align the cleaner hook with the attachment hole in the cleaning
tool.
Hold the cleaner firmly and push the cleaning tool into the
cleaner.
Make sure that the cleaner is firmly attached to the cleaning tool.
1-71
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Clean the laser unit.
(1) Point the cleaner down and slowly insert
the tool into the hole that you wish to clean.
(A)
The parts of the writing unit that require cleaning are
indicated by labels similar to (A).
(2) Insert the cleaning tool all the way into the
hole and then pull it back out.
8
Pull the cleaning tool out until you feel the tip of the tool
leave the cleaning surface of the laser unit.
(3) Repeat step (2) two or three times and then
remove the cleaning tool.
Replace the cleaning tool.
9
Install the toner collection container.
☞ REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION
(1)
10
CONTAINER (page 1-55)
(2)
1-72
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Close the front cover.
11
Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the cover.
Turn on the power.
12
Switch the main power switch "ON" and press the [POWER]
key (
) on the operation panel to turn on the operation panel
power.
1-73
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
CLEANING THE PT CHARGER OF THE
PRIMARY TRANSFER BELT UNIT
If black or white lines still remain after the document glass / automatic document feeder and main charger have been
cleaned, use the PT charger cleaner to clean the PT charger.
Press the [POWER] key ( ) on the
operation panel to turn off the panel
power, and then switch the main power
switch to the off position.
1
Open the front cover and remove the
toner collection container.
☞ REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION
2
CONTAINER (page 1-55)
Clean the PT charger.
(1) Slowly pull the PT charger cleaner out until
you feel a slight resistance.
3
(2) Slowly push the PT charger cleaner back in.
(3) Repeat the above (1) to (2) three times.
Install the toner collection container.
☞ REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION
(1)
4
CONTAINER (page 1-55)
(2)
1-74
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Close the front cover.
5
Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the cover.
Turn on the power.
6
Switch the main power switch "ON" and press the [POWER]
key (
) on the operation panel to turn on the operation panel
power.
1-75
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
ENTERING TEXT
This section explains the text entry screen.
FUNCTIONS OF THE MAIN KEYS
Key
Description
Caps
This key changes the text entry screen from the lower case screen to the upper case screen. The upper
case screen will continue to appear until the [Caps] key is touched again so that it is no longer highlighted.
The [Caps] key is convenient when you wish to enter all capital letters.
Shift
This key temporarily changes the keys in the text entry screen to upper case when lower case letters
appear, or to lower case when upper case letters appear.
Touch a letter key after touching the [Shift] key to enter that letter. After the letter is entered, the [Shift] key
will no longer be highlighted and the original text entry screen will appear.
The [Shift] key is convenient when you only need to enter one upper case letter or one lower case letter, or
when you need to enter one of the symbols assigned to the numeric keys.
To cancel selection of the [Shift] key, touch the [Shift] key again. The [Shift] key will no longer be highlighted.
Enter
Touch this key to enter a line break when entering the body text of an e-mail message.
Touch this key to delete the characters to the left of the cursor one character at a time.
Other Language
Touch this key to temporarily change the key layout of character entry mode to a different language. Select
the key layout that you wish to use.
Space
Touch this key to enter a space between letters.
AltGr
This key temporarily changes the entry screen to the accented letter and symbol entry screen. Touch a
letter key after touching the [AltGr] key to enter that letter. After the letter is entered, the [AltGr] key will no
longer be highlighted and the original text entry screen will appear.
To cancel selection of the [AltGr] key, touch the [AltGr] key again. The [AltGr] key will no longer be
highlighted.
These keys move the cursor left and right.
These keys move the cursor to the line above or below the current line during entry of the body text of an
e-mail message.
Characters
Symbols
Pre-Set Select
Touch this key to select character entry mode.
Touch this key to select symbol entry mode. Symbol mode is used to enter symbols and accented letters.
Use this key to retrieve a previously stored subject for e-mail or other pre-set text.
1-76
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Key
Description
Shows explanations of each key.
Help
.com
.net
.org
.biz
.info
http:
Cancel
OK
Search
Use this key to enter a previously stored text string such as ".com".
Text strings are stored in "Soft Keyboard Template Setting" in "Operation Setting" in the "System Settings"
on the Web page.
Touch this key to return to the previous setting screen without entering text.
Touch this key to enter the text that currently appears and return to the previous setting screen.
Touch this key and search results will appear based on the entered characters.
• " " in the text entry screen indicates how many characters can be entered. A number of characters greater than "
cannot be entered.
"
• The key layouts that can be selected vary depending on the language selected in "MFP Display Language Setting" in the
system settings (administrator).
• The following symbols cannot be used when entering a file name or folder name.
\ ? / " ; : , < > ! * | & #
Some computer environments may not allow the use of spaces and the symbols indicated below. For example, hyperlinks
will not operate correctly or nonsense characters may appear.
$ % ' ( ) + - . = @ [ ] ^ ` { } _~
1-77
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
ENTERING TEXT FROM A KEYBOARD
A keyboard can only be used as a alternative for the text entry screen that appears in the machine's touch panel.
The layout of the keys in the text entry screen in the touch panel differs slightly from the layout of the keys on the
keyboard.
For details on using the keys, press the F1 key to view an explanation of each key.
Entering text from a keyboard
MX-B402SC Only
A keyboard can only be used as a alternative for the text entry screen that appears in the machine's touch panel. The
layout of the keys in the text entry screen in the touch panel differs slightly from the layout of the keys on the keyboard.
For details on using the keys, press the F1 key to view an explanation of each key.
Do not place heavy objects on the keyboard or press down on the keyboard.
1-78
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
SOFTWARE SETUP
BEFORE INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
For an introduction to the software that enables the use of the printer and scanner functions, details regarding the type of
CD-ROM that contains the software, and installation instructions, see "BEFORE INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE" in the
Start Guide.
1-79
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
SETUP IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT
This section explains how to install the software and configure settings so that the printer and scanner function of the
machine can be used with a Windows computer.
The section from this page to page 1-84 is also included in the Start Guide. (This section details basic setup
procedures.)
The instructions from page 1-85 to page 1-106 are not included in the Start Guide. Refer to the guide as necessary.
OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR
ALL SOFTWARE)
Insert the "Software CD-ROM" into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
1
2
• If you are installing the printer driver or printer status monitor, insert the "Software CD-ROM" that shows "Disc 1" on the
front of the CD-ROM.
• If you are installing the PC-Fax driver or scanner driver, insert the "Software CD-ROM" that shows "Disc 2" on the front of
the CD-ROM.
Click the [Start] button (
[CD-ROM] icon ( ).
), click [Computer], and then double-click the
• In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [start] button, click [My Computer], and then double-click the [CD-ROM] icon.
• In Windows 2000, double-click [My Computer] and then double-click the [CD-ROM] icon.
Double-click the [Setup] icon (
3
).
• In Windows 7, if a message screen appears asking you for confirmation, click [Yes].
• In Windows Vista/Server 2008, if a message screen appears asking you for confirmation, click [Allow].
The "SOFTWARE LICENSE" window will appear. Make sure that you understand
the contents of the license agreement and then click the [Yes] button.
4
You can show the "SOFTWARE LICENSE" in a different language by selecting the desired language from the
language menu. To install the software in the selected language, continue the installation with that language selected.
5
Read the message in the "Welcome" window and then click the [Next] button.
1-80
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
The software selection screen appears.
The software selection screen appears.
Before installing the software, be sure to click the [Display
Readme] button and view the detailed information on the
software.
6
* The above screen appears when using the "Disc 1"
CD-ROM.
For the steps that follow, see the appropriate page below for the software that you are installing.
INSTALLING THE PRINTER DRIVER / PC-FAX DRIVER
• WHEN THE MACHINE IS CONNECTED TO A NETWORK*
- Standard installation: page 1-82
- Installation by specifying the machine's address: page 1-85
- Printing using the IPP function and the SSL function: page 1-88
• WHEN THE MACHINE WILL BE CONNECTED WITH A USB CABLE: page 1-90
• USING THE MACHINE AS A SHARED PRINTER: page 1-95
INSTALLING THE PRINTER STATUS MONITOR: page 1-100
INSTALLING THE SCANNER DRIVER: page 1-101
* If the machine is being used on an IPv6 network, see "Installation by specifying the machine's address" (page 1-85).
INSTALLING THE PRINTER DRIVER / PC-FAX DRIVER
To install the printer driver or the PC-Fax driver, follow the appropriate procedure in this section depending on whether
the machine is connected to a network or connected by USB cable.
☞ WHEN THE MACHINE WILL BE CONNECTED WITH A USB CABLE (page 1-90)
WHEN THE MACHINE IS CONNECTED TO A NETWORK
This section explains how to install the printer driver and the PC-Fax driver when the machine is connected to a
Windows network (TCP/IP network).
• To print to the machine over the Internet using the IPP function when the machine is installed in a remote location, or to
print using the SSL (encrypted communication) function, see "Printing using the IPP function and the SSL function" (page
1-88) and install the printer driver or the PC-Fax driver.
• If the machine is connected to an IPv6-only network
The software cannot be installed by detecting the machine's address from the installer. After installing the software as
explained in "Installation by specifying the machine's address" (page 1-85), change the port as explained in "Changing to a
Standard TCP/IP Port" (page 1-105).
• The installation procedure in this section is for both the printer driver and the PC-Fax driver, although the explanations are
centered on the printer driver.
1-81
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
X Standard installation
When the software selection screen appears in step 6 of "OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR
ALL SOFTWARE)" (page 1-80), perform the steps below.
Click the [Printer Driver] button.
To install the PC-Fax driver, click the [PC-Fax Driver] button on
the "Disc 2" CD-ROM.
1
* The above screen appears when using the "Disc 1"
CD-ROM.
Click the [Standard installation] button.
2
When [Custom installation] is selected, you can change any of the items below. When [Standard installation] is
selected, the installation will take place as indicated below.
• Machine connection method: LPR Direct Print (Auto Search)
• Set as default printer: Yes (excluding the PC-Fax driver)
• Printer driver name: Cannot be changed
• Printer display fonts: Installed
If you selected [Custom installation], select [LPR Direct Print (Auto Search)] and click the [Next] button.
If you selected other than [LPR Direct Print (Auto Search)], see the following pages:
• LPR Direct Print (Specify Address): page 1-85
• IPP: page 1-88 • Shared printer: page 1-95
• Connected to this computer: page 1-90
1-82
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Printers connected to the network are
detected. Select the machine and click
the [Next] button.
3
• If the machine is not found, make sure that the machine is powered on and that the machine is connected to the
network, and then click the [Re-search] button.
• You can also click the [Specify condition] button and search for the machine by entering the machine's name (host
name) or IP address.
☞ Start Guide "Checking the IP address of the machine"
4
A confirmation window appears. Check the contents and then click the [Next]
button.
When the printer driver selection
window appears, select the printer driver
to be installed and click the [Next]
button.
5
Click the checkbox of the printer driver to be installed so that a
checkmark (
) appears.
When the PC-Fax driver is being installed, this screen does not appear. Go to the next step.
When you are asked whether or not you want the printer to be your default
printer, make a selection and click the [Next] button.
If you are installing multiple drivers, select the printer driver to be used as the default printer.
If you do not wish to set one of the printer drivers as the default printer, select [No].
6
If you clicked the [Custom installation] button in step 2, the following windows will appear.
• Printer name window
If you wish to change the printer name, enter the desired name and click the [Next] button.
• Window confirming installation of the display fonts
To install the display fonts, select [Yes] and click the [Next] button.
• When the PC-Fax driver is being installed, this screen does not appear. Go to the next step.
1-83
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Read the message in the window that appears and click the [Next] button.
Installation begins.
7
• If you are using Windows Vista/Server 2008/7
If a security warning window appears, be sure to click [Install this driver software anyway].
• If you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
If a warning message regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature appears, be sure to click the [Continue
Anyway] or [Yes] button.
8
When the installation completed screen appears, click the [OK] button.
Click the [Close] button in the window of step 1.
9
After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. If this message appears, click
the [Yes] button to restart your computer.
This completes the installation.
• After installation, see "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER FOR THE OPTIONS INSTALLED ON THE
MACHINE" (page 1-97) to configure the printer driver settings.
• If you are using the machine as a shared printer, see "USING THE MACHINE AS A SHARED PRINTER" (page 1-95)
to install the printer driver on each of the client computers.
1-84
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
X Installation by specifying the machine's address
When the machine cannot be found because it is not powered on or otherwise, installation is possible by entering the
name (host name) or IP address of the machine.
If the machine is being used on an IPv6 network, after you have installed the software as explained below, change the
port as explained in "Changing to a Standard TCP/IP Port" (page 1-105).
When the software selection screen appears in step 6 of "OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR
ALL SOFTWARE)" (page 1-80), perform the steps below.
Click the [Printer Driver] button.
To install the PC-Fax driver, click the [PC-Fax Driver] button on
the "Disc 2" CD-ROM.
1
* The above screen appears when using the "Disc 1"
CD-ROM.
Click the [Custom installation] button.
2
When you are asked how the printer is
connected, select [LPR Direct Print
(Specify Address)] and click the [Next]
button.
3
1-85
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Enter the name (host name) or IP
address of the machine and click the
[Next] button.
☞ Start Guide "Checking the IP address of the machine"
4
If the machine is being used on an IPv6 network, enter any numbers or characters.
5
When the model selection window appears, select the model name of your
machine and click the [Next] button.
When the printer driver selection
window appears, select the printer driver
to be installed and click the [Next]
button.
6
Click the checkbox of the printer driver to be installed so that a
checkmark (
) appears.
When the PC-Fax driver is being installed, this screen does not appear. Go to the next step.
7
8
9
Select whether or not you wish the printer to be your default printer and click the
[Next] button.
If you are installing multiple drivers, select the printer driver to be used as the default printer.
If you do not wish to set one of the printer drivers as the default printer, select [No].
When the printer name window appears, click the [Next] button.
If you wish to change the printer name, enter the desired name and click the [Next] button.
When you are asked if you wish to install the display fonts, select an answer and
click the [Next] button.
When the PC-Fax driver is being installed, this screen does not appear. Go to the next step.
1-86
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Read the message in the window that appears and click the [Next] button.
Installation begins.
10
• If you are using Windows Vista/Server 2008/7
If a security warning window appears, be sure to click [Install this driver software anyway].
• If you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
If a warning message regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature appears, be sure to click the [Continue
Anyway] or [Yes] button.
11
When the installation completed screen appears, click the [OK] button.
Click the [Close] button in the window of step 1.
12
After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. If this message appears, click
the [Yes] button to restart your computer.
This completes the installation.
• After installation, see "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER FOR THE OPTIONS INSTALLED ON THE
MACHINE" (page 1-97) to configure the printer driver settings.
• If the machine is being used on an IPv6 network, enter any numbers or characters.
1-87
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
X Printing using the IPP function and the SSL function
The IPP function can be used to print to the machine over a network using HTTP protocol.
The IPP function can also be used in combination with the SSL (encrypted communication) function to encrypt the print
data. This enables secure printing with no concern that the data will be leaked to others.
To use the SSL function, configure the "SSL Settings" in the system settings (administrator) of the machine. To configure the
settings, see "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
When the software selection screen appears in step 6 of "OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR
ALL SOFTWARE)" (page 1-80), perform the steps below.
Click the [Printer Driver] button.
To install the PC-Fax driver, click the [PC-Fax Driver] button on
the "Disc 2" CD-ROM.
1
* The above screen appears when using the "Disc 1"
CD-ROM.
Click the [Custom installation] button.
2
When you are asked how the printer is
connected, select [IPP] and click the
[Next] button.
3
1-88
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
If a proxy server is used, specify the
proxy server and click the [Next] button.
To specify a proxy server, select [Print via the proxy server] and
then enter the [Address] and [Port number].
4
Enter the machine's URL and click the
[Next] button.
5
Enter the URL in the following format:
Normal format:
http://<the machine's domain name or IP address>:631*1/ipp
*1 Normally "631" should be entered for the port number. If the
IPP port number has been changed on the machine, enter
the new port number.
When SSL is used:
https://< the machine's domain name or IP address>:<port number*2>/ipp
*2 Normally the port number and the colon ":" immediately
preceding the port number can be omitted. If the IPP port
number for SSL has been changed on the machine, enter
the new port number.
If your computer and the machine are connected to the same local area network, you can click the [Search] button to
search for the machine. The machine's URL will appear. Select the URL and click the [OK] button. You will return to
the above screen and the machine's URL will be automatically entered.
6
Perform steps 5 through 12 on page 1-86 to continue the installation.
This completes the installation.
After installation, see "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER FOR THE OPTIONS INSTALLED ON THE MACHINE"
(page 1-97) to configure the printer driver settings.
1-89
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
WHEN THE MACHINE WILL BE CONNECTED WITH A USB CABLE
• Make sure that a USB cable is not connected to your computer and the machine.
If a cable is connected, a Plug and Play window will appear. If this happens, click the [Cancel] button to close the window
and disconnect the cable.
• To use the port created when the printer driver is installed for fax data transfer, install the printer driver first and then install
the PC-Fax driver.
When the software selection screen appears in step 6 of "OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR
ALL SOFTWARE)" (page 1-80), perform the steps below.
Click the [Printer Driver] button.
1
Click the [Custom installation] button.
2
When you are asked how the printer is
connected, select [Connected to this
computer] and click the [Next] button.
3
1-90
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
4
When you are asked if you wish to install the display fonts, select an answer and
click the [Next] button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Read the message in the window that appears and click the [Next] button.
When the installation completed screen appears, click the [OK] button.
5
• If you are using Windows Vista/Server 2008/7
If a security warning window appears, be sure to click [Install this driver software anyway].
• If you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
If a warning message regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature appears, be sure to click the [Continue
Anyway] or [Yes] button.
Click the [Close] button in the window of step 1.
When a message appears prompting you to connect the machine to your computer, click the [OK] button.
6
After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. If this message appears, click
the [Yes] button to restart your computer.
Connect the machine to your computer
with a USB cable.
(1) Make sure that the machine is powered on.
7
(2) Connect the cable to the USB connector (B
type) on the machine.
The USB interface on the machine complies with the USB
2.0 (Hi-Speed) standard. Please purchase a shielded
USB cable.
(3) Connect the other end of the cable to the
USB connector (A type) on your computer.
The machine is found and a Plug and Play window appears.
Installation of the PCL6 printer driver begins.
When the "Found New Hardware Wizard" appears, select [Install the software automatically (Recommended)], click the
[Next] button, and follow the on-screen instructions.
8
• If you are using Windows Vista/Server 2008/7
If a security warning window appears, be sure to click [Install this driver software anyway].
• If you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
If a warning message regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature appears, be sure to click the [Continue
Anyway] or [Yes] button.
This completes the installation.
• After installing the printer driver, see "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER FOR THE OPTIONS INSTALLED ON
THE MACHINE" (page 1-97) to configure the printer driver settings.
• If you are using the machine as a shared printer, see "USING THE MACHINE AS A SHARED PRINTER" (page 1-95)
to install the printer driver on each of the client computers.
1-91
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
When installing the PCL5e printer driver, PS printer driver, PPD driver, or PC-Fax driver
Installation is possible even after the USB cable has been connected. When the software selection screen appears in
step 6 of "OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR ALL SOFTWARE)" (page 1-80), perform the steps
below.
Click the [Printer Driver] button.
To install the PC-Fax driver, click the [PC-Fax Driver] button on
the "Disc 2" CD-ROM.
1
* The above screen appears when using the "Disc 1"
CD-ROM.
Click the [Custom installation] button.
2
When you are asked how the printer is
connected, select [Connected to this
computer] and click the [Next] button.
3
4
When the port selection window appears, select the port that the PCL6 printer
driver is using (USB001, etc.) and click the [Next] button.
1-92
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
When the printer driver selection
window appears, remove the [PCL6]
checkmark and select the printer driver
to be installed, and then click the [Next]
button.
Click the checkbox of the printer driver to be installed so that a
checkmark (
) appears.
5
When the PC-Fax driver is being installed, this screen does not appear. Go to the next step.
6
7
8
Select whether or not you wish the printer to be your default printer and click the
[Next] button.
If you are installing multiple drivers, select the printer driver to be used as the default printer.
If you do not wish to set one of the printer drivers as the default printer, select [No].
When the printer name window appears, click the [Next] button.
If you wish to change the printer name, enter the desired name and click the [Next] button.
When you are asked if you wish to install the display fonts, select [No] and click
the [Next] button.
When the PC-Fax driver is being installed, this screen does not appear. Go to the next step.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Read the message in the window that appears and click the [Next] button.
Installation begins.
9
• If you are using Windows Vista/Server 2008/7
If a security warning window appears, be sure to click [Install this driver software anyway].
• If you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
If a warning message regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature appears, be sure to click the [Continue
Anyway] or [Yes] button.
10
When the installation completed screen appears, click the [OK] button.
Click the [Close] button in the window of step 1.
11
After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. If this message appears, click
the [Yes] button to restart your computer.
This completes the installation.
1-93
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
• After installation, see "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER FOR THE OPTIONS INSTALLED ON THE
MACHINE" (page 1-97) to configure the printer driver settings.
• Make sure that the port of the installed driver is the same as the port used by the PCL6 printer driver.
The port used by the printer driver of the machine is indicated by a checkmark on the [Ports] tab of the printer driver
properties window.
☞ CHANGING THE PORT (page 1-103)
1-94
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
USING THE MACHINE AS A SHARED PRINTER
If you are going to use the machine as a shared printer on a Windows network with the printer driver or the PC-Fax
driver installed on a print server, follow the steps below to install the printer driver or the PC-Fax driver on the client
computers.
• Ask your network administrator for the server name and printer name of the machine on the network.
• For the procedure for configuring settings on the print server, see the operation manual or the Help file of the operating
system. The "print server" explained here is a computer that is connected directly to the machine, and "clients" are other
computers connected to the same network as the print server.
• Install the same printer driver on client computers as the printer driver that is installed on the print server.
When the software selection screen appears in step 6 of "OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR
ALL SOFTWARE)" (page 1-80), perform the steps below.
Click the [Printer Driver] button.
To install the PC-Fax driver, click the [PC-Fax Driver] button on
the "Disc 2" CD-ROM.
1
* The above screen appears when using the "Disc 1"
CD-ROM.
2
Click the [Custom installation] button.
Select [Shared Printer] and click the
[Next] button.
3
1-95
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Select the printer name (configured as a
shared printer).
(1) Select the printer name (configured as a
shared printer on a print server) from the
list.
If you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, you can
also click the [Add Network Port] button displayed below
the list and select the printer to be shared by browsing the
network in the window that appears.
4
(1)
(2)
(2) Click the [Next] button.
If the shared printer does not appear in the list, check the settings on the print server.
Perform steps 5 through 12 on page 1-86 to continue the installation.
5
In the printer driver selection screen, be sure to select the same type of printer as the printer driver installed on the print
server.
This completes the installation.
1-96
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER FOR THE OPTIONS INSTALLED ON
THE MACHINE
After installing the printer driver, you must configure the printer driver settings appropriately for the options that have
been installed and the size and type of paper loaded in the machine. Follow the steps below to configure the printer
driver.
If the PPD driver is installed, see "When the PPD driver is installed" (page 1-99).
X When the PCL printer driver or PS printer driver is installed
Click the [Start] button (
1
), click [Control Panel], and then click [Printer].
• In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [start] button and then click [Printers and Faxes].
• In Windows 2000, click the [Start] button, select [Settings], and then click [Printers].
If [Printers and Faxes] does not appear in the [start] menu in Windows XP, click the [start] button, click [Control Panel],
click [Printers and Other Hardware], and then click [Printers and Faxes].
Open the printer properties window.
2
(1) Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine.
(2) Select [Properties].
3
Click the [Configuration] tab.
Click the [Auto Configuration] button.
The settings are automatically configured based on the
detected machine status.
4
If the machine is being used on an IPv6 network, you must configure the options manually as explained in "If
automatic configuration fails" (page 1-98).
1-97
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Configure the image of the machine.
An image of the machine is formed in the printer driver
configuration window based on the options that are installed.
(1) Select the options that are installed on the
machine.
5
(2) Click the [OK] button.
(1)
(2)
To cancel the image settings, click the [Cancel] button.
6
Click the [OK] button in the printer properties window.
If automatic configuration fails
• You can check the options that are installed and the tray settings by printing out the "All Custom Setting List" in the system
settings of the machine. (However, note that "Input Tray Options" must be set to the number of trays on the machine.)
Follow these steps to print out the "All Custom Setting List": Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, touch the [List Print
(User)] key, and then touch the [Print] key of "All Custom Setting List".
• Click the [Set Tray Status] button, the [Paper Type Name] button, and the [Set Tandem Print]* button to check the settings
of each.
Set Tray Status:
The "Tray Settings" in "Paper Tray Settings" in system settings of the machine are reflected in the
settings shown here. Specify the size and type of paper loaded in each tray.
Paper Type Name: The "Paper Type Registration" settings in "Paper Tray Settings" in the system settings of the machine
are reflected in the settings shown here. If a user type name (1 to 7) was changed, enter the changed
name.
1-98
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
X When the PPD driver is installed
Click the [Start] button (
1
), click [Control Panel], and then click [Printer].
• In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [start] button and then click [Printers and Faxes].
• In Windows 2000, click the [Start] button, select [Settings], and then click [Printers].
If [Printers and Faxes] does not appear in the [start] menu in Windows XP, click the [start] button, click [Control Panel],
click [Printers and Other Hardware], and then click [Printers and Faxes].
Open the printer properties window.
2
(1) Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine.
(2) Select [Properties].
Configure the printer driver for the options installed on the machine.
(1) Click the [Device Settings] tab.
(2) Configure each item based on the machine configuration.
The items and the procedures for configuring the items vary depending on the operating system version.
3
(3) Click the [OK] button.
You can check the options that are installed on the machine by printing out the "All Custom Setting List" in the system
settings. (However, note that "Input Tray Options" must be set to the number of trays on the machine.) Follow these
steps to print out the "All Custom Setting List": Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, touch the [List Print (User)] key,
and then touch the [Print] key of "All Custom Setting List".
1-99
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
INSTALLING THE PRINTER STATUS MONITOR
Printer Status Monitor is a printer utility that allows general users to check the current status of the machine on their
computer screen, such as whether or not the machine is ready to print. The Printer Status Monitor shows error
information such as paper misfeeds, printer configuration information (whether or not a finisher is installed, etc.) as an
image, the paper sizes that can be used, and the amount of paper remaining.
The Printer Status Monitor cannot be used in the following situations:
• When the machine is connected by a USB cable.
• When printing to the machine using the IPP function.
When the software selection screen appears in step 6 of "OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR
ALL SOFTWARE)" (page 1-80), perform the steps below.
Click the [Printer Status Monitor] button.
1
2
Follow the on-screen instructions.
When the installation completed screen appears, click the [Finish] button.
3
To have the Printer Status Monitor start automatically when your computer is started, select the [Add this program to your
Startup folder] checkbox
and click the [Finish] button.
Click the [Close] button in the window of step 1.
4
After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. If this message appears, click
the [Yes] button to restart your computer.
This completes the installation.
For the procedures for using the Printer Status Monitor, see the Help file. Follow these steps to view the Help file:
Click the Windows [start] button, select [All Programs] ([Programs] in Windows 2000), select [SHARP Printer Status
Monitor] and then select [Help].
1-100
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
INSTALLING THE SCANNER DRIVER
The scanner driver (TWAIN driver) can only be used when the machine is connected to a network. When the scanner
driver is installed, PC scan mode of the image send function can be used.
After performing step 1 through step 5 of "OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR ALL
SOFTWARE)" (page 1-80), continue the steps below.
Click the [Scanner Driver (TWAIN)]
button.
1
2
3
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Read the message in the window that appears and click the [Next] button.
When the finish setup window appears, click the [OK] button.
Click the [Close] button in the window of step 1.
4
After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. If this message appears, click
the [Yes] button to restart your computer.
This completes the installation. Next, configure the IP address of the machine in the scanner driver.
When the scanner driver is installed, the "Select Device" utility is also installed.
The IP address of the machine is configured in the scanner driver using "Select Device".
5
Click the [start] button, select [All Programs] ([Programs] in Windows 2000),
select [SHARP MFP TWAIN V], and then select [Select Device].
1-101
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Click the [Search] button.
If you know the IP address, you can click the [Input] key and
enter the IP address without searching.
6
Select the IP address of the machine
from the "Address" menu and click the
[OK] button.
• Be sure to ask your system administrator (network
administrator) for the IP address of the machine.
• The name (host name) or IP address of the machine can be
directly entered in "Address".
• If the port number used by the scanner function of the
machine has been changed, enter a colon ":" following the IP
address and then enter the port number. (Normally the port
number does not need to be entered.)
7
Click the [OK] button.
8
This completes the configuration of the scanner driver.
1-102
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
CHANGING THE PORT
When using the machine in a Windows environment, follow the steps below to change the port when you have changed
the IP address of the machine or have installed the PC-Fax driver when the machine is connected with a USB cable. If
the machine is being used on an IPv6 network, follow the steps 1 to 3 below and see "Changing to a Standard TCP/IP
Port" (page 1-105) for the remaining steps of the procedure to change the port.
Click the [Start] button (
1
), click [Control Panel], and then click [Printer].
• In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [start] button and then click [Printers and Faxes].
• In Windows 2000, click the [Start] button, select [Settings], and then click [Printers].
If [Printers and Faxes] does not appear in the [start] menu in Windows XP, click the [start] button, click [Control Panel],
click [Printers and Other Hardware], and then click [Printers and Faxes].
Open the printer properties window.
2
(1) Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine.
(2) Select [Properties].
Adding or changing a port.
(1) Click the [Ports] tab.
(2) Click the [Add Port] button.
3
(2)
(1)
To change to a previously created port such as USB port, select the desired port (USB001, etc.) from the list and click
the [Apply] button. This changes the port.
1-103
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Select [SC2 TCP/IP Port] and then click
the [New Port] button.
4
• The "SC2 TCP/IP Port" is added when the printer driver is installed using a "Standard installation", or a "Custom
installation" with "LPR Direct Print (Specify Address/Auto Search)" selected.
• If the printer driver is installed using a "Custom installation" with "IPP" selected, the [SC-Print2005 Port] is added. If
you need to change the printer port when the machine is connected to an intranet or a wide area network (WAN)
using the IPP function, select [SC-Print2005 Port], click the [New Port] button, and follow the on-screen instructions
to create the port again.
Create the new port.
(1) Enter the machine's IP address.
☞ Start Guide "Checking the IP address of the machine"
(2) Make sure that [LPR] is selected.
(3) Make sure that [lp] is entered.
(4) Click the [OK] button.
5
(1) (2)
6
7
(3)
(4)
Click the [Close] button in the screen of step 4.
Make sure the created printer port is selected in the printer properties window
and then click the [Apply] button.
1-104
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
X Changing to a Standard TCP/IP Port
If the machine is being used on an IPv6 network, change the port to a port created using the operating system's
"Standard TCP/IP Port".
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 of "CHANGING THE PORT" (page 1-103).
Select [Standard TCP/IP Port] and then
click the [New Port] button.
2
3
Click the [Next] button.
Enter the machine's IPv6 address in
[Printer Name or IP Address] and click
the [Next] button.
4
Select [Custom] and click the [Settings]
button.
5
1-105
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Configure the port settings.
(1) Select [LPR].
(2) Enter [lp].
(3) Click the [OK] button.
6
(2)
7
(3)
(1)
Click the [Next] button in the screen of step 5.
8
Click the [Finish] button.
9
Click the [Close] button in the screen of step 2.
When using a port created with "Standard TCP/IP Port"
In the screen that appears after you click the [Configure Port] button in the screen of step 3, make sure the [SNMP
Status Enabled] checkbox is not selected ( ). If the [SNMP Status Enabled] checkbox is selected ( ), it may not be
possible to print correctly.
1-106
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
SETUP IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT
This chapter explains how to install the PPD file to enable printing from a Macintosh and how to configure the printer
driver settings.
☞ MAC OS X: this page
(v10.2.8, v10.3.9, v10.4.11, v10.5 - 10.5.8., v10.6 - 10.6.2)
☞ MAC OS 9.0 - 9.2.2: page 1-113
• To use the machine as a printer in a Macintosh environment, the machine must be connected to a network. A USB
connection cannot be used.
• The scanner driver and PC-Fax driver cannot be used in a Macintosh environment.
MAC OS X
• The explanations of screens and procedures are primarily for Mac OS X v10.4. The screens may vary in other versions of
the operating system.
• The CD-ROM does not include software for Mac OS X10.2.8 and X10.3.9.
Contact your dealer or nearest authorized service representative if you want software for X10.2.8 and X10.3.9.
1
2
Insert the "Software CD-ROM" into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
Insert the "Software CD-ROM" that shows "Disc 1" on the front of the CD-ROM.
Double-click the [CD-ROM] icon (
) on the desktop.
Double-click the [MacOSX] folder.
3
4
Before installing the software, be sure to read "ReadMe First". "ReadMe First" is in the [US-English] folder ([English] folder in
areas other than the U.S.) in the [Readme] folder.
Double-click the folder corresponding to the versions of the operating system.
Double-click the [MX-PKX] icon (
5
).
If the "Authenticate" window appears in Mac OS X v10.2.8, enter the password and click the [OK] button.
1-107
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Click the [Continue] button.
6
The License Agreement window will appear. Make sure that you understand the
contents of the license agreement and then click the [Continue] button.
7
A message will appear asking you if you agree to the terms of the license. Click the [Agree] button.
If the license appears in the different language, change the language in the language menu.
Select the hard drive where the PPD file
will be installed and click the [Continue]
button.
8
• Be sure to select the hard drive on which your operating
system is installed.
• In Mac OS X v10.6 - 10.6.2, the screen below appears when
you click the [Change Install Location] button.
Click the [Install] button.
Installation begins.
9
If the "Authenticate" window appears, enter the password and click the [OK] button.
10
When the message "The software was successfully installed" appears in the
installation window, click the [Close] button.
This completes the installation of the software. Next, configure the printer driver settings.
1-108
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Select [Utilities] from the [Go] menu.
• If you are using Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.8 or v10.6 - 10.6.2,
click [System Preferences] in the Apple menu ( ) and
select [Print & Fax] ( ). When the screen for adding a
printer appears, click the
button and go to step 14.
• If you are using Mac OS X v10.2.8, select [Applications] from
the [Go] menu.
11
Double-click the [Printer Setup Utility] icon ( ).
If you are using Mac OS X v10.2.8, double-click the [Utilities] folder and then double-click the [Print Center] icon.
12
If this is the first time you are installing a printer driver on your computer, a confirmation message will appear. Click the
[Add] button.
Click [Add].
13
Configure the printer driver.
14
• The procedure for configuring the printer driver varies depending on the operating system version. The procedure for
versions 10.4.11, 10.5 - 10.5.8 and 10.6 to 10.6.2, and the procedure for other versions are explained separately below.
• The machine can print using the IPP function. If you wish to use the IPP function, see "Printing using the IPP function"
(page 1-112) to configure the printer driver settings.
1-109
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
v10.4.11, v10.5 - 10.5.8, v10.6 - 10.6.2
(1) Click the [Default Browser] icon.
(1)
(2)
If you are using Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.8 or v10.6 10.6.2, click the [Default] icon.
(2) Click the machine's model name.
• Using with AppleTalk:
The machine's model name usually appears as
[SCxxxxxx]*.
• Using with Bonjour:
The machine's model name usually appears as
[RDVxxxxxx]*.
* "xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters that varies
depending on your model.
(3)
(4)
(3) Make sure that the PPD file of your model is
selected.
The PPD file of the machine is automatically selected.
(4) Click the [Add] button.
• Using with AppleTalk:
The PPD file of the machine is automatically selected
and the peripheral devices installed on the machine are
detected and automatically configured.
• Using with Bonjour:
The "Installable Options" screen appears. Select the
machine configuration and click the [Continue] button.
v10.2.8, v10.3.9
(1) Select [AppleTalk].
(1)
(2)
If multiple AppleTalk zones are displayed, select the zone
that includes the printer from the menu.
(2) Click the machine's model name.
The machine's model name usually appears as
[SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters that
varies depending on your model.)
(3)
(4)
(3) Select the PPD file of the machine.
• If you are using Mac OS X v10.3.9, select [Auto Select].
• If you are using Mac OS X v10.2.8, select [Sharp] and
click the PPD file of your model.
(4) Click the [Add] button.
If you are using Mac OS X v10.3.9, the PPD file of the
machine is automatically selected and the peripheral
devices installed on the machine are detected and
automatically configured.
The PPD file is installed in the following folders on the startup disk.
[Library] - [Printers] - [PPDs] - [Contents] - [Resources] - [en.lproj]
1-110
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Display printer information.
(2)
(1) Click the machine's name.
(1)
If you are using Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.8 or v10.6 10.6.2, click the [Options & Supplies] button, click the
[Driver] tab and go to step 16.
15
(2) Click [Show Info].
If you are using Mac OS X v10.2.8, select [Show Info]
from the [Printers] menu.
Select the machine configuration.
If you selected [Auto Select] in (3) of step 14, the machine configuration is detected and automatically configured. Check the
configured settings to make sure they are correct.
(1) Select [Installable Options].
If you are using Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.8 or v10.6 - 10.6.2, it does not appear.
(2) Select the options that are installed on the machine.
16
(3) Click the [Apply Changes] button.
If you are using Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.8 or v10.6 - 10.6.2, click the [OK] button.
(4) Click to close the window.
You can check the options that are installed on the machine by printing out the "All Custom Setting List" in the system
settings. (However, note that "Input Tray Options" must be set to the number of trays on the machine.) The "All
Custom Settings List" can be printed from [List Print (User)] in the system settings.
This completes the configuration of the printer driver.
1-111
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
X Printing using the IPP function
The machine can print using the IPP function. When the machine is in a remote location, this function can be used in
place of the fax function to print a higher than a fax. If you wish to use the IPP function, follow these steps to select the
PPD file when configuring the printer driver (step 14 on page 1-109).
v10.4.11, v10.5 - 10.5.8, v10.6 - 10.6.2
(1) Click the [IP Printer] icon.
If you are using Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.8 or v10.6 10.6.2, click the [IP] icon.
(1)
(2)
(2) Select [Internet Printing Protocol] in
"Protocol". Enter the address of the
machine (IP address or domain name) and
the queue name.
Enter "ipp" in "Queue".
(3)
(3) Select [Sharp] in "Print Using" and click the
PPD file of your model.
If you are using Mac OS X v 10.5 to 10.5.8 or v10.6 10.6.2, select [Select a driver to use] (or [Select Printer
Software]) from "Print Using" and click the PPD file for
your model.
(4)
(4) Click the [Add] button.
The "Installable Options" screen will appear. Make sure
that the settings are correct and click the [Continue]
button.
☞ Start Guide "Checking the IP address of the machine"
v10.2.8, v10.3.9
(1)
(2)
(1) Select [IP Printing].
(2) Select [Internet Printing Protocol] in
"Printer Type". Enter the address of the
machine (IP address or domain name) and
the "Queue Name".
• If you are using Mac OS X v10.2.8, enter the address of
the machine (IP address or domain name) in "Printer's
Address".
• Enter "ipp" in "Queue Name".
(3)
(4)
(3) Select [Sharp] in "Printer Model" and click
the PPD file of your model.
(4) Click the [Add] button.
☞ Start Guide "Checking the IP address of the machine"
1-112
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
MAC OS 9.0 - 9.2.2
• If you are using Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2, make sure that "LaserWriter 8" has been installed and that the "LaserWriter 8"
checkbox is selected
in "Extensions Manager" in "Control Panels". If not, install it from the system CD-ROM supplied
with your Macintosh computer.
• The CD-ROM does not include software for Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2.
Contact your dealer or nearest authorized service representative if you want software for Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2.
1
Download the software and save the extracted files in any folder.
Double-click the [MacOS] folder.
2
3
Before installing the software, be sure to read "ReadMe First". "ReadMe First" is in the [US-English] folder ([English] folder in
areas other than the U.S.) in the [Readme] folder.
Double-click the [Installer] icon (
).
Click the [Install] button.
4
5
The License Agreement window will appear. Make sure that you understand the
contents of the license agreement and then click the [Yes] button.
Read the message in the window that appears and click the [Continue] button.
6
Installation of the PPD file begins.
After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer will appear. Click the [OK] button and restart your
computer.
This completes the installation of the software. Next, configure the printer driver settings.
7
Select [Chooser] from the Apple Menu.
1-113
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
(1)
Create a printer.
(2)
(1) Click the [LaserWriter 8] icon.
If multiple AppleTalk zones are displayed, select the zone
that includes the printer.
8
(2) Click the machine's model name.
The machine's model name usually appears as
[SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters that
varies depending on your model.)
(3)
(3) Click the [Create] button.
Select the PPD file.
(1) Click the PPD file for your model.
(1)
(2) Click the [Select] button.
(2)
9
• If the above dialog box does not appear and you return to the "Chooser" dialog box, follow these steps to select the
PPD file manually.
(1) Make sure that the machine is selected in the "Select a PostScript Printer" list, and then click the [Setup] button
followed by the [Select PPD] button.
(2) Select the PPD file for your model and click the [Open] button.
(3) Click the [OK] button.
• The PPD file is installed in the [Printer Descriptions] folder in the [Extensions] folder.
10
Make sure that the machine is selected in the "Select a PostScript Printer" list
and then click the [Setup] button.
Click the [Configure] button.
11
To automatically configure the settings based on the installed machine options that are detected, click the [Auto
Setup] button.
1-114
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Select the machine configuration.
(1) Select the options that are installed on the machine.
(2) Select [Options 2] from the menu to change the screen and continue selecting the options
that have been installed on the machine.
12
(3) Click the [OK] button.
You can check the options that are installed on the machine by printing out the "All Custom Setting List" in the system
settings. (However, note that "Input Tray Options" must be set to the number of trays on the machine.) Follow these
steps to print out the "All Custom Setting List": Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, touch the [List Print (User)] key,
and then touch the [Print] key of "All Custom Setting List".
13
14
Click the [OK] button in the window of step 12 to close the window.
Click the close box (
) to close the "Chooser".
This completes the configuration of the printer driver.
Installing the screen fonts
The screen fonts for Mac OS 9.0 - 9.2.2 are contained in the [Font] folder of the "Software CD-ROM"(Disc 1). Copy the
fonts that you wish to install to the [System Folder] of the startup disk.
If you experience problems that may be due to the installed screen fonts, immediately delete the installed fonts from the
system.
1-115
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
REMOVING THE SOFTWARE
To remove the printer driver or software installed using the installer, follow the steps below.
Windows
1
Click the [start] button and then click [Control Panel].
In Windows 2000, click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and click [Control Panel].
Click [Uninstall a program].
2
3
4
• In Windows XP/Server 2003, click [Add or Remove Programs].
• In Windows 2000, double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.
Select the program or driver that you wish to delete.
For more information, see the manual for the operating system or Help.
Restart your computer.
Mac OS X
1
Delete the printer that uses the machine's PPD file from the printer list.
To show the printer list, see step 11 and 12 of "MAC OS X" (page 1-107).
Delete the PPD file.
2
The PPD file has been copied to the following folder on the startup disk.
[Library] - [Printers] - [PPDs] - [Contents] - [Resources] - [en.lproj]
Delete the PPD file of the machine from this folder.
Delete the installation information.
3
The installation information file has been copied to the following folder on the startup disk.
[Library] - [Receipts]
Delete the [MX-PKX.pkg] file from this folder.
Mac OS 9.0 - 9.2.2
After deleting the icon of the printer that uses the machine's PPD file from the desktop, follow the steps below.
1
Download the software and save the extracted files in any folder.
1-116
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
2
Double-click the [MacOS] folder.
3
Double-click the [Installer] icon (
4
).
Select [Remove] in the Install menu and click the [Remove] button.
1-117
Contents
CHAPTER 2
COPIER
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the copy function.
OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
• OUTPUT MODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
COPIER
MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS
TRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
BASE SCREEN OF COPY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
COPYING SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
ORIGINALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
• STANDARD ORIGINAL PLACEMENT
ORIENTATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
SPECIAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
PAPER TRAYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
ADDING MARGINS (Margin Shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
SPECIAL MODES
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS (Erase) . . . . . 2-46
MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT
(Pamphlet Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING
COPIES
COPYING A LARGE NUMBER OF
ORIGINALS AT ONCE (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
MAKING COPIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
• USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER TO MAKE COPIES (1-sided
copies of 1-sided originals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
• USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO
MAKE COPIES (1-sided copy of a 1-sided
original). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
ADDING INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency
Inserts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
COPYING TWO ORIGINAL PAGES ONTO
ONE SHEET (2in1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ON ONE
SHEET OF PAPER (Card Shot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
• USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER TO MAKE 2-SIDED COPIES . . . . . . 2-17
• USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO
MAKE 2-SIDED COPIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
PRINTING THE DATE AND A STAMP ON
COPIES (Stamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING
STAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ADDING THE DATE TO COPIES (Date) . . . . .
• STAMPING COPIES (Stamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PRINTING PAGE NUMBERS ON COPIES
(Page Numbering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text) . . . . . . . .
• CHECKING THE STAMP LAYOUT
(Layout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND
ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
• AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF THE
EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE . . . . . . . . 2-23
• MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF THE
EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE . . . . . . . . 2-23
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM . . . . . . . . .
• AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION (Auto
Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MANUAL RATIO SELECTION (Preset
ratios/Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH
AND WIDTH SEPARATELY (XY Zoom) . . . . .
2-25
2-25
2-26
2-28
ORIGINAL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
• SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE . . . . . . . . 2-29
• STORING FREQUENTLY USED
ORIGINAL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2-1
2-60
2-61
2-64
2-66
2-68
2-71
2-75
COPIER
[Image Edit] KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• REPEATING PHOTOS ON A COPY
(Photo Repeat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image) . . . .
• COPYING IN THE CENTER OF THE
PAPER (Centering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• REVERSING BLACK AND WHITE IN A
COPY (B/W Reverse). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-77
2-78
2-80
2-81
2-83
ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN
IMAGE (Sharpness). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
CHECKING COPIES BEFORE PRINTING
(Proof Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE COPYING
(Original Count) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT
SIZES (Mixed Size Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
COPYING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan
Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
COPYING MULTIPLE BUSINESS CARDS
(8 Business Cards Layout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN (Interrupt
copy). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
CHECKING A PREVIEW IMAGE OF A COPY
(Preview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
• PREVIEW SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED
JOB SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CANCELING A JOB THAT IS WAITING IN
THE QUEUE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• GIVING PRIORITY TO A JOB IN THE
QUEUE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHECKING INFORMATION ON A COPY
JOB WAITING IN THE QUEUE . . . . . . . . . . .
2-104
2-105
2-107
2-108
2-109
STORING COPY OPERATIONS (Job
Programs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
• STORING (EDITING/DELETING) A JOB
PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
2-2
COPIER
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
COPIER
This section provides information that you should know before using the machine as a copier.
BASE SCREEN OF COPY MODE
Touch the [COPY] key in the touch panel to open the base screen of copy mode.
The base screen shows messages and keys necessary for copying, and settings that have been selected.
(7)
(1)
COPY
(8)
DOCUMENT
FILING
IMAGE SEND
Ready to scan for copy.
0
Plain
1.
2.
3.
4.
Exposure
(4)
Special Modes
(10)
2-Sided Copy
(11)
Output
(12)
8½x11
(2)
(3)
(9)
Auto
Copy Ratio
Original
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
(13)
Preview
(14)
Paper Select
100%
Auto
8½x11
Plain
(5)
(6)
(1)
(5)
Mode Select keys
(2)
Output display
When one or more output functions such as sort, group,
or staple sort have been selected, this shows the icons of
the selected functions.
☞ OUTPUT (page 2-35)
(3)
[Exposure] key
(6)
This shows the current copy exposure and original type
settings. Touch this key to change the exposure or
original type setting.
☞ CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE (page 2-23)
(4)
[Original] key
Touch to specify the original size.
If the original size displayed in this key is different from
the size of the original you placed, or if the original size is
not displayed, be sure to touch this key and specify the
correct size.
If using the automatic document feeder with the
MX-B402SC, also touch the key when setting the original
output destination. The set original output destination is
displayed in this key.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and
document filing modes.
If you wish to switch to copy mode, touch the [COPY]
key.
[Paper Select] key
Touch this key to change the paper (tray) that is used.
The tray, paper size, and paper type will appear. Trays 1
to 4 can also be selected in the paper size display to
open the same screen.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
[Copy Ratio] key
(7)
This shows the current copy ratio. Touch this key to
adjust the copy ratio.
☞ REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM (page 2-25)
Original feed display
This appears when an original is inserted in the
automatic document feeder.
2-3
Contents
COPIER
(8)
Paper size display
(13) Customized keys
This shows the size of paper loaded in each tray.
For the bypass tray, the paper type appears above the
paper size.
The selected tray is highlighted.
The approximate amount of paper in each tray is
indicated by
. Trays 1 to 4 can be selected to open
the same screen as when the [Paper Select] key is
selected.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
(9)
The keys that appear here can be changed to show
settings or functions that you prefer. The following keys
appear by factory default:
☞ Customizing displayed keys (page 2-5)
[File] key, [Quick File] key
Touch one of these keys to use the File function or Quick
File function of document filing mode. These are the
same [File] and [Quick File] keys that appear when the
[Special Modes] key is touched. For information on the
document filing function, see "6. DOCUMENT FILING".
Number of copies display
(14) [Preview] key
This shows the number of copies set.
Touch to view a preview image of a copy in the touch
panel before printing the copy.
☞ CHECKING A PREVIEW IMAGE OF A COPY
(Preview) (page 2-101)
(10) [Special Modes] key
Touch this key to select special modes such as Margin
Shift and Edge Erase.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-41)
(11) [2-Sided Copy] key
Touch this key to select the 2-sided copying function.
☞ AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING (page 2-17)
(12) [Output] key
Touch this to select an output function such as sort,
group, offset, or staple sort.
☞ OUTPUT (page 2-35)
The screen explained in this section appears when 500-sheet paper feed units and finisher are installed. The image will vary
depending on the equipment installed.
Tray during paper feeding
Do not pull out a tray while paper is being fed from the tray. This will cause a paper misfeed.
Identifying the tray that is being used to feed paper
(1) While paper is feeding, the job status display of the system bar on the touch panel screen will show the number of
the tray that is being used to feed paper.
(2) The tray being used to feed paper also appears in green in the paper size display in the base screen on the touch
panel.
Base screen
(1)
Shows the number of the tray being used to feed paper.
Special Modes
Plain
Job status display on the system bar
2-Sided Copy
8½x11
Output
1.
2.
3.
4.
Exposure
Auto
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
(2)
Paper size display
File
Shows the tray being used to feed paper in green.
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
Original
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Preview
Tray2
2-4
Contents
COPIER
Customizing displayed keys
Special mode keys and other keys can be displayed in the base screen. By assigning frequently used functions to these
keys, you can access the functions with a single touch. To change the function that is assigned to a key, use "Customize
Key Setting" in the Web pages.
When "Erase", "Margin Shift", and "Sharpness" are assigned to the customized keys
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Plain
8½x11
Output
1.
2.
3.
4.
Exposure
Auto
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
Erase
Margin Shift
Copy Ratio
Original
100%
These 3 keys can be changed
as desired.
Sharpness
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Preview
System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.
Checking what special modes are selected
The
The
key appears in the base screen when one or more special modes are selected.
key can be touched to display the selected special modes. To close the screen, touch the [OK] key.
Plain
OK
Function Review
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Margin Shift
Shift:Right
Front:1/2inch/Back:1/2inch
Erase
Edge:1/2inch
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
1
1
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
Original
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Preview
2-5
Contents
COPIER
COPYING SEQUENCE
This section explains the basic procedure for copying. Select settings in the order shown below to ensure that the copy
operation takes place smoothly.
For detailed procedures for selecting the settings, see the explanation of each setting in this chapter.
Place the original.
Place the original in the automatic document feeder tray, or on the document glass.
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
* Depending on the copy functions used, there are also cases where functions are selected before the original is placed.
Basic copy settings
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1. 8½x11
Auto
2. 5½x8½
3. 8½x14
4. 8½x11
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
Original
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Select the basic copy settings.
The main settings are as follows:
• Exposure and original type ☞CHANGING THE
EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE (page 2-23)
• Copy ratio ☞ REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
(page 2-25)
• Original size ☞ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
• Paper Settings ☞PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
Preview
2-sided copy settings
2-Sided Copy
OK
Select settings as needed for 2-sided copying and 2-sided
scanning of the original.
☞ AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING (page 2-17)
2-6
Contents
COPIER
Output settings
Select copy output settings.
The main settings are as follows:
• Sort mode ☞Sort mode (page 2-36)
• Group mode ☞Group mode (page 2-36)
• Offset mode ☞Offset function (page 2-36)
• Staple sort mode
☞Staple sort function (page 2-37)
OK
Output
Offset
Sort
Staple
Sort
Group
Special mode settings
Select special modes such as "Margin Shift" and "Erase".
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-41)
OK
Special Modes
Erase
Pamphlet Copy
Transparency
Inserts
2in1
Card Shot
Stamp
Image Edit
Sharpness
File
Quick File
Margin Shift
Job
Build
1
2
Number of copies (sets) setting
Set the number of copies (number of sets).
7
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Plain
8½ 11
Start copying.
Start scanning the original(s) and making copies.
Press the [START] key.
2-7
Contents
COPIER
• When one or more special modes are selected, the
key appears in the base screen. Touch the
key to display a
list of the selected special modes. This lets you check what special modes are selected and the settings of each mode.
☞ Checking what special modes are selected (page 2-5)
• To store a copy job using the document filing function, select copy settings and then touch the [File] key or the [Quick File]
key.
To cancel all settings, press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
).
When the [CLEAR ALL] key (
) is pressed, all settings selected to that point are cleared and you will return to the base
screen.
To stop scanning of the original and copying, press the [STOP] key (
).
When the [STOP] key (
) is pressed, a message will appear asking you if you want to cancel the job. Touch the [Yes] key
in the message screen.
2-8
Contents
COPIER
ORIGINALS
STANDARD ORIGINAL PLACEMENT ORIENTATIONS
Place the original so that the top and bottom edges are oriented as shown below. For more information on placing the
original, see "ORIGINALS" (page 1-37) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
Document feeder tray
Document glass
A
Place the original
face down in the
left center position
of the document
glass
A
MX-B402
Portrait original
When using the below functions in
copy mode, place the original so that
the top of the image is to the right.
• Staple sort
• Pamphlet copy
• 2in1
• Stamp
2-9
A
A
MX-B402SC
Top of image to
the right
Contents
COPIER
Document feeder tray
Document glass
MX-B402
Place the original
face down in the
left center position
of the document
glass
A
A
Landscape original
When using the staple sort function,
place the original so that the top of the
image is toward you.
MX-B402SC
A
Top of image
toward you
A
MX-B402
A
Top of image
toward you
MX-B402SC
A
2-10
Contents
COPIER
PAPER TRAYS
The machine is set to automatically select a tray that has the same size of paper as the size of the placed original
(automatic paper tray selection).
If the correct paper size is not selected or you wish to change the paper size, you can select the paper tray manually.
Special Modes
Touch the [Paper Select] key.
2-Sided Copy
Plain
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
Original
100%
1
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Preview
You can also touch the paper size display (A) to open the paper tray settings.
(A)
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
Original
100%
OK
Paper Select
Bypass Tray
Paper Tray
2
1. 8½x11
Auto
8½x11
Plain
(2)
(1)
Plain
Plain
3. 8½x14
Plain
4. 8½x11
Plain
Preview
Select the tray that you want to use.
(1) Touch the key of the desired tray.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen and the selected tray
will be highlighted.
8½x11
Plain
2. 5½x8½
Paper Select
If the selected tray runs out of paper during a copy job and there is another tray that has the same size and type of paper,
that tray will be automatically selected and the copy job will continue.
To return to automatic paper tray selection after selecting a tray manually, press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
).
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (Paper Tray)
Use this setting to change the tray that is selected by default.
2-11
Contents
COPIER
BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING
COPIES
This section explains the basic procedures for making copies, including selection of the copy ratio and other copy settings.
MAKING COPIES
USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO
MAKE COPIES (1-sided copies of 1-sided originals)
This section explains how to make copies (1-sided copies of 1-sided originals) using the automatic document feeder.
1
Place the originals face up in the document feeder tray with the edges aligned
evenly.
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
Special Modes
Plain
Touch the [Original] key.
2-Sided Copy
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
2
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
Original
100%
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
(1)
Preview
(2)
OK
Original
Specify the original size.
(1) Touch the appropriate original size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
8½x132 5
AB
3
Inch
8½x13
Size Input
Custom Size
None
When using the MX-B402SC, placing an AB size or non-standard size original, specify the original size as explained in
"ORIGINAL SIZES" (page 2-29).
2-12
Contents
COPIER
Check the paper to be used.
Special Modes
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) is selected.
To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
2-Sided Copy
Plain
8½x11
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
Output
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
4
Copy Ratio
Original
Paper Select
100%
Auto
8½x11
Plain
8½x11
Preview
For some original size settings, the same size of paper as the original may not be automatically selected. In this case,
manually change the paper size.
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
7
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
5
Plain
8½ 11
• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• A single copy can be made even if "0" appears for the number of copies.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) and then enter the correct number.
Press the [START] key.
6
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
2-13
Contents
COPIER
USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO MAKE COPIES
(1-sided copy of a 1-sided original)
To make a copy of a book or other thick original that cannot be scanned with the automatic document feeder, open the
automatic document feeder and place the original on the document glass. This section explains how to make a copy
(1-sided copy of a 1-sided original) using the document glass.
Open the automatic document feeder,
place the original face down on the
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.
Document glass scale
mark
Portrait original
A
Align the top edge of the
original against the side of
the document glass with
the scale.
1
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
(A5)
B5
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
Landscape original
Align the right side of the
original against the side of
the document glass with
the scale.
A
Special Modes
Plain
• The maximum original size that can be placed on the
document glass is 8-1/2" x 11" (A4).
• Align the middle of the original with the tip of the
mark.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.
• After placing the original, be sure to close the automatic
document feeder. If left open, parts outside of the original will
be copied black, causing excessive use of toner.
Touch the [Original] key.
2-Sided Copy
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
2
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
Original
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Preview
2-14
Contents
COPIER
(1)
Specify the original size.
(2)
(1) Touch the appropriate original size key.
OK
Original
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
8½x132 5
AB
3
Inch
8½x13
Custom Size
Size Input
None
When using the MX-B402SC, placing an AB size or non-standard size original, specify the original size as explained in
"ORIGINAL SIZES" (page 2-29).
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Plain
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
Check the paper to be used.
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) is selected.
To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
File
Quick File
4
Copy Ratio
Original
Paper Select
100%
Auto
8½x11
Plain
8½x11
Preview
For some original size settings, the same size of paper as the original may not be automatically selected. In this case,
manually change the paper size.
7
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
5
Plain
8½ 11
• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• A single copy can be made even if "0" appears for the number of copies.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) and then enter the correct number.
Press the [START] key.
6
7
Normally copying will start.
Depending on the copy settings (2-sided copying, etc.), copying may not begin until all originals have been scanned. In this
case, go to the next step.
Remove the original and place the next original, and then press the [START] key.
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
2-15
Contents
COPIER
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
8
Read-End
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
2-16
Contents
COPIER
AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING
USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO
MAKE 2-SIDED COPIES
Originals
Originals
Copies
Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided
originals
1
Originals
Copies
Automatic 2-sided copying of 2-sided
originals
Copies
1-sided copying of 2-sided originals
Place the originals face up in the document feeder tray with the edges aligned
evenly.
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
Special Modes
Plain
Touch the [Original] key.
2-Sided Copy
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
2
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
Original
100%
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
(1)
Preview
(2)
OK
Original
Specify the original size.
(1) Touch the appropriate original size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
8½x132 5
AB
3
Inch
8½x13
Size Input
Custom Size
None
When using the MX-B402SC, placing an AB size or non-standard size original, specify the original size as explained in
"ORIGINAL SIZES" (page 2-29).
2-17
Contents
COPIER
Special Modes
Plain
Touch the [2-Sided Copy] key.
2-Sided Copy
8½x11
Output
Exposure
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
Original
Paper Select
100%
Auto
8½x11
Plain
8½x11
(1)
Preview
(2)
OK
2-Sided Copy
Select the 2-sided copy mode.
(1) Touch the key of the desired mode.
: Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals
: Automatic 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals
: 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals
5
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Binding
Change
To make 2-sided copies of a 1-sided portrait original placed horizontally, or to invert the reverse side with respect to
the front side when copying a 2-sided original, touch the [Binding Change] key.
☞ Using the [Binding Change] key (page 2-19)
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
Check the paper to be used.
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) is selected.
To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
File
Quick File
6
Copy Ratio
Original
100%
8½x11
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Preview
For some original size settings, the same size of paper as the original may not be automatically selected. In this case,
manually change the paper size.
2-18
Contents
COPIER
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
7
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Plain
7
8½ 11
• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• If you are only making a single copy, the copy can be made with the copy number display showing "0".
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) and then enter the correct number.
Press the [START] key.
8
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
Using the [Binding Change] key
Binding Change is used
(For a tablet binding)
Originals
A
The reverse side
is upside down.
Binding Change is not used
(For a booklet binding)
A
The reverse side
is not upside
down.
A
1
2
Select this when
the pages will be
bound into a
tablet.
A
A
Select this when
the pages will be
bound into a
booklet.
3
2-19
Contents
COPIER
USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO MAKE 2-SIDED
COPIES
Originals
Copies
Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided
originals
Open the automatic document feeder,
place the original face down on the
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.
Document glass scale
mark
Portrait original
A
Align the top edge of the
original against the side of
the document glass with
the scale.
1
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
(A5)
B5
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
Landscape original
Align the right side of the
original against the side of
the document glass with
the scale.
A
Special Modes
Plain
• The maximum original size that can be placed on the
document glass is 8-1/2" x 11" (A4).
• Align the middle of the original with the tip of the
mark.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.
• After placing the original, be sure to close the automatic
document feeder. If left open, parts outside of the original will
be copied black, causing excessive use of toner.
Touch the [Original] key.
2-Sided Copy
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
2
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
Original
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Preview
2-20
Contents
COPIER
(1)
(2)
OK
Original
Specify the original size.
(1) Touch the appropriate original size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
8½x132 5
AB
3
Inch
8½x13
Custom Size
Size Input
None
When using the MX-B402SC, placing an AB size or non-standard size original, specify the original size as explained in
"ORIGINAL SIZES" (page 2-29).
Special Modes
Plain
Touch the [2-Sided Copy] key.
2-Sided Copy
8½x11
Output
1.
2.
3.
4.
Exposure
4
Auto
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
Original
100%
8½x11
(1)
2-Sided Copy
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Preview
(2)
OK
Select the 2-sided copy mode.
(1) Touch the [1-Sided to 2-Sided] key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
5
Binding
Change
The [2-Sided to 2-Sided] key and [2-Sided to 1-Sided] key cannot be used when copying from the document glass.
2-21
Contents
COPIER
Check the paper to be used.
Special Modes
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) is selected.
To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
2-Sided Copy
Plain
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
6
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
Original
Paper Select
100%
Auto
8½x11
Plain
8½x11
Preview
For some original size settings, the same size of paper as the original may not be automatically selected. In this case,
manually change the paper size.
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
7
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Plain
7
8½ 11
• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• A single copy can be made even if "0" appears for the number of copies.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) and then enter the correct number.
8
9
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
Remove the original and place the next original, and then press the [START] key.
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
Read-End
10
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (2-Sided Copy)
The default 2-sided copy mode can be changed.
2-22
Contents
COPIER
CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE
The exposure and original image type can be selected to obtain a clear copy.
AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF THE EXPOSURE AND
ORIGINAL TYPE
Automatic exposure adjustment operates by default to automatically adjust the exposure level and original type as
appropriate for the original being copied. ("Auto" is displayed.)
This function automatically adjusts the image during copying to obtain the most suitable copy.
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
Original
Paper Select
100%
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Preview
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF THE EXPOSURE AND
ORIGINAL TYPE
If you wish to select the original type or manually adjust the exposure, touch the [Exposure] key in the base screen of
copy mode and follow the steps below.
Select the original image type.
OK
Exposure
The image will be adjusted appropriately for the original type.
Select the image type that best matches your original.
Auto
Manual
1
3
Original Image Type
5
Text
Text/
Prtd.Photo
Text/Photo
Printed
Photo
Photo
Map
Light
Original
Scan
Resolution
● Original image type select keys
1
Mode
Description
Text
Use this mode for regular text documents.
Text/Prtd. Photo
This mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and
printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.
Text/Photo
This mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and
photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on.
Printed photo
This mode is best for copying printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or catalogue.
Photo
Use this mode to copy photos.
Map
This mode is best for copying the light color shading and fine text found on most maps.
Light Original
Use this mode for originals with light pencil writing.
2-23
Contents
COPIER
OK
Exposure
Touch the
Touch the
Auto
Manual
1
3
Adjust the exposure level.
key to make the copy darker.
key to make the copy lighter.
Original Image Type
5
Text
Text/
Prtd.Photo
Text/Photo
Printed
Photo
Photo
Map
Light
Original
2
Scan
Resolution
Guidelines for the exposure level when [Text] is selected:
1 to 2: Dark originals such as a newspaper
3:
Normal density originals
4 to 5: Originals written in pencil or light colored text
OK
Exposure
Touch the [OK] key.
Auto
Manual
Original Image Type
3
1
3
5
Text
Text/
Prtd.Photo
Text/Photo
Printed
Photo
Photo
Map
Light
Original
Scan
Resolution
• If [Auto] is selected but the darkness or lightness of the image does not seem quite right...
If the image seems too light or too dark when [Auto] is selected, the exposure level can be adjusted using "Copy Exposure
Adjustment" in the system settings (administrator).
• To change the resolution...
When making a full-size copy, you can press the [Scan Resolution] key to select the scanning resolution. The numbers
that allow selection of the document glass are different from the numbers that allow selection of the automatic document
feeder.
• System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (Exposure Type)
This is used to change the default original image type.
• System Settings (Administrator): Copy Exposure Adjustment
The exposure level used for automatic exposure adjustment can be adjusted.
• System Settings (Administrator): 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode for Document Feeder / Quick Scan from
Document Glass
The default resolution setting can be changed.
2-24
Contents
COPIER
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION (Auto Image)
This section explains the automatic ratio selection function (Auto Image), which automatically selects the ratio to match
the paper size.
When the paper tray is manually changed, the [Auto Image] key appears in the base screen of copy mode. Touch the
[Auto Image] key to have the reduction or enlargement ratio automatically selected based on the original size and the
selected paper size.
First place the original and select the paper tray, and then touch the [Auto Image] key.
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
Original
Paper Select
100%
8½x11
Auto Image
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Preview
The selected ratio will appear in the ratio display.
For a non-standard size original, the size must be entered in order to use Auto Image.
• To cancel automatic ratio selection...
Touch the [Auto Image] key so that it is no longer highlighted.
• To return the ratio to 100%...
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu and then touch the [100%] key.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (Copy Ratio)
This is used to change the default copy ratio.
2-25
Contents
COPIER
MANUAL RATIO SELECTION (Preset ratios/Zoom)
Touch the [Copy Ratio] key in the base screen of copy mode to select one of two preset enlargement ratios or three
preset reduction ratios (maximum 200%, minimum 50%).
In addition, the zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 50% to 200% in increments of 1%.
Set the ratio.
Touch a preset ratio key and/or the zoom keys to set the ratio.
There are two setting screens. Use the
keys to switch
between the screens.
● 1st screen
• Enlargement keys (1 ratio): 129%
• Reduction keys (2 ratios): 64% and 77%
• [100%] key
OK
Copy Ratio
8½x11
5½x8½
64%
100
8½x14
8½x11
77%
Zoom
%
129%
5½x8½
8½x11
1
2
100%
Auto Image
XY Zoom
● 2nd screen
• Enlargement keys (1 to 3 ratios)
200%, any ratio (max. of two)
• Reduction keys (1 to 3 ratios)
50%, any ratio (max. of two)
• [100%] key
(A)
1
OK
Copy Ratio
50%
100
75%
Zoom
%
200%
2
150%
2
175%
80%
100%
Auto Image
XY Zoom
• (A) keys
The keys marked (A) can be set to show any ratio using "Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios" in the system settings
(administrator).
• To quickly select a ratio, touch a reduction or enlargement key to select a ratio close to the desired ratio and then
use the zoom keys for fine adjustment.
• The zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 50% to 200% in increments of 1%.
Touch the
key to increase the ratio, or the
key to decrease the ratio. (If you continue to touch the
key, the ratio will change automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will change rapidly.)
/
• As an alternative to touching the
keys, you can also directly touch the numeric value display key and
change the value with the numeric keys.
• If the message "Image is larger than the copy paper." appears when an enlargement ratio is selected, the image
may not fit on the paper.
2-26
Contents
COPIER
2
Touch the [OK] key.
OK
Copy Ratio
8½x11
5½x8½
64%
8½x14
8½x11
77%
75
Zoom
After touching the [OK] key, make sure that a paper size
suitable for the ratio is selected.
%
129%
5½x8½
8½x11
1
2
100%
Auto Image
XY Zoom
When the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both 50% to 200%.
To return the ratio to 100%...
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu and then touch the [100%] key.
System Settings (Administrator): Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios
Two enlargement preset ratios (101% to 200%) and two reduction preset ratios (50% to 99%) can be added. An added
preset ratio can also be changed.
2-27
Contents
COPIER
ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND WIDTH
SEPARATELY (XY Zoom)
The XY Zoom feature allows the horizontal and vertical copy ratios to be changed separately.
Both the horizontal and vertical ratios can be set from 50% to 200% in increments of 1%.
Touch the [Copy Ratio] key in the base screen of copy mode and then follow the steps below.
When 50% is selected for the horizontal ratio and 70% is selected for the vertical ratio
Copy
Original
1
Touch the [XY Zoom] key.
OK
Copy Ratio
8½x11
5½x8½
64%
100
8½x14
8½x11
77%
Zoom
%
129%
5½x8½
8½x11
1
2
100%
Auto Image
XY Zoom
(2)
(1), (3)
(4)
OK
Copy Ratio
Set the horizontal and vertical ratios.
(1) Touch the [X] key.
The [X] key will be highlighted and the horizontal ratio can
be set.
Cancel
XY Zoom
50%
X
50
%
Y
70
%
Zoom
64%
129%
200%
(2) Touch one of the preset ratio keys (A) and the
zoom keys (B) to set the X (horizontal) ratio.
(A) A touched preset ratio key will not be highlighted.
(B) The zoom keys can be touched to set the ratio from
50% to 200% in increments of 1%.
77%
100%
2
(A)
(B)
(A)
(3) Touch the [Y] key and set the Y (vertical)
ratio in the same way as the [X] key.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
After touching the [OK] key, make sure that a paper size
suitable for the ratio is selected.
• To quickly select a ratio, touch a preset ratio key (A) to select a ratio close to the desired ratio and then use the
zoom keys (B) for fine adjustment.
• As an alternative to touching the
keys, you can also directly touch the numeric value display key and
change the value with the numeric keys.
When the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both 50% to 200%.
To cancel an XY zoom setting...
To cancel an XY Zoom setting, touch the [XY Zoom] key or the [Cancel] key.
2-28
Contents
COPIER
ORIGINAL SIZES
SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE
The original size is set in "Default original size setting" in the system settings (administrator), and the setting appears in
the [Original] key. This section explains the procedure for specifying the setting when the original size is different from
size shown in the [Original] key.
Touch the [Original] key and perform the following.
Specifying an inch original size
(1)
(2)
OK
Original
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
8½x132 5
(1) Touch the appropriate original size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
AB
Inch
8½x13
Custom Size
Size Input
None
Specifying an AB original size
(2)
(1)
(3)
OK
Original
(1) Touch the [AB
Inch] key.
(2) Touch the appropriate original size key.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
A5
216x330
B5
216x340
16K
AB
Inch
A4
216x343
(1)
(2)
OK
Original
Original Exit
Place
None
Custom Size
Size Input
Upper Exit
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
8½x132 5
Heavy Exit
AB
Check Size
Inch
8½x13
Card Size
Size Input
With the MX-B402SC, touch the
[Original] key to display the screen at
left.
Custom Size
None
(1) The original output destination for the
automatic document feeder can be
selected.
(2) When a card size original is set in the
automatic document feeder, the card size
can be selected.
2-29
Contents
COPIER
• System Settings (Administrator): Default original size setting
Set this if you frequently use a particular original size. The set size will appear in the [Original] key.
When this setting is configured, changing the original size can be omitted.
• System settings (Administrator): Setting of Default Original Exit Place (MX-B402SC Only)
When the automatic document feeder is used, the original's default output destination can be set to the upper exit or the
heavy exit. (Except when "Size Input" or "Card Size" is selected for the original size.)
MX-B402SC Only
• In the situations below, the original exit place is fixed to the heavy exit.
- When "Card Size" is selected
- When the original guide is set to 2 7/8" (74 mm) or lower (Except when "Check Size" is selected)
- When the automatic document feeder is scanning an original with an X (horizontal) value of 4 1/8" (105 mm) or less
• When "Card Size" is selected, you cannot copy if the original guide is set to 2 7/8" (74 mm) or higher.
Specifying a non-standard original size
OK
Original
1
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
8½x132 5
Touch the [Size Input] key.
AB
Inch
8½x13
Size Input
Custom Size
None
2-30
Contents
COPIER
(1), (2)
(3)
OK
Original
Cancel
Size Input
X
11
Y
8
OK
Enter the original size.
(1) Enter the X (horizontal) dimension of the
original.
With the [X] key highlighted, enter the X (horizontal)
dimension of the original with the
keys. When the
document glass is used, enter a number from 1" to
11-5/8" (25 mm to 297 mm).
MX-B402:
When the automatic document feeder is used, enter a
number from 3-1/2" to 14" (89 mm to 356 mm).
When a number which is from 5-3/8" (139 mm) and less is
entered in 2-Sided copy mode, an original cannot be
scanned.
If the horizontal dimension of the original is less than
3-1/2" (89 mm), use the document glass.
MX-B402SC:
When the automatic document feeder is used, enter a
number from 3-1/4" to 14" (85 mm to 356 mm).
When a number which is from 3-1/8" (84 mm) and less is
entered in 2-Sided copy mode, an original cannot be
scanned.
If the horizontal dimension of the original is less than
3-1/4" (85 mm), use the document glass.
(1~14)
inch
½
(1~8 1/2)
inch
(2) Enter the Y (vertical) dimension of the
original.
Touch the [Y] key and enter the Y (vertical) dimension of
the original with the
keys. When the document
glass is used, enter a number from 1" to 8-1/2" (25 mm to
216 mm).
MX-B402:
When the automatic document feeder is used, enter a
number from 4" to 8-1/2" (100 mm to 216 mm).
If the vertical dimension of the original is less than 4" (100
mm), use the document glass.
MX-B402SC:
When the automatic document feeder is used, enter a
number from 2" to 8-1/2" (51 mm to 216 mm).
If the vertical dimension of the original is less than 2" (51
mm), use the document glass.
2
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen.
Make sure that the entered dimensions appear in the
[Original] key.
MX-B402:
• When a number from 11-3/4" to 14" (298 mm to 356 mm) to the X (horizontal) dimension and a number from 1" to
3-7/8" (25 mm to 99 mm) to the Y (vertical) dimension are entered at the same time, an original cannot be scanned.
MX-B402SC:
• When a number from 11-3/4" to 14" (298 mm to 356 mm) to the X (horizontal) dimension and a number from 1" to
1-7/8" (25 mm to 50 mm) to the Y (vertical) dimension are entered at the same time, an original cannot be scanned.
• When the X (horizontal) value is set to 4 1/8" (105 mm) or lower and the Y (vertical) value is set to 2 7/8" (74 mm) or
lower, "Card Size" is automatically selected and the original exit place is fixed to the heavy exit.
2-31
Contents
COPIER
STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES
You can save special original sizes that you frequently use. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and
delete special original sizes.
Storing original sizes (editing/clearing)
Up to 12 special original sizes can be stored.
Touch the [Original] key in the base screen of copy mode and then follow the steps below.
Touch the [Custom Size] key.
OK
Original
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
8½x132 5
AB
1
Inch
8½x13
Size Input
Custom Size
None
Original
OK
Custom Size
OK
Store the original size.
(1) Touch the [Store/Delete] tab.
(2) Touch a key for storing a custom original
size.
X15½ Y 8½
Touch a key that does not show a size (
Store/Delete
Recall
(2)
2
).
(1)
If you wish to edit or clear a previously stored key...
Touch the key that you want to edit or clear. The following screen will appear.
A custom size has already been stored
in this location.
Cancel
Delete
Modify
• To edit the key, touch the [Modify] key and go to the next step.
• To clear the key, touch the [Delete] key. Make sure that the original size has been cleared and touch the [OK] key.
2-32
Contents
COPIER
(1), (2)
(3)
Original
Cancel
3
X
11
Y
8
OK
Enter the original size.
(1) Enter the X (horizontal) dimension of the
original.
With the [X] key highlighted, enter the X (horizontal)
dimension of the original with the
keys. A
dimension from 1" to 14" (25 mm to 356 mm) can be
entered.
(1~14)
inch
½
(1~8 1/2)
inch
(2) Enter the Y (vertical) dimension of the
original.
Touch the [Y] key and enter the Y (vertical) dimension of
the original with the
keys. A dimension from 1" to
8-1/2" (25 mm to 216 mm) can be entered.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off.
To cancel the operation...
Press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
).
2-33
Contents
COPIER
Retrieving a stored original size
To retrieve a stored original size, touch the [Original] key in the base screen of copy mode and perform the steps below.
OK
Original
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
8½x132 5
Touch the [Custom Size] key.
AB
1
Inch
8½x13
Custom Size
Size Input
(2)
2
None
(1)
(3)
Original
OK
Custom Size
OK
Retrieve the desired stored original size.
(1) Touch the [Recall] tab.
(2) Touch the key of the original size that you
wish to retrieve.
X15½ Y 8½
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Store/Delete
Recall
To cancel the operation...
Press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
).
2-34
Contents
COPIER
OUTPUT
To select output functions and the output tray, touch the [Output] key in the base screen of copy mode. Output functions
that can be selected are sort, group, offset, and staple sort. All explanations of the settings below assume that a finisher
is installed.
(5)
(6)
OK
Output
(1)
(1)
Offset
(2)
Sort
(3)
Staple
Sort
(4)
Group
[Offset] key
(3)
This is used to offset each set of output from the previous
set.
The offset function operates when the checkbox is
selected
and does not operate when the checkbox is
not selected
. (The offset checkmark is automatically
cleared when the staple sort function is selected.)
☞ Offset function (page 2-36)
(2)
[Sort] key
This is used to sort output into sets, staple each set, and
deliver the sets to the tray. (Note that the sets will not be
offset in the output tray.)
☞ Staple sort function (page 2-37)
(4)
[Group] key
This is used to group copies by page.
☞ Group mode (page 2-36)
(5)
This is used to sort (collate) output into sets.
☞ Sort mode (page 2-36)
[Staple Sort] key
Output display
An icon will appear to indicate the output mode.
(6)
[OK] key
Touch this key to close the output screen and return to
the base screen.
The above screen shows the keys that appear when a finisher is installed. The keys that appear will vary depending on what
peripheral devices are installed.
In addition, it may not be possible to select some keys depending what peripheral devices are installed. If different from the
above screen, refer to the screen below.
Example
The screen when a finisher is not installed.
OK
Output
Sort
Group
2-35
Contents
COPIER
OUTPUT MODES
This section explains the output modes.
Sort mode
Group mode
This is used to sort (collate) output into sets.
Example: Sorting the output into 5 sets
This function groups copies by page.
Example: Groups of 5 copies of each page
Originals
Output
Originals
Output
Set the number of copies (5).
Set the number of copies (5).
Touch the [Output] key.
Output
Touch the [Output] key.
Output
Group
Sort
Touch the [Sort] key.
Touch the [Group] key.
Press the [START] key.
Press the [START] key.
The group function is automatically selected when an
original is placed on the document glass.
• The sort function is automatically selected when
originals are placed in the automatic document feeder.
• When the Quick File Folder for document filing is
full, copying of a large number of originals using the
sort function will be impeded. Delete unneeded files
from the Quick File Folder.
Offset function
This function offsets each set of copies from the previous set in the output tray, making it easy to separate sets of copies.
Offset function "ON"
Offset function "OFF"
In the following cases, the offset function cannot be selected:
• When 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5) size paper is selected.
• When the staple sort function is selected.
2-36
Contents
COPIER
Staple sort function
The staple sort function sorts output into sets, staples each set, and delivers the sets to the tray.
The relations between the stapling positions, paper orientation, permitted paper sizes for stapling, and number of sheets
that can be stapled are shown below.
For original placement orientations, see "Original placement orientation" (page 2-37).
Staple sort
Stapling positions
Paper
Applicable paper sizes
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 7-1/4" x 10-1/2", A4, B5,
16K
Number of sheets that can be stapled
Max. 30 sheets
Original placement orientation
When using the staple sort function, the original must be placed as shown below to enable stapling in the desired
position on the paper.
Document feeder tray
MX-B402SC
A
A
A
2-37
A
abc
A
A
A
MX-B402
A
MX-B402SC
A
MX-B402
Document glass
A
Contents
COPIER
MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY
In addition to plain paper, the bypass tray allows you to make copies on transparency film, envelopes, and other special
media.
For detailed information on paper that can be loaded in the bypass tray, see "IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER"
(page 1-27) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE". For precautions when loading paper in the bypass tray, see
"LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 1-33) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
After placing the original, specify the original size.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
When placing the originals on the document glass...
After placing the original, be sure to close the automatic document feeder. If left open, parts outside of the original will be
copied black, causing excessive use of toner.
Place paper in the bypass tray.
Insert the paper with print side face down.
2
When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11" or A4, be sure to
pull out the bypass tray extension. Pull the bypass tray
extension all the way out. If the bypass tray extension is not
pulled all the way out, the size of the loaded paper will not be
correctly displayed.
Special Modes
Touch the [Paper Select] key.
2-Sided Copy
Plain
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1. 8½x11
Auto
2. 5½x8½
3. 8½x14
4. 8½x11
3
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
Original
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Preview
2-38
Contents
COPIER
Bypass Tray
Paper Tray
4
Check the paper type setting for the
bypass tray. If you need to change the
setting, touch the paper type key.
OK
Paper Select
1. 8½x11
Plain
2. 5½x8½
Plain
3. 8½x14
Plain
4. 8½x11
Plain
8½x11
If you do not need to change the paper size and type that
appear under "Bypass Tray", go to step 7.
Plain
Paper Select
Cancel
Bypass Tray Type/Size Setting
Select the paper type.
5
Select the paper type that you will use.
Pre-Printed
Recycled
Letter Head
Pre-Punched
Color
Thin Paper
Labels
Heavy Paper
Transparency
Envelope
Plain
Select the type of paper used in the
bypass tray.
1
2
Heavy Paper : 28 - 56 lbs. (106 - 209 g/m2)
(1)
(2)
(1) Select the paper size.
Paper Select
[Auto-Inch] key
When the paper placed in the bypass tray is an inch size
(8-1/2" x 11", etc.), the paper size will be detected
automatically and an appropriate size set.
[Auto-AB] key
When the paper inserted in the bypass tray is an AB size
(A4, etc.), the paper size will be detected automatically
and an appropriate size set.
[Custom Size] key
Touch this key if you wish to enter numeric values for the
size of the loaded paper.
☞ Enter the paper size of the bypass tray (page 2-40)
[Manual] key
This key can be touched to display the [16K] key. Touch
one of these keys if you loaded the corresponding size of
paper.
OK
Bypass Tray Type/Size Setting
Type
Recycled
Set the paper size.
Size
Auto-Inch
Auto-AB
Custom Size
8½x14
8½x11,7¼x10½,5½x8½
A4,A5,B5
216x330(8½x13)
X14
Y8½
Manual
6
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
When [Envelope] is selected, specify the size of the envelope. When finished, touch the [OK] key.
2-39
Contents
COPIER
(1) Touch the paper size key of the bypass tray.
OK
Paper Select
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Bypass Tray
Paper Tray
7
Select the bypass tray.
(2)
(1)
1. 8½x11
Plain
2. 5½x8½
Plain
3. 8½x14
Plain
4. 8½x11
Plain
8½x11
Plain
Press the [START] key.
8
Scanning begins.
• If the originals were placed in the document feeder tray, the originals are copied.
• If you placed the originals on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When using sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
press the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
Enter the paper size of the bypass tray
When the [Custom Size] key is touched, the paper size entry screen appears.
Bypass Tray Type/Size Setting
OK
Size Input
OK
X14
Y8½
X14
Y8½
X14
Y8½
X
14
Y
8
(5 1/2~14)
inch
½
(5 1/2~8 1/2)
inch
Touch the [X] key and enter the horizontal dimension of
the paper with the
keys, and then touch the [Y]
key and enter the vertical dimension. When finished,
touch the [OK] key.
AB
Inch
Stored custom paper sizes appear in the keys on the left side of the screen. Custom paper sizes are stored in the system
settings. For details, see "Paper Tray Settings" (page 7-14) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS". If the key for the size that you wish
to enter appears, touch that key.
2-40
Contents
COPIER
SPECIAL MODES
This section explains Margin Shift, Erase, and other special modes.
SPECIAL MODES
When the [Special Modes] key is pressed in the base screen, the special modes menu screen appears. The special
modes menu consists of two screens. Touch the
keys to move between the screens. After selecting special
mode settings, touch the [OK] key in the special modes menu screen to complete the settings and return to the base
screen of copy mode.
Special modes menu (1st screen)
Plain
2-Sided Copy
(1)
Margin Shift
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
(4)
Original
(7)
[Margin Shift] key
(2)
[Erase] key
Auto
8½x11
Plain
(7)
☞ ADDING MARGINS (Margin Shift) (page 2-44)
☞ ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS (Erase) (page
(8)
Pamphlet Copy
(5)Transparency (6)
(8)
Stamp
(11)
(9)
1
2
2in1
Inserts
Image Edit
(12)
File
Quick File
☞ MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT
[Job Build] key
☞ COPYING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS AT
[Transparency Inserts] key
☞ ADDING INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON
[Card Shot] key
☞ COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ON ONE
[Stamp] key
☞ PRINTING THE DATE AND A STAMP ON COPIES
(Stamp) (page 2-60)
[Pamphlet Copy] key
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency Inserts)
(page 2-53)
(6)
(3)
SHEET OF PAPER (Card Shot) (page 2-57)
(9)
[Image Edit] key
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-77)
(10) [Sharpness] key
☞ ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE
ONCE (Job Build) (page 2-51)
(5)
Erase
Preview
(Pamphlet Copy) (page 2-48)
(4)
(2)
Sharpness
2-46)
(3)
Card Shot
(10)
Paper Select
100%
(1)
Job
Build
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
OK
Special Modes
Special Modes
(Sharpness) (page 2-85)
(11) [File] key
This saves a job in a folder of the document filing
function.
(12) [Quick File] key
[2in1] key
This saves a job in the Quick File folder of the document
filing function.
☞ COPYING TWO ORIGINAL PAGES ONTO ONE
SHEET (2in1) (page 2-55)
2-41
Contents
COPIER
Special modes menu (2nd screen)
OK
Special Modes
(2)
(1)
Proof Copy
(4)
(1)
Slow Scan
Mode
Original
Count
(3)
Mixed Size
Original
(5) 8 Business
2
2
Cards Layout
[Proof Copy] key
☞ CHECKING COPIES BEFORE PRINTING (Proof
(4)
Copy) (page 2-87)
(2)
[Original Count] key
☞ CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
☞ COPYING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode)
(page 2-94)
(5)
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE COPYING (Original
Count) (page 2-90)
(3)
[Slow Scan Mode] key
[8 Business Cards Layout] key*
☞ COPYING MULTIPLE BUSINESS CARDS
(8 Business Cards Layout) (page 2-96)
[Mixed Size Original] key
☞ COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES
(Mixed Size Original) (page 2-91)
* To use this function on MX-B402, the business card feeder must be attached to the automatic document feeder and "Business Card
Scan Option" must be enabled in the system settings (administrator). For the attachment procedure, see "BUSINESS CARD
FEEDER" in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE" (page 1-47).
Special modes can generally be combined with other special modes, however, there are some combinations that are not
possible. In this case, a message indicating that the combination is not possible will be displayed.
2-42
Contents
COPIER
[OK] key and [Cancel] key
In some cases two [OK] keys and one [Cancel] key will appear in the special mode screens. The keys are used as
follows:
(A)
(B)
(C)
OK
Special Modes
Cancel
Margin Shift
OK
Down
Right
Left
Side 2
Side 1
1/2
(0~1)
inch
1/2
(0~1)
inch
Up
(A) Enter the selected special mode settings and return to the base screen of copy mode.
(B) Enter the selected special mode settings and return to the special modes menu screen. Touch this key when you
wish to continue selecting other special mode settings.
(C) During selection of special mode settings, this key returns you to the special modes menu screen without saving the
settings. When settings have been completed, this cancels the settings and returns you to the special modes menu
screen.
2-43
Contents
COPIER
ADDING MARGINS (Margin Shift)
This function is used to shift the copy image right, left, up or down to adjust the margin.
This is convenient when you wish to hole punch the copies.
Shifting the image to the right so the copies can be bound at the left edge with a string
Not using margin shift
Using margin shift
1
1
1
1
The punch holes cut off
part of the image
The image is moved to
allow space for the holes
so the image is not cut off.
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
After placing the original, specify the original size.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
Select the special modes.
2
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Margin Shift] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Touch the margin shift position.
OK
Special Modes
Cancel
Margin Shift
Select one of the 4 positions.
OK
Down
3
Right
Left
1/2
(2) Set the amount of the margin shift with
.
Side 2
Side 1
(0~1)
inch
Set the margin shift.
1/2
0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm) can be entered.
(0~1)
inch
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Up
2-44
Contents
COPIER
Press the [START] key.
4
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
Rotation copy cannot be used in combination with margin shift.
To cancel the margin shift setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Margin Shift Setting
The default margin shift setting can be set from 0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm). The factory default setting is 1/2" (10 mm).
2-45
Contents
COPIER
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS (Erase)
The erase function is used to erase shadows around the edges of copies that occur when copying thick originals or
books.
When a thick book is copied
Not using the erase
function
Shadows appear here
Shadows appear on the
copy.
Using the erase
function
Shadows do not appear on
the copy.
Erase modes
Edge Erase
Side Erase
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
After placing the original, specify the original size.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
Select the special modes.
2
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Erase] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
2-46
Contents
COPIER
(1)
(2)
Select the erase settings.
(3)
(1) Touch the desired erase mode.
OK
Special Modes
Cancel
Erase
Edge
Erase
Select one of the 2 positions.
Touch the [Side Erase] key to open the following screen.
OK
Erase
Edge
1/2
Side Erase
(0~1)
inch
Erase Position
for Original Side 2
Up
Side Erase
OK
Cancel
Left
Right
Same Side as
Side 1
Down
Different Side
from Side 1
Touch the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase
and make sure that a checkmark appears.
When performing 1-sided to 2-sided copying or 2-sided to
2-sided copying, set the erase edge on the reverse side.
• If you touch the [Same Side as Side 1] key, the edge in
the same position as on the front side will be erased.
• If you touch the [Different Side from Side 1], the edge in
the position opposite to the erased edge on the front
side will be erased.
When you have completed the erase edge settings, touch
the [OK] key.
3
(2) Set the erasure width with
.
0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm) can be entered.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Press the [START] key.
4
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
If a ratio setting is used in combination with an erase setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio.
For example, if the erase width setting is 1" (20 mm) and the image is reduced to 50%, the erase width will be 1/2" (10 mm).
To cancel the erase setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Erase Width Adjustment
The default erase width can be set from 0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm). The factory default setting is 1/2" (10 mm).
2-47
Contents
COPIER
MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT
(Pamphlet Copy)
This function copies 2 original pages onto the front side and 2 original pages onto the reverse side of each sheet of
paper so that the copies can be folded at the centerline to form a pamphlet.
This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
Pamphlet copy using 8 original pages
In pamphlet form
Originals
5
4
3
4
2nd page
3rd page
4th page
5
6
7
5th page
6th page
7th page
2
3
2
1st page
7
5
7
8th page
Binding side
Left binding
5
7
7
4
2
3
5
2
3
5
5
4
Right binding
7
7
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
When using this function with a portrait original on the document glass, place the original so that the top of the image is to the
right.
A
Top of image to
the right
1
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
After placing the original, specify the original size.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
If the originals are 2-sided, place them in the document feeder tray.
2-48
Contents
COPIER
Select the special modes.
2
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Pamphlet Copy] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
Cancel
Pamphlet Copy
3
Select pamphlet copy settings.
OK
Special Modes
Original
1-Sided
2-Sided
Left
Binding
(1)
(1) If the original is 1-sided, touch the [1-Sided]
key. If the original is 2-sided, touch the
[2-Sided] key.
OK
(2) Select the binding edge ([Left Binding] or
[Right Binding]).
Right
Binding
(2)
Touch the [OK] key.
OK
Special Modes
Cancel
Pamphlet Copy
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
OK
4
Original
1-Sided
2-Sided
Left
Binding
Right
Binding
Press the [START] key.
5
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
and then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
2-49
Contents
COPIER
• When the pamphlet copy function is selected, copying in group mode and staple sort mode is not possible.
• When the pamphlet copy function is selected, 2-sided copying mode is automatically selected. When settings are selected
that prevent 2-sided copying, the pamphlet copy function cannot be used.
• Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page. The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the
machine. Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically produced at the
end if the number of original pages is not a multiple of four.
• To make landscape originals into a pamphlet with a tablet binding ...
Place the originals in the indicated orientation and select [Right Binding] in (2) of step 3.
MX-B402
abc
Result
Originals
abc
def
MX-B402SC
ghi
cba
def
jkl
abc
Document
feeder tray
ghi
Document glass
To cancel pamphlet copy...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
2-50
Contents
COPIER
COPYING A LARGE NUMBER OF
ORIGINALS AT ONCE (Job Build)
When copying a very large number of originals, this function allows you to divide the originals into sets and feed each
set through the automatic document feeder one set at a time.
Use this function when you wish to copy all of the originals as a single job but the number of originals exceeds the
maximum number that can be inserted.
This function is convenient when you wish to sort copies of a large number of originals into multiple sets. Because all
originals are copied as a single job, you are saved the trouble of sorting the copies that would be required if the originals
were divided into separate copy jobs.
When scanning originals in sets, divide the sheets so that no set has more than the number of paper that can be loaded,
and then scan from the set with the first page. The settings that you select for the first set can be used for all remaining
sets.
Sorting the copies of a large number of originals into 2 sets
Originals are
scanned in
separate sets
Originals
1
1
1
1
51
Insert the originals face up in the document feeder tray.
1
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
After placing the original, specify the original size.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
(2)
(3)
OK
Special Modes
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-41)
Margin Shift
2
Select the special modes.
Job
Build
Erase
Pamphlet Copy
Transparency
Inserts
2in1
Card Shot
Stamp
Image Edit
Sharpness
File
Quick File
1
2
(2) Touch the [Job Build] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Press the [START] key to scan the first set of originals.
Scanning begins.
3
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
2-51
Contents
COPIER
Insert the next set of originals and press the [START] key.
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
4
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
). All scanned data will be cleared.
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
5
Read-End
To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
If the Quick File Folder of document filing mode is full, copying in job build mode will be impeded. Delete unneeded files from
the Quick File Folder.
To cancel job build mode....
Touch the [Job Build] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.
2-52
Contents
COPIER
ADDING INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM
(Transparency Inserts)
When copying on transparency film, the sheets may stick together due to static electricity. The transparency inserts
function can be used to automatically insert a sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency film, making the
sheets easy to handle.
It is also possible to copy on the inserts.
B
C
A
Inserts
Place the transparency film in the
bypass tray.
• Transparency film can only be placed in the bypass tray.
• Place the transparency film face down on the bypass tray.
When placing transparency film, place so that the rounded
corner of the film is to the front and left.
• After loading the transparency film, configure the bypass tray
settings as explained in "MAKING COPIES USING THE
BYPASS TRAY" (page 2-38).
1
Place the original.
2
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
After placing the original, specify the original size.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
Select the special modes.
3
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Transparency Inserts] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
2-53
Contents
COPIER
(1)
Cancel
Transparency Inserts
4
(1) Select whether or not the insert paper will
be copied on ([Yes] or [No]).
OK
Special Modes
Paper Tray
Select insert settings.
(2)
OK
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Print on Insert Sheets
Yes
No
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Explanation of (A)
When transparency inserts is selected, paper suitable for
the inserts is automatically selected. The automatically
selected paper tray, paper size, and paper type are
indicated here.
Tray1
8½x11
Plain
(A)
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
5
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
• The number of copies cannot be selected in this mode.
• When performing 2-sided copying, only "2-sided to 1-sided" mode can be used.
To cancel the transparency inserts setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
2-54
Contents
COPIER
COPYING TWO ORIGINAL PAGES ONTO
ONE SHEET (2in1)
Two original pages can be copied onto one sheet of paper. This function is convenient when you wish to present
multiple pages in a compact format, or show a view of all pages in a document.
By copying two originals onto one sheet, the amount of paper used can be cut in half.
A
A B
B
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
When using this function with a portrait original on the document glass, place the original so that the top of the image is to the
right.
A
1
Top of image to
the right
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
After placing the original, specify the original size.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
Select the special modes.
2
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [2in1] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
2-55
Contents
COPIER
(1)
(2)
(3)
OK
Special Modes
Cancel
2in1
Layout
Select the layout, and the border.
(1) Select the layout.
Select the order in which the originals will be arranged on
the copy.
OK
Border
Layout
3
The arrows in the above diagram indicate how the images
are arranged.
(2) Select the border.
Solid lines, broken lines, or no lines can be selected.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Press the [START] key.
4
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
and then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
When using the 2in1 function, the appropriate copy ratio will be automatically set based on the original size, paper size, and
the number of originals to be copied onto one sheet. The minimum possible reduction ratio is 50%. The original size, paper
size, and selected number of original pages may require that the ratio be less than 50%. As copying will take place at 50% in
this case, part of the original images may be cut off.
To cancel a 2in1 setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
2-56
Contents
COPIER
COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ON ONE
SHEET OF PAPER (Card Shot)
When copying a card, this function allows you to copy the front and reverse sides together onto a single sheet of paper.
This function is convenient for making copies for identification purposes and helps save paper.
Copies
Originals
Front
Back
Example of an 8-1/2" x 11"
(A4) size portrait copy
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
1
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
Example of an 8-1/2" x 11"
(A4) size landscape copy
Select the paper to be used for card
shot.
Select the paper as explained in "PAPER TRAYS" (page 2-11).
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
Original
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Preview
2-57
Contents
COPIER
Place the original.
Originals
MX-B402:
Place the original face down on the document glass.
Front page
Results
A
A
B
Front page
A
2
MX-B402SC:
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or
face down on the document glass.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC
DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
• Set the original on the document glass ➞ Set at the
relative position in the right table.
Place the original as shown below when using the
document feeder tray.
Back page
B
A
B
B
Back page
A
Select the special modes.
3
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Card Shot] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
(1)
(2)
OK
Special Modes
Cancel
Card Shot
X
3
3
8
(1~8 1/2)
inch
Y
2
1
8
(1~8 1/2)
inch
Select card shot settings.
(1) Enter the original size.
With the [X] key highlighted, enter the X (horizontal)
dimension of the original with the
keys.
Touch the [Y] key and enter the Y (vertical) dimension of
the original with the
keys.
(A) To enlarge or reduce the images to fit the paper
based on the entered original size, touch the [Fit to
Page] key.
(B) The [Size Reset] key can be pressed to return the
horizontal and vertical dimensions to the values set in
"Card Shot Settings" in the system settings
(administrator).
OK
Fit to
Page
(A)
Size Reset
(B)
4
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode. Make
sure that the entered dimensions appear in the [Original]
key.
2-58
Contents
COPIER
Press the [START] key.
5
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
When placing the original on the document glass, follow the procedure
below.
Turn the card over and press the [START] key to scan the reverse side of the
card.
6
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
7
Copying will begin.
Read-End
To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
• Copying is only possible on standard size paper.
• XY Zoom cannot be used when using this function.
• The image cannot be rotated when using this function.
To cancel card shot...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
System Settings (Administrator): Card Shot Settings
This is used to set the values to which the size returns when the [Size Reset] key is pressed. 1" to 8-1/2" (25 mm to 210 mm)
can be entered for both the horizontal and vertical dimensions.
The factory default settings are 3-3/8" (86 mm) for X (the width) and 2-1/8" (54 mm) for Y (the height).
2-59
Contents
COPIER
PRINTING THE DATE AND A STAMP ON
COPIES (Stamp)
Use this function to print the date, a stamp, the page number, and text on copies.
Six printing positions are available: top left, top center, top right, bottom left, bottom center, and bottom right.
The printing positions are separated into areas that are used for the date, page number and text (A below), and areas
that are used for a stamp (B below).
Top center
Top right
Top left
A
Bottom left
B
Bottom center
Stamp
Print area
Maximum number
of positions
Date
A
1 position only
Stamp
B
6 positions
Page
Numbering
A
1 position only
Text
A
6 positions
Bottom right
• If the selected stamp content of one position overlaps the stamp content of another position, priority will be given in the
following order: right side, left side, center. Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed.
• Text will be printed at the preset size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size setting.
• Text will be printed at the preset exposure regardless of the exposure setting.
• Depending on the size of the paper, some printed content may be cut off or shifted out of position.
When used in combination with other special modes
When Stamp is used in combination with the following special modes, the special modes are reflected in the stamp
content.
Special Modes
Printing
Margin Shift
Together with the image, the stamp content is shifted the amount of the margin width.
Centering
Unlike a copy image that moves, the image will be printed in the position set in the stamp.
Card Shot
The stamp is printed on each copy sheet.
2in1
The print content is printed on each original page.
Pamphlet Copy
The stamp is printed on each page of the resulting pamphlet.
2-60
Contents
COPIER
GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP
To select stamp settings, follow the steps below.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
When using this function with a portrait original on the document glass, place the original so that the top of the image is to the
right.
A
1
Top of image to
the right
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
After placing the original, specify the original size.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
Select the special modes.
2
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Stamp] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
2-61
Contents
COPIER
Select the print position.
OK
Special Modes
Cancel
Stamp
Date
Stamp
Page
Numbering
Text
OK
3
6
2
5
1
4
1
2
Select from 6 positions: top left, top center, top right, bottom
left, bottom center, bottom right.
You can also skip this step and go directly to the next step. In
this case, the stamp items will be printed in the following
positions:
Date: Top right
Stamp: Top left
Page Numbering: Bottom center Text: Top left
Layout
Print positions
The keys that show the print positions will appear as follows
depending on the state of the settings.
1
Not selected, stamp setting has not
been selected.
1
Selected during selection of the stamp
setting.
1
Not available, stamp setting has already
been selected.
3
• "Date" and "Page Numbering" cannot be selected in multiple positions. If the [Date] key or [Page Numbering] key is
touched when "Date" or "Page Numbering" has already been selected for a position, a message will appear asking
you if you wish to move that item to the selected position. To move the item, touch the [Yes] key. Otherwise, press
the [No] key.
• If you attempt to set "Date", "Text", or "Page Numbering" in a position where one of these items is already set, a
message will appear. To change the previously selected item to the new item, touch the [Yes] key. To keep the
previous item, touch the [No] key.
Cancel
Stamp
4
Select Stamp.
OK
Special Modes
Date
Stamp
Page
Numbering
Text
OK
3
6
2
5
1
4
1
2
Layout
Cancel
Stamp
5
When you have finished selecting stamp
settings, touch the
key.
OK
Special Modes
Date
Stamp
Page
Numbering
Text
OK
3
6
2
5
1
4
For detailed information on each of the stamp items, see the
following sections:
Date:
ADDING THE DATE TO COPIES (Date)
(page 2-64)
Stamp:
STAMPING COPIES (Stamp) (page 2-66)
Page numbering: PRINTING PAGE NUMBERS ON COPIES
(Page Numbering) (page 2-68)
Text:
PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text) (page
2-71)
1
2
Layout
2-62
Contents
COPIER
Select settings for the original.
(2)
Stamp
Cancel
Original Orientation
(1) Touch the [Original Orientation] key and
specify the orientation of the placed
original.
OK
Special Modes
2-Sided Original Type
OK
2
If 2-sided originals have been placed, touch the
key and specify the binding position (booklet binding or
tablet binding) of the originals.
2
6
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Layout
(1)
The [Original Orientation] key icon indicates the orientation
of an original that has been placed in the automatic
document feeder.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
To edit a stamp position or delete a stamp item, touch the
[Layout] key.
☞ CHECKING THE STAMP LAYOUT (Layout) (page
2-75)
Press the [START] key.
7
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you have
selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then touch the
[Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
To cancel Stamp...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
2-63
Contents
COPIER
ADDING THE DATE TO COPIES (Date)
The date can be printed on copies. The position of the date, format, and page (first page only or all pages) can be
selected.
Example: Printing APRIL 4, 2010 in the top right corner of the paper.
APR/04/2010
1
Touch the [Date] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-61).
Set the date format.
Stamp
Cancel
Date
First Page
YYYY/MM/DD
APR/04/2010
MM/DD/YYYY
2
OK
Date Change
DD/MM/YYYY
All Pages
(1) Touch the key that shows the desired date
format.
(2) If you selected [YYYY/MM/DD],
[MM/DD/YYYY], or [DD/MM/YYYY], touch the
[/], [.], [-], or [ ] key to select the separator.
MM DD, YYYY
(1)
(2)
Stamp
Cancel
Date
First Page
YYYY/MM/DD
MM/DD/YYYY
Set the date that you wish to use and touch the [OK] key.
APR/04/2010
Date Change
DD/MM/YYYY
OK
Check the displayed date. If you need to
change the date, touch the [Date
Change] key.
Stamp
All Pages
OK
Date Change
MM DD, YYYY
3
Year
Month
Day
2010
04
04
As an alternative to touching the
keys, you can also
directly touch the numeric value display key and change the
value with the numeric keys.
• If you select a date that does not exist (such as Feb. 30), the [OK] key will be grayed out to prevent entry.
• Changing the date here will not change the date that is set in the machine using "Clock" in the system settings.
2-64
Contents
COPIER
Stamp
Cancel
Date
First Page
YYYY/MM/DD
4
MM/DD/YYYY
APR/04/2010
Date Change
DD/MM/YYYY
OK
All Pages
Select the pages that the date will be
printed on and touch the [OK] key.
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-61) to complete
the copy procedure.
MM DD, YYYY
To cancel the date print setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
2-65
Contents
COPIER
STAMPING COPIES (Stamp)
Text such as "CONFIDENTIAL" can be printed in white on a dark background as a "stamp" on copies.
The position, size, density, and pages (first page only or all pages) can be selected for a stamp.
Printing "CONFIDENTIAL" in the top left corner of a copy
CONFIDENTIAL
The following 12 selections are available for the stamp text.
CONFIDENTIAL
PRIORITY
PRELIMINARY
FINAL
FOR YOUR INFO.
DO NOT COPY
IMPORTANT
COPY
URGENT
DRAFT
TOP SECRET
PLEASE REPLY
Three levels can be selected for the density of the stamp background.
Two stamp sizes can be selected.
1
Touch the [Stamp] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-61).
Stamp
Cancel
Stamp
2
CONFIDENTIAL
PRIORITY
FOR YOUR INFO.
DO NOT COPY
URGENT
DRAFT
PRELIMINARY
FINAL
IMPORTANT
COPY
Larger
TOP SECRET
PLEASE REPLY
Smaller
OK
Touch the key of the stamp that you
wish to use.
First Page
Exposure
1
2
Size
3
All Pages
2-66
Contents
COPIER
Stamp
OK
Cancel
Stamp
CONFIDENTIAL
PRIORITY
FOR YOUR INFO.
DO NOT COPY
URGENT
DRAFT
PRELIMINARY
FINAL
IMPORTANT
COPY
Larger
TOP SECRET
PLEASE REPLY
Smaller
First Page
Exposure
1
2
3
All Pages
Size
Touch the [Exposure] key and set the
density.
If you wish to darken the image, touch the
key. If you
wish to lighten the image, touch the
key.
When you have finished selecting the settings, touch the [OK]
key.
Stamp
3
OK
Exposure
Exposure
1
Stamp
CONFIDENTIAL
PRIORITY
FOR YOUR INFO.
DO NOT COPY
URGENT
DRAFT
PRELIMINARY
FINAL
4
OK
Cancel
Stamp
Touch the [Larger Smaller] key to
select the size of the stamp.
First Page
2
3
All Pages
Size
IMPORTANT
COPY
Larger
TOP SECRET
PLEASE REPLY
Smaller
Stamp
OK
Cancel
Stamp
5
3
Exposure
1
CONFIDENTIAL
2
PRIORITY
First Page
Exposure
FOR YOUR INFO.
DO NOT COPY
URGENT
DRAFT
PRELIMINARY
FINAL
IMPORTANT
COPY
Larger
TOP SECRET
PLEASE REPLY
Smaller
1
2
Size
3
All Pages
Select the pages that the stamp will be
printed on and touch the [OK] key.
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-61) to complete
the copy procedure.
The stamp text cannot be edited.
To cancel a stamp setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
2-67
Contents
COPIER
PRINTING PAGE NUMBERS ON COPIES
(Page Numbering)
Page numbers can be printed on copies.
The position, format, and page number can be selected for page numbering.
Printing the page number at the bottom center of the paper.
1
2
3
1
Touch the [Page Numbering] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-61).
Select a format for the page number.
Stamp
Cancel
Page Numbering
Page Numbering Format
Total Page
(1),(2),(3)..
Auto
-1-,-2-,-3-..
P.1,P.2,P.3..
Manual
<1>,<2>,<3>..
1/5,2/5,3/5..
1,2,3..
OK
1
Page
Page Number
If the [1/5, 2/5, 3/5] key is selected,
"Page number / total pages" will be printed. "Auto" is initially
selected for the total pages, which means that the number of
scanned original pages is automatically set as the total pages.
If you need to set the total pages manually, such as when a
large number of originals are divided into sets for scanning,
touch the [Manual] key to display the total pages entry screen.
Stamp
Cancel
Page Numbering
Page Numbering Format
2
Total Page
(1),(2),(3)..
Auto
-1-,-2-,-3-..
P.1,P.2,P.3..
Manual
<1>,<2>,<3>..
1/5,2/5,3/5..
1
1,2,3..
OK
Page
Page Number
Enter the total pages (1 to 999) with the numeric keys and
touch the [OK] key.
The [CLEAR] key (
) can be pressed to return the setting of
the selected item to the default value. If you make a mistake,
press the [CLEAR] key (
) and then enter the correct
number.
• When 2-sided copying is performed, the total pages is the total number of sides of the paper. If the final page is
blank, it is not counted.
• When used in combination with "2in1", or "Card Shot", the number of sides of the paper copied on is the total pages.
• When used in combination with "Pamphlet Copy", the total number of pages in the resulting pamphlet or booklet is
the total pages.
2-68
Contents
COPIER
Stamp
Cancel
Page Numbering
1,2,3..
If you do not need to configure page number settings, go to
step 5.
Total Page
Page Numbering Format
3
OK
Auto
(1),(2),(3)..
-1-,-2-,-3-..
P.1,P.2,P.3..
<1>,<2>,<3>..
1/5,2/5,3/5..
To configure page number settings,
touch the [Page Number] key.
Manual
1
Page
Page Number
Select page number settings.
Stamp
OK
Page Number
Auto
Manual
First Number
(2) Set the first number, the last number, and
the "Printing Starts from Page" number.
Last Number
1
(1) Touch the [Manual] key.
Auto
Touch each key and enter a number with the numeric
keys (1 to 999).
The [CLEAR] key (
) can be pressed to return the
setting of the selected item to the default value. If you
make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
) and then
enter the correct number.
Printing Starts from Page
1
(1)
4
(2)
• A "Last Number" smaller than the "First Number" cannot be set.
• The "Last Number" is initially set to "Auto", which means that page numbers are automatically printed through the
last page based on the "First Number" and "Printing Start from Page" settings.
• If the "Last Number" is set to a number smaller than the "Total Pages", page numbers are not printed on pages after
the page set as the "Last Number".
• "Printing Starts from Page" is used to set the page number from which you want to begin printing page numbers.
For example, if "3" is set and 1-sided copying is being performed, page numbers will be printed beginning from the
3rd copy sheet (the 3rd original page). If 2-sided copying is being performed, page numbers will be printed
beginning from the front side of the 2nd copy sheet (the 3rd original page).
Touch the [OK] key.
Stamp
OK
Page Number
Auto
5
Manual
First Number
1
Last Number
Auto
Printing Starts from Page
1
2-69
Contents
COPIER
Touch the [OK] key.
Stamp
Cancel
Page Numbering
Total Page
Page Numbering Format
6
(1),(2),(3)..
Auto
-1-,-2-,-3-..
P.1,P.2,P.3..
Manual
<1>,<2>,<3>..
1/5,2/5,3/5..
1,2,3..
OK
1
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-61) to complete
the copy procedure.
Page Number
Page
• When Page Numbering is selected, copying in group mode is not possible. The mode automatically changes to sort mode.
• When the page number printing position is set to the right side or left side and pamphlet copy is used, the print position is
changed so that the page numbers always appear on the outer side of each opened page (the left and right sides of the
opened pages). If a stamp is set in the area where page numbering is set, the position of the stamp changes in the same
way as the page number.
If another stamp item is set in this changing position, the page numbers will alternate sides with this stamp item.
A stamp item that is in a position not affected by the changing page number position will be printed in its original set
position.
Example: When four pages are copied using pamphlet copy and the page number format is "1, 2, 3...", the result is as
follows:
In this example, the page number is set at the bottom of the page and the date is set at the top, and thus the
date does not move.
Print settings
APR/04/2010
Date
Stamp
No.
Side 1
APR/04/2010
CONFIDENTIAL
Text
4
Side 2
APR/04/2010
CONFIDENTIAL
AAA AAA
1
APR/04/2010
CONFIDENTIAL
2
CONFIDENTIAL
AAA AAA
3
To cancel the page numbering setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
2-70
Contents
COPIER
PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text)
Entered text can be printed on copies. Up to 30 frequently used text strings can be stored.
Example: Printing "April 2010 Planning Meeting" in the top left corner of the paper
April 2010 Planning Meeting
1
Touch the [Text] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-61).
Touch the [Recall] key.
Stamp
Cancel
Text
OK
First Page
2
Pre-Set
Recall
All Pages
Store/Delete
Direct Entry
(1)
Specify the text to be printed.
(2)
(1) Touch the text string that you wish to
select.
Stamp
Cancel
Text
5
3
The [Direct Entry] key can be touched to display the text entry
screen. When all characters have been entered, touch the [OK]
key.
To store or delete a text string, touch the [Store/Delete] key.
☞ Storing, editing, and deleting text strings (page 2-73)
OK
You can touch the [5
10] key to switch the number of
keys displayed in the screen between 5 and 10. When
5-key display is selected, the entire text string appears in
each key.
10
Recall
No.01 AAA AAA
No.02 BBB BBB
No.03 CCC CCC
No.04 DDD DDD
No.05
No.06
No.07
No.08
No.09
No.10
1
3
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
2-71
Contents
COPIER
Stamp
OK
Cancel
Text
First Page
AAA AAA
4
Pre-Set
Recall
Store/Delete
All Pages
Select the pages to be printed on and
touch the [OK] key.
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-61) to complete
the copy procedure.
Direct Entry
Text settings can also be configured in the Web pages. Click [Application Settings], [Copy settings] and then [Text Settings
(Stamp)] in the Web page menu.
To cancel a text setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
2-72
Contents
COPIER
Storing, editing, and deleting text strings
1
Touch the [Text] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-61).
Touch the [Store/Delete] key.
Stamp
Cancel
Text
OK
First Page
2
Pre-Set
Recall
All Pages
Store/Delete
Direct Entry
Store a text string, or edit/delete a stored
text string.
Stamp
Back
Text
10
5
Store/Delete
• To store a text string, touch a key with no text stored.
A text entry screen will appear. A maximum of 50 characters
can be entered. When you have finished entering the text,
touch the [OK] key. The text entry screen will close.
• To edit or delete a text string, follow the instructions below.
1
No.01 AAA AAA
No.02 BBB BBB
No.03 CCC CCC
No.04 DDD DDD
No.05
No.06
No.07
No.08
No.09
No.10
3
To edit or delete a text string...
3
• When the key with the text string is touched, the following screen appears.
When the [Modify] key is touched, a text entry screen appears. The stored text string appears in the text entry
screen. Edit the text. When you have finished entering the text, touch the [OK] key. The text entry screen will close.
• When the [Delete] key is touched, the stored text is deleted.
A text has been already stored to this
location. Change the text?
Cancel
Delete
Modify
• Text settings can also be configured in the Web pages. Click [Application Settings], [Copy settings] and then [Text
Settings (Stamp)] in the Web page menu.
2-73
Contents
COPIER
Touch the [Back] key.
Stamp
Back
Text
5
10
Store/Delete
4
1
No.01 AAA AAA
No.02 BBB BBB
No.03 CCC CCC
No.04
No.05
No.06
No.07
No.08
No.09
No.10
You will return to the screen of step 2.
To copy using a stored text string, continue from step 2 of
"PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text)" (page 2-71).
3
2-74
Contents
COPIER
CHECKING THE STAMP LAYOUT (Layout)
After stamp items have been selected, you can check the print layout, change the print position, and delete stamp items.
Touch the [Layout] key.
OK
Special Modes
OK
Cancel
Special Modes
Date
Stamp
Page
Numbering
Text
1
3
6
2
5
1
4
1
2
Layout
The [Layout] key can only be touched when stamp items have been selected.
If the layout is correct, touch the [OK]
key.
Stamp
OK
Layout
Touch the key of the stamp item that you want to delete or
whose position you want to change.
AAA AAA
DO NOT COPY
CONFIDENTIAL
2
1,2,3..
A maximum of 14 characters appear in each key.
To change the position of the item,
touch the [Move] key. To delete the item,
touch the [Delete] key.
Do you want to move or delete the
selected item?
3
Cancel
Delete
Move
• If the [Move] key is touched, a screen for selecting the
destination position appears.
• If the [Delete] key is touched, the item is deleted. (Go to step
6.)
2-75
Contents
COPIER
Stamp
OK
Move
Select the location to move the selected item.
3
6
2
5
1
4
Touch the key of the desired destination
position.
The touched position key is highlighted and the print position
changes.
The keys that show the print positions will appear as follows
depending on the state of the settings.
4
1
Not selected, stamp setting has not
been selected.
1
Selected during selection of the stamp
setting.
1
Not available, stamp setting has already
been selected.
If you wish to swap the position of the selected stamp item with the position of another stamp item, temporarily move
either one of the items to an unoccupied position and then switch the print positions.
Touch the [OK] key.
Stamp
OK
Move
Select the location to move the selected item.
5
3
6
2
5
1
4
If you attempt to move the stamp item to a position that is
already occupied by another stamp item, a message will
appear asking you if you wish to overwrite the other stamp
item. To overwrite the other stamp item, touch the [Yes] key. To
cancel the move, touch the [No] key.
An item has been already selected to
this location. Overwrite the item?
No
Touch the [OK] key.
Stamp
OK
Layout
6
Yes
AAA AAA
CONFIDENTIAL
DO NOT COPY
1,2,3..
2-76
Contents
COPIER
[Image Edit] KEY
When the [Image Edit] key is touched in the 1st special modes menu screen, the image edit menu screen opens.
Image edit menu screen
OK
Special Modes
Margin Shift
Job
Build
Erase
Pamphlet Copy
Transparency
Inserts
2in1
Special Modes
OK
Image Edit
OK
(1)
1
2
(4)
(1)
Card Shot
Stamp
Image Edit
Sharpness
File
Quick File
[Photo Repeat] key
☞ REPEATING PHOTOS ON A COPY (Photo Repeat)
(3)
(page 2-78)
(2)
[Mirror Image] key
☞ REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image) (page
(2)
Photo Repeat
Mirror
Image
(3)
Centering
B/W
Reverse
[Centering] key
☞ COPYING IN THE CENTER OF THE PAPER
(Centering) (page 2-81)
(4)
2-80)
[B/W Reverse] key
☞ REVERSING BLACK AND WHITE IN A COPY (B/W
Reverse) (page 2-83)
2-77
Contents
COPIER
REPEATING PHOTOS ON A COPY (Photo Repeat)
Photo Repeat is used to create repeated images of a photo-size original (3" x 5" size, 5" x 7" size, 2-1/2" x 4" size,
2-1/2" x 2-1/2" size or 2-1/8" x 2-5/8" size (130 mm x 90 mm size, 100 mm x 150 mm size, 70 mm x 100 mm size,
65 mm x 70 mm size or 57 mm x 100 mm size)) on a single sheet of copy paper as shown below. Up to 12 images
(when the image is 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" size (65 mm x 70 mm size)) can be repeated on a single sheet of paper.
• Original sizes up to 5" x 7" (100 mm x 150 mm)
• Original sizes up to 3" x 5" (130 mm x 90 mm)
Copying on 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size paper
2 copies are made.
Copying on 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size paper
4 copies are made.
• Original sizes up to 2-1/2" x 4" (70 mm x 100 mm)
• Original sizes up to 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" (65 mm x 70 mm)
Copying on 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size paper
12 copies are made.
Copying on 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size paper
8 copies are made.
• Original sizes up to 2-1/8" x 2-5/8"
(57 mm x 100 mm)
Copying on 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size paper (Ratio 95%)
10 copies are made.
Place the original face down on the
document glass.
• When placing a 3" x 5" or 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" (130 mm x 90 mm
or 65 mm x 70 mm) photo size original, place the original
with the short side aligned against the left side of the
document glass.
• When placing a 5" x 7" (100 mm x 150 mm) or business card
size original, place with the longest side aligned against the
left side of the document glass.
1
Select the special modes.
2
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
(3) Touch the [Photo Repeat] key.
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-77)
(1)
3
Original Size
(1) Touch the key showing the original type and
paper size combination that you want to use.
OK
Image Edit
Photo Repeat
Select Photo Repeat settings.
(2)
Cancel
OK
Touch the
keys to switch through the screens and
touch the desired repeat type key.
Repeat Type
1
5
A4/8½x11
130x90mm
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
4
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
3x 5"
2-78
Contents
COPIER
Press the [START] key.
4
Copying will begin.
If you have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
• The original must be placed on the document glass.
• Only 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size paper can be used.
• The copy ratio is 100% when this function is used. (The ratio cannot be changed.) However, for a business card size
original (up to 2-1/8" x 2-5/8" (57 mm x 100 mm)), the images are reduced to 95%.
To cancel the photo repeat setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
2-79
Contents
COPIER
REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image)
This feature is used to make a copy that is a mirror image of the original.
Original
Mirror image copy
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
After placing the original, specify the original size.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
Select the special modes.
2
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-77)
(1)
3
Select Mirror Image.
(2)
Special Modes
OK
Image Edit
OK
(1) Touch the [Mirror Image] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Photo Repeat
Mirror
Image
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
Centering
B/W
Reverse
Press the [START] key.
4
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you have
selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then touch the
[Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
To cancel a mirror image setting...
Touch the [Mirror Image] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
2-80
Contents
COPIER
COPYING IN THE CENTER OF THE PAPER (Centering)
This is used to center the copied image on the paper.
This lets you place the image in the center of the paper when the original size is smaller than the paper size or when the
image is reduced.
Not using the centering function
Using the centering function
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
After placing the original, specify the original size.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
Select the special modes.
2
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-77)
(1)
3
Select Centering.
(2)
Special Modes
OK
Image Edit
OK
(1) Touch the [Centering] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Photo Repeat
Mirror
Image
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
Centering
B/W
Reverse
Press the [START] key.
4
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
2-81
Contents
COPIER
• The image can be reduced when using the centering function, but not enlarged.
• When the original size or the paper size is displayed as a special size, this function cannot be used.
To cancel centering...
Touch the [Centering] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
2-82
Contents
COPIER
REVERSING BLACK AND WHITE IN A COPY (B/W Reverse)
This is used to reverse black and white in a copy to create a negative image.
Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be copied using Black/White Reverse to reduce
toner consumption.
Originals
B/W Reverse copy
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
After placing the original, specify the original size.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
Select the special modes.
2
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-77)
(1)
3
Select B/W Reverse.
(2)
Special Modes
OK
Image Edit
OK
(1) Touch the [B/W Reverse] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Photo Repeat
Mirror
Image
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
Centering
B/W
Reverse
Press the [START] key.
4
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
2-83
Contents
COPIER
When this function is selected, the "Original Image Type" setting for exposure adjustment automatically changes to "Text".
To cancel B/W reverse...
Touch the [B/W Reverse] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
2-84
Contents
COPIER
ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE
(Sharpness)
This is used to sharpen an image or make it softer.
Soft
Sharp
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
After placing the original, specify the original size.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
Select the special modes.
2
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Sharpness] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
(1)
(2)
OK
Special Modes
Cancel
Sharpness
OK
Adjust the image.
(1) Touch the [Soft] key or the [Sharp] key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
3
Soft
Sharp
2-85
Contents
COPIER
Press the [START] key.
4
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
When this function is selected, the "Original Image Type" setting for exposure adjustment automatically changes to
"Text/Prtd.Photo".
To cancel the sharpness setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
2-86
Contents
COPIER
CHECKING COPIES BEFORE PRINTING
(Proof Copy)
This feature prints only one set of copies, regardless of how many sets have been specified. After the first set is checked
for errors, the remaining sets can be printed. Previously it was necessary to re-scan the original each time changes to
settings were required. However, this feature makes it possible to change settings for the scanned original without
scanning it again, allowing you perform copying more efficiently.
"Proof Copy" is
selected and 5 sets of
copies are executed
1 set of copies is
printed for you to
check
The remaining 4
sets are printed
If OK
A
A
AA
A
A
AA
A
A
AA
A
A
AA
Adjust the
settings
A
A
AA
A
A
AA
A
A
AA
A
A
AA
A
A
AA
A
A
AA
A
A
AA
If OK
The remaining 4 sets
are printed
After adjustments are
made, 1 set is printed
for you to check
Place the original.
1
2
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
After placing the original, specify the original size.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
Select copy settings in the base screen.
(3)
(2)
Special Modes
Proof Copy
3
Slow Scan
Mode
Original
Count
8 Business
Cards Layout
(4)
Select Proof Copy.
OK
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2
2
(2) Touch the
screens.
Mixed Size
Original
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-41)
keys to switch through the
(3) Touch the [Proof Copy] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
2-87
Contents
COPIER
7
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
4
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
If you will copy multiple originals using the document glass,
switch to sort mode after this step.
☞ Sort mode (page 2-36)
Plain
8½ 11
Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) and then enter the correct number.
Press the [START] key.
5
One set of copies is printed.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple originals, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all
pages have been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key. One set of copies will be printed.
To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
Press [End] to continue.
To make a proof copy again, press
[Start].
6
Change
End
Check the printed set of copies. If the
copies are acceptable, touch the [End]
key. If you need to change the settings,
touch the [Change] key.
When the [End] key is touched, the remaining sets are printed.
If you touched the [Change] key, go to the next step.
To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
2-88
Contents
COPIER
(1)
(2)
OK
Proof Copy
Change the settings.
(1) Touch the key of the setting that you want
to change.
The setting screen of the touched key opens. Change the
settings and touch the [OK] key.
Paper Select
2-Sided Copy
Output
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Special Modes
7
• To change the number of sets printed, set the desired number of copies (sets) with the numeric keys. After changing
the number of sets, touch the [End] key in the touch panel (not the [START] key) to print the sets.
• Special modes that can be adjusted are Margin Shift, Pamphlet Copy, Transparency Inserts, 2in1, and Stamp.
• For Pamphlet Copy, and 2in1, only changes to the settings of the functions can be made; the functions cannot be
newly added or deleted.
• When transparency film is used, the settings can be changed, new settings can be added, and the function can be
canceled. However, this is not possible when pamphlet copying is enabled.
Press the [START] key.
8
One set of copies is printed again using the adjusted settings. Check the results. If further adjustments are needed, repeat
steps 6 through 8. (Repeating Proof Copy does not decrease the remaining number of sets to be printed.)
Touch the [End] key.
Press [End] to continue.
To make a proof copy again, press
[Start].
9
Change
You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the
remaining sets will be printed.
End
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
If Proof Copy is executed while the machine is printing another job, the other job is interrupted and the proof copies are
printed. The previous job will resume after the proof copies are printed.
However, if proof copy is executed during output of a job for which both two-sided printing and stapling are enabled, the proof
copy will be output after the job in progress is finished.
If the [End] key is touched to execute printing of the remaining sets while the machine is printing another job, the remaining
sets will be printed after all previously reserved jobs are completed.
2-89
Contents
COPIER
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE COPYING
(Original Count)
The number of scanned original sheets can be counted and displayed before copying is executed. By allowing you to check
the number of original sheets that were scanned, this helps reduce the occurrence of copy mistakes.
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
MX-B402
Indicator
line
1
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER (page 1-37)
MX-B402SC
Indicator
line
(3)
(2)
(4)
Select Original Count.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
Proof Copy
2
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-41)
OK
Special Modes
Slow Scan
Mode
Original
Count
Mixed Size
Original
2
2
8 Business
Cards Layout
(2) Touch the
screens.
keys to switch through the
(3) Touch the [Original Count] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Press the [START] key.
3
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
After scanning is finished, check the
number of sheets that were scanned and
touch the [OK] key.
130 pages of original
have been scanned.
Copy the scanned data?
Cancel
4
OK
Copying will begin.
• When job build mode is used, the number of scanned sheets
appears when the [Read-End] key is touched.
• The number that is displayed is the number of scanned
original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages.
For example, when two-sided copying is performed using
one original, the number "1" will appear to indicate that one
original sheet was scanned, not "2" to indicate the front-side
page and the reverse side page.
If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of original sheets...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
To cancel the original count mode setting...
Touch the [Original Count] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.
2-90
Contents
COPIER
COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES
(Mixed Size Original)
Originals that are 8-1/2" x 14" size and 8-1/2" x 11" size, 8-1/2" x 11" size and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" size (A4 size and A5 size)
can be placed together in the automatic document feeder and copied.
When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original and uses paper appropriate for
that size.
When mixed size original is combined with auto ratio selection, the ratio is adjusted individually for each original according
to the selected paper size, enabling output on a uniform paper size.
For mixed originals, the only combination of sizes that can be used is 8-1/2" x 11" and 8-1/2" x 14", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" and
8-1/2" x 11" (A5 and A4).
Copies
Originals
8-1/2" x 11"
8-1/2" x 11"
8-1/2" x 14"
8-1/2" x 14"
When mixed size original is combined with auto ratio selection
(Auto ratio selection and 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) are selected)
Copies
Originals
8-1/2" x 11"
8-1/2" x 14"
8-1/2" x 14"
8-1/2" x 14"
An 8-1/2" x 11", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5) size
original will be enlarged to 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size.
2-91
Contents
COPIER
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Inch
8-1/2" x 14"
(8-1/2" x 11")
MX-B402
Place the originals with the sides that are the same length
aligned on the left.
8-1/2" x 11"
(5-1/2" x 8-1/2")
Place with the sides that
are the same length
aligned on the left.
MX-B402SC
8-1/2" x 14"
(8-1/2" x 11")
1
8-1/2" x 11"
(5-1/2" x 8-1/2")
Place with the sides that
are the same length
aligned on the left.
AB
MX-B402
A4
A5
Place with the sides that
are the same length
aligned on the left.
MX-B402SC
A4
A5
Place with the sides that
are the same length
aligned on the left.
(3)
(2)
(4)
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
Proof Copy
2
☞SPECIAL MODES (page 2-41)
OK
Special Modes
Slow Scan
Mode
Original
Count
8 Business
Cards Layout
Mixed Size
Original
2
2
(2) Touch the
screens.
keys to switch through the
(3) Touch the [Mix Size Original] key so that it
is highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
2-92
Contents
COPIER
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
3
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
To cancel the mixed size original setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
The original feeding mode can be set to always scan mixed size originals.
2-93
Contents
COPIER
COPYING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan
Mode)
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent
thin originals from misfeeding.
A
A
B
C
D
B
C
D
Insert the originals face up in the document feeder tray.
1
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
After placing the original, specify the original size.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.
(3)
(2)
Special Modes
Proof Copy
2
Slow Scan
Mode
Original
Count
(4)
OK
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2
2
(2) Touch the
screens.
Mixed Size
Original
8 Business
Cards Layout
Select Slow Scan Mode.
☞SPECIAL MODES (page 2-41)
keys to switch through the
(3) Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
3
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
The "2-Sided to 2-Sided" and "2-Sided to 1-Sided" modes of automatic 2-sided copying cannot be used.
2-94
Contents
COPIER
To cancel the slow scan mode setting...
Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
This is used to have scanning always take place in slow scan mode.
2-95
Contents
COPIER
COPYING MULTIPLE BUSINESS CARDS
(8 Business Cards Layout)
8 Business Cards Layout can be used to copy up to 8 business cards on one sheet of paper.
For the MX-B402, the business card feeder must be attached to the automatic document feeder and "Business Card
Scan Option" must be enabled in the system settings (administrator) to use this function.
For the attachment procedure, see "BUSINESS CARD FEEDER" in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE" (page 1-47).
Use this function to create a list of business cards or to file business cards as a group.
8 Business Cards Layout
Load the business cards.
MX-B402
Set in the business card feeder with MX-B402.
For original placement orientations and copy results, see "Copy
results of 8 Business Cards Layouts" (page 2-98.)
1
MX-B402SC
Select 8 Business Cards Layout.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-41)
(2) Touch the
keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [8 Business Cards Layout] key.
(1)
(2)
Special Modes
8 Business Cards Layout
Install Business card tray, and then set
business card, when using the documnet feeder
3
Specify settings for 8 Business Cards
Layout.
OK
Cancel
OK
(1) Select the desired layout from "Layout".
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
2-96
Contents
COPIER
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
4
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
• For the MX-B402, the "2-Sided to 2-Sided", "2-Sided to 1-Sided" and "1-Sided to 2-Sided" modes of automatic 2-sided
copying cannot be used.
For the MX-B402SC, the "2-Sided to 2-Sided" and "1-Sided to 2-Sided" modes of automatic 2-sided copying cannot be
used.
• The following functions and paper cannot be used.
- Zoom function
- Auto Image
- Label
To cancel the 8 Business Cards Layout setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Business Card Scan Option (MX-B402 Only)
Specify whether or not the 8 Business Cards Layout function is used.
2-97
Contents
COPIER
Copy results of 8 Business Cards Layouts
Originals (Original orientation)
1st
page
5th
page
A
Settings
MX-B402
E
A
2nd
page
3rd
page
B
6th
page
C
7th
page
F
8th
page
D
A
E
B
F
C
G
D
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
MX-B402SC
G
A
4th
page
Results
H
2nd
page
3rd
page
4th
page
A
B
C
D
5th
page
6th
page
7th
page
E
F
G
MX-B402
D C B A
A
1st
page
H
MX-B402SC
G E C A
A
8th
page
H G F E
H F D B
2-98
Contents
COPIER
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
This section explains convenient copy functions such as interrupting a copy run, changing the order of reserved copy
jobs, and storing copy settings in a program.
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN
(Interrupt copy)
When you need to make an urgent copy and the machine is busy with a long copy run or other job, use interrupt copy.
Interrupt copy temporarily stops the job in progress and lets you perform the interrupt copy job first.
Copies in progress from tray 4.
Ready to scan for next copy job.
7
Interrupt
Special Modes
Plain
Touch the [Interrupt] key.
The [Interrupt] key does not appear while an original is being
scanned.
2-Sided Copy
8½x11
Output
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Exposure
Auto
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
Original
100%
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Preview
Place the original.
2
3
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
After placing the original, specify the original size.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
Select copy settings and press the [START] key.
The interrupt copy job begins.
When the interrupt copy job is completed, the interrupted job resumes.
4
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
2-99
Contents
COPIER
• If user authentication is enabled, the login screen will appear when the [Interrupt] key is pressed. Enter your user name
and password to log in. The number of copies made will be added to the count of the user that logged in.
• Depending on the settings of the job in progress, the [Interrupt] key may not appear.
• Depending on the settings of the job in progress, the [Reserve] key may appear instead of the [Interrupt] key. Unlike
interrupt copy, reserve copy does not temporarily stop the job in progress. Instead, the reserve copy job begins when the
job in progress is finished.
• Interrupt copy cannot be used in combination with the following special modes:
Job Build, Card Shot, Original Count
• If the document glass is used for an interrupt copy job, 2-sided copying, sort copying, and staple sort copying cannot be
selected. If any of these functions are necessary, use the automatic document feeder.
2-100
Contents
COPIER
CHECKING A PREVIEW IMAGE OF A COPY
(Preview)
You can touch the [Preview] key so that it is highlighted in the base screen and then scan the original to check a preview
image of the copy in the touch panel before printing the copy.
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Place the original in the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-37)
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Touch the [Preview] key so that it is
highlighted.
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
2
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
Original
100%
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Preview
Select copy settings and press the [START] key.
3
After the original is scanned, a preview image of the copy appears in the touch panel. The copy is not printed until the [Start
Copy] key is touched in the preview screen.
Reset
Preview
Display Output
Function Rev.
Check the preview image and then touch
the [Start Copy] key.
Copy printing begins.
For details on the preview screen, see "PREVIEW SCREEN"
(page 2-103).
Display Rotation
4
Start Copy
0001 /0010
If you need to change the copy settings, touch the [Reset] key.
To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
2-101
Contents
COPIER
To cancel the operation...
Press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
).
System Settings (Administrator): Default Preview
You can set the default state of the [Preview] key to always selected (highlighted). Enable this setting if you wish to check a
preview image each time you make a copy.
2-102
Contents
COPIER
PREVIEW SCREEN
The preview screen is explained below.
Reset
Preview
(3)
Display Output
(4)
Function Rev.
(5)
(6)
(1)
Display Rotation
Start Copy
0001 /0010
(7)
(8)
(2)
(1)
(4)
Preview image
(2)
Change page keys
When there are multiple pages of images, use these keys
to change pages.
•
keys: Go to the first or the last page.
•
keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
• Page number display: This shows the total number of
pages and the current page
number. You can touch the
current page number key and
enter a number with the
numeric keys to go to that page
number.
(3)
(5)
Preview/Reset
Cancel
2-Sided Copy
Special Modes
[Function Rev.] key
Touch to check special mode items, 2-sided copying, and
output settings.
(6)
Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order "Full Page", "Twice", "4
Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in the
file, not just the displayed page.
(7)
"Display Rotation" key
This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.
[Reset] key
Touch to change the copy settings after checking the
preview image. After changing the settings, touch the
[Preview Again] key to update the preview image with the
new settings.
[Display Output] key
Touch to show the selected modes and settings as icons.
Functions that are displayed are as follows:
• 2-sided copying
• Pamphlet copy
• Staple function
• Stamp menu
• Transparency inserts
This key can only be touched when the entire preview
image is displayed in the preview screen.
A preview image of the scanned original is displayed.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the
keys to
scroll.)
(8)
[Start Copy] key
Touch to start printing the copy.
Preview Again
Output
• A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.
• The preview image reflects certain copy settings and special mode settings. Settings that are reflected in the preview
image are as follows:
Copy settings: ratio, paper size
Special modes: margin shift, edge erase, dual page copy, pamphlet copy, transparency film, multi shot, card shot, image
edit menu, mixed size original, 8 Business Cards Layout
• Fine lines (such as borderlines printed by the multi shot function) may not appear correctly at some zoom ratios.
2-103
Contents
COPIER
JOB STATUS SCREEN
The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.
Example: Pressing the key in copy mode
Print Job
Scan to
Job Queue
JOB STATUS
Fax Job
Internet Fax
Sets / Progress
Status
1
Copy
020 / 001
Copying
2
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
3
Computer01
002 / 000
Waiting
4
0312345678
001 / 000
Waiting
Spool
Job Queue
1
Complete
1
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
The job status display (A) is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the
job status screen. The first four jobs in the print queue (the job in progress and reserved jobs) can be checked in the job
status display (B).
Ready to scan for copy.
Job Status
MFP Status
Special Modes
020/001
2-Sided Copy
Copying
Output
002/000
Plain
8½x11
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
Waiting
002/000
Waiting
Copy Ratio
100%
Original
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
001/000
Preview
Waiting
Tray1
(A)
(B)
2-104
Contents
COPIER
JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED JOB SCREEN
The job status screen consists of the job queue screen that shows copy and print jobs waiting to be printed and the job
currently in progress, the completed job screen that shows jobs that have been completed, and the spool screen that
shows print jobs that have been spooled and encrypted PDF jobs that are waiting for a password to be entered. This
section explains the job queue screen and the completed jobs screen, which are related to copy mode. The job status
screen switches between the job queue screen and the completed jobs screen each time the job status screen selector
key is touched.
(1)
Print Job
Job Queue
(2)
Scan to
Fax Job
Internet Fax
Sets / Progress
Status
1
Copy
020 / 001
Copying
2
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
3
Computer01
002 / 000
Waiting
4
0312345678
001 / 000
Waiting
Print Job
1
Complete
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
(1)
(3)
1
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Mode select tabs
Use these tabs to select the mode that is shown in the
job status screen.
The status of copy jobs can be checked by touching the
[Print Job] tab.
(2)
(3)
Sets
Internet Fax
Status
1
Computer02
11:00 04/01 001/001 OK
2
Computer03
10:33 04/01 010/010 OK
3
Computer04
10:31 04/01 013/013 OK
4
file-01
10:30 04/01 010/010 OK
5
Copy
10:13 04/01 001/001 OK
6
Copy
10:03 04/01 001/001 OK
7
Computer05
10:01 04/01 003/003 OK
8
Copy
10:00 04/01 010/010 OK
Spool
Job Queue
1
Complete
2
(7)
Detail
(8)
Call
(9)
Job list (completed jobs screen)
This shows up to 99 completed jobs. The result (status)
of each completed job is shown. Copy jobs that used the
document filing function are indicated as keys.
(8)
Job list (job queue screen)
Jobs waiting to be printed appear in the job queue as
keys. The jobs are printed in order from the top of the
queue. Each job key shows information on the job and
the current status of the job.
Fax Job
Set Time
Spool
Job Queue
Scan to
Jobs Completed
[Detail] key (completed jobs screen)
When a job is shown as a key in the job list, the [Detail]
key can be touched to show detailed information on the
job.
(9)
[Call] key
Touch this key to retrieve and use a copy job stored
using the document filing function.
Job status screen selector key
Touch this key to switch through the job queue screen,
the completed jobs screen, and the spool screen.
(4)
[Detail] key (job queue screen)
Touch this key to display detailed information on a job.
(5)
[Priority] key
Touch this key to give priority to a selected job.
(6)
[Stop/Delete] key
Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job.
2-105
Contents
COPIER
Job key display
Each job key shows the position of the job in the job queue and the current status of the job.
2
(1)
(1)
Copy
(2)
002/000
(3)
(4)
Indicates the number (position) of the job in the job
queue.
(6)
When the job currently being printed is finished, the job
moves up one position in the job queue.
This number does not appear in keys in the completed
jobs screen.
(2)
Mode icon
The
(3)
icon appears when the job is a copy job.
Shows the job status.
Message
Status
"Copying"
Copying is in progress.
"Waiting"
Scanning the original.
"Toner
Empty"
The toner cartridge is out of toner.
Replace the toner cartridge with a
new cartridge.
"Paper
Empty"
The paper used for the job has run
out. Add paper or change to a
different paper tray.
"Limit"
The copy page limit has been
exceeded. Check with the
administrator of the machine.
"Error"
An error occurred while the job was
being executed. Clear the error
condition.
Number of copies (sets) entered
This shows the number of copies (sets) specified.
(5)
(6)
Status
Job name
"Copy" appears for a copy job.
When user authentication is enabled, the name of the
user that performed the job appears.
(4)
(5)
Waiting
Number of completed copies
This shows the number of copies (sets) completed. "000"
appears while the job is waiting in the job queue.
2-106
Contents
COPIER
CANCELING A JOB THAT IS WAITING IN THE QUEUE
A copy job that is waiting to be printed can be canceled.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
JOB STATUS
1
Print Job
Job Queue
Cancel the job.
(2)
(1)
Scan to
Fax Job
Sets / Progress
(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.
Internet Fax
Status
Spool
1
Computer01
020 / 001
Printing
2
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
3
Computer02
002 / 000
Waiting
4
0312345678
001 / 000
Waiting
Job Queue
1
Complete
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
Queue].
1
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
Detail
(3) Touch the key of the copy job that you wish
to cancel.
Priority
Stop/Delete
(4) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
(3)
2
(4)
(5) A message appears to confirm the
cancelation. Touch the [Yes] key.
Delete the job?
Copy
No
Yes
The selected job key is deleted and printing is canceled.
If the job in progress is a copy job, you can also press the [STOP] key (
To cancel, touch the [Yes] key.
) to display the above screen.
If you do not want to cancel the selected print job...
Touch the [No] key in step (5).
2-107
Contents
COPIER
GIVING PRIORITY TO A JOB IN THE QUEUE
If a copy job is begun when there are already multiple jobs in the queue, the copy job will appear at the end of the queue.
However, if you have an urgent copy job, you can give priority to the job and have it executed first.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
JOB STATUS
1
Print Job
2
Give the desired job priority.
(2)
(1)
Scan to
Fax Job
(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.
Internet Fax
Job Queue
Sets / Progress
Status
1
Computer01
020 / 001
Printing
2
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
3
Computer02
002 / 000
Waiting
4
0312345678
001 / 000
Waiting
Spool
Job Queue
1
Complete
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
Queue].
1
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
Detail
(3) Touch the key of the copy job to which you
want to give priority.
Priority
Stop/Delete
(4) Touch the [Priority] key.
(3)
(4)
The job being printed stops and the job selected in (3) is
printed.
2-108
Contents
COPIER
CHECKING INFORMATION ON A COPY JOB WAITING
IN THE QUEUE
Detailed information can be displayed on a copy job waiting in the queue.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
JOB STATUS
1
Print Job
Job Queue
Checking job details
(2)
(1)
Scan to
Fax Job
(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.
Internet Fax
Sets / Progress
Status
1
Copy
020 / 001
Copying
2
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
3
Computer01
002 / 000
Waiting
4
0312345678
001 / 000
Waiting
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
Queue].
Spool
Job Queue
1
Complete
1
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
Detail
(3) Touch the key of the job that you wish to
check.
Priority
Stop/Delete
(4) Touch the [Detail] key.
(3)
(4)
The job check screen of the job selected in (3) appears.
OK
Detail
Copy
2
002 / 000
2-Sided
Copy:
Color / B/W: Mono2
Exposure:
Paper:
1
8½x11
Plain
Copy Ratio:
Waiting
3
5
Paper Select
Output:
Special
Modes:
X100% Y100%
[Paper Select] key
If a copy job is stopped because the paper ran out, the [Paper Select] key can be pressed to change to a
different paper tray.
When the [Paper Select] key is pressed, the paper tray selection screen appears.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
Touch the key of the tray that has the size of paper that you wish to use and then touch the [OK] key. The
stopped copy job will resume.
2-109
Contents
COPIER
STORING COPY OPERATIONS (Job Programs)
A job program is a group of copy settings stored together. When copy settings are stored in a job program, the settings
can be retrieved and used for a copy job by means of a simple operation.
For example, suppose 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size CAD drawings are copied once a month for archive purposes using the
following settings:
(1) The 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size CAD drawings
are reduced to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"(A5) size.
(2) The drawings have fine lines that do not
show clearly, and thus a dark exposure
setting (level 4) is used.
(3) To reduce paper use by half, 2-sided
copying is used.
8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size CAD drawings
Copies
When a job program is not stored
When a job program is stored
8-1/2" x 11" (A4) to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"(A5) reduction
Press the [#/P] key.
Change the exposure setting
Exit
Job Programs
Press program number.
Select 2-sided copying
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
4
Press the [START] key.
Recall
Store/Delete
Touch the stored program key.
Press the [START] key.
Considerable time is required to copy the drawings each
month because the above settings must be selected.
In addition, mistakes are occasionally made when selecting
the settings, so some copies must be redone.
The settings are stored in a job program, so they can be
selected by the touch of a key. This is simple and takes no time.
In addition, the settings are all stored so there are no chances
for mistakes, and thus no need to redo copies due to setting
mistakes.
• Up to 48 job programs can be stored. The job programs are retained even if an interruption occurs in the power supply.
• Job programs can also be stored in the Web pages. Click [Job program] and then [Copy] in the Web page menu to store a
job program.
2-110
Contents
COPIER
STORING (EDITING/DELETING) A JOB PROGRAM
The procedures for storing copy settings in a job program and deleting a job program are explained below.
Press the [#/P] key (
).
1
LOGOUT
Touch the [Store/Delete] tab.
Exit
Job Programs
Press program number.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
4
2
Recall
Store/Delete
Touch a numeric key.
Exit
Job Programs
Numeric keys in which job programs are already stored are
highlighted.
• To store a job program, touch a numeric key that is not
highlighted.
• To edit or delete a job program, touch the key in which the
job program is stored (highlighted key).
Press program number.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
4
Recall
3
Store/Delete
Editing or deleting a job program...
When a highlighted numeric key is touched, the following screen appears.
The [Store] key can be touched to delete the stored settings and store new settings. Go to the next step.
When the [Delete] key is touched, the stored settings are deleted. After the deletion is finished, touch the [Exit] key to
return to the base screen.
A job program has been already stored
in this location.
Cancel
Delete
Store
When "Disabling Deletion of Job Programs" is enabled in the system settings, a stored job program cannot be edited
or deleted.
2-111
Contents
COPIER
To store, make selections and press
[OK], to delete, press [Cancel].
OK
Cancel
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
8½x11
Output
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
4
Copy Ratio
100%
Original
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
Program Name
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Select the copy settings that you wish to
store in the job program and touch the
[OK] key.
To assign a name to the program, touch the [Program Name]
key. A text entry screen will appear.
Up to 10 characters can be entered for the name.
When you have finished, touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen with the stored information
reflected in the screen.
Preview
The number of copies cannot be stored.
2-112
Contents
CHAPTER 3
PRINTER
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the printer function.
PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . 3-3
CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING
PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CREATING A PAMPHLET (Pamphlet). . . . . . .
• INCREASING THE MARGIN (Margin Shift) . . .
• CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Poster
Printing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
• SELECTING THE PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
• PRINTING ON ENVELOPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
PRINTING WHEN THE USER
AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED . . . . 3-8
FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND
ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180
DEGREES (Rotate 180 degrees) . . . . . . . . . . .
• ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT
IMAGE (Zoom/XY-Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ADJUSTING LINE WIDTHS WHEN
PRINTING (Line Width Settings) . . . . . . . . . . .
• REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image) . . . .
VIEWING PRINTER DRIVER HELP. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
SAVING FREQUENTLY USED PRINT
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
• SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF
PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
• USING SAVED SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER
DEFAULT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-37
3-38
3-38
3-39
3-40
3-41
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
• ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS AND
CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE (Image
Adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
• PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN
BLACK (Text To Black/Vector To Black) . . . . . 3-43
PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SELECTING PAPER SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . .
• PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SELECTING THE PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PRINTING ON ENVELOPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-34
3-34
3-36
3-17
3-17
3-18
3-20
3-21
FUNCTIONS THAT COMBINE TEXT AND
IMAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED
PAGES (Watermark) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT
DATA (Image Stamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CREATING OVERLAYS FOR PRINT
DATA (Overlays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINTING WHEN THE USER
AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED . . . 3-22
FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS
SELECTING A PRINT MODE SETTING . . . . . . . . 3-24
TWO-SIDED PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER . . . 3-28
PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE
PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
STAPLING OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-1
3-44
3-44
3-45
3-46
PRINTER
PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL
PURPOSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PRINTING SPECIFIED PAGES ON
DIFFERENT PAPER (Different Paper). . . . . . .
• ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency
Inserts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PRINTING A CARBON COPY (Carbon
Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• TWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC
PAGES PRINTED ON THE FRONT SIDE
(Chapter Inserts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE PRINT STATUS
3-47
JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
• SPOOL SCREEN/JOB QUEUE
SCREEN/COMPLETED JOB SCREEN . . . . . . 3-65
3-47
PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE. . . . . . . . . 3-67
3-49
3-50
GIVING A PRINT JOB
PRIORITY/CANCELING A PRINT JOB . . . . . . . . . 3-68
• GIVING A PRINT JOB PRIORITY . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
• CANCELING A PRINT JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3-51
CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND
PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT . . . . . . . . . 3-70
CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . 3-52
• SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES
(Retention/Document Filing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
APPENDIX
PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATION LIST . . . . . . 3-71
PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER
DRIVER
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM THE MACHINE. . . .
• DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP
SERVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB
MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A
NETWORK FOLDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-55
DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER . . . .
• SUBMIT PRINT JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FTP PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• E-MAIL PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-62
3-62
3-62
3-63
3-56
3-57
3-59
3-2
PRINTER
PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE
The machine is equipped standard with a printing function. To enable printing from your computer, a printer driver must
be installed.
See the table below to determine which printer driver to use in your environment.
Environment
Printer driver type
Windows
PCL6, PCL5e*
The machine supports the Hewlett-Packard PCL6 and PCL5e printer
control languages. It is recommended that you use the PCL6 printer
driver. If you have a problem printing from older software using the PCL6
printer driver, use the PCL5e printer driver.
Macintosh
PS
This printer driver supports the PostScript 3 page description language
developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated, and enables the machine to
be used as a PostScript 3 compatible printer.
(A PPD file is available if it is desired to use the Windows standard PS
printer driver.)
Remarks
Can be used in the
standard machine
configuration.
* The PCL5e printer driver is not available in some countries.
Installing the printer driver in a Windows environment
To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Windows environment, see "SETUP IN A WINDOWS
ENVIRONMENT" (page 1-80) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
The explanations in this manual of printing in a Windows environment generally use the screens of the PCL6 printer driver.
The printer driver screens may differ slightly depending on the printer driver that you are using.
Installing the printer driver in a Macintosh environment
To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Macintosh environment, see "SETUP IN A MACINTOSH
ENVIRONMENT" (page 1-107) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
In a Macinstosh environment, the machine can only be used as a printer if it is connected to your network.
3-3
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE
The following example explains how to print a document from "WordPad", which is a standard accessory program in
Windows.
Select [Print] from the [File] menu of
WordPad.
If you are using Windows 7, click the
button.
1
The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.
Open the printer driver properties
window.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
• If the printer drivers appear as icons, click the icon
of the printer driver to be used.
• If the printer drivers appear as a list, select the
name of the printer driver to be used from the list.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.
If you are using Windows 2000, the [Preferences]
button does not appear. Click a tab on the "Print"
dialog box to adjust the settings on that tab.
2
(1)
(2)
The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.
3-4
Contents
PRINTER
(1)
Select print settings.
(2)
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select the paper size.
To select settings on other tabs, click the desired tab
and then select the settings.
(3) Click the [OK] button.
3
(3)
• Make sure the paper size is the same as the paper size set in the software application.
• Up to eight custom paper sizes can be stored. Storing a custom paper size makes it easy to specify that size each
time you need to use it.
To store a paper size, select [Custom Paper] or one of [User1] to [User7] from the pull-down menu and click the
[Custom] button.
Click the [Print] button.
Printing begins.
4
3-5
Contents
PRINTER
SELECTING THE PAPER
This section explains how to configure the "Paper Selection" setting on the [Paper] tab of
the printer driver properties window.
Before printing, check the paper sizes, paper types, and paper remaining in the machine's
trays. To view the most recent tray information, click the [Tray Status] button.
• When [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Source"
The tray that has the size and type of paper selected in "Paper Size" and "Paper Type" on the [Paper] tab is
automatically selected.
• When other than [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Source"
The specified tray is used for printing regardless of the "Paper Size" setting.
When [Bypass Tray] is selected
The "Paper Type" must also be selected. Check the bypass tray and make sure that the desired type of paper is
loaded, and then select the appropriate "Paper Type" setting.
• Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray. For the procedure for loading paper and other
media in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 1-33) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".
• When "Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray" (disabled by factory default) or "Enable Selected Paper Type in
Bypass Tray" (enabled by factory default) is enabled in the system settings (administrator), printing will not take place if the
paper size or paper type specified in the printer driver is different from the paper size or paper type specified in the settings
of the bypass tray.
• When [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Type"
A tray with plain paper or recycled paper of the size specified in "Paper Size" is automatically selected. (The factory
default setting is plain paper only.)
• When other than [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Type"
A tray with the specified type of paper and the size specified in "Paper Size" is used for printing.
System Settings (Administrator): Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select
When [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Selection", specify whether or not the paper in the bypass tray will be excluded from
the paper that can be selected. This setting is disabled by factory default, and thus paper in the bypass tray is included in the
paper that can be automatically selected. If special media are frequently loaded in the bypass tray, it is recommended that
this setting be enabled.
3-6
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING ON ENVELOPES
The bypass tray can be used to print on special media such as envelopes. The procedure for printing on an envelope
from the printer driver properties screen is described below.
For the types of paper that can be used in the bypass tray, see "IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER" (page 1-27) in
"BEFORE USING THE MACHINE". For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN
THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 1-33) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
Select the envelope size in the appropriate settings of the application ("Page Settings" in many applications) and then
perform the following steps.
(1)
(2)
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(3)
(2) Select the envelope size from the "Paper
Size" menu.
(3) Select [Bypass Tray] from the "Paper
Source" menu of "Paper Selection".
(4) Select [Envelope] from the "Paper Type"
menu.
Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Envelope] and
make sure the envelope is loaded in the bypass tray.
(4)
• It is recommended that you do a test print to check the print result before using an envelope.
• In the case of media that can only be loaded in a certain orientation such as an envelope, you can rotate the image 180
degrees if needed. For more information, see "ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (Rotate 180 degrees)"
(page 3-38).
• For more information on "Paper Selection", see "SELECTING THE PAPER" (page 3-6).
3-7
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING WHEN THE USER
AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED
When the user authentication function is enabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), your user information
(login name, password, etc.) must be entered in the printer driver properties window before you can print. The
information that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the
administrator of the machine before printing.
Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.
1
(1)
(2)
The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.
3-8
Contents
PRINTER
(1)
Enter your login name and password.
(2)
(1) Click the [Job Handling] tab.
(2) Enter your user information.
• When authentication is by login name/password
Select the [Login Name] and [Password]
checkboxes so that checkmarks
appear, and
enter your login name and password. Enter 1 to 32
characters for the password.
• When authentication is by user number
Click the [User Number] checkbox
and enter a
user number (5 to 8 digits).
When [User Authentication] has been checked
on [Printing Policy] in the [Configuration] tab,
you cannot enter the user information.
Enter the user information in the dialog box
whenever you print.
2
(3) Enter the user name and job name as
necessary.
(4)
• User Name
Click the [User Name] checkbox
and enter your
user name (maximum of 32 characters). Your
entered user name will appear at the top of the
operation panel. If you do not enter a user name,
your computer login name will appear.
• Job Name
Click the [Job Name] checkbox
and enter a job
name (maximum of 30 characters). The entered job
name will appear at the top of the operation panel
as a file name. If you do not enter a job name, the
file name set in the software application will appear.
(3)
(4) Click the [OK] button.
To have a confirmation window appear before printing starts, select the [Auto Job Control Review] checkbox so that a
checkmark
appears.
Start printing.
3
• Even when user authentication is enabled in the system settings (administrator), normally printing is possible without
entering user information. The number of pages printed is added to the "Other User" count. In this case, other print
functions may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.
• The machine's user authentication function cannot be used when the PPD file* is installed and the Windows standard PS
printer driver is used. For this reason, printing will not be possible if printing by invalid users is prohibited in the system
settings (administrator).
* The PPD file enables the machine to print using the standard PS printer driver of the operating system.
3-9
Contents
PRINTER
System Settings (Administrator): Disabling of Printing by Invalid User
This is used to prohibit printing of print jobs by users whose user information is not stored in the machine. When this function
is enabled, printing is not allowed when user information is not entered or incorrect information is entered.
3-10
Contents
PRINTER
VIEWING PRINTER DRIVER HELP
When selecting settings in the printer driver, you can display Help to view explanations of the settings.
Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.
1
(1)
(2)
The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.
Click the [Help] button.
The Help window will open to let you view explanations of
the settings on the tab.
To view Help for settings in a dialog box, click the
underlined text at the top of the Help window.
2
Pop-up help
Help can be displayed for a setting by clicking the setting and pressing the [F1] key.
* To view Help for a setting in Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, click the
button in the upper right-hand corner of the
printer driver properties window and then click the setting.
You can also view the same Help by right-clicking the setting and clicking the [Help] box that appears.
Information icon
Some restrictions exist on the combinations of settings that can be selected in the printer driver properties window.
When a restriction exists on a selected setting, an information icon (
) will appear next to the setting. Click the icon to
view an explanation of the restriction.
3-11
Contents
PRINTER
SAVING FREQUENTLY USED PRINT
SETTINGS
Settings configured on each of the tabs at the time of printing can be saved as user settings. Saving frequently used
settings or complex settings under an assigned name makes it easy to select those settings the next time you need to
use them.
SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTING
Settings can be saved from any tab of the printer driver properties window. Settings configured on each tab are listed at
the time of saving, allowing you to check the settings as you save them.
Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.
1
(1)
(2)
The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.
Save the print settings.
(1) Configure print settings on each tab.
(2) Click the [Save] button.
2
(1)
(2)
3-12
Contents
PRINTER
(1)
Check and save the settings.
(2)
(1) Check the displayed settings.
(2) Enter a name for the settings (maximum
of 20 characters).
(3) Click the [OK] button.
3
(3)
Click the [OK] button.
4
Start printing.
5
• Up to 30 sets of user settings can be saved.
• The following items cannot be saved in user settings.
- A watermark that you created
- Paper insertion settings
- Overlay file
- The login name, password, user name, and job name entered in the [Job Handling] tab
3-13
Contents
PRINTER
USING SAVED SETTINGS
Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.
1
(1)
(2)
The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.
Select the print settings.
(1) Select the user settings that you wish to
use.
(2) Click the [OK] button.
2
(1)
(2)
Start printing.
3
Deleting saved settings
Select the user settings that you want to delete in (1) of step 2 above, and click the [Delete] button.
3-14
Contents
PRINTER
CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER
DEFAULT SETTINGS
The default settings of the printer driver can be changed using the procedure below. The settings selected using this
procedure are saved and become the default settings when printing from a software application. (Settings selected in
the printer driver properties window when printing from an application remain in effect only while the application is in
use.)
Click the [Start] button (
1
) and select [Control Panel] and then [Printer].
• In Windows 7, click the [start] button and then click [Devices and Printers].
• In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [start] button and then click [Printers and Faxes].
• In Windows 2000, click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then select [Printers].
In Windows XP, if [Printers and Faxes] does not appear in the [start] menu, select [Control Panel], select [Printers and
Other Hardware], and then select [Printers and Faxes].
Open the printer properties window.
(1)
(2)
(1) Click the icon of the printer driver of the
machine.
In Windows 7, right-click the icon of the printer driver
of the machine. Go to step (3).
(2) Click the [Organize] menu.
In Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, click the [File]
menu.
2
(3) Select [Properties].
In windows 7, click the [Printer properties] menu.
(3)
Click the [Printing Preferences] button
on the [General] tab.
In Windows 7, click the [Preferences] button on the
[General] tab.
3
3-15
Contents
PRINTER
Configure the settings and click the
[OK] button.
For explanations of the settings, see printer driver Help.
4
3-16
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE
The following example explains how to print a document from the standard accessory program "TextEdit" in Mac OS X
("SimpleText" in Mac OS 9).
SELECTING PAPER SETTINGS
Select paper settings in the printer driver before selecting the print command.
Select [Page Setup] from the [File]
menu of TextEdit.
In Mac OS 9, select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu of
SimpleText.
1
Select paper settings.
(1)
(1) Make sure that the correct printer is
selected.
(2) Select paper settings.
The paper size, paper orientation, and enlarge/reduce
can be selected.
(3) Click the [OK] button.
2
(2)
(3)
The machine name that appears in the "Format for" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of
characters that varies depending on your machine model.)
3-17
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING
Select [Print] from the [File] menu of
TextEdit.
In Mac OS 9, select [Print] from the [File] menu of
SimpleText.
1
The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.
Make sure that the correct printer is
selected.
2
The machine name that appears in the "Printer" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters
that varies depending on the machine model.)
Select print settings.
• In Mac OS X, click
next to [Copies & Pages] and
select the settings that you wish to configure from the
pull-down menu. The corresponding setting screen will
appear. If the settings do not appear in Mac OS X v10.5
to 10.5.8 and v10.6 to 10.6.2, click " " next to the
printer name.
• In Mac OS 9, click
next to [General] and select the
settings that you wish to configure from the pull-down
menu. The corresponding setting screen will appear.
3
3-18
Contents
PRINTER
Click the [Print] button.
Printing begins.
4
3-19
Contents
PRINTER
SELECTING THE PAPER
This section explains the [Paper Feed] settings ("Paper Source" setting in [General] in Mac OS 9) in the print settings
window.
• When [Auto Select] is selected
A tray with plain paper or recycled paper (the factory default setting is plain paper only) of the size specified in "Paper
Size" in the page settings window is automatically selected.
• When a paper tray is selected
The specified tray is used for printing regardless of the "Paper Size" setting in the page settings window.
For the bypass tray, a paper type can also be specified. Make sure that the paper type setting for the bypass tray is
correct and that the set type of paper is actually loaded in the bypass tray, and then select the appropriate bypass tray
(paper type).
• Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray. For the procedure for loading paper and other
media in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 1-33) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".
• When "Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray" (disabled by factory default) or "Enable Selected Paper Type in
Bypass Tray" (enabled by factory default) is enabled in the system settings (administrator), printing will not take place if the
paper size or paper type specified in the printer driver is different from the paper size or paper type specified in the settings
of the bypass tray.
• When a paper type is selected
A tray with the specified type of paper and the size specified in "Paper Size" in the page settings window is used for
printing.
System Settings (Administrator): Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select
When [Auto Select] is used for printing, this setting determines whether or not the paper in the bypass tray will be excluded
from the paper that can be selected. This setting is disabled by factory default, and thus paper in the bypass tray is included
in the paper that can be automatically selected. If special media are frequently loaded in the bypass tray, it is recommended
that this setting be enabled.
3-20
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING ON ENVELOPES
The bypass tray can be used to print on special media such as envelopes. The procedure for printing on an envelope
from the printer driver properties screen is described below.
For the types of paper that can be used in the bypass tray, see "IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER" (page 1-27) in
"BEFORE USING THE MACHINE". For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN
THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 1-33) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
Select the envelope size in the appropriate settings of the application ("Page Settings" in many applications) and then
perform the following steps.
Select the paper size.
(1)
(1) Select the envelope size from the "Paper
Size" menu on the page setup screen.
In Mac OS 9, select the envelope size from the
"Paper" menu on the page setup screen.
(2) Click the [OK] button.
1
(2)
In the case of media that can only be loaded in a certain orientation such as an envelope, you can rotate the image
180 degrees if needed. For more information, see "ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (Rotate 180
degrees)" (page 3-38).
Select the bypass tray.
(1)
(1) Select [Paper Feed] on the print screen.
In Mac OS 9, select [General].
(2) Select [Bypass Tray(Envelope)] from the
"All pages from" menu.
• In Mac OS 9, select [Bypass Tray(Envelope)] from
the "All pages from" menu of "Paper Source".
• Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Envelope]
and make sure the envelope is loaded in the bypass
tray.
2
(2)
For more information on "Paper Feed", see "SELECTING THE PAPER" (page 3-20).
It is recommended that you do a test print to check the print result before using an envelope.
3-21
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING WHEN THE USER
AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED
When the user authentication function is enabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), you must enter your
user information (login name, password, etc.) in order to print. The information that must be entered varies depending on
the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing.
Select [Print] from the application's
[File] menu.
1
The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.
Display the job handling screen.
(1)
(1) Make sure that the machine's printer
name is selected.
(2) Select [Job Handling].
• In Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.8 and v10.6 to 10.6.2,
select [Job Handling] and then click the
[Authentication] tab in the screen that appears.
• In Mac OS 9, select [User Authentication].
2
(2)
The machine name that appears in the "Printer" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters
that varies depending on the machine model.)
3-22
Contents
PRINTER
Start printing.
(1) Enter your user information.
• When authentication is by login name/password
Enter your login name in "Login Name" and your
password in "Password" (1 to 32 characters).
• When authentication is by user number
Enter your user number (5 to 8 digits) in "User
Number".
(2) Enter the user name and job name as
necessary.
3
(1)
(2)
(3)
• User Name
Enter your user name (maximum of 32 characters).
Your entered user name will appear at the top of the
operation panel. If you do not enter a user name,
your computer login name will appear.
• Job Name
Enter a job name (maximum of 30 characters). The
entered job name will appear at the top of the
operation panel as a file name. If you do not enter a
job name, the file name set in the software
application will appear.
(3) Click the [Print] button.
In Mac OS X, you can click the
(lock) button after entering your login name and password, or user number, to
simplify operation the next time you wish to print based on the same user authentication.
Even when user authentication is enabled in the system settings (administrator), normally printing is possible without
entering user information. The number of pages printed is added to the "Other User" count. In this case, other print functions
may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.
System Settings (Administrator): Disabling of Printing by Invalid User
This is used to prohibit printing of print jobs by users whose user information is not stored in the machine. When this function
is enabled, printing is not allowed when user information is not entered or incorrect information is entered.
3-23
Contents
PRINTER
FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS
This section explains frequently used functions.
• SELECTING A PRINT MODE SETTING
• TWO-SIDED PRINTING (page 3-26)
• FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER (page
3-28)
• PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE (page
3-29)
• STAPLING OUTPUT (page 3-31)
The explanations assume that the paper size and other basic settings have already been selected. For the basic
procedure for printing and the steps for opening the printer driver properties window, see the following section:
☞ Windows: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 3-4)
☞ Macintosh: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 3-17)
In Windows, view printer driver Help for details on printer driver settings for each printing function.
SELECTING A PRINT MODE SETTING
This section explains the procedure for selecting a print mode setting. The "Print Mode Settings" consist of the following
three items:
Normal:
This mode is suitable for printing data such as regular text or a table.
High Quality: The print quality of photos and text is high.
Fine:
Select this when you want to print a photo with greater clarity or print graphics with gradations, etc.
Windows
(This function is not available when using the PCL5e printer driver.)
(1)
(2)
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2) Select the "Print Mode".
3-24
Contents
PRINTER
Macintosh
(1)
(2) (3)
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select [Advanced].
(3) Select the "Print Mode".
3-25
Contents
PRINTER
TWO-SIDED PRINTING
The machine can print on both sides of the paper. This function is useful for many purposes, and is particularly
convenient when you want to create a simple pamphlet. Two-sided printing also helps conserve paper.
Orientation
Print results
Windows
Macintosh
Windows
Macintosh
2-Sided(Book)
Long-edged binding
(Flip on long edge)
2-Sided(Tablet)
Short-edged binding
(Flip on short edge)
Windows
Macintosh
Windows
Macintosh
2-Sided(Book)
Short-edged binding
(Flip on short edge)
2-Sided(Tablet)
Long-edged binding
(Flip on long edge)
Vertical
Horizontal
The pages are printed so that they can be bound at
the side.
The pages are printed so that they can be bound at
the top.
Windows
(1)
(2)
(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select [2-Sided(Book)] or [2-Sided(Tablet)].
3-26
Contents
PRINTER
Macintosh
(1)
(2)
(1) Select [Layout].
(2) Select [Long-edged binding] or
[Short-edged binding].
• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select the settings in
[Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select [Output/Document Style] and
then select [Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short
edge].
3-27
Contents
PRINTER
FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER
This function is used to automatically enlarge or reduce the printed image to match the size of the paper loaded in the
machine.
This is convenient for such purposes as enlarging an invoice or A5 size document to letter or A4 size to make it easier to
view, and to print when the same size of paper as the document image is not loaded in the machine.
Invoice or A5
Letter or A4
The following example explains how to print an invoice size document on letter size paper.
Windows
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(4)
(2) Select the size of the print image (for
example: Invoice).
(3) Select [Fit To Paper Size].
(4) Select the actual paper size to be used for
printing (for example: Letter).
Macintosh
(This function can only be used in Mac OS X v10.4.11, v10.5 to 10.5.8 and v10.6 to 10.6.2.)
(2)
(1)
(1) Select [Paper Handling].
(2) Check the size of the print image (for
example: Invoice).
To change the print image size, use the "Paper Size"
menu that appears when [Page Setup] is selected.
(3) Select [Scale to fit paper size].
(4) Select the actual paper size to be used for
printing (for example: Letter).
(3)
(4)
3-28
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE
This function can be used to reduce the print image and print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
This is convenient when you want to print multiple images such as photos on a single sheet of paper, and when you
want to conserve paper. This function can also be used in combination with two-sided printing for maximum
conservation of paper.
For example, when [2-Up] (2 pages per sheet) and [4-Up] (4 pages per sheet) are selected, the following print results will
be obtained, depending on the order selected.
Print results
N-Up
(Pages per
sheet)
Left To Right
Right To Left
Top To Bottom
(When the print orientation
is landscape)
2-Up
(2 pages per
sheet)
N-Up
(Pages per
sheet)
Right, and Down
Down, and Right
Left, and Down
Down, and Left
4-Up
(4 pages per
sheet)
• The page orders for 6-Up, 8-Up, 9-Up, and 16-Up are the same as for 4-Up.
• In a Windows environment, the page order can be viewed in the print image in the printer driver properties window.
In a Macintosh environment, the page orders are displayed as selections.
• In a Macintosh environment, the number of pages that can be printed on a single sheet is 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16.
3-29
Contents
PRINTER
Windows
(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(1)
(2) Select the number of pages per sheet.
(3) If you wish to print borderlines, click the
[Border] checkbox so that a checkmark
appears.
(4) Select the order of the pages.
(2) (3)
(4)
Macintosh
(1)
(1) Select [Layout].
(2)
(2) Select the number of pages per sheet.
(3) Select the order of the pages.
(4) If you wish to print borderlines, select the
desired type of borderline.
(4)
(3)
3-30
Contents
PRINTER
STAPLING OUTPUT
The staple function can be used to staple output.
This function saves considerable time when preparing handouts for a meeting or other stapled materials. The staple
function can also be used in combination with two-sided printing to create materials with a more sophisticated
appearance.
Stapling positions can be selected to obtain the following stapling results.
* Stapling takes place in one location only.
Orientation
Left
Right
Top
Vertical
Horizontal
• To use the staple function, a finisher is required.
• For the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled, see "PERIPHERAL DEVICES" (page 1-43) in "1. BEFORE
USING THE MACHINE". The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled at once includes any covers and/or inserts
that are inserted.
• The staple function cannot be used in combination with the offset function, which offsets the position of each output job
from the previous job.
• When the staple function is disabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), stapling is not possible.
3-31
Contents
PRINTER
Windows
(1)
(3)
(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2)
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the staple function.
For the staple function, select the number of staples in
the "Staple" menu.
Macintosh
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the staple function.
For the staple function, select the number of staples in
the "Staple" menu.
• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select the settings in
[Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select the settings in
[Output/Document Style].
3-32
Contents
PRINTER
CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS
This section explains convenient functions for specific printing objectives.
• CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING
PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS
• FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND
ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE (page 3-38)
• IMAGE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION (page 3-42)
• FUNCTIONS THAT COMBINE TEXT AND IMAGES
(page 3-44)
• PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL PURPOSES
(page 3-47)
• CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS (page 3-52)
The explanations assume that the paper size and other basic settings have already been selected. For the basic
procedure for printing and the steps for opening the printer driver properties window, see the following section:
☞ Windows: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 3-4)
☞ Macintosh: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 3-17)
In Windows, view printer driver Help for details on printer driver settings for each printing function.
3-33
Contents
PRINTER
CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING
PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS
CREATING A PAMPHLET (Pamphlet)
The pamphlet function prints on the front and back of
each sheet of paper so that the sheets can be folded and
bound to create a pamphlet. This is convenient when
you wish to compile printed output into a pamphlet.
Windows
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select [Pamphlet Style].
(3) Select the "Binding Edge".
3-34
Contents
PRINTER
Macintosh
(1)
(2)
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select [Tiled Pamphlet] or [2-Up Pamphlet].
• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select from the "2-Side
Printing" and "Binding Edge" menus in [Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select the settings in
[Output/Document Style].
(3)
3-35
Contents
PRINTER
INCREASING THE MARGIN (Margin Shift)
This function is used to shift the print image to increase
the margin at the left, right, or top of the paper. This is
convenient when you wish to staple or punch the output
but the binding area overlaps the text. When a finisher is
installed, the staple function can be used with this
function.
Windows
(1)
(2)
(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the "Margin Shift".
Select from the "Margin Shift" menu. If you wish to
configure another numeric setting, select the setting from
the pull-down menu and click the [Settings] button. Click
the
button or directly enter the number.
(3)
Macintosh
(1)
(2)
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the "Margin Shift".
• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select from the "Binding
Edge" and "Margin Shift" menus in [Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select [Advanced] and then select the
binding edge and margin shift from the margin shift
menu.
(3)
3-36
Contents
PRINTER
CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Poster Printing)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
One page of print data can be enlarged and printed
using multiple sheets of paper (4 sheets (2 x 2), 9 sheets
(3 x 3) or 16 sheets (4 x 4)). The sheets can then be
attached together to create a large poster. To enable
precise alignment of the edges of the sheets during
attachment, borderlines can be printed and overlapping
edges can be created (overlap function).
Windows
(This function can be used when the PCL6 or PS printer driver is used.)
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(1)
(2) Select the [Poster Printing] checkbox
and click the [Poster Settings] button.
(3) Select poster settings.
Select the number of sheets of paper to be used from the
pull-down menu. If you wish to print borderlines and/or
use the overlap function, select the corresponding
checkboxes
.
(2)
(3)
3-37
Contents
PRINTER
FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND
ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE
ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES
(Rotate 180 degrees)
This feature rotates the image 180 degrees so that it can
be printed correctly on paper that can only be loaded in
one orientation (such as envelopes or paper with punch
holes). (In Mac OS X, a portrait image cannot be rotated
180 degrees.)
ABCD
ABCD
Windows
(1)
(1) Select the setting on the [Main] tab.
(2)
(2) Select the [Rotate 180 degrees] checkbox
.
Macintosh
(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and click the
button.
In Mac OS 9, select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and select [PostScript Options]. Then select the [Flip
Horizontal] and [Flip Vertical] checkbox
.
(2) Click the [OK] button.
(1)
(2)
3-38
Contents
PRINTER
ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE
(Zoom/XY-Zoom)
This function is used to enlarge or reduce the image to a
selected percentage. This allows you to enlarge a small
image or add margins to the paper by slightly reducing
an image.
When using the PS printer driver (Windows), you can set
the width and length percentages separately to change
the proportions of the image. (XY-Zoom)
Windows
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(1)
(2) Select [Zoom] and click the [Settings]
button.
The actual paper size to be used for printing can be
selected from the pull-down menu.
(3) Select the zoom ratio.
Directly enter a number (%) or click the
button to
change the ratio in increments of 1%. You can also select
[Upper Left] or [Center] for the base point on the paper.
(2)
(3)
Macintosh
(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and enter the ratio (%).
In Mac OS 9, select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and enter the ratio (%).
(2) Click the [OK] button.
(1)
(2)
3-39
Contents
PRINTER
ADJUSTING LINE WIDTHS WHEN PRINTING
(Line Width Settings)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
When lines in special applications such as CAD cannot
be printed correctly, this setting can be used to adjust
line widths, such as making overall line widths wider.
(This setting is only effective for vector data; raster data
such as bitmap images cannot be adjusted.) When the
data includes lines of varying widths, you can also print
all lines at the minimum width.
Windows
(This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.)
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(1)
(2) Adjust the line width.
Select a number from the pull-down menu.
• The units of line-width adjustment can be set to
"Fixed Width" or "Ratio". Click the [Compatibility]
button and select the units from the "Line Width
Unit" menu.
• To print all lines in the data at the minimum line
width, click the [Compatibility] button and select the
[Minimum Line Width] checkbox ( ).
(2)
3-40
Contents
PRINTER
REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image)
The image can be reversed to create a mirror image.
This function can be used to conveniently print a design
for a woodblock print or other printing medium.
B
B
Windows
(This function can be used when the PS printer driver is used.)
(1)
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2)
(2) Select a mirror image setting.
If you wish to reverse the image horizontally, select
[Horizontal]. If you wish to reverse the image vertically,
select [Vertical].
Macintosh
(This function can only be used in Mac OS 9.)
(1)
(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and select [PostScript Options].
(2)
(2) Select "Visual Effects".
To reverse the image horizontally, select [Flip Horizontal].
To reverse the image vertically, select [Flip Vertical].
(3) Click the [OK] button.
(3)
3-41
Contents
PRINTER
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION
ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF
THE IMAGE (Image Adjustment)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
The brightness and contrast can be adjusted in the print settings when printing a photo or other image. These settings
can be used for simple corrections when you do not have image editing software installed on your computer.
Windows
(This function is not available when using the PCL5e printer driver.)
(1)
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2)
(2) Click the [Image Adjustment] button.
(3) Adjust the image settings.
To adjust a setting, drag the slide bar
or
button.
or click the
(3)
3-42
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK
(Text To Black/Vector To Black)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
When printing a color image, color text and lines that are
faint can be printed in black. (Raster data such as bitmap
images cannot be adjusted.) This allows you to bring out
color text and lines that are faint and difficult to see.
ABCD
ABCD
• [Text To Black] can be selected to print all text other
than white text in black.
• [Vector To Black] can be selected to print all vector
graphics other than white lines and areas in black.
Windows
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(1)
(2) Select the [Text To Black] checkbox
and/or the [Vector To Black] checkbox
(2)
3-43
Contents
.
PRINTER
FUNCTIONS THAT COMBINE TEXT AND
IMAGES
ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED PAGES
(Watermark)
CO
NF
ID
EN
TI
AL
Faint shadow-like text can be added to the background
of the printed image as a watermark. The size, angle,
and print position of the watermark text can be adjusted.
The text can be selected from a pre-stored list, or
entered to create an original watermark.
Windows
(1)
(2)
(1) Click the [Watermarks] tab.
(2) Select the watermark settings.
Select a stored water mark from the pull-down menu. You
can click the [Edit] button to edit the font and select other
detailed settings.
If you wish to create a new watermark...
Enter the text of the watermark in the "Text" box and
click the [Add] button.
Macintosh
(2)
(1)
(1) Select [Watermarks].
(2) Click the [Watermark] checkbox and
configure watermark settings.
Detailed watermark settings can be configured such as
selection of the text and editing of the font. Adjust the size
and angle of the text by dragging the slide bar
.
In Mac OS 9, select [Watermark] and configure the
settings.
3-44
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT DATA
(Image Stamp)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
A bitmap or JPEG image stored on your computer can
be printed over the print data. The size, position, and
angle of the image can be adjusted. This feature can be
used to "stamp" the print data with a frequently used
image or an icon of your own creation.
MEMO
MEMO
Windows
(This function can be used when the PCL6 or PS printer driver is used.)
(1)
(2)
(1) Click the [Watermarks] tab.
(2) Select the image stamp setting.
If an image stamp has already been stored, it can be
selected from the pull-down menu.
If you have not stored an image stamp, click the [Image
File], select the file you wish to use for the image stamp,
and click the [Add] button.
3-45
Contents
PRINTER
CREATING OVERLAYS FOR PRINT DATA (Overlays)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
The print data can be printed in a previously created
overlay. By creating table rulings or a decorative frame
in an application different from that of the text file and
registering the data as an overlay file, an attractive print
result can be easily obtained without the need for
complex manipulations.
XXXX
XXX
XXXX
XXX
XXXX
XXXX
1
10
0
10
100
150
120
250
XXX
XXXX
XXX
XXXX
1
10
0
10
100
150
120
250
Overlay file
Windows
Create an overlay file.
(1)
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2)
Configure the printer driver settings from the software
application that you wish to use to create the overlay file.
(2) Click the [Edit] button.
(3) Create an overlay file.
Click the [Create Overlay] button and specify the name
and folder to be used for the overlay file that you wish to
create. The file will be created when the settings are
completed and printing is started.
(3)
• When printing is started, a confirmation message
will appear. The overlay file will not be created until
the [Yes] button is clicked.
• To register a previously existing overlay file, click
the [Load Overlay] button.
Printing with an overlay file
(1)
(2)
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
Configure the printer driver settings from the application
from which you wish to print using the overlay file.
(2) Select the overlay file.
A previously created or stored overlay file can be selected
from the pull-down menu.
3-46
Contents
PRINTER
PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL
PURPOSES
PRINTING SPECIFIED PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPER
(Different Paper)
• Using this function in a Windows environment
The front and back cover and specified pages of a
document can be printed on paper that is different
from the other pages. Use this function when you wish
to print the front and back cover on heavy paper, or
insert colored paper or a different paper type at
specified pages. You can also insert paper as an
insert without printing on it.
1
2
3
4
5
• Using this function in a Macintosh environment
The front cover and last page can be printed using
paper that is different from the other pages. This
function can be used, for example, when you want to
print only the front cover and last page on thick paper.
Windows
(1)
(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.
(2)
(2) Select [Different Paper] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select paper insertion settings.
Select the insertion position, paper source, and printing
method from the corresponding menus. Click the [Add]
button to show the selected settings in "Information".
When you have completed the settings, click the [Save]
button in "User Settings" to save the settings.
• When [Bypass Tray] is selected in "Paper Source",
be sure to select the "Paper Type" and load that
type of paper in the bypass tray.
(3)
• About paper insertion settings
When [Other Page] is selected for "Insert Position",
the insert position can be specified by directly
entering a page number. However, inserts cannot
be successively inserted at the same page. When
"Printing Method" is set to [2-Sided], the specified
page and the next page after it will be printed on the
front and reverse side of the paper, and thus an
insert setting at a page printed on the reverse side
will not be effective.
3-47
Contents
PRINTER
Macintosh
(This function can only be used in Mac OS 9, Mac OS X v10.4.11, v10.5 to 10.5.8 and v10.6 to 10.6.2.)
(1)
(2) (3)
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select [Different Paper].
(3) Select cover insertion settings.
Select the print setting, paper tray, and paper type for the
cover page and last page.
In Mac OS 9, select [Different Paper] and then select
the settings for the cover page and last page.
3-48
Contents
PRINTER
ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency Inserts)
When printing on transparency film, this function helps
prevent the sheets of transparency film from sticking
together by inserting a sheet of paper between each
sheet of film. It is also possible to print the same content
on each inserted sheet of paper as is printed on the
corresponding sheet of transparency film.
A B C
Windows
(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.
(1)
(2) Select [Transparency Inserts] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select transparency insert settings.
To print the same content on the insert as is printed on
the sheet of transparency film, select the [Printed]
checkbox
. Select the paper source and type if
needed.
(2)
Set [Transparency] for the "Paper Type" of the bypass
tray.
(3)
Macintosh
(1)
(2) (3)
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select [Transparency Inserts].
(3) Select transparency insert settings.
To print the same content on the insert as is printed on the
sheet of transparency film, select [Print] in "Transparency
Inserts". Select the paper source and type if needed.
• Set [Transparency] for the "Paper Type" of the
bypass tray.
• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select the [Transparency
Inserts] checkbox
in [Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select [Transparency Inserts] and
select from the "Transparency Inserts" menu. Select
the paper source and type if needed.
3-49
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING A CARBON COPY (Carbon Copy)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
This function is used to print an additional copy of the
print image on paper that is the same size but from a
different paper tray.
For example, if carbon copy print is selected when
standard paper is loaded in tray 1 and colored paper is
loaded in tray 2, a print result similar to a carbon copy
slip can be obtained with a single selection of the print
command. As another example, if standard paper is
loaded in tray 1 and recycled paper is loaded in tray 2,
Carbon Copy can simultaneously print one copy for
presentation and one copy as a duplicate.
A
AAA
Windows
(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.
(1)
(2) Select [Carbon Copy] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select the carbon copy settings.
Select the tray for the "Top Copy" and then select the tray
for the carbon copy (or copies) in "Carbon Copy".
When the bypass tray is selected, be sure to select
the "Paper Type".
(2)
(3)
3-50
Contents
PRINTER
TWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC PAGES PRINTED
ON THE FRONT SIDE (Chapter Inserts)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
You can have specific pages printed on the front side of
the paper.
When a page (such as the first page of a chapter) is
specified as a front side page, the page will be printed on
the front side of the paper even if would normally be
printed on the reverse side (the reverse side will be left
blank and the page will be printed on the front side of the
next sheet of paper).
Example:
When pages 4 and 8 are specified as page settings.
Back is blank
Windows
(This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.)
(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.
(1)
(2) Select [Chapter Inserts] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select the chapter settings.
Enter the page numbers that are to begin chapters in
"Page Settings". Click the [Add] button and your settings
will appear in "Information". When you have finished
selecting settings, click the [Save] button in "User
Settings" to save the settings.
(2)
(3)
3-51
Contents
PRINTER
CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS
SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES (Retention/Document Filing)
This function is used to store a print job as a file on the
machine's hard drive, allowing the job to be printed from
the operation panel when needed. The location for
storing a file can be selected to prevent the file from
being mixed together with files of other users.
When printing from a computer, a password (5 to 8
digits) can be set to maintain the secrecy of information
in a stored file.
When a password is set, the password must be entered
to print a stored file from the machine.
HDD
Hold Only
This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine's hard drive without printing it.
Hold After Print
This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine's hard drive after it is printed.
Sample Print
When a print job is sent to the machine, only the first set of copies is printed. After checking the contents of the first set
of copies, you can print the remaining sets from the operation panel of the machine. This prevents the occurrence of
excessive misprints.
To print files stored on the machine's hard drive, see "PRINTING A STORED FILE" (page 6-32) in "6. DOCUMENT FILING".
3-52
Contents
PRINTER
Windows
(1)
(2)
(1) Click the [Job Handling] tab.
(2) Select the retention setting.
Click the [Retention] checkbox
. Select the retention
method in "Retention Settings". To enter a password (5 to
8 digit number), click the [Password] checkbox
.
(3) Select document filing settings.
Select the folder for storing the file in "Document Filing
Settings". If you selected [Custom Folder], click the
[Stored to] button to select the folder.
• When [Quick File] is selected, "Retention Settings"
will be set to [Hold After Print] only.
• When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered
in "Retention Settings" is cleared and cannot be used.
• To store a file in a custom folder, the custom folder
must first be created using "Document Filing Control"
in the system settings (administrator). If a password
has been established for a custom folder, enter the
"Folder Password" in the folder selection screen.
(3)
• When [Retention] has been checked on [Printing
Policy] in the [Configuration] tab, the [Retention]
checkbox is always checked and you cannot change
the checkbox.
• In an IPV6 environment, files can only be stored in
the main folder.
3-53
Contents
PRINTER
Macintosh
(2)
(1)
(1) Select [Job Handling].
(2) Select the retention setting.
Click the [Retention] checkbox
. Select the retention
method in "Retention Settings". To simplify operation the
next time the same password is set, click the
(lock)
button after entering the password (5 to 8 digit number).
(3) Select document filing settings.
Select the folder for storing the file in "Document Filing
Settings". If you selected [Custom Folder], click the
[Stored to] button to select the folder.
• When [Quick File] is selected, "Retention Settings"
will be set to [Hold After Print] only.
• When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered
in "Retention Settings" is cleared and cannot be
used.
(3)
• To store a file in a custom folder, the custom folder
must first be created using "Document Filing
Control" in the system settings (administrator). If a
password has been established for a custom folder,
enter the "Folder Password" in the folder selection
screen.
• In Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.8 and v10.6 to 10.6.2, if
you wish to store document filing settings in a
custom folder, click the [Custom Folder] tab.
• In Mac OS 9, select [Job Handling] and then select
the retention setting. (The document filing function
cannot be used.)
Automatically print all stored data
When user authentication is enabled in the system settings (administrator), all retained (stored) print jobs of a user who
logs in can be printed automatically after log in.
After all jobs are printed, the files are deleted.
To use the print all function, the following steps are necessary:
• "Automatically print stored jobs after login" must be enabled in the system settings (administrator) of the machine.
• At the time of retention print, in addition to user authentication information, the user name stored in the machine
must be entered in "User Name" of the job ID in the printer driver.
☞ Windows: PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED (page 3-8)
☞ Macintosh: PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED (page 3-22)
(1) Log into the machine.
Enter your user number or login name and password in the user authentication screen of the machine.
(2) Perform print all.
A confirmation prompt will appear. Touch the [OK] key. The print files stored in the quick file folder, main folder, and custom
folder will be printed automatically and then deleted.
Files with a password and files that are protected by the document filing function of the machine will not be printed. Files in a
folder (excluding My Folder) that has a password will also not be printed.
If you do not wish to "print all"...
Touch the [Cancel] key in step (2).
3-54
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER
DRIVER
When you do not have the printer driver installed on your computer, or when the software application used to open a file
that you wish to print is not available, you can print directly to the machine without using the printer driver.
The file types (and corresponding extensions) that can be printed directly are shown below.
File Type
TIFF
JPEG
PCL
PDF/
Encrypted
PDF
PS
XPS
Extension
tiff, tif
jpeg, jpg,
jpe, jfif
pcl
pdf
ps
xps
• To print XPS files, the XPS expansion kit must be installed.
• Depending on the file type, it may not be possible to print some files in the above table.
DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM THE MACHINE
A file on an FTP server, in a network folder or in a USB memory device connected to the machine can be selected and
printed from the operation panel of the machine without using the printer driver.
3-55
Contents
PRINTER
DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP SERVER
When an FTP server is configured in the machine's Web pages, you can specify and print a file on the FTP server from
the operation panel of the machine. This saves you the trouble of downloading the file and printing it from a computer.
For the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the Start Guide.
To configure FTP server settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Setting for Print from the MFP(FTP)] in the Web page
menu. (Administrator rights are required.) Up to 20 FTP servers can be configured.
(1)
COPY
IMAGE SEND
(2)
Access the FTP server.
(3)
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
DOCUMENT
FILING
(2) Touch the [Ex Data Access] tab.
File Retrieve
Scan to HDD
HDD Status
Ex Data Access
(3) Touch the [FTP] key.
External Data Access
The [FTP] key cannot be touched when any FTP server
has not been configured.
1
FTP
USB Memory
Network Folder
File Retrieve
Scan to HDD
HDD Status
Touch the key of the FTP server that you
wish to access.
Ex Data Access
Back
FTP
Server 1
2
Server 2
1
Server 3
3
Server 4
Server 5
Server 6
Server 7
Touch the key of the file that you wish to
print.
Server 1
File or Folder Name
• The
icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be
printed.
• The
icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders on the
FTP server. To display the files and folders in a folder, touch
the key of the folder.
File-01.tiff
Folder01
1
1
File-02.tiff
File-03.tiff
Folder02
File-04.tiff
3
File-05.tiff
• A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.
• Touch the
key to move up one folder level.
• When you move down a folder level by touching a folder key, the
key appears in the top right corner of the
screen. Touch this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen.
• Touch the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.
3-56
Contents
PRINTER
Cancel
Print
File-01.tiff
Print the selected file.
(1) Select print conditions.
If you selected a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) in step 3 that
includes print settings, the settings will be applied.
Paper Select
Number of Prints
Auto
4
1
(1 999)
(2) Touch the [Print] key.
Output
Fit To Page
Printing begins. When the message appears in the touch
panel, touch the [OK] key.
2-Sided
Quick File
Print
(1)
(2)
When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
☞ PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 3-67)
DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB MEMORY
A file in a USB memory device connected to the machine can be printed from the operation panel of the machine without
using the printer driver. When the printer driver of the machine is not installed on your computer, you can copy a file into
a commercially available USB memory device and connect the device to the machine to print the file directly.
Connect the USB memory device to the
machine.
1
Use a FAT32 USB memory with a capacity of no more than 32 GB.
(1)
COPY
IMAGE SEND
(2)
(3)
Access the USB memory device.
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
DOCUMENT
FILING
(2) Touch the [Ex Data Access] tab.
File Retrieve
Scan to HDD
HDD Status
Ex Data Access
(3) Touch the [USB Memory] key.
External Data Access
2
FTP
USB Memory
Network Folder
3-57
Contents
PRINTER
Touch the key of the file that you wish to
print.
USB Memory
File or Folder Name
File-01.tiff
• The
icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be
printed.
• The
icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the
USB memory. To display the files and folders in a folder,
touch the key of the folder.
1
Folder01
1
File-02.tiff
File-03.tiff
Folder02
File-04.tiff
3
File-05.tiff
• A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.
• Touch the
key to move up one folder level.
• When you move down a folder level by touching a folder key, the
key appears in the top right corner of the
screen. Touch this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen.
• Touch the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.
Cancel
Print
File-01.tiff
Print the selected file.
(1) Select print conditions.
If you selected a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) in step 3 that
includes print settings, the settings will be applied.
Paper Select
Auto
Number of Prints
1
(1 999)
(2) Touch the [Print] key.
Output
4
Fit To Page
Printing begins after the selected file is transferred. When
the message appears in the touch panel, touch the [OK]
key.
2-Sided
Quick File
Print
(1)
(2)
To cancel printing...
To cancel printing while the file is being transferred, touch the [Cancel] key in the message screen that appears in the
touch panel.
Remove the USB memory device from
the machine.
5
When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
☞ PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 3-67)
3-58
Contents
PRINTER
DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A NETWORK FOLDER
You can use the machine's operation panel to select and print a file on a server or in a shared folder of an individual's
computer on the same network as the machine.
(1)
COPY
IMAGE SEND
(2)
(3)
Access the network.
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
DOCUMENT
FILING
(2) Touch the [Ex Data Access] tab.
File Retrieve
Scan to HDD
HDD Status
Ex Data Access
(3) Touch the [Network Folder] key.
External Data Access
1
FTP
USB Memory
Network Folder
3-59
Contents
PRINTER
Select workgroup.
Access the network folder.
Search
(1) Touch the key of the workgroup that you
wish to access.
Workgroup
Workgroup Name
1
Work 1
17
Work 2
Work 3
Work 4
Work 5
Work 6
Select server.
(2) Touch the key of the server or computer
that you wish to access.
Search
Server
If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name
and password, check with your server administrator and
enter the appropriate user name and password.
Work 1
Server Name
1
Server 1
17
Server 2
Server 3
Server 4
Server 5
Server 6
2
Select network folder.
(3) Touch the key of the network folder.
Search
Network Folder
\\Server 1
Network Folder Name
1
User 1
17
User 2
User 3
User 4
User 5
User 6
• You can touch the [Search] key and enter a keyword to search for a workgroup, server, or network folder. For the
procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-76) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
• Up to 100 workgroups, 100 servers, and 100 network folders can be displayed.
• Touch the
key to move up one folder level.
• To return to the workgroup selection screen, touch the
key.
• To change the sorting order of the displayed keys, touch the key that shows
or
in each screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.
• To go to a particular page, touch the
number.
1
key that shows the current page number and enter the desired page
3-60
Contents
PRINTER
Touch the key of the file that you wish to
print.
\\Server 1\User 1
File or Folder Name
File-01.tiff
• The
icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be
printed.
• The
icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the
network folder. To display the files and folders in a folder,
touch the key of the folder.
1
Folder01
15
File-02.tiff
File-03.tiff
Folder02
File-04.tiff
3
File-05.tiff
• A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.
• Touch the
key to move up one folder level.
• To return to the network folder selection screen, touch the
key.
• Touch the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.
Cancel
Print
File-01.tiff
Print the selected file.
(1) Select print conditions.
If you selected a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) in step 3 that
includes print settings, the settings will be applied.
Paper Select
Auto
4
Number of Prints
1
(1 999)
(2) Touch the [Print] key.
Output
Fit To Page
Printing begins after the selected file is transferred. When
the message appears in the touch panel, touch the [OK]
key.
2-Sided
Quick File
Print
(1)
(2)
When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
☞ PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 3-67)
3-61
Contents
PRINTER
DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER
Settings can be configured in the Web pages of the machine to enable direct printing from a computer without using the
printer driver. For the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the Start Guide.
SUBMIT PRINT JOB
You can specify a file to be printed directly without using the printer driver.
In addition to a file on your computer, this procedure can be used to print any file that can be accessed from your
computer, such as a file on another computer connected to the same network.
To directly print a file on a computer, click [Document Operations] and then [Submit Print Job] in the Web page menu.
FTP PRINT
You can print a file from your computer by simply dragging and dropping the file onto the FTP server of the machine.
• Configuring settings
To enable FTP Print, click [Application Settings] and then [Setting for Print from the PC] in the Web page menu, and
configure the port number. (Administrator rights are required.)
• Performing FTP Print
Type "ftp://" and then the IP address of the machine in the address bar of your computer's Web browser as shown
below.
(Example)
ftp://192.168.1.28
Drag and drop the file that you wish to print onto the "lp" folder that appears in your Web browser. The file will
automatically begin printing.
• If you printed a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) that includes print settings, the settings will be applied.
• When user authentication is enabled in the system settings (administrator) of the machine, the print function may be
restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.
3-62
Contents
PRINTER
E-MAIL PRINT
An e-mail account can be configured in the machine to have the machine periodically check your mail server and
automatically print received e-mail attachments without using the printer driver.
• Configuring settings
To use E-mail Print, you must first configure an e-mail account in the machine. To configure an account, click
[Application Settings] and then [E-mail Print Settings] in the Web page menu. (Administrator rights are required.) For
the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the Start Guide.
• Using E-mail Print
To print a file using E-mail Print, use your e-mail program on your computer to send the file as an attachment to the
machine's e-mail address.
Control commands can be entered in the message of the e-mail to specify the number of copies and print format.
Commands are entered in the format "command name=value".
As an example, the control commands include the following:
Function
Command name
Values
Copies
COPIES
1-999
Staples*1
STAPLEOPTION
NONE, ONE
Output
COLLATE
OFF, ON
2-sided print
DUPLEX
OFF, TOP, LEFT, RIGHT
Account
number*2
ACCOUNTNUMBER
Number (5 to 8 digits)
File type
LANGUAGE
PCL, PCLXL, POSTSCRIPT, PDF, TIFF,
JPG, XPS
Paper
PAPER
Name of available paper (LETTER, A4, etc.)
Document Filing
FILE
OFF, ON
FOLDERNAME
Maximum of 28 characters
Quick File
QUICKFILE
OFF, ON
Fit to page
FITIMAGETOPAGE
OFF, ON
Example
COPIES=2
DUPLEX=LEFT
ACCOUNTNUMBER=11111
PAPER=LETTER
*1 Only effective when a finisher is installed.
*2 Can be omitted except when authentication is by user number.
• Enter the commands in Plain Text format. If entered in Rich Text format (HTML), the commands will have no effect.
• To receive a list of the control commands, enter the command "Config" in the e-mail message.
• If nothing is entered in the body text (message) of the e-mail, printing will take place according to the "Printer Default
Settings" in the system settings. If you printed a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) that includes print settings, the settings will be
applied.
• Only enter a "File type" when you are specifying a page-description language. Normally there is no need to enter a file
type.
3-63
Contents
PRINTER
CHECKING THE PRINT STATUS
JOB STATUS SCREEN
The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.
Print Job
JOB STATUS
Scan to
Fax Job
Job Queue
Sets / Progress
1
Computer01
002 / 001
Internet Fax
Status
Spool
Printing
2
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
3
Copy
020 / 000
Waiting
4
0312345678
001 / 000
Waiting
Job Queue
Complete
1
1
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
The job status display (A) is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the
job status screen. You can check the first four print jobs in the print queue (the job in progress and reserved jobs) in the job
status display (B).
Ready to scan for copy.
Job Status
MFP Status
Special Modes
020/001
2-Sided Copy
Copying
Output
002/000
Plain
8½x11
Exposure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Auto
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
File
Quick File
Waiting
002/000
Waiting
Copy Ratio
100%
Original
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
001/000
Waiting
Tray1
(A)
(B)
3-64
Contents
PRINTER
SPOOL SCREEN/JOB QUEUE SCREEN/COMPLETED
JOB SCREEN
The job status screen consists of the job queue screen that shows copy and print jobs waiting to be printed and the job
currently in progress, the completed job screen that shows jobs that have been completed, and the spool screen that
shows print jobs that have been spooled and encrypted PDF jobs that are waiting for a password to be entered.
(1)
Scan to
Print Job
Job Queue
(3)
Internet Fax
Fax Job
Sets / Progress
Status
Spool
Computer01
020 / ---
Rendering
Computer02
020 / ---
Spooling
Computer03
--- / ---
Spooling
Computer04
--- / ---
Spooling
Computer05
002 / ---
Encrypt PDF
Job Queue
1
(2)
Complete
1
Stop/Delete
Print Job
(4)
Scan to
Fax Job
Internet Fax
Job Queue
Sets / Progress
Status
1
Computer01
002 / 001
Printing
2
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
3
Copy
020 / 000
Waiting
4
0312345678
001 / 000
Waiting
Print Job
Job Queue
1
Complete
1
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
(1)
(2)
Mode select tabs
(5)
(6)
(7)
(6)
(7)
Job status screen selector key
(8)
Job list (spool screen)
Job list (job queue screen)
Jobs waiting to be printed appear in the job queue as
keys. The jobs are printed in order from the top of the
queue. Each job key shows information on the job and
the current status of the job.
(5)
Sets
Internet Fax
Status
1
Computer02
11:00 04/01 001/001 OK
2
Computer03
10:33 04/01 010/010 OK
3
Computer04
10:31 04/01 013/013 OK
4
file-01
10:30 04/01 010/010 OK
5
Copy
10:13 04/01 001/001 OK
6
Copy
10:03 04/01 001/001 OK
7
Computer05
10:01 04/01 003/003 OK
8
Copy
10:00 04/01 010/010 OK
Spool
Job Queue
1
Complete
2
(8)
Detail
(9)
Call
(10)
[Priority] key
[Stop/Delete] key
Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job.
Job list (completed jobs screen)
This shows up to 99 completed jobs. The result (status)
of each completed job is shown.
(9)
[Detail] key (completed jobs screen)
When a job is shown as a key in the job list, the [Detail]
key can be touched to show detailed information on the
job.
Spooled print jobs and encrypted PDF print jobs that
require a password to be entered are displayed.
(4)
Fax Job
Set Time
Touch this key to give priority to a selected job.
Use these tabs to select the mode that is shown in the
job status screen.
The status of print jobs can be checked by touching the
[Print Job] tab.
Touch this key to switch through the job queue screen,
the completed jobs screen, and the spool screen.
(3)
Scan to
Jobs Completed
Spool
(10) [Call] key
Touch this key to retrieve and use a print job stored using
the document filing function.
[Detail] key (job queue screen)
Touch this key to display detailed information on a job.
3-65
Contents
PRINTER
Job key display
Each job key shows the position of the job in the job queue and the current status of the job.
2
(1)
(1)
Computer01
(2)
002/000
(3)
(4)
(6)
Indicates the number (position) of the job in the job
queue.
(4)
Status
Message
Status
"Printing"
Printing is in progress.
"Waiting"
The job is waiting to be executed.
"Toner
Empty"
The toner cartridge is out of toner.
Replace the toner cartridge with a
new cartridge.
The computer login name of the user will appear in the
print job.
A "User Name" can be entered in the printer driver to
display the name of the user who executed the job.
"Paper
Empty"
The paper used for the job has run
out. Add paper or change to a
different paper tray.
Number of sets entered
"Limit"
The printing page limit has been
exceeded. Check with the
administrator of the machine.
"Error"
An error occurred while the job was
being executed. Clear the error
condition.
"Rendering"
Analyzing print data.
"Spooling"
Print data is being received or a job is
waiting for analysis after being
spooled.
"Encrypt
PDF"
Upon analysis, if a spooled job is
found to be an encrypted PDF, it
changes to the password entry wait
state.
Mode icon
The
(3)
icon appears when the job is a print job.
User name
This shows the number of sets specified.
(5)
(6)
Shows the job status.
When the job currently being printed is finished, the job
moves up one position in the job queue.
This number does not appear in keys in the completed
jobs screen.
(2)
(5)
Waiting
Number of completed sets
This shows the number of sets completed. "000" appears
while the job is waiting in the job queue.
3-66
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE
Encrypted PDF is used to protect a PDF file by requiring the entry of a password to print or edit the file. To directly print
an encrypted PDF file on an FTP server or in a USB memory device, etc. connected to the machine, follow the steps
below to enter the password and begin printing.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
JOB STATUS
1
(1)
(3)
Scan to
Print Job
Job Queue
2
Status
Computer01
020 / ---
Rendering
Computer02
020 / ---
Spooling
Computer03
--- / ---
Spooling
Computer04
--- / ---
Spooling
Computer05
002 / ---
Encrypt PDF
Spool
Job Queue
1
Select the encrypted PDF print job.
(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.
Internet Fax
Fax Job
Sets / Progress
(2)
Complete
(2) Change the print job status mode to
[Spool].
1
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
Stop/Delete
(3) Touch the print job key of the PDF file that
has the password.
Touch the [Yes] key.
Enter the password?
3
A text entry screen appears. Enter the password (32 characters
or less) and touch the [OK] key. The print job is released and
moved to the [Job Queue].
No
Yes
When both a master password and a user password (which is used to open the file) have been set, enter the master
password.
• To print an encrypted PDF file using the printer driver, enter the password when opening the file on your computer.
• Printing is not possible if you do not know the password for an encrypted PDF file. To delete a spooled print job, touch the
[No] key in the screen of step 3 and touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
• Encrypted PDF versions that can be directly printed are 1.6 (Adobe® Acrobat® 7.0) and earlier.
3-67
Contents
PRINTER
GIVING A PRINT JOB
PRIORITY/CANCELING A PRINT JOB
GIVING A PRINT JOB PRIORITY
When the machine is busy copying or printing a received fax or other job, you can give priority to a print job that is
waiting to be printed and print it ahead of the other jobs.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
JOB STATUS
1
(2)
(1)
Print Job
Job Queue
2
Scan to
Sets / Progress
(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.
Internet Fax
Fax Job
Status
Spool
Computer01
020 / 001
Printing
Computer02
020 / 000
Waiting
0312345678
002 / 000
Waiting
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
Job Queue
1
Complete
002 / 000
Waiting
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
Queue].
1
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
Detail
Copy
Give the desired job priority.
Priority
Stop/Delete
(3) Touch the key of the print job to which you
want to give priority.
(4) Touch the [Priority] key.
(3)
(4)
The job being printed stops and the job selected in (3) is
printed.
To check print information on the selected job, touch the [Detail] key.
3-68
Contents
PRINTER
CANCELING A PRINT JOB
A job being printed, a job waiting to be printed, or a spooled job can be canceled.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
JOB STATUS
1
(2)
(1)
Print Job
Job Queue
Scan to
Sets / Progress
(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.
Internet Fax
Fax Job
Status
Spool
Computer01
020 / 001
Printing
Computer02
020 / 000
Waiting
0312345678
002 / 000
Waiting
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
Job Queue
1
Complete
002 / 000
Waiting
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Spool]
or [Job Queue].
1
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
Detail
Copy
Cancel the job.
Priority
Stop/Delete
(3) Touch the key of the print job that you wish
to cancel.
(4) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
(3)
2
(4)
(5) A message appears to confirm the
cancelation. Touch the [Yes] key.
Delete the job?
Computer02
No
Yes
The selected job key is deleted and printing is canceled.
It is also possible to cancel printing with the [STOP] key (
) on the operation panel. When the [STOP] key (
pressed, a message will appear asking you if you want to cancel the job.
If you do not want to cancel the selected print job...
Touch the [No] key in step (5).
3-69
Contents
) is
PRINTER
CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND
PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT
If printing stops because the machine ran out of paper, or if the size of paper specified in the printer driver is not loaded
in the machine, a message will appear in the touch panel. Printing will begin automatically when the [OK] key is touched
and paper is loaded in the machine. If you wish to print on paper in another tray because the desired size of paper is not
immediately available, follow the steps below.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
JOB STATUS
1
Print Job
Scan to
Job Queue
Computer01
Internet Fax
Fax Job
Sets / Progress
020 / 001
Status
Spool
Paper Empty
Display details on the print job for which
there is no paper.
Job Queue
1
Complete
1
2
Detail
(1) Touch the key of the job for which "Paper
Empty" appeared.
(2) Touch the [Detail] key.
Priority
Stop/Delete
(1)
(2)
OK
Detail
Computer01
020 / 001
Touch the [Paper Select] key.
Paper Empty
Data : File-01.tiff
3
Document
Style:
Color / B/W : Mono2
Paper :
8½x11
Plain
Paper Select
2-Sided
(Book)
Output :
Special
Modes:
OK
Detail
Computer01
020 / 001
Paper Empty
Paper Select
Printing begins.
Paper Tray
4
Touch the key of the tray that has the
paper you wish to use.
Bypass Tray
1.8½x11
Plain
2.5½x8½
Plain
3.8½x14
Plain
4.8½x11
Plain
8½x11
Plain
If you changed to a different paper size, printing may not take place correctly; for example part of the text or image may run
off the paper.
3-70
Contents
PRINTER
APPENDIX
PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATION LIST
Available functions and output results may vary depending on the type of printer driver being used.
PCL6
PCL5e
PS
Windows
PPD*1
Macintosh
PPD*1
1-999
1-999
1-999
1-999
1-999
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2,4,6,8,9,16
2,4,6,8,9,16
2,4,6,8,9,16
2,4,6,9,16
2,4,6,9,16
Order
Selectable
Selectable
Selectable
Selectable
Selectable
Border
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
Yes
Selectable
2-Sided Print
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fit To Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes*2
Selectable
Selectable
Selectable
No
Yes
Staple*5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Paper Size
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 size
8 size
8 size
Yes
Yes
Paper Selection
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Output tray
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Pamphlet
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 inch to
1.2 inch
0 inch to
1.2 inch
0 inch to
1.2 inch
Yes
Yes
Poster Printing
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Rotate 180 degrees
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*4
Yes*4
Yes
Yes*4
Yes*4
Line Width Settings
Yes
No
No
No
No
Mirror Image
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes*5
Different Paper
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes*6, 7
Transparency Inserts
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Carbon Copy
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Chapter Inserts
Yes
No
No
No
No
Page Interleave
Yes
No
No
No
No
Retention
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Document Filing
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes*8
Image Adjustment
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Text To Black/
Vector To Black
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Function
Frequently used
functions
Copies
Orientation
N-Up
Number of
pages
Binding Edge
Paper
Custom Paper
Convenient
printer functions
Margin Shift
Zoom/XY-Zoom
Special
functions
Image adjusting
function
3-71
Contents
PRINTER
PCL6
PCL5e
PS
Windows
PPD*1
Macintosh
PPD*1
Watermark
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Image Stamp
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Overlay
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Normal/
High Quality/
Fine
No
Normal/
High Quality/
Fine
Normal/
High Quality/
Fine
Normal/
High Quality/
Fine
Graphics Mode
Selection
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Toner Save*9
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Resident font
80 fonts
80 fonts
136 fonts
136 fonts
35 fonts
bitmap,
TrueType,
Graphics
bitmap,
TrueType,
Graphics
bitmap,
TrueType,
Type1
bitmap,
TrueType,
Type1
No*10
Auto Configuration
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes*11
User Authentication
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Function
Functions to
combine text
and images
Image Quality
Font
Print Mode
Selectable download
font
Other functions
*1 The specifications of each function in Windows PPD and Macintosh PPD vary depending on the operating system
version and the software application.
*2 Only Mac OS X v10.4.11, v10.5 to 10.5.8 and v10.6 to 10.6.2 can be used.
*3 Can be used when a finisher is installed.
*4 The horizontal and vertical proportion cannot be set separately.
*5 Only Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2 can be used.
*6 Only covers can be inserted.
*7 Cannot be used in Mac OS X v10.2.8 or v10.3.9.
*8 Cannot be used in Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2.
*9 This setting may not operate in some software applications and operating systems.
*10 True Type and Type1 can be selected in some versions of LaserWriter.
*11 Cannot be used in Mac OS X v10.2.8.
3-72
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
Type
Built-in
Continuous printing speed
40 pages/min (When printing same document continuously on 8-1/2"x11" (A4) plain paper in
non-offset mode, excluding processing time.)
Printing resolution
600x600 dpi / 1200x1200 dpi
Printer driver type
PCL5e, PCL6, PostScript 3 compatible*1, XPS*3
Supported protocols
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, EtherTalk*1
Supported client PC
operating systems
See "VERIFYING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS" in the Start Guide.
Fonts
PCL5e, PCL6
80 European fonts, 28 barcode fonts*2, 1 bitmap font
PostScript 3 compatible*1
136 European fonts
Interface port
LAN connectivity: 10Base-T / 100Base-TX / 1000Base-T
USB connectivity: Supports USB 2.0 (Hi speed)
Memory
Standard system memory: 512 MB
Expansion memory: 1GB*4
Print area
Entire page excluding margin of 1/6" (4.2mm) at each edge. The actual print area may vary
depending on the printer driver and the software application.
*1
*2
*3
*4
When the machine is used as a PostScript printer.
Barcode font kit is required.
When the XPS expansion kit is installed.
Required when there is insufficient memory to handle certain print data. Must be used when the XPS expansion kit
is installed.
3-73
Contents
CHAPTER 4
FACSIMILE
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the fax function.
To use the fax function, the facsimile expansion kit must be installed.
BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX
PREPARATIONS FOR FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CONNECTION TO THE TELEPHONE
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SETTING THE TELEPHONE LINE TYPE . . . . .
• MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH
IS IN THE "ON" POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME . . . . . . . . . .
• STORING THE SENDER FAX NUMBER . . . . .
TRANSMISSION METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PLACEMENT ORIENTATION OF THE
ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR
OCCURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FAX DESTINATION CONFIRMATION
MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-6
4-25
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-29
USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
• USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT
TRANSMISSION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
• BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
• ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF
ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN THE ADDRESS
BOOK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR
TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO
SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION
MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
FAX TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
ENTERING DESTINATIONS
TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER . . . . . . . 4-38
ENTERING A FAX NUMBER WITH THE
NUMERIC KEYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
SENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission) . . . . 4-39
RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
• RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION . . . . 4-18
• CHECKING AND DELETING ENTERED
DESTINATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
SENDING A FAX DIRECTLY FROM A
COMPUTER (PC-Fax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
IMAGE SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH
SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided
Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND
SEND SIZE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHANGING THE EXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHANGING THE RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . .
USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A
GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
USING THE RESEND FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
CHAIN DIALING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4-45
4-46
4-47
4-56
4-57
CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE
TRANSMITTED (Preview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
• PREVIEW CHECK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4-1
FACSIMILE
SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER
MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE (Polling
Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• RESTRICTING POLLING ACCESS
(Polling security) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO
POLLING MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
• CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE
PUBLIC BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• DELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE
PUBLIC BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
FAX RECEPTION
RECEIVING FAXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
• RECEIVING A FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
• RECEIVING A FAX MANUALLY . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print) . . . . . . . . 4-63
CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING . . . 4-64
• IMAGE CHECK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES (Fax Data
Forward) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO A
NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing
Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
• CONFIGURING INBOUND ROUTING
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION
F-CODE COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HOW F-CODES WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE
MACHINE FOR F-CODE
COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• F-CODE DIALING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIAL MODES
SPECIAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4-101
4-101
4-102
4-102
CONFIDENTIAL COMMUNICATION USING
F-CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
• F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
• CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY
F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION . . . . 4-105
STORING FAX OPERATIONS (Program). . . . . . . 4-73
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
POLLING RECEPTION USING F-CODES. . . . . . 4-107
SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A
SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
POLLING MEMORY TRANSMISSION USING
F-CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO A
MEMORY BOX FOR F-CODE POLLING
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE
F-CODE MEMORY POLLING BOX . . . . . . . .
• DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR
F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION . . . . . . .
SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES
(Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
FAXING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode). . . 4-84
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE
TRANSMISSION (Original Count) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
SENDING BUSINESS CARDS (Business
Card Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
4-109
4-109
4-112
4-113
RELAY REQUEST TRANSMISSION USING
F-CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction
Report) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION
USING F-CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO
FAXES (Own number sending) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
• TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE
SENDER INFORMATION (Own Name
Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING
RECEPTION (Polling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
• INITIATING POLLING RECEPTION
MANUALLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
4-2
FACSIMILE
USING AN EXTENSION PHONE
CONNECTING AND USING AN EXISTING
PHONE (Extension Phone Connection) . . . . . . 4-117
• RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING
A CALL ON THE EXTENSION PHONE
(Remote Reception) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
• MAKING AND RECEIVING PHONE
CALLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX JOBS
JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED
JOB SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB
QUEUE IS COMPLETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE
JOB IN PROGRESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS . . . . . . . . . .
4-119
4-120
4-123
4-124
4-125
CANCELING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A
RESERVED FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
GIVING PRIORITY TO A RESERVED FAX
JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
CHECKING THE ACTIVITY LOG (Image
Sending Activity Report) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
• IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT . . . . . 4-128
• INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE
RESULT COLUMN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
4-3
FACSIMILE
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
FAX
This section provides information that you should know before using the machine as a fax machine.
PREPARATIONS FOR FAX
To use the machine as a fax, the telephone line must be connected and the type of line must be set.
CONNECTION TO THE TELEPHONE LINE
Be sure to use the provided telephone line cord to connect the machine to the wall telephone jack. Connect the end of
the line cord that has the core to the "LINE" jack on the machine. Insert the other end (the end without the core) into a
telephone line jack.
"LINE" jack
Click!
Core
Insert the end of the cord with the
core into the "LINE" jack.
4-4
Contents
FACSIMILE
SETTING THE TELEPHONE LINE TYPE
The machine's dial mode setting must be set to the type of telephone line you are using.
If the setting is not correct, dialing will not be possible.
Touch the [Auto Select] key in "Dial Mode Setting" in the system settings (administrator). The machine will automatically
set the dial mode to the type of line you are using.
You can also set the "Dial Mode Setting" manually.
After setting the dial mode, do not change the setting unless you have a specific reason for changing it.
MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH IS IN THE
"ON" POSITION
When the main power indicator on the operation panel is lit, the main power is on.
If the main power indicator light is not lit, the main power is "off". Switch the main power switch to the "on" position and
press the [POWER] key ( ) on the operation panel.
If the fax function will be used, and in particular if reception or timer transmission will take place at night, always keep the
main power switch in the "on" position.
When the [POWER SAVE] key (
) indicator light is blinking, the machine is in auto power shut-off mode. If the [POWER
SAVE] key (
) is pressed when the indicator is blinking, the indicator will turn off and the machine will return to the ready
state after a brief interval.
Main power indicator
"On" position
LOGOUT
Main power switch
[POWER SAVE] key/indicator
4-5
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME
Verify that the correct date and time are set in the machine.
The date and time are set in the system settings of the machine. When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the
system settings menu screen appears on the touch panel. Select [Default Settings], [Clock], and [Clock Adjust], and set
the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
If "Disabling of Clock Adjustment" has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), the date and time cannot be set.
STORING THE SENDER FAX NUMBER
Store the user name and fax number in "Sender Data Registration".
Be sure to configure this information, as it is required for communication.
System Settings (Administrator): Sender Data Registration
Use this setting to program the sender name and sender fax number.
4-6
Contents
FACSIMILE
BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE
To use the fax function, select settings and operations in the base screen of fax mode. To display the base screen of fax
mode, touch the [IMAGE SEND] key and then touch the [Fax] tab.
COPY
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
Ready to send.
Scan
Resend
Speaker
Internet Fax
Address Book
Original
Fax
Scan:
Direct TX
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
Special Modes
USB Mem. Scan
PC Scan
Auto
Send:
8½x11
This screen only appears
when the fax function and
Internet fax function have
been installed.
The contents of the screen
will vary depending on the
devices that are installed.
File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Each of the other modes that can be displayed by touching the [IMAGE SEND] key (scan, Internet fax, USB memory,
PC scan and data entry modes) also have base screens.
Transmission destinations can be stored in one-touch keys in the address book and retrieved from the address book
screen when you need to use them. The address book is shared by fax mode, scan mode, Internet fax mode and data
entry mode.
To display the address book screen, touch the [Address Book] key in the base screen. To display the base screen, touch
the [Condition Settings] key in the address book screen. This chapter refers to the base screen of fax mode as the "base
screen".
Base screen of fax mode
Scan
Address Book
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
Address book screen
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Auto
Cc
To
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
Exposure
Auto
Address Review
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Address Review
Special Modes
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
Sub Address
III III
JJJ JJJ
File
Quick File
Freq.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Sort Address
1
2
Direct TX
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
The procedures in this chapter begin from the base screen of fax mode.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
• Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, fax, or data entry mode)
• Address book screen
4-7
Contents
FACSIMILE
BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE
This screen is used to select settings and operations in fax mode.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
COPY
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
Ready to send.
Scan
Address Book
Resend
Speaker
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
Direct TX
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
Special Modes
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
PC Scan
Send:
Auto
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
File
Quick File
(8)
(10)
(11)
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Preview
(16)
(9)
(1)
Mode select keys
(7)
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and
document filing modes.
To switch to fax mode, touch the [IMAGE SEND] key.
(2)
This shows various messages and the destinations
that have been entered.
The
(3)
(8)
Send mode tabs
(9)
(10) [Speaker] key / [Pause] key / [Space] key
[Address Book] key
Touch this key to dial using the speaker.
When entering a fax number to be dialed, the key
changes to the [Pause] key. When entering a
sub-address, the key changes to the [Space] key.
☞ TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER (page
4-38)
[Direct TX] key
(11) [Resend] key / [Next Address] key
Touch this key to send a fax by direct transmission.
When the [Direct TX] key is not highlighted, normal
transmission (memory TX mode) is selected.
☞ To fax a large number of sheet originals, use the
automatic document feeder. (page 4-25)
☞ If you wish to send a fax ahead of other previously
reserved fax transmissions, use direct transmission
mode. (page 4-27)
(6)
key
Touch this key to dial a fax destination using a search
number.
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 4-20)
Touch this key to dial using a one-touch key or group
key. When the key is touched, the address book screen
appears.
☞ RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK (page 4-17)
(5)
[Preview] key*1
Touch to check the image that will be sent in the touch
panel before transmission.
☞ CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED
(Preview) (page 4-58)
icon on the left indicates fax mode.
Use these keys to change the mode of the image send
function.
Tabs of modes that cannot be used because the
appropriate options are not installed do not appear.
If the [Fax] tab does not appear, touch the
tab to move the screen.
☞ BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE (page 4-7)
(4)
Customized keys
The keys that appear here can be changed to show
settings or functions that you prefer.
☞ Customizing displayed keys (page 4-9)
Touch this key to redial a fax number. When entering a
fax number to be dialed, this key changes to the [Next
Address] key.
☞ USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page 4-23)
(12) Image settings
Touch this key to select the image settings (original size,
exposure, resolution).
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-45)
[Sub Address] key
(13)
Touch this key to enter a sub-address and passcode for
F-code transmission.
☞ F-CODE DIALING (page 4-102)
key
This key appears when a special mode or 2-sided
scanning is selected. Touch the key to display the
selected special modes.
☞ Checking what special modes are selected (page
4-9)
4-8
Contents
FACSIMILE
(14) [Special Modes] key
(16) This shows the currently selected fax reception
mode and the amount of free memory remaining.
Touch this key to use a special mode.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
(15)
/
/
If the remaining amount of fax memory becomes low,
faxes can no longer be received. Print or delete received
data in memory to increase the remaining amount of
memory.
☞ RECEIVING FAXES (page 4-60)
key
When "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" or
"Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled in the
system settings (administrator), this will appear when a
fax is received.
: Only "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" is enabled
: Only "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled
: Both settings are enabled
☞ PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX (Hold
Setting For Received Data Print) (page 4-63)
☞ CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING (page
4-64)
*1 MX-B402SC Only
Customizing displayed keys
Special mode keys and other keys can be displayed in the base screen. You can assign frequently used functions to these
keys to access the functions with a single touch. To change the function that is assigned to a key, use "Customize Key
Setting" in the Web pages. The following keys appear by factory default:
• [Address Review] key
Touch this to view a list of the destinations that have been selected in the address book and the numbers that have been
directly entered with the numeric keys. This is the same key as the [Address Review] key in the address book screen.
• [File] key, [Quick File] key
Touch either key to use Quick File or File in document filing mode.
Example: When "Erase", "Job Build", and "Slow Scan Mode" are assigned to the customized keys.
Scan
These 3 keys can be changed
as desired.
Internet Fax
Fax
Address Book
Original
Direct TX
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Erase
Special Modes
Scan:
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
Auto
Job Build
Slow Scan Mode
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Displaying a program key in the base screen will enable you to call up the program by simply touching the key.
☞ STORING FAX OPERATIONS (Program) (page 4-73)
System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.
Checking what special modes are selected
The
The
key appears in the base screen when a special mode or 2-sided scanning is selected.
key can be touched to display the selected special modes. To close the screen, touch the [OK] key.
4-9
Contents
FACSIMILE
Scan
Address Book
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
Direct TX
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
OK
Function Review
Auto
Special Modes
Erase
: Edge:½inch
Timer
: Day of the Week:Monday
Time: 21:30
Slow Scan
Mode
: On
1
1
File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
The special mode settings cannot be changed from the function review screen. To change a setting, touch the [OK] key to
close the function review screen and then touch the [Special Modes] key and select the setting that you wish to change.
4-10
Contents
FACSIMILE
ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN
This screen is used to select a destination from the list of stored destinations.
(9)
(1)
CCC CCC
0123456789
(2)
(3)
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
(10)
Cc
To
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
(4)
Address Review
(5)
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
(6)
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
(7)
Sub Address
III III
JJJ JJJ
(11)
2
Freq.
(8)
1
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
(12)
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Sort Address
(13)
(1)
This shows the destination that has been selected.
(2)
Number of displayed items selector key
(8)
Touch this key to change the index tabs to custom
indexes or to display one-touch keys by send mode.
☞ CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS
IN THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN (page 4-12)
Touch to change the number of destinations (one-touch
keys) displayed in the address book screen. Select 5, 10,
or 15 destinations.
(3)
(9)
[Condition Settings] key
(10) [Cc] key
[Address Review] key
Touch this key to view a list of the selected destinations.
The selected destinations can be changed.
☞ CHECKING AND DELETING ENTERED
DESTINATIONS (page 4-19)
(5)
Not used in fax mode.
(11) One-touch key display
This shows the one-touch keys of the destinations that
have been stored in the address book. This chapter
refers to keys in which single destinations and groups are
stored as one touch keys. Keys that have fax numbers
stored are indicated by
.
☞ RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION (page
4-18)
[Address Entry] key
Not used in fax mode.
(6)
[Global Address Search] key
When the use of a LDAP server has been enabled in the
machine's Web page, a fax number can be obtained from
a global address book.
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL
ADDRESS BOOK (page 4-21)
(7)
[Sub Address] key
Touch this key to enter a sub-address and passcode for
F-code transmission.
☞ F-CODE DIALING (page 4-102)
[To] key
Touch this key to enter a selected destination (one-touch
key).
☞ RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION (page
4-18)
Touch this key to select transmission settings and
operations. When the key is touched, the base screen
appears.
☞ BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE (page 4-8)
(4)
[Sort Address] key
(12) Index tabs
Touch this to change indexes.
☞ RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION (page
4-18)
(13)
key
Touch this key to retrieve a destination using a search
number.
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 4-20)
4-11
Contents
FACSIMILE
When using the network scanner function or the Internet fax function, a different icon will appear in the one-touch key display
if a non-fax destination (address) is stored.
☞ RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER FROM THE ADDRESS BOOK (page 4-17)
• System Settings: Address Book (page 7-17)
This is used to store fax numbers in one-touch keys.
• System Settings (Administrator): The Number of Direct Address Keys Displayed Setting
This is used to change the default setting for the number of one-touch keys displayed in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
- Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, fax, or data entry mode)
- Address book screen
• System Settings (Administrator): Address Book Default Selection
The following settings are available for the method of sorting the addresses that appear in the address book.
- Index type (alphabetical, custom)
- Address type (all, group, E-mail, FTP/Desktop, Network Folder, Internet fax, fax)
CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN
THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN
You can show only destinations of a specific transmission mode in the address book screen, or change the displayed
index tabs from the alphabetical tabs to the custom tabs. The procedure for selecting destinations does not change.
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
1
Touch the [Sort Address] key.
Cc
To
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
2
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
Freq.
Sort Address
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
(1)
(2)
OK
Sort Address
2
1
Tab Switch
Address Type
ABC
All
Group
User
E-mail
FTP/Desktop
Internet Fax
Fax
Change the display mode.
(1) Touch the key of the mode or tab that you
wish to display.
• To show only the one-touch keys of a particular send
mode, touch the desired mode key under "Address
Type".
• To change the index tabs to the custom indexes, touch
the [User] key under "Tab Switch".
Network Folder
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
4-12
Contents
FACSIMILE
Index display
Indexes make it easy to search for a destination (one-touch key). The destinations are displayed separately using
alphabetical search characters and index numbers. To display a stored destination, touch the appropriate index tab. It is
convenient to store frequently used destinations in the [Freq.] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in the [Freq.]
index when you store the destination.
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
Cc
To
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
Freq.
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
1
2
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Sort Address
Index tabs
The destinations can be displayed in alphabetical order by their initials.
Each time the displayed index tab is touched, the display order changes in the following order: search numbers (page
4-20), ascending names, descending names, search numbers... When the display order is changed, the display order of
the other index tabs also changes.
Ordered by search number (default)
Freq.
Ascending names
Freq.
ABCD
Descending names
Freq.
ABCD
ABCD
Index names can be changed using "Custom Index" in the system settings, allowing you to create groups of one-touch
keys that can be easily recognized.
System Settings: Custom Index (page 7-22)
This is used to store custom index names. The custom index where a one-touch key appears is specified when the
transmission destination is stored in the key.
Narrowing the search letter range
An alphabet tab on an index tab can be touched to display keys to further narrow the search range. For example, when
the [ABCD] tab is touched, keys from "A" to "D" appear. If the [B] key is touched, only destinations starting with the letter
"B" will appear. To cancel, touch the key again. Note that the search letter range cannot be narrowed on the [Freq.] tab,
the [etc.] tab, or on a user index tab.
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
Cc
To
BBB AAA
BBB BBB
BBB CCC
BBB DDD
Address Entry
BBB EEE
BBB FFF
Global
Address Search
BBB GGG
BBB HHH
BBB III
BBB JJJ
Freq.
Sort Address
ABCD
EFGH
A
IJKL
B
4-13
C
1
2
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
D
Contents
FACSIMILE
FAX TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
This section explains the basic procedure for sending a fax.
Place the original
Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
Enter the destination fax number
Ready to send.
Scan
Address Book
Resend
Speaker
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
Direct TX
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
Special Modes
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
PC Scan
Send:
Auto
File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
or
• [Address Book] key: Select a destination that is stored in
the address book or look up a
destination in a global address book.
☞ RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER
FROM THE ADDRESS BOOK
(page 4-17)
•
key: Use a search number to specify a destination
stored in the address book.
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION (page 4-20)
• [Resend] key: Select a fax number from the last eight
destinations used for transmission.
☞ USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page
4-23)
• Numeric keys: Enter a fax number.
☞ ENTERING A FAX NUMBER WITH THE
NUMERIC KEYS (page 4-16)
Select image settings
Scan
Address Book
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
Direct TX
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
Special Modes
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Send:
PC Scan
Auto
Select settings for the original to be faxed.
• [Original] key: Use this key to select the original size, the
original send size, and 2-sided original
scanning.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND
SEND SIZE (page 4-47),
AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH
SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided
Original) (page 4-46)
• [Exposure] key: Use this key to adjust the exposure of the
image.
☞ CHANGING THE EXPOSURE (page 4-56)
• [Resolution] key: Use this key to adjust the resolution of the
image.
☞ CHANGING THE RESOLUTION
(page 4-57)
4-14
Contents
FACSIMILE
Special mode settings
Scan
Internet Fax
Fax
Address Book
Original
Direct TX
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
Special Modes
Scan:
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
Touch the [Special Modes] key to select special modes such
as timer transmission and the erase function.
Auto
File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Begin transmission
Scan the original and send the fax.
If the original is placed on the document glass, follow these steps to start scanning and transmit:
When sending a fax normally (memory transmission)
(1) Press the [START] key.
(2) When scanning is finished, replace the original with the next original.
(3) Press the [START] key.
(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) until all originals have been scanned.
(5) Touch the [Read-End] key.
When sending a fax in direct transmission mode
Multiple originals cannot be scanned in direct transmission mode.
Press the [START] key to start transmission.
When transmission ends, image settings and convenient special mode settings are cleared.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
The settings can be kept in effect a fixed period of time after scanning is completed.
4-15
Contents
FACSIMILE
ENTERING DESTINATIONS
This section explains how to enter destination fax numbers.
Destination fax numbers can be entered using the numeric keys, or by retrieving a previously stored fax number using
the address book or a search number.
ENTERING A FAX NUMBER WITH THE
NUMERIC KEYS
Enter the destination fax number with
the numeric keys.
Take care to enter the correct number.
If an incorrect number is entered...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) to clear the number and then enter the correct number.
Entering a pause between digits of the number
Enter a pause after the number used to dial out from a PBX (for example, after "0"), or after the country code when
dialing an international number.
Scan
Address Book
Next Address
Pause
1234567890Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
Direct TX
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
Special Modes
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
Touch the [Pause] key.
A hyphen "-" is entered when the [Pause] key is touched once.
Auto
File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
System Settings (Administrator): Pause Time Setting
This is used to set the length of pauses. The default setting is 2 seconds.
4-16
Contents
FACSIMILE
RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK
The address book screen shows stored destinations as one-touch keys.
A destination fax number is retrieved by simply touching the one-touch key of that destination. This is called "one-touch
dialing". It is also possible to store multiple fax numbers in a one-touch key, allowing you to retrieve all the numbers by
simply touching the key. This is called "group dialing". This dialing method is convenient when you wish to send a fax to
(or poll) multiple fax destinations.
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Cc
To
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
Address Review
1
2
Freq.
ABCD
Sort Address
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
When destinations of other scan modes are stored in addition to fax destinations, an icon indicating the mode appears
together with the name of the destination in each one-touch key.
Icon
Mode
Fax
Scan to E-mail
Internet fax (Direct SMTP)
Scan to FTP
Scan to Network Folder
Scan to Desktop
Group key with multiple destinations
System Settings: Address Book (page 7-17)
This is used to store destinations (names and fax numbers) in the address book.
4-17
Contents
FACSIMILE
RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION
A destination fax number is retrieved by simply touching the one-touch key of that destination.
Scan
1
Internet Fax
Fax
Address Book
Original
Direct TX
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
Special Modes
USB Mem. Scan
Auto
8½x11
Scan:
Send:
PC Scan
Touch the [Address Book] key.
Auto
File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Select the destination.
(2)
CCC CCC
0123456789
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
Pause
Cc
To
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
Sub Address
III III
JJJ JJJ
Freq.
Sort Address
1
2
Address Entry
2
Next Address
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
(1) Touch the index tab where the destination
is stored.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
If you select an incorrect destination, touch the key again
to cancel the selection.
MNOP
QRSTU VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
(1)
• Frequently used destinations can be displayed in the [Freq.] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in the
[Freq.] index when you store the destination.
• To continue specifying other destinations...
Touch the [Next Address] key and repeat (1) and (2) of this step.
• System Settings (Administrator): Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting
This setting determines whether or not the [Next Address] key can be omitted before specifying the next destination.
Factory default setting: The [Next Address] key can be omitted.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Switching of Display Order
This is used to disable switching of the order of display of the one-touch keys in the address book screen. The currently
selected display order will be the order that is used after this setting is enabled.
4-18
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING AND DELETING ENTERED DESTINATIONS
When multiple destinations have been entered, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a
destination (cancel selection of the destination).
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
Sub Address
III III
JJJ JJJ
Address Review
1
Touch the [Address Review] key.
Cc
To
2
Freq.
Sort Address
1
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Check the destinations and then touch
the [OK] key.
OK
Address Review
001 CCC CCC
002 KKK KKK
003 LLL LLL
004 MMM MMM
005 NNN NNN
006 OOO OOO
007 PPP PPP
008 QQQ QQQ
009 RRR RRR
010 SSS SSS
011 TTT TTT
012 UUU UUU
1
2
To
2
Cc
To delete a destination...
Touch the one-touch key of the destination that you wish to delete. A message will appear to confirm the deletion.
Touch the [Yes] key. Touch the [Detail] key to check the specified destination type and name.
Deselect the address?
BBB BBB
Detail
4-19
No
Yes
Contents
FACSIMILE
USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION
A destination stored in the address book can be retrieved using the
of the modes or in the address book screen.
Scan
Address Book
1
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
Direct TX
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
Special Modes
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
key. This can be done in the base screen of any
Touch the
key.
Auto
File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Enter the 3-digit search number of the
address with the numeric keys.
When the 3-digit search number is entered, the stored address
is retrieved and specified as a destination.
2
• The search number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book.
• If you do not know the search number, print the one-touch address list using "Sending Address List" in the system
settings.
• When entering search numbers such as "001" and "011", "0" can be omitted. For example, to enter "001", enter "1"
and touch the
key or the [Next Address] key.
If an incorrect search number is entered...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) to clear the number and enter the correct number.
4-20
Contents
FACSIMILE
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A
GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK
If a LDAP server is stored in the Web pages, you can look up a destination fax number in a global address book.
Open the global address search screen.
(2)
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
Address Review
1
Cc
To
1
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
2
Freq.
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
For the [Address Book] key, see "BASE SCREEN OF
FAX MODE" (page 4-8).
(2) Touch the [Global Address Search] key.
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Sort Address
(1)
(2)
Cancel
Server Change
Server 1
Server 2
Server 3
Server 4
OK
Search for the destination.
If only one LDAP server has been stored, (1) and (2) are not
necessary. Go directly to (3). If an authentication screen for the
LDAP server appears, enter your user name and password.
(1) Touch the key of the LDAP server that you
wish to use.
If an authentication screen for the LDAP server appears,
enter your user name and password.
Server 5
Server 6
Server 7
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
(3) Search for the destination in the search
screen.
Enter search characters for the destination and touch the
[Search] key. The search results will appear after a brief
interval.
For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING
TEXT" (page 1-76) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".
2
How to search
Enter a maximum of 64 characters for the search characters. The system will look for names starting with the entered
letters.
An asterisk can be used as follows:
XXX :
Names beginning with "XXX".
XXX:
Names that end with "XXX".
XXX : Names that include "XXX".
AA XX: Names that start with "AA" and end with "XX".
4-21
Contents
FACSIMILE
(2)
To
Condition
Settings
Address Review
Search Again
Select the destination.
(1)
(1) Touch the key of the desired destination.
Cc
If no names are found that match the search letters, a
message will appear. Touch the [OK] key to close the
message and touch the [Search Again] key to search
again.
Detail
XXX
XXX AAA
0123456789
XXX BBB
9876543210
XXX CCC
0612345678
XXX DDD
0687654321
XXX EEE
0676543210
XXX FFF
0601234567
1
2
Address Book
(2) Touch the [To] key.
This enters the selected destination.
If you wish to select another destination, repeat steps (1)
and (2) above.
3
• If 30 or more matches are found, a message will appear in the screen. Touch the [OK] key to close the message. A
maximum of 300 search results are displayed. If the desired destination was not found, touch the [Search Again]
key to add more search letters.
• To check the information stored in a destination...
Touch the key of the destination and then touch the [Detail] key. The information stored for the selected destination
will appear. Check the information and then touch the [OK] key to return to the search results screen.
• If a screen for selecting the item to be used appears...
If the selected destination includes an E-mail address or other address in addition to the fax number or telephone
number, you will need to select which item you wish to use. Touch the [Fax] key to retrieve the fax number.
Storing a destination from a global address book in the machine's
address book
A destination from a global address book can be stored in the machine's address book as a one-touch key.
Touch the [Detail] key in the search results screen of the global address book (the screen of step 3 above) to display
information on the selected destination. Touch the [Register] key in the detailed information screen and then touch the
item to be used (the [Fax] key in this case). The following screen will appear.
Exit
Direct Address / Individual
E-mail
Internet Fax
Fax
Search Number 001
Name
AAA AAA
Initial
A
Fax No.
0123456789
Key Name
AAA AAA
Mode
Index
User 1
33.6 kbps/None
The information stored in the global address book is automatically entered. (The settings can be changed if needed. For
detailed information on each item, see "Address Control" (page 7-17) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".) However, configure
the items below manually. To complete the storing procedure, touch the [Exit] key.
• [Initial] key: Touch this key to enter the initials that determine where the destination will appear in the alphabetical
index and the order of one-touch key display. Enter up to 10 characters for the initials.
• [Index] key: Touch this key to select the custom index in which the address will appear. You can also select whether
or not the destination will be included on the [Freq.] tab of the address book.
• [Mode] key: Touch this key to configure the "Transmission Speed" and "International Correspondence Mode"
settings. These settings have already been configured, however, if the destination is an international
destination, or if you find that communication errors frequently occur when communicating with that
destination, you can try changing the settings.
4-22
Contents
FACSIMILE
USING THE RESEND FUNCTION
The destinations of the most recent 8 transmissions by fax, Scan to E-mail, and/or Internet fax are stored. One of these
can be selected to resend to that destination.
Ready to send.
Scan
Internet Fax
Address Book
Direct TX
1
Original
Fax
Scan:
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
Special Modes
Speaker
Resend
USB Mem. Scan
PC Scan
8½x11
Touch the [Resend] key.
Auto
Send:
File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Cancel
Resend
2
No.01
AAA AAA
No.02
BBB BBB
No.03
CCC CCC
No.04
DDD DDD
No.05
EEE EEE
No.06
FFF FFF
No.07
GGG GGG
No.08
HHH HHH
Touch the key of the fax destination that
you wish to redial.
The last 8 transmission destinations appear.
• If numeric keys were pressed during the previous transmission, the [Resend] key may not dial the correct number.
• The fax addresses below are not stored as addresses for which resend is possible.
- A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key)
- Broadcast destinations
- Destinations transmitted to using a program
System Settings (Administrator): Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Send Mode
This prohibits use of the resend function. When this setting is enabled, the [Resend] key cannot be used in the base screen
of image send mode.
4-23
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHAIN DIALING
Number sequences entered with the numeric keys and/or one-touch keys can be linked together with pauses and dialed
as a single number.
Use chain dialing to dial a long number (such as an international number) when the country code and/or area code are
stored separately in one-touch keys.
Example: Using chain dialing to dial an international number
Number to be dialed
Number to access
international telephone
service
010
Country
code
Area code
XXX
010
00
XX
Using the
numeric keys
Entry
XXX
Number of other
party
XXXX
Using a one-touch
key
Pause
CCC CCC
System Settings (Administrator): Pause Time Setting
This is used to set the length of pauses. The default setting is 2 seconds.
4-24
Contents
FACSIMILE
BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS
This section explains the basic procedures for sending a fax.
TRANSMISSION METHODS
The methods that can be used to send a fax from the machine are explained below. Select the method that best suits
your needs.
To fax a large number of sheet originals, use the automatic document feeder.
The originals will be scanned into memory and then transmitted (memory transmission).
When memory transmission is selected and multiple originals are placed in the automatic document feeder (and the line
is free), transmission will begin as soon as the first page is scanned and will take place while the remaining pages are
being scanned (Quick Online transmission).
If transmission cannot begin immediately because the line is in use, all pages will be scanned into memory and the
transmission will be reserved.
☞ USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION (page 4-30)
When a fax transmission or reception is already in progress, the following procedure can be performed to reserve a
transmission job. To check reserved transmission jobs, display the job status screen.
☞ CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX JOBS (page 4-119)
1
11
11
1
Transmission
11
11
1
1
11
11
1
4-25
Contents
FACSIMILE
• If memory becomes full while the first original page is being scanned, transmission will stop.
• In the following situations, the transmission will be automatically reserved (memory transmission)
- When the line is busy or a communication error occurs and automatic resending is enabled.
☞ WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY (page 4-28), WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS (page 4-28)
- The machine is already using the line to send or receive a fax.
- Another fax transmission was reserved ahead of your fax.
- One of the following functions is being used for transmission:
Broadcast transmission, F-code transmission, timer transmission, Card Shot, Job Build, Business Card Scan
- The document glass is being used (except when the speaker is being used to dial).
• Up to 94 transmission jobs can be reserved.
• When the transmission is finished, the scanned original pages are cleared from memory. However, when the document
filing function is used, the transmitted fax is stored.
System Settings (Administrator): Quick On Line Sending
This is used to disable Quick Online transmission. In this case, fax transmissions will be sent by memory transmission
(reserved and then transmitted).
To fax thick originals or pages of a book, use the document glass.
☞ USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR TRANSMISSION (page 4-34)
1
1
Transmission
When the document glass is being used for a transmission, Quick Online transmission will not operate.
4-26
Contents
FACSIMILE
If you wish to send a fax ahead of other previously reserved fax
transmissions, use direct transmission mode.
The original is transmitted directly to the receiving fax machine without being scanned into memory.
When direct transmission mode is used, transmission will begin as soon as the transmission in progress is completed
(ahead of any previously reserved transmissions).
To send a fax by direct transmission, touch the [Direct TX] key in the base screen.
☞ USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE (page 4-32)
☞ USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE (page 4-36)
Scan
Address Book
Direct TX
Sub Address
Transmission
Address Review
• When transmission in direct transmission mode ends, the mode automatically changes back to memory transmission
mode.
• When the document glass is used, multiple original pages cannot be scanned.
4-27
Contents
FACSIMILE
PLACEMENT ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL
A 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"(A5) or B5 size original in landscape orientation will be rotated 90 degrees and transmitted as a
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"(A5) or B5 image in portrait orientation.
Transmission
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"(A5)
size original
Rotated to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"(A5)
image in portrait orientation
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"(A5) image in
portrait orientation is transmitted.
System Settings (Administrator): Rotation Sending Setting
The factory default setting is rotate before transmission. If this setting is disabled, the original will be transmitted in the
orientation in which it is placed.
WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY
If the line is busy when you send a fax, transmission will be re-attempted automatically after a preset interval. This
function only operates in memory transmission mode. In direct transmission mode or manual transmission mode, the
transmission will be canceled. Wait briefly and then try sending the fax again.
To cancel transmission...
Cancel the transmission from the job status screen.
☞ CANCELING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A RESERVED FAX (page 4-126)
System Settings (Administrator): Recall in Case of Line Busy
This is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when the connection cannot be
established because the line is busy. The factory default setting is 2 attempts at an interval of 3 minutes.
WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS
If a communication error occurs or the other fax machine does not answer the call within a preset period of time,
transmission will be re-attempted automatically after a preset interval. This function only operates in memory
transmission mode.
To cancel transmission...
Cancel the transmission from the job status screen.
☞ CANCELING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A RESERVED FAX (page 4-126)
System Settings (Administrator): Recall in Case of Communication Error
This is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when a transmission fails due to an error.
The factory default setting is attempt at an interval of 3 minutes.
4-28
Contents
FACSIMILE
FAX DESTINATION CONFIRMATION MODE
The fax destination confirmation mode displays a destination confirmation message when a fax transmission is
performed to prevent accidental transmission to the wrong destination. This function is enabled in the system settings
(administrator). When the function is enabled, a message will appear to confirm the destination when the [START] key is
pressed to begin fax transmission.
The message that appears will vary depending on the method used to specify the destination.
Destination specified by the numeric keys, [Resend]
key, or [Global Address Search] key
Destination specified by one-touch key/search
number
Enter the number again and
press the Start key.
Number Confirmation
BBB BBB
0312345678
Cancel
OK
OK
Make sure that the destination indicated in the message
is correct and touch the [OK] key. Scanning will begin.
If the destination is not correct, touch the [Cancel] key
and select the destination again.
Touch the [OK] key, re-enter the destination with the
numeric keys, and press the [START] key.
If the re-entered destination is correct, scanning will
begin.
If the re-entered destination is not correct, a message
will appear. Touch the [OK] key and re-enter the
destination. If an incorrect number is entered for
confirmation 3 times in a row, the screen will revert to the
base screen.
• Even if a one-touch key or search number was used to specify the destination, if the [Sub Address] key is used to enter a
sub-address and passcode, the fax number must be re-entered during confirmation. After re-entering the fax number,
touch the [Sub Address] key and enter the sub-address and passcode.
• If chain dialing was used, touch the [Pause] key to enter "-" during confirmation.
Functions that cannot be used
When the fax destination confirmation function is enabled, only one destination is allowed, and thus the following
functions cannot be used.
• Broadcast transmission to multiple destinations including fax destinations
Group keys and program keys that contain multiple fax destinations cannot be used. After one destination is specified,
specification of a destination by search number is no longer possible, and keys such as another one-touch key, the
[Next Address] key, the [Address Entry] key, and the [Global Address Search] key cannot be selected.
• Transmission using the speaker key
A destination cannot be specified after the [Speaker] key is pressed.
System Settings (Administrator): Fax Dest. Confirmation Mode
This setting is used to have a destination confirmation message appear when a fax is sent.
4-29
Contents
FACSIMILE
USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION
This section explains how to use the automatic document feeder to send a fax.
Place the originals face up in the
document feeder tray with the edges
aligned evenly.
MX-B402:
Indicator
line
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray. Multiple
originals can be placed in the document feeder tray. The stack of
originals must not be higher than the indicator line on the tray.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set
the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 4-47)
MX-B402SC:
1
Indicator
line
When sending a multi-page fax, the automatic document feeder and the document glass cannot both be used to scan
the original pages.
Enter the destination fax number.
(2)
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
Sub Address
III III
JJJ JJJ
Address Review
2
1
For the [Address Book] key, see "BASE SCREEN OF
FAX MODE" (page 4-8).
2
Freq.
Sort Address
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
Cc
To
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can also
directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-16).
Press the [START] key.
3
Scanning begins.
When scanning is completed, the machine sounds a beep.
When scanning is completed, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number can be
used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report.
4-30
Contents
FACSIMILE
• If a fax is being received when the transmission operation is performed, the transmission will be reserved and transmitted
after fax reception is completed.
• If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop. If Quick
Online transmission is taking place, the originals that were scanned will be transmitted. If Quick Online is not enabled, the
transmission will be canceled.
System Settings (Administrator): Scan Complete Sound Setting
The scan complete sound can be selected.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
4-31
Contents
FACSIMILE
USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO
SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE
Place the originals face up in the
document feeder tray with the edges
aligned evenly.
MX-B402:
Indicator
line
1
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set
the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 4-47)
MX-B402SC:
Indicator
line
(3)
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Cc
To
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
Sub Address
III III
JJJ JJJ
Address Review
2
Enter the destination fax number.
(2)
1
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
For the [Address Book] key, see "BASE SCREEN OF
FAX MODE" (page 4-8).
2
Freq.
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
(3) Touch the [Condition Settings] key.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Sort Address
• Only one destination can be entered. A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key) cannot
be used.
• In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-16).
Scan
Address Book
Direct TX
3
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
Special Modes
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
Touch the [Direct TX] key.
Auto
File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
4-32
Contents
FACSIMILE
Press the [START] key.
Transmission begins.
4
To cancel transmission...
While "Dialing. Press [
] to cancel." appears or while the fax is being transmitted, press the [STOP] key (
).
• The following functions cannot be used with direct transmission:
Program, Timer Transmission, Card Shot, Job Build, Polling Memory, File, Quick File, Memory Box, 2-Sided Original
Scanning, Global Address Search
• Resending will not take place when a direct transmission is not successful due to a communication error or other reason.
• If a fax transmission is already in progress when the direct transmission operation is performed, the direct transmission will
wait until the previous transmission is finished. When the previous transmission is completed, the direct transmission will
begin. While the direct transmission is waiting, the [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed to display the job status screen. No
other operations are possible.
☞ CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX JOBS (page 4-119)
4-33
Contents
FACSIMILE
USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR
TRANSMISSION
To fax a thick original or other original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder, open the automatic
document feeder and place the original on the document glass.
Open the automatic document feeder,
place the original face down on the
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.
Document glass scale
mark
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
(A5)
B5
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
1
• Align the middle of the original with the tip of the
mark at
the middle of the scale on the left side of the document glass.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.
• When the original is a different size than the size setting, set
the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page
4-47)
• When faxing a multi-page original, scan each page in order starting from the first page.
• When sending a multi-page fax, the automatic document feeder and the document glass cannot both be used to
scan the original pages.
Enter the destination fax number.
(2)
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
2
Cc
To
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
For the [Address Book] key, see "BASE SCREEN OF
FAX MODE" (page 4-8).
2
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
Sub Address
III III
JJJ JJJ
Freq.
Sort Address
1
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can also
directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-16).
4-34
Contents
FACSIMILE
3
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
If you have another page to scan, change pages and then press the [START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
4
If no action is taken for one minute, scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved.
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original.
(Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
Configure
5
A beep sounds.
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.
Read-End
• When scanning is completed, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number.
This number can be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report.
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be changed,
and this can only be done when scanning each even page number of the original pages.
To cancel transmission...
Press the [STOP] key (
) before the [Read-End] key is touched.
• If a fax is being received when the transmission operation is performed, the transmission will be reserved and transmission
will take place after fax reception is completed.
• If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and transmission will be
canceled.
4-35
Contents
FACSIMILE
USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN
DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE
When sending a fax from the document glass in direct transmission mode, only one page can be transmitted.
Open the automatic document feeder,
place the original face down on the
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.
Document glass scale
mark
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
(A5)
1
B5
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
• Align the middle of the original with the tip of the
mark at
the middle of the scale on the left side of the document glass.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.
• When the original is a different size than the size setting, set
the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page
4-47)
Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.
(3)
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Cc
To
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
Sub Address
III III
JJJ JJJ
Address Review
2
1
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
For the [Address Book] key, see "BASE SCREEN OF
FAX MODE" (page 4-8).
2
Freq.
Sort Address
Enter the destination fax number.
(2)
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
(3) Touch the [Condition Settings] key.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
• Only one destination can be entered. A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key) cannot
be used.
• In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-16).
4-36
Contents
FACSIMILE
Scan
Address Book
3
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
Direct TX
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
Special Modes
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
Touch the [Direct TX] key.
Auto
File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Press the [START] key.
Transmission begins.
4
To cancel transmission...
While "Dialing. Press [
] to cancel" appears in the display, press the [STOP] key (
).
• The following functions cannot be used with direct transmission:
Program, Timer Transmission, Card Shot, Job Build, Polling Memory, File, Quick File, Memory Box, 2-Sided Original
Scanning, Global Address Search
• Resending will not take place when a direct transmission is not successful due to a communication error or other reason.
• If a fax transmission is already in progress when the direct transmission operation is performed, the direct transmission will
wait until the previous transmission is finished. When the previous transmission is completed, the direct transmission will
begin. While the direct transmission is waiting, the [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed to display the job status screen. No
other operations are possible.
☞ CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX JOBS (page 4-119)
4-37
Contents
FACSIMILE
TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER
When the speaker is used to dial, the fax is sent after the number is dialed and the connection is established. If a person
answers, you will be able to hear his or her voice, but you will not be able to speak.
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
When the document glass is used, only one page can be transmitted.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 4-47)
(3)
Telephone mode.
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Speaker Volume
2
Enter the destination fax number.
(1)
Speaker
To
(1) Touch the [Speaker] key.
Resend
You will hear the dial tone through the machine's speaker.
Cc
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
1
2
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
Freq.
Sort Address
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
Fax Memory:100%
MNOP
(2) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
For the [Address Book] key, see "BASE SCREEN OF
FAX MODE" (page 4-8).
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
(3) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
Fax Manual
Reception
A group key cannot be used.
• In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-16).
• After touching the [Speaker] key, you can touch the [Speaker Volume] key to adjust the volume of the speaker. The
speaker volume changes each time the [Speaker Volume] key is touched. Adjust the volume to the desired level.
Wait until the connection is made and then press the [START] key.
Transmission begins.
3
To cancel transmission...
Touch the [Speaker] key before the [START] key is pressed. The line will be disconnected and transmission will stop.
• When the speaker is used, transmission takes place without scanning the original into memory.
• A destination that includes a F-code (sub-address and passcode) cannot be used.
• A one-touch key that has multiple destinations or has a non-fax destination cannot be used.
System Settings (Administrator): Speaker Settings
The default volume level of the speaker can be changed in the "Speaker Settings".
4-38
Contents
FACSIMILE
SENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission)
This function is convenient when you need to send the same fax to multiple destinations, such as sending a report to
branch offices in different regions. You can transmit to as many as 500 destinations in one broadcast operation.
Transmission
Originals
It is convenient to store destinations to which you frequently send faxes by broadcast transmission in group keys. Group
dialing allows you to retrieve multiple fax numbers stored in a one-touch key by simply pressing the one-touch key. To
store group keys, see "Address Control" (page 7-17) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
When a group key is used to dial, the number of fax numbers that are dialed is the number of destinations that are
stored in the group key. When a group key that has 10 destinations is used, 10 fax numbers are dialed.
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 4-47)
4-39
Contents
FACSIMILE
Enter the destination fax number.
(2)
CCC CCC
0123456789
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
Pause
Next Address
Cc
To
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
For the [Address Book] key, see "BASE SCREEN OF
FAX MODE" (page 4-8).
1
2
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
Sub Address
III III
JJJ JJJ
Freq.
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
(3) Repeat step (2) until all destinations are
selected.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Sort Address
• In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-16).
• It is convenient to use a group key to enter the destinations.
2
• After entering a destination with the numeric keys, if you wish to enter another destination with the numeric keys,
touch the [Next Address] key before entering the next destination. The [Next Address] key can be omitted before or
after a destination entered using a one-touch key. However, if "Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting"
is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the [Next Address] key must be touched before entering the next
destination.
Fax number entered
with the numeric keys
[Next Address]
key
Fax number
entered with the
numeric keys
Cannot be omitted
[Next Address]
key
Destination entered with
a one-touch key
Can be omitted*
* Cannot be omitted if "Must Input Next
Address Key at Broadcast Setting" is enabled
in the system settings (administrator).
System Settings (Administrator): Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting
This setting is used to prohibit omission of the [Next Address] key when entering destinations for broadcast
transmissions.
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
3
Touch the [Address Review] key.
Cc
To
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
2
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
Sub Address
III III
JJJ JJJ
Freq.
Sort Address
1
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
4-40
Contents
FACSIMILE
Check the destinations and then touch
the [OK] key.
OK
Address Review
001 CCC CCC
002 KKK KKK
003 LLL LLL
004 MMM MMM
005 NNN NNN
006 OOO OOO
007 PPP PPP
008 QQQ QQQ
009 RRR RRR
010 SSS SSS
011 TTT TTT
012 UUU UUU
1
2
4
To
Cc
To cancel a specified destination...
Touch the key of the destination that you wish to cancel. A message will appear to confirm the deletion. Touch the
[Yes] key.
☞ CHECKING AND DELETING ENTERED DESTINATIONS (page 4-19)
Press the [START] key.
5
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
• A broadcast transmission takes place by memory transmission only.
• A broadcast transmission can be used in combination with the timer transmission function to transmit at night or any other
desired time. A broadcast transmission can also be used in combination with other convenient functions.
• The broadcast transmission can include Scan to E-mail and Internet fax destinations. In this case, the image sent to the
Scan to E-mail and Internet fax destinations will be black and white.
4-41
Contents
FACSIMILE
Resending to unsuccessful broadcast transmission destinations
The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the
destinations failed, resend the fax to those destinations.
1
Print Job
2
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
JOB STATUS
Scan to
Fax Job
Pages
Touch the [Complete] key.
Internet Fax
Address
Set Time
Status
1
Broadcast0001
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting
2
0123456789
10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting
3
AAA AAA
10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
4
BBB BBB
10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting
5
Broadcast
10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting
Job Queue
1
Complete
If the job status screen of fax mode does not appear, touch the
[Fax Job] tab.
1
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
If the broadcast transmission included destinations of different modes, the same broadcast transmission key will
appear in each of those modes.
Print Job
3
Display details on the broadcast
transmission.
(2)
(1)
Scan to
Fax Job
Address
Start Time
Pages
Broadcast0001
10:00 04/01 010/003 NG000000
Status
Broadcast0002
10:05 04/01 001/001 Send OK
CCC CCC
10:22 04/01 004/004 Send OK
0123456789
10:30 04/01 010/010 Send OK
Job Queue
1
Complete
(1) Touch the key of the completed broadcast
transmission.
1
(2) Touch the [Detail] key.
Detail
Call
"Broadcastxxxx" will appear as the destination of the broadcast job key. The job control number that appeared in the
touch panel when scanning ended appears in "xxxx".
4-42
Contents
FACSIMILE
Resend to unsuccessful destinations.
OK
Detail
Broadcast0001
Address
Start Time
Status
002
DDD DDD
10:01 04/01
NG00000
010
EEE EEE
10:10 04/01
NG00000
(1) Touch the [Failed] tab.
Retry
1
(2) Touch the [Retry] key.
1
File
Failed
All Destinations
(1) (2)
4
• The procedure after the [Retry] key is touched varies depending on whether or not the document filing function was
used.
Not using document filing
You will return to the base screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Place the original and perform the
broadcast transmission operation.
Using document filing
The document filing operation selection screen will appear with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Perform the
document filing resend procedure. (There is no need to rescan the original.)
If the job was stored in a confidential folder or was stored as confidential file, a password entry screen will appear
after you touch the [Retry] key. Enter the password.
• If the [All Destinations] key is touched in (1), all destinations will be displayed. The [Retry] key that appears in the
screen can be touched to resend to all destinations.
4-43
Contents
FACSIMILE
SENDING A FAX DIRECTLY FROM A
COMPUTER (PC-Fax)
A document in a computer can be transmitted via the machine as a fax. Faxes are sent using the PC-Fax function in the
same way as documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver on your computer and then select the
Print command in the software application. Image data for transmission will be created and sent as a fax.
Fax transmission
For more information on using PC-Fax, see the Help file for the PC-Fax driver.
• To use the PC-Fax function, the PC-Fax driver must be installed. For more information, see the Start Guide.
• This function can only be used on a Windows® computer.
• This function can only be used for transmission. Faxes cannot be received to your computer.
4-44
Contents
FACSIMILE
IMAGE SETTINGS
Settings for scanning the original are selected in the base screen of each mode. The current state of each setting
appears to the right of the key used to select the setting.
Scan
Address Book
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
Auto
(1)
Direct TX
Exposure
Auto
(2)
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
(3)
Address Review
Special Modes
File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
(1)
[Original] key
Touch this key to set the scan size, send size, and
orientation of the original, and select 2-sided scanning
settings.
☞ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF
AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 4-46),
SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE
(page 4-47)
(2)
[Exposure] key
Touch this key to select the exposure for scanning.
☞ CHANGING THE EXPOSURE (page 4-56)
(3)
[Resolution] key
Touch this key to select the scanning resolution.
☞ CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 4-57)
4-45
Contents
FACSIMILE
AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN
ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original)
The automatic document feeder will automatically scan both sides of the document.
Transmission
2-sided original
1
Front and back are
sent as two pages
Touch the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-45)
Specify the binding style of the 2-sided
original (book or tablet) and the
orientation in which the original is placed.
OK
Fax/Original
Scan Size
8½x11
100% Send Size
Auto
(1) Touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the
[2-Sided Tablet] key.
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Tablet
2-Sided
Booklet
A book and a tablet are bound as shown below.
Booklet
(1)
(2)
Tablet
(3)
A J
E
C L
G
2
A B
E F
K L
(2) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation] key.
If the wrong orientation is selected here, the image may
not be sent properly.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
To cancel 2-sided scanning, touch the highlighted key so that it is no longer highlighted.
• 2-sided scanning automatically turns off after the transmission operation is completed.
• 2-sided scanning is not possible when direct transmission or speaker transmission is performed.
4-46
Contents
FACSIMILE
SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE
When the original is placed, the original size and the send size set in the system settings appear in the base screen as
the original size and send size.
Scan
Internet Fax
Address Book
Direct TX
Original
Fax
Scan:
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
Special Modes
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
Auto
File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
In the above screen, the scan size (the original size) is 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) and the send size is auto. If, for example, the
scan size were 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) and the send size were 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5), the image would be reduced before
transmission.
"Scan Size"
Transmission
"Send Size" is set to
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5)
The image is reduced
to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5)
before transmission
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
If the size of the placed original is different from the displayed original size, specify the original size.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by paper size) (page 4-48)
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values) (page 4-51)
• System Settings (Administrator): Default Original Size Settings
Set this if you frequently use a particular original size. The set size will appear in the [Original] key.
When this setting is configured, changing the original size can be omitted.
• System settings (Administrator): Setting of Default Original Exit Place (MX-B402SC Only)
When the automatic document feeder is used, the original's default output destination can be set to the upper exit or the
heavy exit. (Except when "Size Input" or "Card Size" is selected for the original size.)
4-47
Contents
FACSIMILE
Specifying the original scan size (by paper size)
If the size of the placed original is different from the displayed original size or you wish to change the original size, you
must touch the [Original] key and directly specify the original size. Place the original in the document feeder tray or on
the document glass and follow the steps below.
Touch the [Original] key.
1
The original size set in the system settings appears to the right of the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-45)
OK
Fax/Original
Scan Size
8½x11
2
Touch the [Scan Size] key.
100% Send Size
Auto
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
4-48
Contents
FACSIMILE
Specify the scan size.
MX-B402:
(1) Touch the appropriate original size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Specify the scan size.
MX-B402SC:
(1)
(3)
OK
Fax/Original
Original Exit
Place
3
Upper Exit
Heavy Exit
(1) Touch the original output destination.
(2) Touch the appropriate original size key.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Original Size
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
8½x13
AB
Check Size
8½x13
Long Size
Size Input
Card Size
Inch
(2)
• If you are sending a long original, touch the [Long Size] key. Use the automatic document feeder to scan a long
original. The maximum length that can be scanned is 19-5/8" (500 mm) (the maximum height is 8-1/2" (216 mm)).
• To specify an AB size for the scan size, touch the [AB Inch] key to highlight the [AB] side and then specify the
scan size.
MX-B402SC Only
• In the situations below, the original exit place is fixed to the heavy exit.
- When "Card Size" is selected
- When the original guide is set to 2 7/8" (74 mm) or lower (Except when "Check Size" is selected)
- When the automatic document feeder is scanning an original with an X (horizontal) value of 4 1/8" (105 mm) or
less
• When "Card Size" is selected, you cannot copy if the original guide is set to 2 7/8" (74 mm) or higher.
4-49
Contents
FACSIMILE
OK
Fax/Original
Scan Size
5½x8½
4
Touch the [OK] key.
100% Send Size
Auto
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed.
4-50
Contents
FACSIMILE
Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values)
When scanning a non-standard size original such as a postcard or card, follow these steps to specify the original size.
Touch the [Original] key.
1
The original size set in the system settings appears to the right of the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-45)
OK
Fax/Original
Scan Size
8½x11
Touch the [Scan Size] key.
100% Send Size
Auto
2
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
Touch the [Size Input] key.
MX-B402:
OK
Fax/Original
5½x8½
8½x11
8½x13
AB
8½x14
8½x13
Inch
Long Size
Size Input
3
MX-B402SC:
OK
Scan/Original
Fax/Original
Original Exit
Place
Upper Exit
Heavy Exit
Original Size
5½x8½
8½x13
8½x14
8½x11
8½x13
8½x14
AB
Check Size
8½x13
Long Size
Size Input
Card Size
Inch
If the [Card Size] key is touched, "X86 Y54" is set in [Size Input]. (MX-B402SC)
4-51
Contents
FACSIMILE
(1), (2)
(3)
Fax/Original
OK
Cancel
Size Input
X
11
(1 14)
inch
Y
8½
(1 8 1/2)
inch
OK
Enter the scan size.
(1) Enter the X (horizontal) dimension of the
original.
With the [X] key highlighted, enter the X (horizontal)
dimension of the original with the
keys. When the
document glass is used, enter a number from 1" to
11-5/8" (25 mm to 297 mm).
MX-B402:
When the automatic document feeder is used, enter a
number from 3-1/2" to 14" (89 mm to 356 mm).
When a number which is from 5-3/8" (139 mm) and less is
entered in 2-Sided scanning setting, an original cannot be
scanned.
If the horizontal dimension of the original is less than
3-1/2" (89 mm), use the document glass.
MX-B402SC:
When the automatic document feeder is used, enter a
number from 3-1/4" to 14" (85 mm to 356 mm).
When a number which is from 3-1/8" (84 mm) and less is
entered in 2-Sided scanning setting, an original cannot be
scanned.
If the horizontal dimension of the original is less than
3-1/4" (85 mm), use the document glass.
(2) Enter the Y (vertical) dimension of the
original.
4
Touch the [Y] key and enter the Y (vertical) dimension of
the original with the
keys. When the document
glass is used, enter a number from 1" to 8-1/2" (25 mm to
216 mm).
MX-B402:
When the automatic document feeder is used, enter a
number from 4" to 8-1/2" (100 mm to 216 mm).
If the vertical dimension of the original is less than 4" (100
mm), use the document glass.
MX-B402SC:
When the automatic document feeder is used, enter a
number from 2" to 8-1/2" (51 mm to 216 mm).
If the vertical dimension of the original is less than 2" (51
mm), use the document glass.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
To complete the setting and return to the screen of step 3,
touch the [OK] key next to the [Cancel] key.
MX-B402:
• When a number from 11-3/4" to 14" (298 mm to 356 mm) to the X (horizontal) dimension and a number from 1" to
3-7/8" (25 mm to 99 mm) to the Y (vertical) dimension are entered at the same time, an original cannot be scanned.
MX-B402SC:
• When a number from 11-3/4" to 14" (298 mm to 356 mm) to the X (horizontal) dimension and a number from 1" to
1-7/8" (25mm to 50 mm) to the Y (vertical) dimension are entered at the same time, an original cannot be scanned.
• When the X (horizontal) value is set to 4 1/8" (105 mm) or lower and the Y (vertical) value is set to 2 7/8" (74 mm) or
lower, "Card Size" is automatically selected and the original exit place is fixed to the heavy exit.
4-52
Contents
FACSIMILE
OK
Fax/Original
Touch the [OK] key.
The specified size appears in the [Scan Size] key.
Scan Size
X11 Y8½
5
Send Size
Auto
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
• When the scan size is specified by numerical values, the send size cannot be specified.
• When the automatic document feeder is used, an original longer that 11-5/8" (297 mm) can be scanned (maximum width
19-5/8" (500 mm)). In this case, touch the [Long Size] key in the screen of step 3.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by paper size) (page 4-48)
4-53
Contents
FACSIMILE
Specifying the send size of the original
Specify the send size as a paper size. If a send size bigger than the scan size is selected, the image will be enlarged. If
a send size smaller than the scan size is selected, the image will be reduced.
The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by
numerical values.
1
Touch the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-45)
OK
Fax/Original
Scan Size
8½x11
2
Touch the [Send Size] key.
100% Send Size
Auto
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
(1)
Fax/Original
(2)
OK
Specify the send size.
(1) Touch the desired send size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Auto
Manual
5½x8½
3
8½x13
8½x11
8½x14
8½x13
11x17
AB
Inch
• Depending on the "Scan Size" setting, it may not be possible to select some sizes for the "Send Size". Size keys
that cannot be specified for the "Send Size" are grayed out to prevent selection.
• To specify an AB size for the send size, touch the [AB
send size.
4-54
Inch] key to highlight the [AB] side and then specify the
Contents
FACSIMILE
(1)
(2)
OK
Fax/Original
Scan Size
8½x11
129% Send Size
11x17
Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.
(1) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation]
key.
If the wrong orientation is selected here, the image may
not be sent properly when using enlargement/reduction.
4
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
The ratio used for reduction or enlargement of the original will appear between the "Scan Size" and the "Send Size".
4-55
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHANGING THE EXPOSURE
The exposure can be changed to match the darkness of the original.
Refer to the following tables to select appropriate settings.
Exposure settings
Exposure
When to select
Auto
This setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original.
Manual
1-2
Select this setting when the original consists of dark text.
3
Select this setting for a normal original (neither dark nor light).
4-5
Select this setting when the original consists of faint text.
Touch the [Exposure] key.
1
The current exposure setting appears to the right of the [Exposure] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-45)
(1)
(2)
(3)
OK
Fax/Exposure
Select the exposure.
(1) Touch the [Manual] key.
(2) Adjust the exposure with the
Auto
2
When the exposure is set to [Auto], the
keys
cannot be used.
The exposure darkens when the
key is touched,
and lightens when the
key is touched.
To return to auto exposure adjustment, touch the [Auto]
key.
Manual
1
3
keys.
5
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the exposure setting can be changed each time you change
pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun.
(However, when "Job Build" in the special modes is used, the exposure can be changed each time a new set of originals is
inserted.)
System Settings (Administrator): Default Exposure Settings
This is used to change the default exposure setting.
4-56
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHANGING THE RESOLUTION
The resolution can be selected to match the characteristics of the original, such as text or photo, the size of the text, and
the darkness of the image.
Refer to the following tables to select appropriate settings.
Resolution settings
Resolution
When to select
Standard
Select this setting when your original consists of normal-sized text (like the text in this manual).
Fine
Select this setting when your original has small text or diagrams with fine lines.
The original will be scanned at twice the resolution of the [Standard] setting.
Super Fine
Select this setting when your original has intricate pictures or diagrams.
A higher-quality image will be produced than with the [Fine] setting.
Ultra Fine
Select this setting when your original has intricate pictures or diagrams.
This setting gives the best image quality. However, transmission will take longer than with the
other settings.
Half Tone
Select this setting when your original is a photograph or has gradations of color (such as a
color original).
This setting will produce a clearer image than [Fine], [Super Fine], or [Ultra Fine] used alone.
Halftone cannot be selected when [Standard] is used.
Touch the [Resolution] key.
1
The current resolution setting appears to the right of the [Resolution] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-45)
(1)
(2)
Fax/Resolution
OK
Select the resolution.
(1) Touch the key of the desired resolution.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Standard
Fine
2
Super Fine
Half Tone
Ultra Fine
When [Fine], [Super Fine], or [Ultra Fine] is selected, the [Half Tone] key can be touched to select halftone.
• When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the resolution setting can be changed each time you change pages.
When using the automatic document feeder, the resolution setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun. (However, when
"Job Build" in the special modes is used, the resolution can be changed each time a new set of originals is inserted.)
• When a fax is sent at [Ultra Fine], [Super Fine], or [Fine] resolution, a lower resolution will be used if the receiving machine
does not have that resolution.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Resolution Setting
This is used to change the default resolution setting.
4-57
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE
TRANSMITTED (Preview)
MX-B402SC
If you touch the [Preview] key before scanning the original, you can check the scanned image in the touch panel before
sending the image.
* The factory default setting is disabled.
Depending on the size of the transmission data, part of the preview image may not appear in the preview screen in the touch
panel.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Scan
Address Book
Direct TX
2
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
Special Modes
USB Mem. Scan
Auto
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
Touch the [Preview] key to highlight it.
Auto
File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Preview
Select transmission settings and press the [START] key.
3
"Originals are being read" appears while the originals are being scanned, and when scanning is finished, the preview screen
appears on the touch panel. Transmission will not take place until you touch the [Start Sending] key in the preview screen.
Preview
B/W
Sender Info
Function Rev.
4
Check the preview image and then touch
the [Start Sending] key.
Transmission begins.
For information on the preview screen, see "PREVIEW CHECK
SCREEN" (page 4-59).
Display Rotation
0001
/0010
Start
Sending
System settings (administrator): Default Preview
You can specify whether or not the [Preview] key function will be enabled in the base screens of the image send modes and
in the address book.
4-58
Contents
FACSIMILE
PREVIEW CHECK SCREEN
This section explains the preview check screen.
Preview
B/W
Sender Info
Function Rev.
(1)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Display Rotation
(6)
0001
Start
Sending
/0010
(7)
(2)
(1)
(3)
Preview image
Touch to display the sender information for fax own
number.
This key can only be touched when the entire preview
image is displayed in the preview screen.
A preview of the scanned original appears.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and slide
it to scroll. (You can also touch the
keys to scroll.)
(2)
(4)
Change page keys
[Sender Info] key
[Function Rev.] key
Touch to check special mode settings or scan settings for
two-sided originals.
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
•
keys: Go to the first or the last page.
•
keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
(5)
• Page number display:
This shows the total number of pages
and the current page number. You can
touch the current page number key and
enter a number with the numeric keys
to go to that page number.
Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order "Full Page", "Twice",
"4 Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in
the file, not just the displayed page.
(6)
"Display Rotation" key
This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.
(7)
[Start Sending] key
Touch to begin transmission.
• A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual send result.
• The preview image reflects certain scanning and special mode settings.
Settings reflected in the preview image are as follows:
Scanning settings: Original
Special modes: Erase, Card Shot
4-59
Contents
FACSIMILE
FAX RECEPTION
This section explains the basic procedures for receiving faxes.
RECEIVING FAXES
When the reception mode is set to "Auto Reception", the machine will receive and print faxes automatically. The fax
reception mode is displayed in the base screen.
Scan
Address Book
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
Direct TX
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
Special Modes
USB Mem. Scan
Auto
8½x11
File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Send:
PC Scan
Auto
This shows the current fax
reception mode and the amount
of free memory remaining.
• When fax reception is in progress, it is possible to reserve a transmission by performing the transmission in memory
transmission mode.
☞ TRANSMISSION METHODS (page 4-25)
• When a fax smaller than 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size is received, the size of the paper used for printing will vary depending on the
orientation (vertical or horizontal) in which the sender placed the original.
• System Settings: Receive Setting (page 7-106)
This is used to change the fax reception mode. "Auto Reception" should normally be used.
Select "Manual Reception" when an extension phone is connected to the machine.
• System Settings (Administrator): Allow/Reject Number Setting
You can store numbers and specify whether or not reception is allowed from those numbers.
4-60
Contents
FACSIMILE
RECEIVING A FAX
When a fax is transmitted to the machine, the machine automatically receives and prints the fax.
Beep
The machine rings and fax reception
begins automatically.
A beep sounds when reception ends.
1
• System Settings (Administrator): Speaker Settings
This is used to change the volume and tone of the reception beep.
• System Settings (Administrator): Number of Calls in Auto Reception
This is used to change the number of rings on which fax reception begins automatically. To receive faxes without
the machine ringing, select "0" rings.
The fax is automatically printed.
2
• If a password entry screen appears...
A password must be entered to print the received fax. When the correct password is entered, the received fax is printed.
☞ PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX (Hold Setting For Received Data Print) (page 4-63)
• Stapling (when a finisher is installed) can be selected.
When printing received data, you can specify the number of copies and staple settings.
• If printing of a copy job or print job is in progress when a fax is received, the fax will not be printed until the previously
reserved job is completed.
• Received faxes will not be printed when the machine cannot print due to an error condition such as out of paper, out of
toner, or a paper misfeed. The faxes will be printed automatically when the error condition is cleared. (If the machine ran
out of paper, touch the [OK] key in the touch panel after loading paper.
• When received faxes cannot be printed, the faxes can be forwarded to another fax machine.
☞ FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES (Fax Data Forward) (page 4-66)
• If stapling is enabled when a finisher is installed, stapling will take place at
the position indicated below on the paper.
• System Settings (Administrator): Duplex Reception Setting
This is used to have received faxes printed on both sides of the paper.
• System Settings (Administrator): Receiving Date & Time Print
Use this to select whether or not the date and time of reception is added when a received image is printed.
4-61
Contents
FACSIMILE
RECEIVING A FAX MANUALLY
A fax can be received manually using the touch panel. While the machine rings, touch the [Speaker] key in the base
screen and then touch the [Fax Manual Reception] key that appears.
Telephone mode.
Scan
Internet Fax
Fax
Address Book
Original
Speaker Volume
Exposure
Auto
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
Special Modes
Scan:
Speaker
Resend
USB Mem. Scan
PC Scan
8½x11
Send:
Auto
File
Quick File
Fax Memory:100%
Fax Manual
Reception
• When a call is answered by touching the [Speaker] key, you will be able to hear the other party, however, you will not be
able to speak.
• Even when you use an extension phone to answer a call, you can touch the [Fax Manual Reception] key in the touch panel
to begin fax reception. You can also use the extension phone to begin fax reception.
☞ RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON THE EXTENSION PHONE (Remote Reception) (page 4-118)
4-62
Contents
FACSIMILE
PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print)
"Hold Setting for Received Data Print" can be enabled in the system settings (administrator) to have faxes received to
memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a password must be entered. When this function is used, a password
entry screen appears in the touch panel when a fax is received.
Received data is stored.
Enter password via the 10-key.
Cancel
When the previously programmed 4-digit password is entered with the numeric keys, printing begins.
The [Cancel] key can be touched to close the password entry screen. If this is done, the data in memory key (
) will
blink in the touch panel. The password entry screen will reappear when you touch the blinking key (
) or change
modes.
When "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), a password can be
entered to display the received data list screen. If you wish to check an image before printing it, continue from step 1 on
the next page.
• The received faxes will be retained in memory regardless of whether they were received automatically or manually.
• If "Fax Data Receive/Forward" is executed in the system settings to forward received faxes to another machine, faxes
retained in memory will also be forwarded. At that time, the same password entry screen as for printing will appear.
Forwarding will not take place unless the password is entered.
System Settings (Administrator): Hold Setting for Received Data Print
Enable this setting to have received faxes retained in memory until a password is entered. This setting is also used to
program the password.
4-63
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING
When "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled* in the system settings (administrator), you can check a
received image in the touch panel before printing it out. When this function is enabled, follow the steps below to print a
received image.
* The factory default setting is disabled.
When an image is received, a
confirmation prompt will appear. Touch
the [Yes] key.
The memory has received data.
Check the data?
1
No
If this message appears while you are configuring settings of
any type and you touch the [Yes] key, the settings that you are
configuring will be cancelled. If this message appears in
another mode, you will return to the base screen of image send
mode after checking the image.
Yes
Select the received image
(1)
Received Data List
Select All
Thumbnail
2
(1) Touch the key of the received image that
you want to check.
Back
Multiple received images can be checked.
0123456789
04/04/2010
10:28
Not checked
BBB BBB
04/04/2010
10:14
Checked
1
9876543210
04/04/2010
10:12
Not checked
5
BBB BBB
0612345678
04/04/2010
10:08
Checked
BBB BBB
0123456789
04/04/2010
10:00
Not checked
CCC CCC
04/04/2010
10:00
Checked
Image Check
Delete
(2) Touch the [Image Check] key.
• To show thumbnails of the received images, touch the
[Thumbnail] key.
• To delete an image that has been selected, touch the
[Delete] key. To print an image that has been selected,
touch the [Print] key.
Print
(2)
0123456789
Check the received image and then
touch the [Print] key.
Back
Image Check
04/04/2010
3
10:28
1 / 3
Display Rotation
0001 /0010
Printing begins.
For information on the image check screen, see "IMAGE
CHECK SCREEN" (page 4-65).
Print
If the screen of step 1 appears when you are configuring settings in the setting screens of any of the modes, the configured
settings will be cancelled if you view the image. After viewing the image, you will return to the base screen of image send
mode, regardless of which mode you were in previously.
System Settings (Administrator): Received Data Image Check Setting
Use this to specify whether or not a received fax can be viewed before it is printed.
4-64
Contents
FACSIMILE
IMAGE CHECK SCREEN
This section explains the image check screen.
Back
Image Check
0123456789
04/04/2010
10:28
1 / 3
Display Rotation
Print
0001
(1)
(1)
(2)
0010
(3)
(4)
(4)
Information display
Preview image
An image of the selected received image appears.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the
keys to
scroll.)
(3)
(5)
(7)
"Display Rotation" key
[Print] key
Touch this key to start printing.
(6)
Display zoom key
Use this key to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
The setting applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.
Change page keys
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
•
keys: Go to the first or the last page.
•
keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
• Page number display: This shows the total number of
pages and the current page
number. You can touch the
current page number key and
enter a number with the
numeric keys to go to that page
number.
(6)
This key rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees.
The rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.
This shows information on the displayed image.
(2)
(5)
(7)
Image select key
When multiple images are selected for preview display,
use this key to change the displayed images.
A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.
4-65
Contents
FACSIMILE
FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES
(Fax Data Forward)
When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another
previously programmed fax machine.
This function is convenient in an office or work area that has two or more telephone lines and another fax machine is
connected to a different line than the machine.
The machine
The machine cannot print
Forwarding
destination
Forwarding
Printing
Received fax
Forwarding of received faxes is executed in the system settings of the machine. Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key on
the operation panel to display the system setting menu screen in the touch panel. Select [Fax Data Receive/Forward] [Fax Settings], and then touch the key that executes received fax forwarding.
• If some pages of a fax that is being forwarded were successfully printed, only those pages that were not printed will be
forwarded.
• A forwarded fax becomes a fax transmission job. If transmission does not take place because the transmission was
canceled or an error occurred, the fax will be held in memory until it can be printed.
• Faxes received to a F-code confidential memory box cannot be forwarded.
• If a password entry screen appears after touching the [OK] key, "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" has been enabled.
Enter the password with the numeric keys to begin forwarding.
☞ PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX (Hold Setting For Received Data Print) (page 4-63)
• System Settings: Fax Data Receive/Forward (page 7-25)
Use this to forward received faxes when the machine is unable to print.
• System Settings (Administrator): Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding
This is used to store the forwarding fax number.
4-66
Contents
FACSIMILE
FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO A
NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing Settings)
You can have received faxes automatically forwarded to an e-mail address, file server address, desktop address, or
network folder address. This function can be used to forward received faxes to a specified address without printing them.
The machine
Forwarding
Received fax
• This function cannot be used for faxes received by confidential reception.
• When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot
be printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date & Time Print" is disabled.)
CONFIGURING INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS
All inbound routing settings are configured in the Web pages. For the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the
Start Guide.
The following explanation assumes that the Web pages have been accessed with administrator rights.
To configure inbound routing settings, follow the steps below.
Enabling the inbound routing function.
(1) In the Web page menu, click [Application
Settings], [Inbound Routing Settings], and
then [Administration Settings].
(2) Select [Enable] in "Inbound Routing" and
click the [Submit] button.
1
(2)
Users without administrator rights can be prohibited from storing, editing, and deleting forwarding tables in this screen,
and from specifying which table is used. To do so, select the checkboxes below
.
• Disable Registration of Forward Table • Disable Change/Delete of Forward Table • Disable Change of Forward
Approval
When inbound routing is enabled, you can also specify whether or not you wish the machine to print the forwarded
faxes.
To have all received faxes printed before being forwarded, select "Print Out All Report" in "Print Style Setting". To
have received faxes printed only when an error prevents forwarding, select "Print at Error".
After configuring the settings, be sure to click the [Submit] button.
4-67
Contents
FACSIMILE
Storing sender addresses.
If you wish to have only faxes from specified addresses
forwarded, store the desired sender addresses. Sender
addresses stored here can be selected from a list when you
store a forwarding table.
(1) Click [Sender Number/Address
Registration] in the [Inbound Routing
Settings] menu in the Web page.
(2)
2
(2) Enter the sender address in "Internet Fax
Address" or "Fax Number" as appropriate,
and click the [Add to List] button.
The entered address will be added to the "Address to be
Entered" list.
• Specify whether the address will be directly entered
(maximum of 1500 characters) or selected from a
global address book by clicking the [Global Address
Search] button.
• To store multiple addresses, repeat this step.
(3)
(3) When you have finished adding addresses,
click the [Submit] button.
• A maximum of 500 sender numbers/addresses can be stored.
• To delete an entered address, select the address in "Address to be Entered" and click the [Delete] button.
4-68
Contents
FACSIMILE
(2)
(3) (4)
Store a forwarding table.
Follow the steps below to store a forwarding table that
combines a specified sender and forwarding address.
(1) Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web
page menu and click the [Add] button.
(2) Enter a "Table Name".
(3) Select the line used for reception.
(MX-B402SC only)
(4) Select the sender whose faxes will be
forwarded.
• To forward all received faxes, select [Forward All
Received Data].
MX-B402
• To forward faxes received from a specific sender only,
select [Forward Received Data from Below Sender],
select the sender from the list, and then click the [Add]
button.
MX-B402SC
• To forward only data received from specific senders,
select [Forward Received Data from Below Sender].
To forward all data except data from specific senders,
select [Forward Received Data from Senders except
Below]. Select the appropriate senders from the list and
click the [Add] button.
(5) Select the forwarding conditions.
(MX-B402SC only)
3
(8)
(7) (6)
• To always forward received data, select [Always
Forward].
• To specify a day and time on which received data will
be forwarded, select [Forward on Selected Day & Time]
and select the checkbox
of the desired day of the
week. To specify a time, select the [Set Forwarding
Time] checkbox
and specify the time.
(5)
(6) Select the file format.
The format can be set separately for each forwarding
address (for each of forwarding addresses 1, 2, and 3 in
the table).
(7) Select the forwarding address.
Forwarding addresses can be selected from the
machine's address book. (Multiple addresses can be
selected.) A maximum of 1000 forwarding addresses can
be stored (a combined maximum of 100 file server,
desktop, and network folder addresses can be stored).
(8) Click [Submit].
• When selecting senders from the "Sender Number/Address Setting" list, you can use the [Shift] key or the [Ctrl] key
on your keyboard to select multiple senders.
• A maximum of 50 forwarding tables can be stored.
• Images sent in TIFF format may not display correctly in some recipient environments. In this event, change the file
format to PDF.
• For the MX-B402, If you wish to select a group of addresses for the forwarding destination, you can only select a
group that contains e-mail addresses only.
• For the MX-B402SC, up to three forwarding day and time settings can be set for one forwarding table, and a
forwarding destination can be set for each set time. To configure these settings, use the forwarding list tabs to
access each setting.
4-69
Contents
FACSIMILE
(2)
Specifying forwarding tables to be used.
To use the inbound routing function, enable the forwarding
tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables.
(1) Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web
page menu.
(2)
MX-B402
Select the "Forward Activated" checkbox of
each forwarding table that you wish to use.
MX-B402SC
Select [Always Forward] or [Forward on
Selected Day & Time] from the forwarding
table.
4
The forwarding permission settings that appear here are
linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 3. If you
wish to use different forwarding conditions than those set
in step 3, set the forwarding permission settings
(3) Click [Submit].
(3)
To delete a forwarding table, click the checkbox next to the table name so that it is selected
4-70
and click [Delete].
Contents
FACSIMILE
SPECIAL MODES
This section explains special modes that can be used for fax transmission.
SPECIAL MODES
When the [Special Modes] key is touched in the base screen, the special modes menu screen appears. The special
modes menu consists of two screens. Touch the
key to switch between the two screens. When the [OK] key is
touched in the special modes screen, the selected settings are entered and the base screen reappears.
1st screen
2nd screen
MX-B402:
Fax/Special Modes
(1)
OK
(2)
Program
(4)
Card Shot
(7)
(3)
(12)
Erase
(5)
Job
Build
(8)
File
Fax/Special Modes
Timer
(6)
Slow Scan
Mode
(9)
(13)
Polling
Memory Box
1
2
2
2
Business
Card Scan
Quick File
(10)Transaction
OK
(11)
Own Name
Select
Report
MX-B402SC:
Fax/Special Modes
(1)
OK
(2)
Program
(4)
Card Shot
(14)
Original
Count
(3)
(12)
Erase
(5)
Job
Build
Timer
(6)
Slow Scan
Mode
File
2
2
2
(11)
Own Name
Select
(6)
[Program] key
☞ STORING FAX OPERATIONS (Program) (page
[Slow Scan Mode] key
☞ FAXING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode) (page
4-84)
[Erase] key
(7)
☞ ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
(8)
[Timer] key
☞ SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME (Timer)
[Card Shot] key
☞ SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE
(9)
PAGE (Card Shot) (page 4-79)
(5)
[Job Build] key
☞ SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES (Job
[Quick File] key
Touch this key to use the Quick File function of document
filing mode.
(page 4-77)
(4)
[File] key
Touch this key to use the File function of document filing
mode.
IMAGE (Erase) (page 4-75)
(3)
Polling
1
4-73)
(2)
(13)
Memory Box
Quick File
Report
(1)
OK
(8)
(7)
(10)Transaction
Fax/Special Modes
[Business Card Scan] key*
☞
SENDING BUSINESS CARDS (Business Card
Scan) (page 4-88)
(10) [Transaction Report] key
☞ CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
Build) (page 4-82)
TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction Report)
(page 4-89)
4-71
Contents
FACSIMILE
(11) [Own Name Select] key
☞ TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE SENDER
(13) [Polling] key
☞ CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING
INFORMATION (Own Name Select) (page 4-92)
(12) [Memory Box] key
☞ SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER MACHINE
RECEPTION (Polling) (page 4-93)
(14) [Original Count] key
☞ CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
POLLS YOUR MACHINE (Polling Memory) (page
4-96)
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION
(Original Count) (page 4-86)
* Only MX-B402
The optional business card feeder must be attached and "Business Card Scan Option" must be enabled in the system
settings (administrator).
Special modes can generally be combined with other special modes, however, there are some combinations that are not
possible. If a prohibited combination is selected, a message will appear in the touch panel.
[OK] key and [Cancel] key
In some cases two [OK] keys and one [Cancel] key will appear in the special mode screens. The keys are used as
follows:
Fax/Special Modes
Cancel
Erase
OK
(A)
OK
(B)
(C)
Edge
Erase
Edge
1/2
(0~1)
inch
Side Erase
(A) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the base screen.
(B) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the special modes menu screen. Touch this key when you
wish to continue selecting other special mode settings.
(C) During selection of special mode settings, this key returns you to the special modes menu screen without saving the
settings. When settings have been completed, this cancels the settings and returns you to the special modes menu
screen.
4-72
Contents
FACSIMILE
STORING FAX OPERATIONS (Program)
A program is a group of transmission settings stored together. When transmission settings are stored in a program, the
settings can be retrieved and used for a fax job by means of a simple operation.
For example, suppose that the same 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size documents are distributed to branch offices in various
regions once a month.
(1) The same documents are faxed to each branch office
(2) Smudges on the edges of the documents are erased before transmission
When a job program is not stored
When a job program is stored
Enter the fax numbers of the branch offices.
Retrieve the stored program.
Select erase settings.
Press the [START] key.
The originals are scanned and transmitted.
Press the [START] key.
The originals are scanned and transmitted.
Considerable time is required to send the documents each
month because the above settings must be selected.
In addition, mistakes may occasionally be made when
selecting the settings, so incorrect transmissions may occur.
When a program is stored, settings are selected with ease by
simply pressing the program key.
In addition, transmission takes place based on the stored
settings so there are no chances for mistakes.
• Programs are stored, edited, and deleted using "Address Control" in the system settings. See "Program" (page
7-23) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
• Programs can also be stored using the Web pages. Click [Job Programs] and then [Image Send] in the Web page menu.
• The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can
be used repeatedly for transmission.
• The following settings can be stored in programs.
• Destinations:
One-touch keys, group keys, search number
• Image settings:
Original scan size, original orientation, duplex scanning, exposure, resolution
• Special modes:
Polling reception, Erase, Job Build, Slow Scan Mode, Business Card Scan
• F-code communication: A destination that includes a F-code can be stored to perform a F-code operation.
• Up to 48 programs can be stored.
• Up to 500 destinations can be stored in each program.
4-73
Contents
FACSIMILE
Place the original.
1
Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass as appropriate for the functions stored in the
program.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 4-47)
Select the special modes.
2
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Program] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
(1)
Retrieve the stored program.
(2)
Program
(1) Touch the desired program key.
OK
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
3
Program A
Program B
Program C
Program D
Program E
Program F
Program G
Program H
Program I
Program J
Program K
Program L
1
2
Select additional settings.
Program : Program C
0123456789
Scan
Internet Fax
Original
Address Review
4
Fax
Scan:
Exposure
Auto
Resolution
Standard
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
Special Modes
File
PC Scan
Auto
When a program is used, the following settings can be
additionally specified:
• Image settings: Original scan size*, send size
• Special modes: Timer Transmission, Card Shot, File, Quick
File, Own Name Select, Transaction Report
* When stored in the program, this cannot be additionally
specified.
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
• The screen that appears will vary depending on the destination stored in the program.
• The mode cannot be changed here.
• Functions stored in the program cannot be canceled here.
Press the [START] key.
5
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
4-74
Contents
FACSIMILE
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase)
The erase function is used to erase shadows on images produced when scanning thick originals or books. (This function
does not detect shadows and will eliminate everything appearing in the erase area - including shadows, text and images.)
Scanning a thick book
Not using the erase
function
Shadows appear here.
Shadows appear in the image.
Using the erase
function
No shadows appear.
Erase modes
Side Erase
Edge Erase
Place the original.
1
2
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 4-47)
Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
Select the special modes.
3
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Erase] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
4-75
Contents
FACSIMILE
(1)
(2)
(3)
Select the erase settings.
(1) Touch the desired erase mode.
OK
Fax/Special Modes
Cancel
Erase
Select one of the 2 erase modes.
Touch the [Side Erase] key to open the following screen.
OK
Erase
Edge
Erase
Edge
Side Erase
1/2
OK
Cancel
(0 1)
inch
Erase position
for Original Side 2
Up
Side Erase
Left
Right
Same Side as
Side 1
Different Side
from Side 1
Down
4
Touch the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase
and make sure that a checkmark (
) appears.
When performing two-sided scanning, set the erase edge
on the reverse side.
• If you touch the [Same Side as Side 1] key, the edge in
the same position as on the front side will be erased.
• If you touch the [Different Side from Side 1], the edge in
the position opposite to the erased edge on the front
side will be erased.
When you have completed the settings, touch the [OK]
key.
(2) Set the erasure width with the
keys.
0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm) can be entered.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Press the [START] key.
5
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
When the erase function is used, erase takes place at the edges of the original image. If you also use a reduction or an
enlargement setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio. For example, if the erase width setting is 1"
(20 mm) and the image is reduced to 50%, the erase width will be 1/2" (10 mm).
To cancel an erase setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
System Settings (Administrator): Erase Width Adjustment
The default erase width setting is linked to the copy mode system setting, and can be set from 0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm). The
factory default setting is 1/2" (10 mm).
4-76
Contents
FACSIMILE
SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer)
When this function is used, transmission takes place automatically at a specified time.
The timer transmission function makes it easy to perform reserved transmissions, broadcast transmissions and other
transmissions at night or other times when phone rates are low.
A timer setting can also be specified for polling reception to receive a fax when you are not present.
During the day, set up a
broadcast transmission to
take place at 20:00
At 20:00, the broadcast
transmission begins automatically
(Transmission to the first destination
takes place)
• When a timer transmission is set, keep the main power switch "on". Transmission will not take place if the main power is
turned off at the specified time.
• When performing a timer transmission, you must scan the original into memory when you set up the transmission. It is not
possible to leave the document in the auto document feeder or on the document glass and have it scanned at the reserved
time of transmission.
• Settings selected for a timer transmission (exposure, resolution, special modes, etc.) are automatically cleared after the
transmission is finished. (However, when the document filing function is used, the scanned original and settings are stored
on the built-in hard drive.)
Place the original.
1
2
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 4-47)
Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
Select the special modes.
3
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Timer] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
4-77
Contents
FACSIMILE
(1)
(2)
OK
Cancel
Timer
Day of the Week
If you do not wish to specify a day, select [---]. In this
case, transmission will begin when the time specified in
(2) arrives.
Time
10
hh.
00
keys.
(1) Specify the day.
OK
Fax/Special Modes
---
Set the time with the
(3)
(2) Specify the time (hour, minute)
mm.
Select the time in 24-hour format.
You can also directly touch a numeric display key to
change the setting with the numeric keys.
4
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
When this screen is opened, the setting will show the current time. If the time is not correct, press the [CLEAR ALL]
key (
) to cancel the operation. Correct the time in the system settings and then perform the timer transmission
procedure.
☞ CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME (page 4-6)
Press the [START] key.
5
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• The time can be specified up to a week in advance.
• Up to 94 timer transmissions can be stored at once.
• Only one timer polling operation can be stored at once. If you wish to poll multiple machines, store a serial polling timer
operation.
• If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives, the timer operation will begin after that transmission
is finished.
• Other operations can be performed after a timer transmission is set up.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.
• If a timer transmission is given priority in the job status screen, the time specification is canceled. The transmission will
begin as soon as the job in progress is completed.
☞GIVING PRIORITY TO A RESERVED FAX JOB (page 4-127)
To cancel timer transmission...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
4-78
Contents
FACSIMILE
SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A
SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot)
This function lets you send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side
separately.
Transmitted image
Originals
Transmission
Front
Back
• For the MX-B402, when using card shot, the original must be scanned on the document glass.
• For the MX-B402SC, depending on the card type, some cards cannot be used with the automatic document feeder.
MX-B402:
MX-B402:
Place the original face down on the document glass.
1
MX-B402SC:
MX-B402SC:
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set
the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND
SIZE (page 5-56)
2
Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
Select the special modes.
3
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Card Shot] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
4-79
Contents
FACSIMILE
(1)
(B)
(A)
Specify the original size.
(2)
(1) Enter the original size.
OK
Fax/Special Modes
X
3
3
8
(1~8 1/2)
inch
Y
2
1
8
(1~8 1/2)
inch
• Touch the X (width) numeric value display key and
enter the width.
• Touch the Y (height) numeric value display key and
enter the height.
(A) To return the original size to the default size, touch
the [Size Reset] key.
(B) To automatically enlarge or reduce the image size to
the send size, touch the [Fit to Send Size] key. Do not
touch this key if you wish to scan the original at the
original size that you entered.
OK
Cancel
Card Shot
Fit to
Send Size
Size Reset
4
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Y
Y
X
X
• You can also touch the
keys to change the number.
• The send size is automatically selected based on the original size you entered.
• After selecting Card Shot, you can touch the [Original] key in the base screen to change the original scan size or the
send size. In this case, press the [Scan Size] key to display the screen for this procedure. For the procedure for
setting the send size, see "Specifying the send size of the original" (page 4-54).
Press the [START] key to scan the front of the card.
5
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
Turn the card over so that the back is face down, and press the [START] key to
scan the back of the card.
6
Before scanning the back of the card, you can touch the [Configure] key in the touch panel to change the exposure.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
4-80
Contents
FACSIMILE
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original.
(Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
7
Configure
Read-End
If you will continue scanning additional cards, you can touch the [Configure] key to change the exposure, resolution,
scan size, and send size.
• The ratio cannot be specified and "Rotation Sending Setting" cannot be selected.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.
To cancel Card Shot...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
4-81
Contents
FACSIMILE
SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES
(Job Build)
This function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic
document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. Use this function when there are more original pages
than can be placed at once in the auto document feeder.
When scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first. The settings that you
select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets.
Originals
Originals are
scanned in
separate sets.
Transmission
1
1
1
101
Up to 999 pages can be scanned. Note that when the memory is being used for other jobs, fewer pages can be scanned.
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
MX-B402:
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set
the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page
4-47)
Indicator
line
1
MX-B402SC:
Indicator
line
2
Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
4-82
Contents
FACSIMILE
(2)
(3)
OK
Fax/Special Modes
Select job build mode.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
Program
3
Erase
Timer
1
Card Shot
File
Slow Scan
Mode
Job
Build
2
Business
Card Scan
Quick File
Transaction
Report
(2) Touch the [Job Build] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Own Name
Select
Press the [START] key to scan the first set.
4
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
Insert the next set of originals and press the [START] key.
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
5
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
). All scanned data will be cleared.
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original.
(Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
Configure
Read-End
6
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned.
• If the memory becomes full during scanning, a message will appear and the transmission will be canceled.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.
To cancel Job Build....
Touch the [Job Build] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
4-83
Contents
FACSIMILE
FAXING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode)
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent
thin originals from misfeeding.
A
A
B
C
D
B
C
D
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
MX-B402:
Adjust the document guides slowly.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set
the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page
4-47)
1
MX-B402SC:
Indicator
line
If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.
2
Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
(2)
(3)
OK
Fax/Special Modes
Select slow scan mode.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
Program
3
Erase
Timer
1
Card Shot
File
Transaction
Report
Job
Build
Quick File
Slow Scan
Mode
Business
Card Scan
2
(2) Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Own Name
Select
4-84
Contents
FACSIMILE
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
4
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
When this function is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible.
To cancel slow scan mode...
Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
This is used to have scanning always take place using slow scan mode.
4-85
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION
(Original Count)
MX-B402SC Only
The number of scanned original sheets can be counted and displayed before transmission. Checking the number of
scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes.
Indicator
line
1
2
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
(3)
(2)
Fax/Special Modes
OK
Select the original count function.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
Program
3
Erase
Timer
1
Card Shot
Original
Count
Job
Build
File
Transaction
Report
Slow Scan
Mode
Quick File
2
(2) Touch the [Original Count] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Own Name
Select
Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Scanning begins.
4
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation. All scanned data will be cleared.
4-86
Contents
FACSIMILE
(A)
(B)
XX pages of original have been scanned.
Send the scanned data?
Cancel
5
(P.x)
OK
When scanning ends, check the number
of original sheets scanned and touch the
[OK] key.
Transmission will begin.
• When Job Build mode is used, the confirmation message will
appear after the [Read-End] key is touched.
• The message on the screen shows the number of sheets
scanned in (A), and the number of pages (sheet sides)
scanned in (B). For example, if both sides of one original
sheet are scanned, "1" will appear in (A) and "2" will appear
in (B).
If this step is not performed for one minute while the above confirmation screen appears, the scanned image and
settings will be cleared and the base screen will reappear. Scanning will not be completed automatically and the
image will not be reserved for transmission.
If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets...
Touch the [Cancel] key and then touch the [OK] key in the message screen to clear all scanned data. Scan settings
and destination settings will not be cleared. Insert the original sheets in the automatic document feeder again and
press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key to re-scan.
When original count is enabled, it is enabled in other modes as well.
To cancel the Original Sheet Count function...
Touch the [Original Count] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is no longer highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Original Count Setting
This can be enabled to have the number of original sheets always counted. The setting can be enabled separately for each
mode.
4-87
Contents
FACSIMILE
SENDING BUSINESS CARDS
(Business Card Scan)
MX-B402 Only
Multiple business cards can be scanned and transmitted at once.
To use this function, the business card feeder must be attached to the automatic document feeder and "Business Card
Scan" must be enabled in the system settings (administrator). For the attachment procedure, see "BUSINESS CARD
FEEDER" in "BEFORE USING THE MACHINE" (page 1-47).
Depending on the card type, some cards cannot be used with the automatic document feeder.
Load the business cards.
1
2
Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
3
(2) Touch the [Business Card Scan] key.
Read the message that appears and then touch the [OK] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
4
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
This function cannot be used when the scan size is specified by numerical values.
System Settings (Administrator): Business Card Scan Option
Specify whether or not the Business Card Scan function is used.
4-88
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT
(Transaction Report)
A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when a transmission fails or when a broadcast transmission
is performed. The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of other party,
time required, number of pages, result, etc.).
☞ INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN (page 4-129)
Transaction reports are printed based on conditions set in the system settings; however, you can temporarily select
different conditions for a transmission. To change the transaction report print conditions at the time of transmission,
follow the steps below.
Place the original.
1
2
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 4-47)
Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
Select the special modes.
3
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Transaction Report] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
(1)
(2)
OK
Fax/Special Modes
Cancel
Transaction Report
Always Print
Print at Error
OK
Select print conditions.
(1) Select the print conditions.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Do not Print
Print Original Image
4
• The print conditions for a transaction report are as follows:
"Always Print": A transaction report is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails.
"Print at Error": A transaction report is printed when transmission fails.
"Do not Print": Do not print a transaction report.
• When the [Print Original Image] checkbox is selected
, part of the transmitted original is included on the
transaction report.
• Even if the [Print Original Image] checkbox is selected
, the original cannot be printed when speaker dialing,
direct transmission, polling reception, or F-code transmission is used.
4-89
Contents
FACSIMILE
Press the [START] key.
5
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
For a broadcast transmission, changes to the transaction report print conditions apply to all destinations.
To cancel the transaction report setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
• System Settings (Administrator): Transaction Report Print Select Setting
This is used to set the conditions for printing transaction reports.
The factory default setting is
.
Single Sending: Print Out All Report/ Print Out Error Report Only /No Printed Report
Print Out All Report /Print Out Error Report Only/No Printed Report
Broadcasting:
Receiving:
Print Out All Report/Print Out Error Report Only/ No Printed Report
Confidential Reception (fax mode): Print Out Notice Page /No Printed Report
• System Settings (Administrator): Original Print on Transaction Report
This is used to have part of the transmitted original printed on the transaction report.
4-90
Contents
FACSIMILE
ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO
FAXES (Own number sending)
Your sender information (date, time, sender name, sender fax number, number of pages) is automatically added to the
top of each fax page you transmit.
Example of the sender information printed
APR/04/2010/Sat 3:00 PM
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
AAAAA FAX No. 0123456789 P.001/001
(2)
(3)
(4)
Date, time:
The date and time of transmission.
Sender name:
The sender name programmed in the machine.
Sender fax number: The sender fax number programmed in the machine.
Page numbers:
Page number / total pages (the total page number is only printed
when the fax is sent by memory transmission.)
Information programmed in Own Number Sending
Date, time:
Adjust the setting in "Clock Adjust" in the system settings.
Sender name, sender fax number: Program the sender name and fax number in "Sender Data Registration" in the system
settings (administrator). If you intend to use own number sending, be sure to configure
this information.
Page numbers:
Select whether or not to include page numbers in "Printing Page Number at Receiver" in
the system settings (administrator).
Page numbers appear in the format "page number / total pages". Only the page number
is printed when manual transmission or quick online transmission is used.
System Settings (Administrator): Date/Own Number Print Position Setting
This is used to set the position where the sender information is printed. The sender information can be printed outside the
scanned original image or inside the scanned original image.
Outside scanned image (factory default setting)
Inside scanned image
Sender
information
Sender
information
Originals
Originals
The transmitted image length will be: length of sender
information + length of original image. When the fax is
printed by the receiving machine, it may be reduced or
divided onto two pages.
4-91
The sender information is printed inside the original
image, and thus the transmitted image length is the
length of the original. Note that the sender information
will overlap part of the original image (the overlapped
part of the original image will not appear).
Contents
FACSIMILE
TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE SENDER
INFORMATION (Own Name Select)
You can select the sender information printed on a transmitted fax from a list of stored senders.
Select the special modes.
1
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Own Name Select] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
(1)
Cancel
Own Name Select
Select the sender information.
(2)
(1) Touch the desired sender information key.
OK
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
2
AAAAA
BBBBB
CCCCC
DDDDD
EEEEE
FFFFF
GGGGG
HHHHH
IIIII
JJJJJ
KKKKK
LLLLL
1
2
Fax/Special Modes
Program
OK
Erase
Touch the [OK] key.
Timer
1
3
Card Shot
File
Transaction
Report
Job
Build
Quick File
Slow Scan
Mode
2
Business
Card Scan
Own Name
Select
System Settings (Administrator): Registration of Own Name Select
This is used to store sender information for Own Name Select.
4-92
Contents
FACSIMILE
CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING
RECEPTION (Polling)
The Polling function allows the receiving machine to call the transmitting machine and initiate reception of a document in
that machine.
Because the receiving machine initiates reception of a document, this is called "Polling Reception".
(1) Requests fax transmission.
Transmission
(3) The fax is received.
(2) The previously prepared
document is transmitted.
Make sure that an original is not placed in the machine when using the polling reception function.
(3)
Fax/Special Modes
Memory Box
1
(2)
(4)
OK
Polling
2
2
Select polling reception.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
(2) Touch the
screens.
keys to switch through the
(3) Touch the [Polling] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
2
• Multiple fax numbers can be entered.
Polling will take place in the order that the numbers were entered.
Polling multiple machines is called "Serial Polling".
Up to 500 fax numbers can be entered. In this procedure, one-touch keys that have a sub-address and passcode
cannot be used.
• To enter multiple fax numbers, touch the [Next Address] key after entering a fax number and enter the next fax
number.
4-93
Contents
FACSIMILE
3
Press the [START] key.
Your machine will call the other machine and initiate reception of the fax.
• Polling reception can be used in combination with the timer function to poll at any specified time, such as at night or when
you are not present (Only one timer polling reception can be set.).
• This function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
• The receiving machine bears the expense (phone charges) of the polling reception.
To cancel polling reception...
Touch the [Polling] key in the screen of step 1 so that it is not highlighted.
4-94
Contents
FACSIMILE
INITIATING POLLING RECEPTION MANUALLY
Use this procedure when you must start polling after listening to a recorded greeting, such as when using a fax
information service.
• Make sure that an original is not placed in the machine when using the polling reception function.
• This function cannot be used to poll multiple machines (serial polling).
(3)
Telephone mode.
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Speaker Volume
1
Enter the destination fax number.
(1)
To
(1) Touch the [Speaker] key.
Resend
Speaker
You will hear the dial tone through the machine's speaker.
Cc
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
1
2
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
Freq.
Sort Address
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
(2) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
For the [Address Book] key, see "BASE SCREEN OF
FAX MODE" (page 4-8).
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
(3) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
Fax Manual
Reception
Fax Memory:100%
A group key cannot be used.
• In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-16).
• After touching the [Speaker] key, you can touch the [Speaker Volume] key to adjust the volume of the speaker. The
speaker volume changes each time the [Speaker Volume] key is touched. Adjust the volume to the desired level.
(3)
OK
Fax/Special Modes
Memory Box
2
Receive the fax.
(2)
Polling
2
2
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
(2) Touch the
screens.
keys to switch through the
(3) When you hear the fax tone, touch the
[Polling] key.
The fax is received.
• This function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
• The receiving machine bears the expense (phone charges) of the polling reception.
4-95
Contents
FACSIMILE
SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER
MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE
(Polling Memory)
Sending a document that has been scanned into memory when another machine polls your machine is called "Polling
Memory".
Prior to polling, the document that will be faxed to the other machine must be scanned into a polling memory box.
This function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
(1) Requests fax transmission.
Polling
memory box
Transmission
(2) The document in the memory box is
transmitted.
(3) The fax is received.
RESTRICTING POLLING ACCESS (Polling security)
To only allow specified machines to poll your machine, you can restrict polling to machines whose programmed sender
fax number matches a fax number stored in your machine as a polling passcode number. This is called "Polling
Security".
To use this function, first store polling passcode numbers (the sender fax numbers programmed in the other machines)
in the machine's system settings, and then enable polling security.
Up to 10 fax numbers can be stored as polling passcode numbers.
System Settings (Administrator): Fax Polling Security
This is used to enable polling security. This is used to store fax numbers as polling passcode numbers.
4-96
Contents
FACSIMILE
SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO POLLING MEMORY
Follow these steps to scan a document into the memory box for polling transmission (Public Box).
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 4-47)
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2
(2) Touch the
keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
Confidential
Reception
Polling Memory
3
Data Store
Touch the [Data Store] key.
Exit
Memory Box
Data Check
Delete Data
Print Data
Back
Memory Box - Data Store
Touch the [Public Box] key.
Public Box
4
Box 1
Box 2
Box 3
Box 4
Box 5
Box 6
Box 7
Box 8
Box 9
Box 10
Box 11
Box 12
2
(1)
(2)
OK
Memory Box - Data Store
5
1
Specify the number of polling times.
(1) Touch the key for the desired number of
times.
Touch the [Once] key if you want the document cleared
from memory after it is transmitted. Touch the [Unlimited]
key to allow polling an unlimited number of times.
Once
Unlimited
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
4-97
Contents
FACSIMILE
Memory Box - Data Store
Memory Box
List
Original
Scan:
Exposure
Auto
Resolution
Standard
8½x11
Send:
Auto
Select image settings and special
modes.
Special Modes
6
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
• A program, timer setting, transaction report, polling and document filing cannot be selected.
• To return to the screen of step 4, touch the [Memory Box List] key.
Press the [START] key.
7
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) while the original is being scanned.
If another document remains in the memory box (Public Box), the newly scanned document is added to the previous
document. In this case, the number of polling times will be the number set for the newly scanned document.
4-98
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE PUBLIC BOX
You can check the document stored in the machine's public box for memory polling.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
1
(2) Touch the
keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
Confidential
Reception
Polling Memory
2
Data Store
Touch the [Data Check] key.
Exit
Memory Box
Data Check
Print Data
Delete Data
Back
Memory Box - Print Data
Touch the [Public Box] key.
Public Box
Box 1
Box 2
Box 3
Box 4
Box 5
Box 6
Box 7
Box 8
Box 9
Box 10
Box 11
Box 12
1
2
3
When nothing is stored in the Public Box, the [Public Box] key will be grayed out.
Touch the [Image Check] key.
Press [Image Check] to check data.
Press [Print] to output data.
4
Cancel
Print
Image Check
The content of the document can be viewed in the image check
screen. For information on the image check screen, see
"IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page 4-65).
To print the document, touch the [Print] key.
4-99
Contents
FACSIMILE
DELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE PUBLIC BOX
Delete a document from the Public Box when it is no longer needed.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
1
(2) Touch the
keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
Confidential
Reception
Polling Memory
2
Data Store
Touch the [Delete Data] key.
Exit
Memory Box
Data Check
Print Data
Delete Data
Back
Memory Box - Delete Data
Touch the [Public Box] key.
Public Box
Box 1
Box 2
Box 3
Box 4
Box 5
Box 6
Box 7
Box 8
Box 9
Box 10
Box 11
Box 12
1
2
3
When nothing is stored in the Public Box, the [Public Box] key will be grayed out.
Touch the [Yes] key.
Delete the data in the memory box?
Press [Image Check] to check data.
4
Image Check
No
Yes
• The document is deleted and you return to the screen of step 3.
• You can touch the [Image Check] key to check the image in
the touch panel before deleting it. For information on the
image check screen, see "IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page
4-65).
To cancel the deletion...
Touch the [No] key. You will return to the screen of step 3.
4-100
Contents
FACSIMILE
PERFORMING F-CODE
COMMUNICATION
This section explains how to perform F-code communication operations. F-code communication is possible with
machines of other manufacturers that also support F-code communication.
F-CODE COMMUNICATION
Exchange of confidential documents (confidential communication), retrieval (polling) and distribution (polling memory) of
information, and distribution of information to multiple destinations (relay broadcast transmission) are possible with other
machines that support F-code communication.
A F-code* is specified in each communication, enabling a higher level of security.
* F-code is a communication function based on the G3 standard of the ITU-T.
The ITU-T is a United Nations organization that establishes communications standards. It is a department of the International
Telecommunication Union (ITU), which coordinates global telecommunications networks and services.
HOW F-CODES WORK
A fax that is transmitted with a F-code is received to the memory box in the receiving machine specified by the F-code
(sub-address and passcode). If the F-code sent by the transmitting machine does not match the F-code in the receiving
machine, reception will not take place.
The fax is received to
the memory box
specified by the
F-code
Memory box for F-code
communication
Box name:
Sub-address:
Passcode:
BBBB
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX
Fax number of other
machine
+
F-code
Sub-address:
Passcode:
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX
The products of other manufacturers may use different terms for "sub-address" and "passcode". If you need to contact the
operator of another machine regarding sub-addresses and passcodes, refer to the terms used by the ITU-T in the table below.
The machine
ITU-T
F-code polling memory box
F-code confidential box
F-code relay broadcast
memory box
Sub Address
SEP
SUB
SUB
Passcode
PWD
SID
SID
A F-code consists of a sub-address and passcode, and cannot be longer than 20 digits.
4-101
Contents
FACSIMILE
CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE MACHINE FOR
F-CODE COMMUNICATION
Before the F-code communication function can be used, special memory boxes must be created using "F-Code Memory
Box" in the system settings.
A box name and F-code (sub-address and passcode) are programmed in each box, and a F-code communication
function is assigned to each box.
After you have created a memory box, inform the other party of the sub-address and passcode of the box.
Memory box for F-code
communication
• Box Name
• Sub Address
• Passcode
• End receiving machines (only in a
F-code relay broadcast memory box)
• Print PIN (only for F-code confidential
reception)
To use the following F-code communication functions, F-code memory boxes must be created in your machine:
F-code confidential reception, F-code polling memory, F-code relay broadcast transmission
To use the following F-code communication functions, F-code memory boxes must be created in the other machine:
F-code confidential transmission, F-code polling reception, F-code relay request transmission
System Settings: F-Code Memory Box (page 7-104)
This is used to configure memory boxes for F-code communication.
• Up to 100 memory boxes can be created.
• The memory box name cannot be longer than 18 characters, and the sub-address and passcode cannot be longer than 20
digits.
F-CODE DIALING
When performing a F-code operation, the F-code (sub-address and passcode) is appended to the fax number that is
dialed. Check the F-code (sub-address and passcode) programmed in the memory box in the other machine before you
perform a F-code transmission. It is convenient to store a F-code together with the fax number in a one-touch key or
group key.
0123456789
Fax number of other
machine
/
*
AAAAAAAA
Sub Address
/
*
XXXXXXXX
Passcode
* Touch the [Sub Address]
key in the screen to enter
"/".
When the following F-code functions are used, your machine dials the other machine:
F-code confidential transmission, F-code polling reception, F-code relay request transmission
When the following F-code functions are used, the other machine dials your machine:
F-code confidential reception, F-code polling memory, F-code relay broadcast transmission
• If the destination machine does not have a passcode configured in the F-code, do not enter a passcode when dialing that
machine.
• F-code communication cannot be performed when using the speaker or performing manual transmission.
System Settings: Address Book (page 7-17)
This is used to store and edit one-touch keys and group keys.
4-102
Contents
FACSIMILE
CONFIDENTIAL COMMUNICATION USING
F-CODES
By sending a fax to a F-code memory box (confidential) in the receiving machine (your machine or the other machine),
the sender can direct the transmission specifically to the user of the box.
This is convenient for sending sensitive documents that you do not wish people other than the recipient to see, or when
the receiving machine is shared by multiple departments.
To print a F-code confidential fax, the print passcode must be entered.
Sender
Receiver
Sub-address:
Passcode:
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX
Transmission with a
F-code
Reception in F-code Memory Box
Sub-address:
Passcode:
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX
Print passcode: Enter BBBB
The fax is printed.
The F-code (sub-address and passcode) of the memory box to be used should be verified by the sender and the recipient
before the fax is sent.
System Settings: F-Code Memory Box (page 7-104)
This is used to create memory boxes for F-code confidential communication (confidential reception).
A memory box name, sub-address, passcode, and print passcode are programmed in each box.
4-103
Contents
FACSIMILE
F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION
Follow the steps below to send a confidential fax by adding a F-code to the fax number.
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 4-47)
Enter the destination fax number.
(2)
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
Sub Address
III III
JJJ JJJ
Address Review
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
Cc
To
1
For the [Address Book] key, see "BASE SCREEN OF
FAX MODE" (page 4-8).
2
Freq.
Sort Address
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
QRSTU
VWXYZ
If the destination is not stored in the address book, enter
the fax number with the numeric keys.
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
(3), (5)
2
If the sub-address and passcode are stored in the one-touch
key, the following sub-steps are not necessary. Go to step 3.
(3) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.
(4) Enter the sub-address with the numeric
keys.
(5) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.
(6) Enter the passcode with the numeric keys.
If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the other machine, (5) and (6) are not necessary.
Press the [START] key.
3
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
This function can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. This function can also be
stored in a program.
4-104
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY F-CODE
CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION
When a F-code confidential fax is sent to your machine, the fax is received to the memory box specified by the F-code.
To check received faxes, enter the print passcode.
The machine rings and the fax is
received.
Beep
A beep sounds when reception ends.
1
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2
(2) Touch the
keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
Memory Box
Confidential
Reception
Polling Memory
3
Data Store
Touch the [Print Data] key.
Exit
Data Check
Delete Data
Print Data
Memory Box - Confidential Reception
Back
Public Box
4
Box 1
Box 2
Box 3
Box 4
Box 5
Box 6
1
1
Touch the key of the memory box
containing the confidential fax.
" " appears in the keys of memory boxes that have received
faxes. The keys of memory boxes that have not received faxes
are grayed out and cannot be selected.
4-105
Contents
FACSIMILE
Enter the print passcode with the
numeric keys.
Enter PIN via the 10-key.
As each digit is entered, "–" changes to " ".
5
Cancel
Take care to enter the correct print passcode. If you make a mistake, a message will appear and you will return to the
entry screen. You can touch the [Cancel] key to return to step 4.
Touch the [Image Check] key.
Press [Image Check] to check data.
Press [Print] to output data.
6
Cancel
Print
Image Check
The content of the document can be viewed in the image check
screen. For information on the image check screen, see
"IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page 4-65).
To print the document, touch the [Print] key.
• The confidential fax is automatically given priority in the print job queue.
• The fax is automatically cleared from the memory box after printing.
• If you forget the print passcode...
There is no way to check a forgotten passcode on the machine. Take care not to forget the passcode. In the event that you
forget the passcode or need to verify the passcode, contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
System Settings (Administrator): Transaction Report Print Select Setting
This setting can be used to have a transaction report printed automatically when a F-code confidential fax is received.
4-106
Contents
FACSIMILE
POLLING RECEPTION USING F-CODES
This function enables your machine to call another machine and initiate reception of a fax stored in a F-code memory
box (polling memory) in the other machine. During the polling operation, your machine must correctly specify the F-code
(sub-address and passcode) configured in the other machine or polling reception will not take place.
Transmission request (polling)
using a F-code
The machine
Sub-address:
Passcode:
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX
The other machine
F-code polling memory box
Transmission
Box name:
Sub-address:
Passcode:
BBBB
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX
• Verify the F-code (sub-address and passcode) of the memory box in the other machine before you perform F-code polling
reception.
• Do not place an original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass when using this function.
• The receiving machine bears the phone charges of the transmission.
(3)
Fax/Special Modes
Memory Box
1
(2)
(4)
OK
Polling
2
2
Select polling.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
(2) Touch the
screens.
keys to switch through the
(3) Touch the [Polling] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
4-107
Contents
FACSIMILE
Enter the destination fax number.
(2)
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
Cc
To
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
1
For the [Address Book] key, see "BASE SCREEN OF
FAX MODE" (page 4-8).
2
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
Sub Address
III III
JJJ JJJ
Freq.
Sort Address
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
QRSTU
VWXYZ
If the destination is not stored in the address book, enter
the fax number with the numeric keys.
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
If the sub-address and passcode are stored in the one-touch
key, the following sub-steps are not necessary. Go to step 3.
(3), (5)
2
(3) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.
(4) Enter the sub-address with the numeric
keys.
(5) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.
(6) Enter the passcode with the numeric keys.
If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the other machine, (5) and (6) are not necessary.
3
Press the [START] key.
Your machine will call the other machine and initiate reception of the fax.
• Polling multiple machines (serial polling) is not possible.
• F-code polling reception can be used in combination with a timer setting. Only one polling reception operation with a timer
setting can be stored at a time.
☞SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME (Timer) (page 4-77)
To cancel polling...
Touch the [Polling] key in the screen of step 1 so that it is not highlighted.
4-108
Contents
FACSIMILE
POLLING MEMORY TRANSMISSION USING
F-CODES
When your machine receives a transmission request from another machine, this function sends a fax stored in a F-code
memory box (polling memory) in your machine to that machine. The other machine must correctly specify the F-code
configured in your machine or transmission will not take place.
The document to be transmitted must be scanned into a F-code polling memory box.
Transmission request (polling)
using a F-code
The other
machine
Sub-address:
Passcode:
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX
The machine
F-code polling memory box
Box name:
Sub-address:
Passcode:
BBBB
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX
Transmission
System Settings: F-Code Memory Box (page 7-104)
This is used to create memory boxes (polling memory) for F-code polling memory transmission.
A memory box name, sub-address, and passcode are programmed in each box.
SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO A MEMORY BOX FOR
F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION
Follow these steps to scan a document into a memory box (polling memory) for F-code polling transmission.
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 4-47)
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2
(2) Touch the
keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
4-109
Contents
FACSIMILE
Confidential
Reception
Polling Memory
3
Data Store
Touch the [Data Store] key.
Exit
Memory Box
Data Check
Delete Data
Print Data
Back
Memory Box - Data Store
Public Box
4
Box 1
Box 2
Box 3
Box 4
Box 5
Box 6
Touch the key of the F-code memory
polling box.
1
2
Box 7
Box 8
Box 9
Box 10
Box 11
Box 12
(1)
(2)
OK
Memory Box - Data Store
5
Specify the number of polling times.
(1) Touch the key for the desired number of
times.
Touch the [Once] key if you want the document cleared
from memory after it is transmitted. Touch the [Unlimited]
key to allow polling an unlimited number of times.
Once
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Unlimited
Memory Box - Data Store
Memory Box
List
Original
Scan:
Exposure
Auto
Resolution
Standard
8½x11
Send:
Auto
Select image settings and special
modes.
Special Modes
6
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
• A program, timer setting, transaction report, polling and document filing cannot be selected.
• To return to the screen of step 4, touch the [Memory Box List] key.
4-110
Contents
FACSIMILE
Press the [START] key.
7
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) while the original is being scanned.
• If other documents have already been stored in the memory box, the document is added to the previously stored
documents.
• The factory default setting for the number of polling times is "Once" (after the document is transmitted to the receiving
machine, it is automatically cleared).
4-111
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE F-CODE MEMORY
POLLING BOX
You can check the document stored in the F-code memory polling box.
A document in a memory box cannot be printed while the document is being transmitted.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
1
(2) Touch the
keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
Confidential
Reception
Polling Memory
2
Data Store
Touch the [Data Check] key.
Exit
Memory Box
Data Check
Print Data
Delete Data
Back
Memory Box - Print Data
Public Box
3
Box 1
Box 2
Box 3
Box 4
Box 5
Box 6
Box 7
Box 8
Box 9
Box 10
Box 11
Box 12
Touch the key of the F-code memory
polling box where the document you
wish to print is stored.
1
2
appears in keys that have documents stored.
Touch the [Image Check] key.
Press [Image Check] to check data.
Press [Print] to output data.
4
Cancel
Print
Image Check
The content of the document can be viewed in the image check
screen. For information on the image check screen, see
"IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page 4-65).
To print the document, touch the [Print] key.
4-112
Contents
FACSIMILE
DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR F-CODE
POLLING TRANSMISSION
When a document in a F-code memory polling box is no longer needed, follow the steps below to delete it.
A document in a memory box cannot be deleted while the document is being transmitted.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
1
(2) Touch the
keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
Confidential
Reception
Polling Memory
2
Data Store
Touch the [Delete Data] key.
Exit
Memory Box
Data Check
Print Data
Delete Data
Back
Memory Box - Print Data
Public Box
3
Box 1
Box 2
Box 3
Box 4
Box 5
Box 6
Box 7
Box 8
Box 9
Box 10
Box 11
Box 12
1
2
Touch the key of the F-code memory
polling box that has the document you
wish to delete.
appears in keys that have documents stored.
Touch the [Yes] key.
Delete the data in the memory box?
Press [Image Check] to check data.
4
Image Check
No
Yes
• The document is deleted and you return to the screen of step 3.
• You can touch the [Image Check] key to check the image in
the touch panel before deleting it. For information on the
image check screen, see "IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page
4-65).
To cancel the deletion...
Touch the [No] key. You will return to the screen of step 3 without deleting the document.
4-113
Contents
FACSIMILE
RELAY REQUEST TRANSMISSION USING
F-CODES
This function is used to send a fax to a F-code relay broadcast memory box in another machine and have that machine
relay the fax to multiple end receiving machines.
When the end receiving machines are far from your machine, sending the fax to a relay machine that is close to the end
receiving machines can help reduce phone charges. A relay request transmission can be used in combination with the
timer transmission function to further reduce phone costs.
☞ SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME (Timer) (page 4-77)
Relay machine
F-code relay broadcast
memory box
The machine
The fax is transmitted to
each of the end receiving
machines programmed in
the F-code relay
broadcast memory box.
End receiving
machines
Transmission
Transmission specifying a F-code
Sub-address:
Passcode:
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX
Box name:
Sub-address:
Passcode:
BBBB
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX
End receiving machines are
programmed in this box
• Verify the F-code (sub-address and passcode) and end receiving machines programmed in the relay broadcast memory
box in the relay machine before you perform a F-code relay request transmission.
• Before this function can be used, the end receiving machines must be programmed in the F-code relay broadcast memory
box in the relay machine.
• The end receiving machines do not need to support F-code communication.
• This function can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. A F-code relay request
transmission can also be stored in a program.
• Your machine (the machine that requests a relay broadcast transmission) only bears the cost of sending the fax to the
relay machine. The relay machine bears the cost of sending the fax to each of the end receiving machines.
• When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot
be printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date & Time Print" is disabled.)
System Settings: F-Code Memory Box (page 7-104)
This is used to create memory boxes for F-code relay broadcast transmission.
A memory box name, sub-address, passcode, and end receiving machines are programmed in each box.
4-114
Contents
FACSIMILE
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 4-47)
Enter the destination fax number.
(2)
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
Sub Address
III III
JJJ JJJ
Address Review
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
Cc
To
1
For the [Address Book] key, see "BASE SCREEN OF
FAX MODE" (page 4-8).
2
Freq.
Sort Address
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
QRSTU
VWXYZ
If the destination is not stored in the address book, enter
the fax number with the numeric keys.
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
If the sub-address and passcode are stored in the one-touch
key, the following sub-steps are not necessary. Go to step 3.
(3), (5)
2
(3) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.
(4) Enter the sub-address with the numeric
keys.
(5) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.
(6) Enter the passcode with the numeric keys.
If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the other machine, (5) and (6) are not necessary.
Press the [START] key.
3
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
When the relay machine receives the fax, it will automatically transmit the fax to each of the end receiving machines
programmed in the memory box.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) while the original is being scanned.
4-115
Contents
FACSIMILE
RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION
USING F-CODES
When your machine receives a F-code relay request transmission, the fax is received to a F-code relay broadcast
memory box in your machine. Your machine then relays the fax to each of the end receiving machines programmed in
the memory box. Transmission to the end receiving machines takes place automatically.
The machine
F-code relay broadcast
memory box
The other
machine
The fax is transmitted to
each of the end receiving
machines programmed in
the F-code relay
broadcast memory box.
End receiving
machines
Transmission
Transmission specifying a F-code
Sub-address:
Passcode:
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX
Box name:
Sub-address:
Passcode:
BBBB
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX
End receiving machines are
programmed in this box
• Prior to the operation, inform the requesting party of the sub-address and passcode of the relay broadcast memory box in
your machine.
• Program the end receiving machines in the F-code relay broadcast memory box when you create the box in your machine.
☞ CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE MACHINE FOR F-CODE COMMUNICATION (page 4-102)
• The end receiving machines do not need to support F-code communication.
• The machine that requests a relay broadcast transmission only bears the cost of sending the fax to your machine (the relay
machine). Your machine bears the cost of sending the fax to each of the end receiving machines.
• When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot
be printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date & Time Print" is disabled.)
4-116
Contents
FACSIMILE
USING AN EXTENSION PHONE
This section explains how to use an extension phone to make voice calls and receive a fax after talking with the other
party.
CONNECTING AND USING AN EXISTING
PHONE (Extension Phone Connection)
You can connect an existing extension phone to the machine.
The phone can be used for voice calls and to start fax reception on the machine.
As an example, you can make a phone call using the existing phone, speak to the other party, and then press the
[START] key to fax an original that has been placed to that party. You can also press the [START] key when an original
is not placed to receive a fax.
Connect the extension phone as shown below.
Extension phone jack
Existing extension
phone (example)
Core
Click!
Click!
Attach the provided core to
your extension telephone cord
and then connect the cord to
the machine.
Make sure you hear a "click"
sound indicating that the
cord is securely connected.
• Connect an extension phone that has a modular jack. Use standard phone line cable to connect the phone. If other than a
standard phone line cable is used, the connection may not work correctly.
• If the plug on the telephone line cord does not fit into the jack on your extension phone, contact your dealer or nearest
SHARP Service Department.
4-117
Contents
FACSIMILE
RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON
THE EXTENSION PHONE (Remote Reception)
Follow the steps below if you need to start fax reception after answering a call and speaking on the extension phone.
If you are on a pulse-dial (rotary) line, set the extension phone to issue tone signals.
When you hear ringing, answer the call
on the extension phone.
1
Signal the machine to start fax
reception.
2
Press
on the keypad of the extension phone.
Replace the extension phone.
The machine sounds a beep when reception ends.
3
• System Settings: Receive Setting (page 7-106)
To use remote fax reception, set this setting to "Manual Reception".
• System Settings (Administrator): Remote Reception Number Setting
This is used to change the number used for remote fax reception. The factory default setting is "5".
MAKING AND RECEIVING PHONE CALLS
You can make and receive normal calls on your extension phone. A phone call can also be made by dialing on the
machine.
4-118
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX
JOBS
This section explains how to check the status of reserved transmission jobs and received faxes.
JOB STATUS SCREEN
The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.
Reserved transmissions and received faxes are referred to as jobs here.
Example: Pressing the key in fax mode
Print Job
JOB STATUS
Scan to
Fax Job
Pages
Internet Fax
Address
Set Time
Status
Broadcast0001
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting
0123456789
10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting
AAA AAA
10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
BBB BBB
10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting
Broadcast
10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting
Job Queue
1
Complete
1
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
The job status display is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the job
status screen.
Scan
Address Book
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
Direct TX
Exposure
Auto
Sub Address
Resolution
Standard
Address Review
Special Modes
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
Auto
File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Sending
4-119
Contents
FACSIMILE
JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED JOB SCREEN
The job status screen consists of two screens: the job queue screen, which shows reserved jobs and the job currently in
progress, and the completed jobs screen. To switch between the two screens, touch the job status screen selector key
((2) below).
Job queue screen
Completed job screen
(1)
Print Job
Scan to
(1)
Internet Fax
Fax Job
Address
Set Time
Pages
Broadcast0001
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting
0123456789
10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting
Print Job
Status
AAA AAA
10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
BBB BBB
10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting
Broadcast
10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting
Job Queue
1
Complete
(2)
1
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
(6)
Mode select tabs
Broadcast0001
10:00 04/01 010/003 NG000000
Broadcast0002
10:05 04/01 001/001 Send OK
CCC CCC
10:22 04/01 004/004 Send OK
0123456789
10:30 04/01 010/010 Send OK
Job status screen selector key
(7)
[Priority] key
(8)
(2)
Detail
(7)
Call
(8)
Job queue screen
Completed jobs screen [Detail] key
[Call] key
Touch this key to retrieve and use a transmission or
reception job that was stored using the document filing
function.
[Stop/Delete] key
Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job.
☞ CANCELING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A
RESERVED FAX (page 4-126)
Complete
1
This shows detailed information on the results of
completed broadcast transmission jobs, completed serial
polling jobs, and completed jobs that used the document
filing function. Select the key of the desired job in the
completed jobs screen (9) and then touch the [Detail]
key.
From the details screen, it is possible to resend the fax to
destinations to which transmission was not successful.
☞ CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS (page 4-125)
Job queue screen [Detail] key
Touch this key to give priority to a selected job.
☞ GIVING PRIORITY TO A RESERVED FAX JOB
(page 4-127)
(5)
Job Queue
1
Jobs are shown as keys in the order they were reserved.
Each key shows information on a job and its current
status.
☞ Job key display (page 4-121)
This shows detailed information on a broadcast
transmission or serial polling job that is reserved or in
progress. Select the key of the desired job in the job
queue screen (6) and then touch the [Detail] key.
☞ CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN
PROGRESS (page 4-124)
(4)
Status
(9)
Touch this key to switch between the job queue screen
and the completed jobs screen.
(3)
Pages
(3)
(4)
(5)
Use these tabs to select the job status screen of each
mode.
(2)
Internet Fax
Fax Job
Start Time
(6)
(1)
Scan to
Address
(9)
Completed jobs screen
This shows up to 99 completed transmission/reception
jobs. A description of each job and the result (status) are
shown.
Broadcast transmission jobs, serial polling jobs, received
fax forwarding jobs, and transmission/reception jobs that
used the document filing function are indicated as keys.
4-120
Contents
FACSIMILE
Job key display
The following information is shown in the job queue keys and completed job keys that appear in the job status screen.
3
(1)
(1)
AAA AAA
(2)
10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
(3)
(4)
Indicates the number (position) of the job in the job
queue.
When the job currently being transmitted is finished, each
job moves up one position in the job queue.
This number does not appear in keys in the completed
jobs screen.
(2)
(4)
(6)
Time reserved / Time started
In the job queue screen, the date and time the job was
reserved. In the completed jobs screen, the date and
time the job was started.
(5)
Number of pages
Shows the number of pages transmitted / total number of
original pages.
Mode icon
This indicates the type of job. In the completed jobs
screen, a color bar indicating black & white will appear
next to the icon. (However, the color bar icon does not
appear in the key of a job that used document filing or in
the key of a transmission/reception job that was
canceled.)
(5)
(6)
Status
Shows the job status.
• Job in progress
Message
Status
"Connecting"
Connecting
"Sending"
Sending
"Receiving"
Receiving
Fax reception
"Tel"
Speaking with the other party using
an extension phone
Broadcast transmission, Serial polling
or Inbound routing
"Stopped"
The job has been stopped.
"Error"
An error occurred while the job was
being executed.
Icon
Job type
Fax transmission
PC-Fax transmission
• Job waiting to be executed
(3)
Name of other party
For a transmission, the name or fax number of the
destination. For a reception, the fax number of the
sending party.
In the case of a broadcast transmission or serial polling
operation, "Broadcast" or "Multi Polling" appears together
with a broadcast control number (4-digits).
4-121
Message
Status
"Waiting"
The job is waiting to be executed.
"Retry Mode"
The job is being re-attempted due
to a communication error or other
problem.
The day and
time are
displayed.
Timer transmission job (the
specified time is displayed)
Contents
FACSIMILE
• Completed job
Message
Status
"Send OK"
Transmission completed.
"In Memory"
Reception completed but the fax
has not been printed.
"Received"
A received fax has been printed or
deleted in the check image screen.
"Forward OK"
The received fax has been
forwarded.
"Stopped"
The job was stopped.
"Number of
successful
transmission
destinations /
Total
destinations
OK"
Completion of a broadcast
transmission, serial polling or
inbound routing operation.
If transmission to 3 destinations
was successful out of a total of 5,
"003/005" will appear.
"No
response"
An error occurred because there
was no response from the
destination.
"Busy"
An error occurred because the
other party was busy.
"Reject
Reception"
A fax was sent from a party that
has been blocked by the anti junk
fax function.
"NGxxxxxx"
Transmission/reception was not
successful because a
communication error occurred (a
6-digit error code appears in
xxxxxx.)
"Error"
An error occurred while the job was
being executed.
4-122
Contents
FACSIMILE
OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB QUEUE IS
COMPLETED
When a normal transmission job is completed, it moves to the completed jobs screen and "Send OK" appears in the
status column.
Received faxes, timer transmission jobs, retry jobs, and forwarding jobs are handled in the job status screen as
explained below.
Fax reception jobs
While a fax is being received, "Receiving" appears in the job queue screen.
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears.
After the fax is printed, the status changes to "Printed".
Timer transmission jobs
A timer transmission job appears at the bottom of the job queue screen until the specified time arrives.
When the specified time arrives, the job is executed. If another job is in progress, the timer job is started when the other
job is completed.
Retry jobs
A retry job appears at the bottom of the job queue screen. When the set retry interval elapses, the job is executed. If
there are jobs reserved ahead of the retry job, the retry job is reserved at the bottom of the job queue and executed
when its turn arrives.
Fax reception jobs when Inbound Routing is enabled
When Inbound Routing is enabled in the Web pages, fax reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print
setting.
☞ FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing Settings) (page 4-67)
• Received fax is not printed
"Receiving" appears in the job queue screen while the fax is being received. When reception is completed, the job
moves to the job queue of the job status screen of scan mode.
• Received fax is printed
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears. After the fax is
printed, "Printed" appears. In addition, the job is added to the job queue of the job status screen of scan mode. When
forwarding is finished, "Forward OK" appears.
4-123
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN
PROGRESS
The detailed contents of a broadcast transmission or serial polling job can be displayed. Select (touch) the key of the job
that you wish to check and touch the [Detail] key. The job details screen will appear (see below).
OK
Detail
Broadcast0001
Progress:
Fax No. :
0123456789
Name:
AAA AAA
Number:
050
Fax Connecting
Pages:
Fax Waiting
050/100
005/010
Failed
All Destinations
The job name and progress (number of completed destinations / total destinations) appear at the top of the screen.
Touch a tab to display the information that appears on that tab. The following information appears on each tab.
Tab name
Information displayed
Fax Connecting
Information on the current destination appears.
Fax No.: The fax number of the destination.
Name: The name of the destination.
Number: The broadcast control number (3-digits).
Pages: Number of pages completed / total number of pages
Fax Waiting
This shows information on the destinations that are waiting. A broadcast control
number (3-digits) appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name of the other destination.
Status: The status of communication.
Failed
This shows information on destinations for which communication failed. A broadcast
control number (3-digits) appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name or fax number of each destination.
Start Time: The time when communication began.
Status: The status of communication.
All Destinations
This shows all destinations specified in the job. A broadcast control number (3-digits)
appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name or fax number of the destination.
Start time: The time at which communication began.
Status: The status of communication.
4-124
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS
You can check a list of the destinations, the destinations for which transmission failed, and other detailed information on
completed broadcast transmission jobs, received fax forwarding jobs, serial polling jobs, and jobs that used document
filing. Touch the key of the desired job in the completed jobs screen and touch the [Detail] key. The job detail screen
(see below) will appear.
OK
Detail
Broadcast0001
Address
Start Time
Status
002
DDD DDD
10:01 04/01
NG000000
010
EEE EEE
10:10 04/01
NG000000
File
Failed
Retry
1
1
All Destinations
The job name appears at the top of the job detail screen.
To view details on the job, touch one of the tabs. The following information appears on each tab.
Tab name
Information displayed
File
Information on a transmission/reception that used document filing.
To retrieve the file and use it, touch the [Call] key.
Failed
This shows information on destinations for which communication failed. A broadcast
control number (3-digits) appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name or fax number of each destination.
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Description of failure (error)
The [Retry] key can be touched to re-attempt transmission to that destination.*
All Destinations
Shows all addresses specified in the job. A broadcast control number (3-digits)
appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name or fax number of each destination.
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Communication result
The [Retry] key can be touched to transmit to all destinations again.*
* Recalling is not possible for a broadcast transmission that includes a Scan to FTP address, Scan to Network Folder
address, or Scan to Desktop address.
4-125
Contents
FACSIMILE
CANCELING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A
RESERVED FAX
Follow the steps below to cancel a fax transmission that is in progress or a reserved fax job.
1
Print Job
2
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
JOB STATUS
Scan to
Fax Job
Pages
Internet Fax
Address
Set Time
Status
1
Broadcast
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting
2
0123456789
10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting
3
AAA AAA
10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
4
BBB BBB
10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting
5
Broadcast
10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting
Job Queue
1
Select the fax job that you wish to
cancel.
(1) Touch the key of the fax job to be canceled.
Complete
1
(2) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
(1)
(2)
Touch the [Yes] key.
Delete the job?
BBB BBB
3
10:30 04/01
No
Yes
If you do not wish to cancel the selected fax job...
Touch the [NO] key.
Printing of received faxes and forwarding jobs set using "Inbound Routing Settings" cannot be canceled.
☞ FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing Settings) (page 4-67)
4-126
Contents
FACSIMILE
GIVING PRIORITY TO A RESERVED FAX
JOB
When multiple jobs are waiting to be transmitted, the jobs are normally transmitted in the order they were reserved.
If you need to give priority to a job and send it ahead of the other jobs, follow the steps below.
1
Print Job
2
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
JOB STATUS
Scan to
Fax Job
Pages
Select the fax job to which you wish to
give priority.
Internet Fax
Address
Set Time
Status
Broadcast
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting
0123456789
10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting
AAA AAA
10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
BBB BBB
10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting
Broadcast
10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting
Job Queue
1
(1) Touch the key of the desired job.
Complete
1
(2) Touch the [Priority] key.
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
(1)
The selected job moves up to the position immediately
following the job in progress. The job will be executed
when the job in progress is completed.
(2)
If the job in progress is a broadcast transmission job or a serial polling job, the priority job will be transmitted between
destinations of the broadcast transmission or serial polling job. However, if the priority job is a broadcast transmission job or
a serial polling job, it will be executed after the current job is completed.
4-127
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING THE ACTIVITY LOG
(Image Sending Activity Report)
IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT
You can have the machine print a log of recent image sending activity (date, name of other party, time required, result,
etc.). The Image Sending Activity Report contains useful information such as the types of errors that occurred.
The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report.
You can have the machine print the Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reaches 201,
or at a specified time (once a day only).
The contents of the Image Sending Activity Report are erased when the report is printed, and thus it cannot be reprinted.
System Settings (Administrator): Activity Report Print Select Setting
This is used to set the conditions for printing activity reports. The factory default setting is not to print.
The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to print each time the number of transactions reaches 201, or at a specified
time (once a day only).
4-128
Contents
FACSIMILE
INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN
Error types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction
report or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed.
Examples of messages that are printed in the result column
Message
Explanation
OK
The transaction was completed normally.
G3
Communication took place in G3 mode.
ECM
Communication took place in G3 ECM mode.
SG3
Communication took place in Super G3 mode.
Forwarding
The received data was forwarded.
NO RESPONSE
No response from the receiving party.
BUSY
Transmission was not possible because the other party was already using the line.
CANCEL
The transmission was canceled while in progress.
MEMORY OVER
The memory became full during quick on-line transmission.
MEM.FULL
The memory became full during reception.
LENGTH OVER
The transmitted fax was over 1.5 m (59") long and therefore could not be received.
ORIGINAL ERROR
Direct transmission or manual transmission was not successful because a misfeed occurred.
PASS# NG
The connection was broken because the polling passcode was not correct.
NO RX POLL
The machine that was polled does not have a polling function.
RX POLL FAIL
The other machine refused the polling operation, or your machine broke the connection when
polled because no data was in memory.
NO F-CODE POLL
The other machine refused a F-code polling operation, or your machine broke the connection
when polled because no data was in its F-code memory polling box.
RX POLL# NG
The connection was broken because the sub-address for F-code polling memory was not valid.
F POLL PASS# NG
The connection was broken because the passcode for F-code polling memory was not valid.
BOX NO. NG
Your machine broke the connection because the specified sub-address for a F-code memory box
does not exist.
F PASS# NG
Your machine broke the connection because the other machine sent an incorrect passcode for
F-code communication.
RX NO F-CODE POLL
F-code polling was attempted, however, the other machine did not have a F-code polling memory box.
NO F FUNC
F-code communication was attempted, however, the other machine does not support F-code
communication.
NO F-CODE
F-code communication was refused by the other machine because of an incorrect sub-address or
other reason.
M. BOX: [xxxxxx]
Data was received to a confidential or relay broadcast memory box, or data was sent from a
memory polling box.
The name of the memory box appears in [xxxxxx], and the type of F-code operation (relay request
reception, polling memory transmission, or confidential reception) appears in
.
FAIL xx (xxxx)
The transaction failed due to a communication error.
First 2 digits of communication error number: Error code from 00 to 99.
Last 4 digits of communication error number: Code for use by service technicians.
REJECTED
A fax was sent from a party from which reception is blocked.
4-129
Contents
FACSIMILE
FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS
Applicable telephone
line
Public switched telephone network, PBX
Scanning resolution
(supports ITU-T
standards)
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard), 8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Fine, Fine-Halftone), 8 x 15.4 lines/mm (Super Fine,
Super Fine - Halftone), 16 x 15.4 lines/mm (Ultra Fine, Ultra Fine - Halftone)
Transmission speed
33.6 kbps down to 2.4 kbps Automatic fallback
Compression method
MH / MR / MMR / JBIG
Transmission modes
Super G3, G3 (the machine can only send faxes to and receive faxes from machines that support
G3 or Super G3)
Input document size
Inch sizes:8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
AB sizes:A4, B5, A5, 216 mm x 330 mm, 216 mm x 340 mm, 216 mm x 343 mm, 16K
Long originals (max. width 8-1/2" (216 mm) x max. length 19-5/8" (500 mm) can be transmitted using
the automatic document feeder. Scanning one side is possible.)
Paper sizes
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A4, B5, A5)
Transmission time *1
Approx. 2 seconds (Super G3 mode/33.6 kbps, JBIG)
Approx. 6 seconds (G3 ECM mode/14.4 kbps)
Remarks
Extension telephone connection
Possible (1 telephone)
Number of one-touch keys for storing
destinations*2
Maximum number of keys: 999
Number of destinations that can be stored in a
group (1 key)*2
Maximum number of destinations in one group
(1 key): 500
Timer transmission
Yes
Program function
Yes (48 programs)
F-code transmission
Supported (SUB/SEP (sub-address) and SID/PWD
(passcode) signals can be transmitted / received)
Image memory
8 MB standard
*1 Transmission speed is for an 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 document with approximately 700 characters at standard resolution
(8 x 3.85 lines/mm) sent in high speed mode (33.6 kbps (JBIG) or 14.4 kbps). This is only the time required to
transmit the image information; the time required to send protocol signals is not included. Actual transmission times
will vary depending on the contents of the document, the receiving machine type, and telephone line conditions.
*2 Total number of all destinations (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, Scan to Network folder, Internet Fax,
Fax and Group)
4-130
Contents
CHAPTER 5
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the scanner function and the Internet fax
function.
To use the Internet fax function, the internet fax function must be available.
USB memory mode can be used without installing a peripheral device.
TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
NETWORK SCANNER
SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE . . . . . . . . . 5-28
• CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME,
REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
PREPARATIONS FOR USE AS A NETWORK
SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH
IS IN THE "ON" POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME . . . . . . . . . .
• STORING SENDER INFORMATION . . . . . . . . .
• SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB
PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES
FOR EACH SCAN MODE IN THE
ADDRESS BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN
TO DESKTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• BEFORE SENDING TO A DIRECT SMTP
ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY
MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
• ENTERING A FILE NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-5
SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE. . . . . 5-42
• CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME,
AND BODY TEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5-6
SENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission) . . . . 5-48
• BROADCAST TRANSMISSIONS THAT
INCLUDE INTERNET FAX
DESTINATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5-6
5-7
SENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A
COMPUTER (PC-I-Fax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5-8
IMAGE SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH
SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided
Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE
AND SEND SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND
ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHANGING THE RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHANGING THE COLOR MODE . . . . . . . . . .
BASE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
• CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF
ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN THE ADDRESS
BOOK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
SCAN SEND SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
ENTERING DESTINATIONS
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
• RETRIEVING A DESTINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
• CHECKING AND DELETING THE
SELECTED DESTINATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-54
5-55
5-56
5-64
5-66
5-67
5-71
CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE
TRANSMITTED (Preview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
• PREVIEW CHECK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY . . . . . . . . 5-22
• SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER . . . . . . . 5-23
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A
GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
USING THE RESEND FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-1
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS
SPECIAL MODES
RECEIVING AN INTERNET FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
• MANUALLY RECEIVING INTERNET
FAXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
SPECIAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs) . . . . 5-76
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print) . . . . . . . 5-112
SENDING AN IMAGE AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING . . 5-113
• IMAGE CHECK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO
A SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET
FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS
(Inbound Routing Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
• CONFIGURING INBOUND ROUTING
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE
(Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan
Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE
TRANSMISSION (Original Count) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC
Scan Mode)
BASIC SCANNING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
ELIMINATING BLANK PAGES FROM A
TRANSMISSION (Blank Page Skip) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
SCANNING BUSINESS CARDS (Business
Card Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
METADATA DELIVERY
METADATA DELIVERY (Data Entry) . . . . . . . . . 5-124
SCAN THE ORIGINAL DELETING THE
COLORED PORTIONS (Drop Out Color). . . . . . . . . 5-95
PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA
TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125
• SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB
PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125
• METADATA TRANSMISSION FOR SCAN
TO DESKTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125
WHITENING FAINT COLORS IN THE IMAGE
(Suppress Background) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction Report) . . . 5-99
TRANSMITTING METADATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126
• METADATA FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
CHECKING THE STATUS OF
TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS
JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED
JOB SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB
QUEUE IS COMPLETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS . . . . . . . . . .
5-101
NETWORK SCANNER / INTERNET FAX*1
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129
5-102
PULL SCAN FUNCTION (TWAIN)
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
5-105
5-106
STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING
TRANSMITTED OR WAITING TO BE
TRANSMITTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN
TRANSMISSION JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
CHECKING THE INTERNET FAX ACTIVITY
LOG (Image Sending Activity Report) . . . . . . . . 5-109
• IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT . . . . . 5-109
• INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE
RESULT COLUMN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
5-2
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
NETWORK SCANNER
This section provides information that you should know before using the machine as a network scanner.
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
The network scanner function of the machine can be used to scan an original, create an image file, and send the file
over a network to a computer, FTP server, or other destination. Scanning is also possible from your computer using a
TWAIN-compliant application.
The network scanner function provides the following scanning modes.
Scan modes
☞ SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE (page 5-28)
Scan to E-mail
The scanned file is sent to an e-mail address.
Scan to FTP
The scanned file is sent to a specified directory of a FTP server.
When the file is sent, it is also possible to send an e-mail to a previously stored e-mail
address to inform the recipient of the location of the file. (This is called "Scan to FTP
(Hyperlink)".)
Scan to Desktop
The scanned file is sent to a specified folder on your computer.
To use Scan to Desktop, software must be installed from the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner
Utilities" CD-ROM that accompanies the machine. For the system requirements of the
software, see the manual (PDF format) or the Readme file on the CD-ROM. For the
procedures for installing the software, see the "Sharpdesk Installation Guide".
Scan to Network Folder
The scanned file is sent to a shared folder on a Windows computer on the same network as
the machine.
5-3
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
USB memory mode
☞ SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE (page 5-36)
USB Memory Scan
The scanned file is sent to and stored in a USB memory device connected to the machine.
Internet fax mode
To use the Internet fax function, the Internet fax expansion kit must be installed.
☞ SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE (page 5-42)
Internet fax transmission
The scanned file is sent as an Internet fax. Reception of Internet faxes is also possible.
The machine supports Direct SMTP, which lets you directly send Internet faxes within your
company without using a mail server.
PC scan mode
☞ SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) (page 5-119)
PC Scan
A TWAIN-compliant application on a computer connected to the same network as the
machine is used to scan a document or image.
To use PC Scan, the scanner driver must be installed from the "Software CD-ROM" that
accompanies the machine.
Operating systems that can be used are Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server
2008/7.
Data entry mode
The application integration module is required to use the metadata transmission function.
☞ METADATA DELIVERY (page 5-124)
Metadata delivery
The application integration module can be combined with the network scanner function to append a metadata* file to a
scanned image file. (This is called metadata delivery.)
Information entered using the touch panel or automatically generated by the machine can be sent to a directory on a
FTP server or an application on a computer as a metadata file in XML format.
* Metadata is information about a file, how it is to be processed, and its relation to other objects.
5-4
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
PREPARATIONS FOR USE AS A NETWORK
SCANNER
MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH IS IN THE
"ON" POSITION
The main power is "on" when the main power indicator on the right side of the operation panel is lit.
If the main power indicator is not lit, the main power is "off". Switch the main power switch to the "on" position and press
the [POWER] key ( ) on the operation panel.
If the Internet fax function will be used, and in particular if reception or timer transmission will take place at night, always
keep the main power switch in the "on" position.
When the [POWER SAVE] key (
) indicator light is blinking, the machine is in auto power shut-off mode. If the [POWER
SAVE] key (
) is pressed when the indicator is blinking, the indicator will turn off and the machine will return to the ready
state after a brief interval.
Main power indicator
"On" position
LOGOUT
Main power switch
[POWER SAVE] key/indicator
CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME
Verify that the correct date and time are set in the machine.
The date and time are set in the system settings of the machine. When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the
system settings menu screen appears on the touch panel. Select [Default Settings], [Clock], and [Clock Adjust], and set
the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
If "Disabling of Clock Adjustment" has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), the date and time cannot be set.
STORING SENDER INFORMATION
Be sure to configure this information, as it is required for communication.
Before using Scan to E-mail
Store a default sender name in "Sender Name" and a reply e-mail address in "Reply E-mail Address". These will be
used when a sender is not selected.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Sender Set
This is used to store the sender name and e-mail address that is used when a sender is not selected.
Before using Internet fax
Store a sender name in "Sender Name" and a sender Internet fax address in "Own Address".
System Settings (Administrator): Sender Data Registration
Use this setting to program the sender name and sender address.
5-5
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB PAGES
To use scan mode and Internet fax mode, the basic network scanner settings, server settings such as SMTP and DNS
server settings, and sender addresses must be configured in the Web pages.
• Server settings
To configure server settings, click [Network Settings] and then [Services Settings] in the Web page menu.
(Administrator rights are required.)
• Basic network scanner settings
To configure network scanner settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Network Scanner Settings] in the Web
page menu. (Administrator rights are required.)
• Internet fax settings
To configure the network scanner settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Internet Fax Settings] in the Web
page menu. (Administrator rights are required.)
STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES FOR EACH
SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK
To use Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder, destinations must be stored in the address book.
Although destinations for Scan to E-mail and Internet fax do not need to be stored in the address book (they can be
entered directly or looked up in a global address book at the time of transmission), storing these types of destinations in
the address book makes it easy to select them. Store each type of destination as explained below.
Types of transmission in scanner mode
• Scan to FTP:
Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [FTP] in
[Address Type] and store an address.
• Scan to Network Folder: Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [Network
Folder] in [Address Type] and store an address.
• Scan to E-mail:
Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [E-mail]
in [Address Type] and store an address. Addresses can also be stored in the system
settings.
• Scan to Desktop:
See "STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP" (page 5-7). Scan to Desktop
destinations can also be stored in the Web pages. Click [Address Book] in the Web page
menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [Desktop] in [Address Type] and store an
address.
A total of 999 addresses can be stored. Among these, a combined maximum of 200 Scan to Network Folder, Scan to FTP,
and Scan to Desktop addresses can be stored.
Transmission in Internet fax mode:
Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [Internet
Fax] or [Direct SMTP] for the [Address Type], and store the address. Addresses can also be
stored in the system settings.
System Settings: Address Book (page 7-17)
This is used to store destination addresses for Scan to E-mail and Internet fax.
5-6
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP
To store your computer in the machine as a destination for Scan to Desktop, Network Scanner Tool must be installed
from the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner Utilities" CD-ROM that accompanies the machine. To scan an image to your
computer, Network Scanner Tool must be running on your computer.
INSTALLING NETWORK SCANNER TOOL
To install Network Scanner Tool, see the "Sharpdesk Installation Guide" that accompanies the machine. When a
standard installation is performed, Network Scanner Tool is installed with Sharpdesk.
When you restart your computer after installing Network Scanner Tool, the Setup Wizard will start automatically. Follow
this wizard to set up Network Scanner Tool. This will store your computer in the machine as a destination for Scan to
Desktop. The stored destination will be displayed as a one-touch key in the address book screen.
The following window appears while Network Scanner Tool is being set up. The item selected in "My Profiles" (C) will be
the name of the one-touch key.
Scan
Internet Fax
Address Book
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
Fax
USB Mem. Scan
Scan:
Auto
Text
Auto
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
(A)
Send:
8½x11
PC Scan
PDF
(B)
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
Address Entry
Global
Address Search
To
AAA AAA
AAA BBB
Comp-DESKTOP
AAA CCC
AAA DDD
AAA EEE
1
2
AAA FFF
AAA GGG
AAA HHH
AAA III
Freq.
(C)
Cc
ABCD
Sort Address
EFGH
A
IJKL
B
C
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
D
(B)
(D)
The profile name is determined by the combination of the text entered in "Prefix" (A) and the profile*.
The one-touch key is assigned to an index tab in the address book screen based on the text entered in "Initial" (B).
* This defines how an image sent to your computer is processed. For more information, see profile explanation (D).
ADDING DESTINATIONS
For the number of computers that can be stored in the machine as destinations of Scan to Desktop, see the number of
licenses indicated in the "Sharpdesk Installation Guide". To store more destinations, a license kit is required. Store Scan
to Desktop destinations by installing Network Scanner Tool on each computer.
5-7
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
BEFORE SENDING TO A DIRECT SMTP ADDRESS
The machine supports Direct SMTP, which lets you directly send Internet faxes within your company without using a
mail server. For the procedure for storing a Direct SMTP address in the address book, see "STORING DESTINATION
ADDRESSES FOR EACH SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK" (page 5-6). Stored Direct SMTP addresses are
included in the address book for Internet fax mode.
If the destination is busy
If the destination is busy, the machine will wait briefly and then automatically resend.
To cancel transmission...
Cancel the transmission from the job status screen.
☞ STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING TRANSMITTED OR WAITING TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 5-107)
System Settings (Administrator): Recall in Case of Line Busy
This is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when the connection cannot be
established because the line is busy. The factory default setting is 2 attempts at an interval of 3 minutes.
When a communication error occurs
If a communication error occurs or the other fax machine does not answer the call within a preset period of time,
transmission will be re-attempted automatically after a preset interval.
To cancel transmission...
Cancel the transmission from the job status screen.
☞ STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING TRANSMITTED OR WAITING TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 5-107)
System Settings (Administrator): Recall in Case of Communication Error
This is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when a transmission fails due to an error.
The factory default setting is attempt at an interval of 3 minutes.
5-8
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
BASE SCREEN
Scan mode, USB memory mode, Internet fax mode, and PC scan mode are used by selecting operations and settings in
the base screens of those modes. To display the base screen of a mode, touch the [IMAGE SEND] key in the touch
panel and then touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
Base screen of scan mode
(1)
COPY
DOCUMENT
FILING
IMAGE SEND
Ready to send.
(2)
(3)
(4)
Scan
(5)
(6)
Resend
Internet Fax
Address Book
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
Fax
USB Mem. Scan
Scan:
Text
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
(7)
(8)
(11)
PDF
(12)
(13)
Preview
(9)
Base screen of USB memory mode
(1)
(2)
(3)
COPY
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
(1)
File Name
Internet Fax
Exposure
Fax
Scan:
Auto
Resolution
200X200dpi
File Format
PDF
Color Mode
USB Mem. Scan
Auto
8½x11
Send:
Auto
DOCUMENT
FILING
IMAGE SEND
Ready to send.
(3)
(4)
PC Scan
Scan
Address Book
Resend
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
(5)
Address Entry
Exposure
(11) (6)
Send Settings
Resolution
200X100dpi
Address Review
File Format
TIFF-F
File
Special Modes
Text
(7)
Mono2
(13)
Preview
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
(10)
PC Scan
Auto
Auto
(11)
PDF
Special Modes
(8)
COPY
(2)
Original
(14)
Base screen of Internet fax mode
Ready to send.
Scan
Auto
Send:
8½x11
Auto
(10)
PC Scan
(13)
Quick File
(8)
Preview
I-Fax Manual
Reception
(15)
(16)
(9)
(1)
metadata delivery using the [Data Entry] tab, see
"METADATA DELIVERY" (page 5-124).
Mode select keys
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and
document filing modes.
To use scan mode, USB memory mode, Internet fax
mode, PC scan mode, or data entry mode, touch the
[IMAGE SEND] key.
(2)
(4)
Touch this key to use a one-touch key or a group key. When
the key is touched, the address book screen appears.
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-18)
Various messages are displayed here.
The icon of the selected mode appears on the left.
(3)
[Address Book] key
(5)
Send mode tabs
[Address Entry] key
Touch this key to manually enter a destination address
instead of using a one-touch key.
☞ ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-22)
Touch one of these tabs to change the image send
mode.
Tabs of modes that cannot be used because the
corresponding options are not installed do not appear.
If the [USB Mem. Scan] and [PC Scan] tabs do not
appear, touch the
tab to move the screen.
If the [Scan], [Internet Fax], [Fax], and [Data Entry] tabs
do not appear, touch the
tab to move the
screen.
The [Data Entry] tab appears when the application
integration module is installed. For information on
(6)
[Send Settings] key
Touch this key to select or enter the subject, file name,
sender name, or body text, which has been previously
stored in the Web page.
Scan modes:
☞ CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME,
REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT (page 5-33)
Internet fax mode:
☞ CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND
BODY TEXT (page 5-45)
5-9
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(7)
Customized keys
(12)
The keys that appear here can be changed to show the
settings or functions that you prefer.
☞ Customizing displayed keys (page 5-12)
(8)
[Preview] key *1
Touch to check the image that will be sent in the touch
panel before transmission.
☞ CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED
(Preview) (page 5-72)
(9)
key
This key appears when a special mode or 2-sided
scanning is selected. Touch the key to display the
selected special modes.
☞ Checking what special modes are selected (page
5-12)
(13) [Special Modes] key
Touch this key to use a special mode.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
key
(14) [File Name] key
Touch this key to specify a destination using a search
number*.
* 3-digit number assigned to a destination when it is
stored.
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 5-21)
Touch this key to enter a file name when storing a file to
USB memory.
☞ ENTERING A FILE NAME (page 5-41)
(15)
(10) [Resend] key/[Next Address] key
The destinations of the most recent 8 transmissions by
Scan to E-mail, fax and/or Internet fax are stored. Touch
this key to select one of these destinations. After a
destination is selected, this key changes to the [Next
Address] key.
☞ USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page 5-27)
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION (page 5-19)
(11) Image settings
Touch this key to select the image settings (original size,
exposure, resolution, file format, and color mode).
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-54)
/
/
key
When "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" or
"Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled in the
system settings (administrator), this will appear when an
Internet fax is received.
: Only "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" is
enabled
: Only "Received Data Image Check Setting" is
enabled
: Both settings are enabled
☞ PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print) (page 5-112)
☞ CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING
(page 5-113)
(16) [I-Fax Manual Reception] key
Touch this key to receive an Internet fax manually.
☞ MANUALLY RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES (page
5-111)
*1 MX-B402SC Only
When sending an image, you can retrieve and use a stored transmission destination from the address book screen. The
address book screen is shared by scan mode, Internet fax mode, fax mode and data entry mode.
Touch the [Address Book] key in the base screen to switch to the address book screen. Touch the [Condition Settings]
key in the address book screen to switch to the base screen.
Base screen of scan mode
Scan
Internet Fax
Address Book
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
Fax
Scan:
Auto
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
Address book screen
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Auto
Address Review
Text
PDF
To
Cc
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
2
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
Freq.
Sort Address
1
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
• This chapter uses the base screen of scan mode as an example when operations common to all modes are explained.
• The procedures in this chapter assume that the base screen of scan mode appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is
touched.
5-10
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
• Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, fax, or data entry mode)
• Address book screen
5-11
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Customizing displayed keys
Special mode keys and other keys can be displayed in the base screen. Set these keys to functions that you frequently
use to access the functions with a single touch. The customized keys are configured using "Customize Key Setting" in
the Web pages. The following keys appear by factory default:
• [Address Review] key
Touch this key to display a list of the destinations that have been selected in the address book. This is the same key
as the [Address Review] key in the address book screen.
• [File] key, [Quick File] key
Touch either of these keys to use the File function or Quick File function of document filing mode.
In USB memory mode...
Customized keys do not initially appear, however, up to three keys can be added.
Example: When "Erase", "Job Build", and "Slow Scan Mode" are assigned to the customized keys
Scan
These three keys can be changed
as desired.
Internet Fax
Address Book
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
Fax
Scan:
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Resolution
200X200dpi
Erase
File Format
PDF
Job Build
Color Mode
Mono2
Slow Scan Mode
Special Modes
Auto
Text
Auto
Send Settings
Send:
PC Scan
PDF
• Displaying a program key in the base screen will enable you to retrieve the program by simply touching the key.
☞ STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs) (page 5-76)
• The functions that can be selected for the customized keys vary depending on the mode.
System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.
Checking what special modes are selected
The
The
key appears in the base screen when a special mode or 2-sided scanning is selected.
key can be touched to display the selected special modes. To close the screen, touch the [OK] key.
Scan
Internet Fax
Address Book
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
Send Settings
Resolution
Fax
Scan:
Auto
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
OK
Function Review
Auto
Erase
Edge:1/2inch
Timer
Day of the Week:Monday
Time:21:30
Slow Scan
Mode
On
Text
1
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
PDF
1
The special mode settings cannot be changed from the review screen. To change a setting, touch the [OK] key to close the
review screen and then touch the [Special Modes] key and select the setting that you wish to change.
5-12
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN
This screen is used to select transmission destinations.
(8)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(9)
AAA AAA
xxx@xx.xxx.com
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
To
Cc
AAA AAA
Bcc
BBB BBB
(4)
Address Review
(5)
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
(6)
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
1
(11)
2
CCC CCC
Freq.
(7)
(10)
DDD DDD
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
(12)
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Sort Address
(13)
(1)
This shows the selected destination.
(2)
Number of displayed items selector key
(9)
When using Scan to E-mail, touch the [Cc] key when you
wish to send a "Carbon copy" of the e-mail to an
additional destination.
Touch this key to change the number of destinations
(one-touch keys) displayed in the address book screen.
Select 5, 10, or 15 keys.
(3)
(10) [Bcc] key
When using Scan to E-mail, touch the [Bcc] key when
you wish to send a "Blind carbon copy" of the e-mail to an
additional destination.
When an address is specified as a Bcc recipient, other
recipients will not know that the address is a recipient.
This key only appears when Bcc has been enabled using
"Bcc Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
[Condition Settings] key
Touch this key to select transmission settings. When the
key is touched, the base screen appears.
☞ BASE SCREEN (page 5-9)
(4)
[Address Review] key
Touch this key to view a list of the selected destinations.
Destination selections can be changed.
☞ CHECKING AND DELETING THE SELECTED
DESTINATIONS (page 5-20)
(5)
The destinations (one-touch keys) stored in each index
are displayed. This chapter refers to keys in which
destinations and groups are stored as one-touch keys.
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION (page 5-19)
(12) Index tabs
Touch this to change the displayed index tab.
☞ Index display (page 5-15)
[Global Address Search] key
When the use of a LDAP server has been enabled in the
machine's Web pages, a transmission address can be
obtained from a global address book.
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL
ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-25)
(7)
(11) One-touch key display
[Address Entry] key
Touch this key to manually enter a destination address
instead of using a one-touch key.
☞ ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-22)
(6)
(13)
[Sort Address] key
Touch this key to change the index tabs to custom
indexes or to display one-touch keys by send mode.
☞ CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS
IN THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN (page 5-14)
(8)
[Cc] key
key
Touch this key to specify a destination using a search
number*.
* A 3-digit number assigned to a one-touch key or group
key when it is stored.
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 5-21)
[To] key
Touch this key to enter the selected destination
(one-touch key).
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION (page 5-19)
5-13
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
• Icons appear in the one-touch keys in the address book to indicate which mode is used for transmission.
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-18)
• For information on storing addresses in the address book, see "STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES FOR EACH
SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK" (page 5-6).
• For information on storing destinations for Scan to Desktop, see "STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP"
(page 5-7).
• System Settings: Address Book (page 7-17)
This is used to store Scan to E-mail and Internet fax addresses in one-touch keys.
• System Settings (Administrator): The Number of Direct Address Keys Displayed Setting
This is used to change the default setting for the number of one-touch keys displayed in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
- Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, fax, or data entry mode)
- Address book screen
• System Settings (Administrator): Address Book Default Selection
The following settings are available for the method of sorting the addresses that appear in the address book.
- Index type (alphabetical, custom)
- Address type (all, group, E-mail, FTP/Desktop, Network Folder, Internet fax, fax)
CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN
THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN
You can show destinations of only a specific transmission mode in the address book screen, or change the displayed
index tabs from the alphabetical tabs to the custom tabs. The procedure for selecting destinations does not change.
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
Address Entry
1
Global
Address Search
To
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
(1)
(2)
OK
Sort Address
2
1
2
Freq.
Sort Address
Touch the [Sort Address] key.
Cc
Tab Switch
Address Type
ABC
All
Group
User
E-mail
FTP/Desktop
Internet Fax
Fax
Change the display mode.
(1) Touch the key of the mode or tab that you
wish to display.
• To show only the one-touch keys of a particular send
mode, touch the desired mode key under "Address
Type".
• To change the index tabs to the custom indexes, touch
the [User] key under "Tab Switch".
Network Folder
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
5-14
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Index display
Indexes make it easy to search for a destination (one-touch key). The destinations are displayed separately using
alphabetical search characters and index numbers. To display a stored destination, touch the appropriate index tab. It is
convenient to store frequently used destinations in the [Freq.] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in the [Freq.]
index when you store the destination.
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
Address Entry
Global
Address Search
To
Cc
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
1
2
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
Freq.
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Sort Address
Index tabs
The destinations can also be displayed in alphabetical order by initial.
Each time the displayed index tab is touched, the display order changes in the following order: search numbers (page
5-21), ascending names, descending names. When the display order is changed, the display order of the other index
tabs also changes.
Ordered by search number (default)
Freq.
Ascending names
Freq.
ABCD
Descending names
Freq.
ABCD
ABCD
Index names can be changed using "Custom Index" in the system settings, allowing you to create groups of one-touch
keys that can be easily recognized.
System Settings: Custom Index (page 7-22)
This setting is used to store custom index names. The custom index where a one-touch key appears is specified when the
transmission destination is stored in the key.
Narrowing the search letter range
An alphabet tab on an index tab can be touched to display keys to further narrow the search range. For example, when
the [ABCD] tab is touched, keys from "A" to "D" appear. If the [B] key is touched, only destinations starting with the letter
"B" will appear. To cancel, touch the key again. Note that the search letter range cannot be narrowed on the [Freq.] tab,
the [etc.] tab, or on a user index tab.
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
Address Entry
Global
Address Search
To
BBB AAA
BBB BBB
BBB CCC
BBB DDD
1
2
BBB EEE
BBB FFF
BBB GGG
BBB HHH
BBB III
BBB JJJ
Freq.
Sort Address
Cc
ABCD
EFGH
A
IJKL
B
5-15
C
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
D
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SCAN SEND SEQUENCE
This section explains the basic procedure for scanning and transmission. Select settings in the order shown below to
ensure smooth transmission.
For the detailed procedures for selecting the settings, see the explanation of each setting in this chapter.
Place the original
Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
☞ SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE (page 5-28)
☞ SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE (page 5-36)
☞ SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE (page 5-42)
Enter the destination
Ready to send.
Scan
Address Book
Resend
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
Address Entry
Exposure
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
Auto
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
Auto
Text
PDF
Specify the destination of the scan transmission.
• [Address Book] key:
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS
BOOK (page 5-18)
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL
ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-25)
• [Address Entry] key:
☞ ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-22)
•
key:
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 5-21)
• [Resend] key:
☞ USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page 5-27)
Select settings
Scan
Internet Fax
Fax
Address Book
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
Scan:
Auto
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
Text
PDF
PC Scan
Auto
Settings can be selected for scanning the original.
• Original (2-sided original, scan size, send size)
• Exposure • Resolution • File Format • Color Mode
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-54)
• Send Settings (File Name)
Scan mode, Data entry mode:
☞ CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO,
AND BODY TEXT (page 5-33)
USB memory mode:
☞ ENTERING A FILE NAME (page 5-41)
Internet fax mode:
☞ CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND BODY
TEXT (page 5-45)
5-16
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Special mode settings
Scan
Internet Fax
Address Book
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
Fax
Scan:
USB Mem. Scan
Send:
8½x11
Auto
PC Scan
Auto
Special modes can be selected.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
Text
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
PDF
Start scanning and transmission
Start scanning and transmission.
If the original is placed on the document glass, follow these steps to start scanning and transmission:
(1) Press the [START] key.
(2) When scanning is finished, replace the original with the next original.
(3) Press the [START] key.
(4) Repeat (2) and (3) until all originals have been scanned.
(5) Touch the [Read-End] key.
After the original is scanned, the settings revert to the default settings.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
The settings can be kept in effect a fixed period of time after scanning is completed.
5-17
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
ENTERING DESTINATIONS
This section explains how to specify destination addresses, including selecting an address from the address book and
retrieving an address by entering a search number.
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK
The address book screen shows stored destinations as one-touch keys.
The destinations are displayed in order by search number.
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
To
Cc
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
1
2
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
Freq.
ABCD
Sort Address
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
The address book screen shows the destinations of all modes of the image send function. Each one-touch key shows
the name of the destination and an icon indicating the mode to be used.
Icon
Mode
Fax
Scan to E-mail
Internet fax (Direct SMTP)
Scan to FTP
Scan to Network Folder
Scan to Desktop
Group key with multiple destinations
• For information on storing addresses in the address book, see "STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES FOR EACH
SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK" (page 5-6).
• For information on storing destinations for Scan to Desktop, see "STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP"
(page 5-7).
System Settings: Address Book (page 7-17)
This is used to store Scan to E-mail and Internet fax addresses in one-touch keys.
5-18
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION
A destination is retrieved by selecting its one-touch key.
Scan
1
Internet Fax
Address Book
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
USB Mem. Scan
Resolution
200X200dpi
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
10
15
Condition
Settings
Specify the destination.
(2)
To
Cc
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
DDD DDD
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
1
2
Freq.
Sort Address
ABCD
Touch the [Address Book] key.
Auto
PDF
CCC CCC
Address Review
PC Scan
Text
Send Settings
5
Send:
8½x11
Auto
Address Review
(3)
2
Fax
Scan:
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
(1) Touch the index tab where the destination
is stored.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
If you select an incorrect destination, touch the key again
to cancel the selection.
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
This enters the selected destination.
(1)
• It is convenient to store frequently used destinations in the [Freq.] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in
the [Freq.] index when you store the destination.
• To continue specifying other destinations...
It is possible to specify multiple scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, Scan to Network
Folder), Internet fax, and fax mode destinations when performing a broadcast transmission (maximum of 500
destinations). To specify multiple destinations, repeat (1) through (3) of this step.
When performing Scan to E-mail, you can select a one-touch key and then touch the [Cc] key or the [Bcc] key to
send Cc or Bcc copies of the e-mail.
• System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting
This setting determines whether or not the [Next Address] key can be omitted before specifying the next destination.
Factory default setting: the [Next Address] key can be omitted.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Switching of Display Order
This is used to disable switching of the order of display of the one-touch keys in the address book screen. The currently
selected display order will be the order that is used after this setting is enabled.
5-19
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHECKING AND DELETING THE SELECTED
DESTINATIONS
When multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a
destination from the list (cancel selection of the destination).
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
1
To
Touch the [Address Review] key.
Cc
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
2
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
Freq.
Sort Address
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
2
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Check the destinations and then touch
the [OK] key.
OK
Address Review
001 AAA AAA
002 BBB BBB
003 KKK KKK
004 LLL LLL
005 MMM MMM
006 NNN NNN
007 OOO OOO
008 PPP PPP
009 QQQ QQQ
010 RRR RRR
011 SSS SSS
012 TTT TTT
To
1
1
2
Cc
To check Cc or Bcc destinations, touch the corresponding tab.
To cancel selection of a destination...
Touch the one-touch key of the destination that you wish to cancel. A message will appear to confirm the deletion.
Touch the [Yes] key. Touch the [Detail] key to check the specified destination type and name.
Deselect the address?
AAA AAA
Detail
5-20
No
Yes
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION
A destination stored in the address book can be retrieved using the
of the modes or in the address book screen.
Scan
Address Book
1
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
Address Entry
Exposure
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
Auto
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
key. This can be done in the base screen of any
Touch the
key.
Auto
Text
PDF
Enter the 3-digit search number of the
address with the numeric keys.
When the 3-digit search number is entered, the stored address
is retrieved and specified as a destination.
2
• The search number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book.
• If you do not know the search number, print the one-touch address list using "Sending Address List" in the system
settings.
• When entering search numbers such as "001" and "011", "0" can be omitted. For example to enter "001", enter "1"
and touch the
key or the [Next Address] key.
If an incorrect search number is entered...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) to clear the number and enter the correct number.
5-21
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY
Scan to E-mail, Internet fax and data entry mode addresses can be manually entered.
Display the address input screen.
(1)
Scan
1
Internet Fax
Fax
USB Mem. Scan
Address Book
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
Scan:
Send:
8½x11
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to
use.
Auto
(2) Touch the [Address Entry] key.
Text
Auto
PC Scan
PDF
(2)
Enter the destination address.
Scan mode
(1) If you are in scan mode, touch the key of the
desired delivery method.
Select addressee type.
To
• Normally the [To] key is touched. This specifies that the
entered e-mail address will be a recipient.
• If Internet fax mode is selected, touch the [Internet Fax]
key or the [Direct SMTP] key.
Cc
Internet fax mode
(2) Enter the destination address in the text
entry screen that appears.
Select the destination type.
Enter the destination address and touch the [OK] key.
For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING
TEXT" (page 1-76) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".
2
Internet Fax
Direct SMTP
• If you wish the destination to be a Cc destination, touch the [Cc] key.
• The [Bcc] key only appears when Bcc has been enabled using "Bcc Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
If you wish the destination to be a Bcc destination, touch the [Bcc] key.
• When Internet fax mode is selected, the base screen appears after the destination address is entered. However, if
"I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the reception report
request screen will appear. If you wish to receive a report, touch the [Yes] key. If not, touch the [No] key. (When
Direct SMTP is used, transmission confirmation is not performed.)
• System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting
This setting is used to request a reception report when an Internet fax is sent. When the destination is specified by directly
entering the address, a message will appear asking you if you wish to receive a report. (When Direct SMTP is used,
transmission confirmation is not performed.)
• System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen and the
delivery type selection screen.
5-22
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER
A network folder on a server or computer connected to the same network as the machine can be directly specified.
Select [Direct SMTP] in step 2 on the previous page and follow the steps below.
Network Folder
Cancel
OK
Touch the [Browse] key.
• To directly enter a folder, touch the [Folder Path] key. A
text entry screen will appear.
• If a user name and password are required, check with
the administrator of the server and enter the user name
and password.
Folder Path
Browse
1
User Name
Password
For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-76) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
5-23
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Access the network folder.
(1)
Select workgroup.
Search
Workgroup
OK
Cancel
(1) Touch the key of the workgroup that you
wish to access.
Workgroup Name
1
Work 1
16
Work 2
Work 3
Work 4
Work 5
Work 6
(2)
Select server.
Search
Server
(2) Touch the key of the server or computer
that you wish to access.
If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name
and password, check with your server administrator and
enter the appropriate user name and password.
OK
Cancel
Work 1
Server Name
1
Server 1
16
Server 2
Server 3
Server 4
Server 5
2
Server 6
Select network folder.
Network Folder
(3) Touch the key of the network folder.
(4)
(3)
Search
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the screen of step 1. Touch the [OK] key
again to enter the folder.
OK
Cancel
\\Server 1
Network Folder Name
1
User 1
3
User 2
User 3
User 4
User 5
User 6
• You can touch the [Search] key and enter a keyword to search for a workgroup, server, or network folder. For the
procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-76) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
• Up to 100 workgroups, 100 servers, and 100 network folders can be displayed.
• To move up one level, touch the
key.
• The [Cancel] key can be pressed to return to the screen of step 1.
• To change the sorting order of the displayed keys, touch the key that shows
or
in each screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.
• To go to a particular page, touch the
number.
1
key that shows the current page number and enter the desired page
5-24
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A
GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK
When a LDAP server is configured in the Web pages, you can look up an address in a global address book and retrieve
the address for Scan to E-mail or Internet fax transmission (excluding Direct SMTP addresses).
Open the global address search screen.
(2)
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
Cc
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
Address Review
1
To
1
For the [Address Book] key, see "BASE SCREEN" (page
5-9).
2
Freq.
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
(2) Touch the [Global Address Search] key.
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Sort Address
(1)
(2)
Cancel
Server Change
Server 1
Server 2
Server 3
OK
Search for the destination.
If only one LDAP server has been stored, (1) and (2) are not
necessary. Go directly to (3). If an authentication screen for the
LDAP server appears, enter your user name and password.
(1) Touch the key of the LDAP server that you
wish to use.
Server 4
If an authentication screen for the LDAP server appears,
enter your user name and password.
Server 5
Server 6
Server 7
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
(3) Search for the destination in the search
screen.
Enter search characters for the destination and touch the
[Search] key. The search results will appear after a brief
interval.
For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING
TEXT" (page 1-76) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".
2
How to search
Enter the search characters (maximum of 64 characters). The system will look for names starting with the entered
letters.
An asterisk can be used as follows:
XXX : Names beginning with "XXX".
XXX: Names that end with "XXX".
XXX : Names that include "XXX".
AA XX: Names that start with "AA" and end with "XX".
5-25
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(2)
To
Condition
Settings
Address Review
Search Again
Select the destination.
(1)
(1) Touch the key of the desired destination.
Cc
If no names are found that match the search characters, a
message will appear. Touch the [OK] key to close the
message and touch the [Search Again] key to search
again.
Detail
XXX
XXX AAA
AAA@xx.xxx.com
XXX BBB
BBB@xx.xxx.com
XXX CCC
CCC@xx.xxx.com
XXX DDD
DDD@xx.xxx.com
XXX EEE
EEE@xx.xxx.com
XXX FFF
FFF@xx.xxx.com
1
2
Address Book
(2) Touch the [To] key.
This enters the selected destination.
If you wish to enter another destination, repeat (1) and (2)
of this step.
3
• If 30 or more matches are found, a message will appear in the screen. Touch the [OK] key to close the message. Up
to 300 matches can appear. If no names are found that match the search letters, touch the [Search Again] key to
search again using more search letters.
• To check the information stored in a destination...
Touch the key of the destination and then touch the [Detail] key. The information stored for the selected destination
will appear. Check the information and then touch the [OK] key to return to the search results screen.
• If a screen for selecting the item to be used appears...
If the selected destination includes a fax number, telephone number, or other contact information in addition to the
e-mail address or Internet fax address, you will need to select which item you wish to use. Touch the [E-mail] key or
the [Internet Fax] key to retrieve the address for Scan to E-mail or Internet fax transmission.
Storing a destination from a global address book in the machine's
address book
A destination address obtained from a global address book can be stored as a destination (one-touch key) in the
address book of the machine.
Touch the [Detail] key in the search results screen of the global address book (the screen of step 3 above) to display
information on the selected destination. Touch the [Register] key in the detailed information screen and then touch the
item to be used (the [E-mail] key or the [Internet Fax] key). The following screens will appear.
E-mail address registration screen
Exit
Direct Address / Individual
Internet Fax
E-mail
Search Number
Name
E-mail
Fax
Search Number
Name
AAA AAA
A
Address
AAA@xx.xxx.com
Key Name
AAA AAA
Index
User 1
Color/Grayscale :PDF/Medium
B/W
Exit
Direct Address / Individual
001
Initial
File Format
Internet fax address registration screen
:PDF/MMR(G4)
Internet Fax
Fax
001
AAA AAA
Initial
A
Address
AAA@xx.xxx.com
Key Name
AAA AAA
Compression
MH (G3)
I-Fax Report
Off
Index
User 1
The information stored in the global address book is automatically entered. (The settings can be changed if needed. For
detailed information on each item, see "Address Control" (page 7-17) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".) However, configure
the items below manually. To complete the storing procedure, touch the [Exit] key.
• [Initial] key:
Touch this key to enter the initials that determine where the destination will appear in the
alphabetical index and the order of one-touch key display. Enter up to 10 characters for the initials.
• [Index] key:
Touch this key to select the custom index in which the address will appear. You can also select
whether or not the destination will be included on the [Freq.] tab of the address book.
• [File Format] key: Set the format for Scan to E-mail. Default format settings have already been configured; however,
selecting format settings when you store a destination saves you the trouble of selecting the
settings each time you transmit to that destination.
• [Compression] key: Touch this key to set the compression mode when sending an Internet fax.
• [I-Fax Report] key: Touch this key to request a reception report when sending an Internet fax.
5-26
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
USING THE RESEND FUNCTION
The destinations of the most recent 8 transmissions by Scan to E-mail, Internet fax (including Direct SMTP addresses)
and/or fax are stored. One of these can be selected to resend to that destination.
Ready to send.
1
Resend
Internet Fax
Scan
Fax
Address Book
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
Scan:
Auto
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Touch the [Resend] key.
PC Scan
Auto
Send:
Text
PDF
Cancel
Resend
Touch the key of the desired address.
The last 8 addresses used for transmission are displayed.
2
No.01
AAA AAA
No.02
BBB BBB
No.03
CCC CCC
No.04
DDD DDD
No.05
EEE EEE
No.06
FFF FFF
No.07
GGG GGG
No.08
HHH HHH
• When the [Resend] key is touched and a destination selected, the mode of the selected destination is automatically
selected.
• The following types of addresses are not stored for resending.
- A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key).
- Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder addresses.
- Broadcasting destinations
- Addresses used only for BCC delivery
- Destinations transmitted to using a program
System Settings (Administrator): Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Send Mode
This prohibits use of the resend function. When this setting is enabled, the [Resend] key cannot be used in the base screen
of image send mode.
5-27
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE
SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE
This section explains the basic procedure for transmission in scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to
Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder).
When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot be
changed, the destination cannot be changed, and destinations cannot be added. If you wish to change the mode or
destination, touch the [Cancel] key in the touch panel and then follow the procedure below.
5-28
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Place the original.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
• When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.
Document glass
Originals
Document feeder tray
Place the original face up.
MX-B402
1
1
Portrait orientation*
Place the original face down with the middle
aligned with the tip of the
mark at the middle of
the scale on the left side of the document glass.
MX-B402SC
1
1
1
Landscape orientation
MX-B402
1
1
1
MX-B402SC
1
* To place a large portrait-oriented original, place it as shown above in "Landscape orientation" and specify the
placement orientation in step 3.
• Originals cannot be scanned in succession from both the automatic document feeder and the document glass and
sent in a single transmission.
5-29
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(4)
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
(3)
Specify the destination.
(2)
To
Cc
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
1
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
For the [Address Book] key, see "BASE SCREEN" (page
5-9).
2
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
Freq.
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
QRSTU
VWXYZ
The icon on the key indicates the type of destination
stored in the key.
: Scan to E-mail
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Sort Address
: Scan to FTP
: Scan to Network Folder
: Scan to Desktop
(3) Touch the [To] key.
2
The destination is specified.
(4) Touch the [Condition Settings] key.
• After a one-touch key is touched, if the screen is changed without touching the [To] key, the destination is
automatically specified.
• When performing Scan to E-mail, you can also send Cc or Bcc copies to other destinations. Touch the desired
destination and then touch the [Cc] key or the [Bcc] key.
• Multiple destinations can be specified. To specify multiple destinations, repeat steps (2) and (3).
• You can also select multiple one-touch keys and then touch the [To] key (or the [Cc] or [Bcc] key) to specify all
selected keys at once.
• In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. For a Scan
to E-mail destination, you can enter an address manually or retrieve an address from a global address book. For
more information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 5-18).
System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen.
(1)
Scan
3
(2)
Internet Fax
Fax
Address Book
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
Scan:
Auto
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
Auto
Switch to scan mode and display the
image settings screen.
(1) Touch the [Scan] tab.
Text
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
PDF
The current settings for [Original], [Exposure], [Resolution], [File Format], and [Color Mode] are indicated at the right of
each key. To change a setting, touch the appropriate key.
☞ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 5-55), SPECIFYING
THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 5-56), CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE (page 5-64), CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-66), CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT (page
5-67), CHANGING THE COLOR MODE (page 5-71), SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
5-30
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1)
(2)
Check the original scan size and
placement orientation.
OK
Scan/Original
Scan Size
8½x11
100% Send Size
Auto
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet
(3)
To make sure that the original is scanned in the correct
orientation (the orientation in which the top edge of the original
appears at the top of the display), check the size and
orientation of the original placed in step 1.
(1) Check the scan size.
Check if the size of the placed original is displayed. If the
displayed size is different from the size of the placed
original, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND
SEND SIZE (page 5-56)
2-Sided
Tablet
4
(2) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the
key. If
the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the
key.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the screen of step 2.
• The placement orientation of the original is initially set to
left, this step is not necessary.
. If you placed the original with the top edge to the
• The original size set in the system settings appears as the original size.
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
• If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one
page, go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to the next step.
• If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission
will take place.
• If the color mode is set to [Auto], the color used in the original is automatically detected and scanning takes place in
full color, grayscale, or Mono2.
5
• If the file type is [Encrypt PDF], a password entry screen will appear when the [START] key is pressed.
Please enter encrypt PDF
password.
Cancel
Entry
Touch the [Entry] key to open the keyboard screen, enter a password (maximum of 32 characters), and touch the
[OK] key. The recipient must use the password entered here to open the encrypted PDF file.
To cancel encrypted PDF, touch the [Cancel] key. The format settings screen will appear to let you change the file
type. Select a new file type and press the [START] key to begin transmission.
6
If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original
and press the [START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
5-31
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original.
(Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
Configure
A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.
Read-End
7
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be changed
when scanning an even-numbered original page.
• When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number can
be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report. If the job is a broadcast
transmission, this number will also appear in the key of the job in the job status screen. For this reason, making a note of
the number is useful for checking the result.
• If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop.
• When performing Scan to E-mail, take care not to send a file that is too large. In particular, multi-page files tend to be large.
When sending a multi-page file or other large file, it may be necessary to reduce the number of scanned pages or reduce
the send size.
• Storing a mail signature
You can have preset text automatically added at the end of e-mail messages as a mail signature. This is convenient when
you wish to have a corporate policy or other preset text appear at the bottom of e-mail messages. To store the text for the
mail signature, click [Application Settings], [Network Scanner Settings] and then [Administration Settings] in the Web page
menu. (Administrator rights are required.) Up to 900 characters can be entered. (The mail signature is not included in the
maximum number of characters that can be entered in the e-mail message.)
Use "Pre-Setting Mail Signature" in the system settings (administrator) to specify whether or not a mail signature is added.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
• System Settings (Administrator): Image Send Settings
Use this to configure scanner transmission settings, including the default resolution and exposure settings, the default
color mode and file format, the file compression method for broadcasting, the file size limit for Scan to E-mail, and the
default sender and destination.
• System Settings (Administrator): Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Use this setting to specify whether or not a mail signature is added at the end of e-mail messages. By factory default, a
mail signature is not added.
5-32
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO,
AND BODY TEXT
The subject, file name, reply-to, and body text can be changed when performing a scan transmission. Preset items can
be selected or text can be directly entered.
• When performing Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or Scan to Network Folder, only the file name is used.
• If the subject and file name are not changed, the settings in the Web page are used.
• If the sender name is not changed, the name set in "Default Sender Set" in the system settings is used. If this is not
configured, the reply address in [Network Settings] - [Services Settings] - [SMTP Settings] in the Web pages is used.
(Administrator rights are required.)
• Selections for the subject, file name, and body text are configured by clicking [Application Settings] and then [Network
Scanner Settings] in the Web page menu.
• For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-76) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
1
Touch the [Send Settings] key in the base screen.
☞ BASE SCREEN (page 5-9)
If you are sending to a Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or Scan to Network Folder destination, go to step 4.
To change the subject, touch the
[Subject] key.
OK
Send Settings
Subject
File Name
2
Reply-To
Body Text
Add 'Reply to' to Cc
(1)
Cancel
Subject
Enter the subject.
(2)
(1) Touch a Pre-Set text key.
OK
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Direct Entry
No.01 Sub: Schedule coordination
No.02 Sub: Monthly Schedule
No.03 Sub: Minutes of planning m
No.04
No.05
No.06
No.07
No.08
No.09
No.10
No.11
No.12
1
5
3
• If you wish to directly enter the text, touch the [Direct Entry] key to open the text entry screen. Enter the text and
touch the [OK] key.
• The text in a pre-set text key can be edited by touching the pre-set text key and then the [Direct Entry] key. The text
entry screen will appear with the selected pre-set text entered. (When a destination is stored using the Web pages,
up to 80 characters can be entered. However, only 54 characters can be entered in the touch panel.)
5-33
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Subject
To change the file name, touch the [File
Name] key.
OK
Send Settings
• The file name is entered in the same way as the subject.
• If you are sending to a Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or
Scan to Network Folder destination, go to step 9.
Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
File Name
4
Reply-To
Body Text
Add 'Reply to' to Cc
Subject
File Name
To change "Reply-To", touch the
[Reply-To] key.
OK
Send Settings
Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
Material for planning meeting
Reply-To
5
Body Text
Add 'Reply to' to Cc
If user authentication is being used, the information of the user that logged in will be applied, and thus "Reply-To"
cannot be changed.
Cancel
Reply-To
6
12
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
6
ABC
User
Specify a user for "Reply-To" and touch
the [OK] key.
OK
18
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
1
3
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
KKK KKK
All
• Touch the key that you wish to use for "Reply-To".
• You can touch the [Global Address Search] key to specify a
user stored in a global address book for "Reply-To". You can
also touch the [Address Entry] key to directly enter an e-mail
address.
LLL LLL
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
• To specify the return address, you can touch the
key and enter a user number that has been previously stored
using "User List" in the system settings (administrator).
• A key can only be selected for the return address if an e-mail address has been stored for that user in "User List" in
the system settings (administrator).
5-34
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Subject
7
To change the body text, touch the
[Body Text] key.
OK
Send Settings
Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
File Name
Material for planning meeting
Reply-To
AAA AAA
Body Text
Add 'Reply to' to Cc
Clear All
Body Entry
Enter the body text and touch the [OK]
key.
OK
Thank you for your continuous support. We have attached scanned data,
which you have requested.
• To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Web page,
touch the [Pre-Set Select] key.
• To directly enter the body text, touch the [Edit] key.
8
Pre-Set Select
Edit
• 1800 characters can be entered. (A line break counts as one character.)
• To clear all entered text, touch the [Clear All] key. When this key is touched, the entire body of the message is
erased immediately; not just the selected line.
• Each line of the entered text can be selected with the
keys. To edit the selected line, touch the [Edit] key.
The text entry screen will appear with the selected text entered.
Subject
9
Touch the [OK] key.
OK
Send Settings
Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
File Name
Material for planning meeting
Reply-To
AAA AAA
Body Text
Thank you for your continuous support. We have attached sca
Add 'Reply to' to Cc
The [Add 'Reply to' to Cc] checkbox can be selected
to send a Cc copy to the sender.
When storing pre-set text for the subject and file name in the Web pages, up to 80 characters can be entered.
• System Settings (Administrator): The Number of File Name/Subject/Body Keys Displayed Setting
The setting for the number of subject keys and file name keys displayed in one screen can be changed to 6, 12, or 18.
• System Settings (Administrator): Default Sender Set
This is used to store the sender name and e-mail address that is used when a sender is not selected.
5-35
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE
Follow the steps below to send a scanned image to a commercially available USB memory device that has been
connected to the machine. This stores the file in the USB device.
• Use a FAT32 USB memory with a capacity of no more than 32 GB.
• When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot
be changed. To switch to USB memory mode, touch the [Cancel] key in the touch panel and then follow the steps below.
Connect the USB memory to the USB
connector (Type A) on the machine.
1
5-36
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Place the original.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
• When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.
Document glass
Originals
Document feeder tray
Place the original face up.
MX-B402
1
1
Portrait orientation*
Place the original face down with the middle
aligned with the tip of the
mark at the middle of
the scale on the left side of the document glass.
MX-B402SC
1
1
2
Landscape orientation
MX-B402
1
1
1
MX-B402SC
1
* To place a large portrait-oriented original, place it as shown above in "Landscape orientation" and specify the
placement orientation in step 4.
• Originals cannot be scanned in succession from both the automatic document feeder and the document glass and
sent in a single transmission.
5-37
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(2)
Scan
Internet Fax
Original
File Name
Exposure
(1)
Fax
Scan:
Auto
Resolution
200X200dpi
File Format
PDF
Color Mode
Mono2
USB Mem. Scan
PC Scan
Send:
8½x11
Auto
Switch to USB memory mode and
display the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the [USB Mem. Scan] tab
If the [USB Mem. Scan] tab does not appear, touch the
tab to move the screen.
Text
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
PDF
Special Modes
3
• When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination.
• If a destination of another mode has been previously specified, a message will appear when you change to USB
memory mode indicating that the destination setting will be cleared. Touch the [OK] key in the message screen and
go to the next step.
• The current settings for [Original], [Exposure], [Resolution], [File Format], and [Color Mode] are indicated at the right
of each key. To change a setting, touch the appropriate key.
☞ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 5-55), SPECIFYING
THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 5-56), CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE (page 5-64), CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-66), CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT
(page 5-67), CHANGING THE COLOR MODE (page 5-71), SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
(1)
(2)
Check the original scan size and
placement orientation.
OK
USB Mem. Scan/Original
Scan Size
8½x11
100% Send Size
Auto
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet
(3)
To make sure that the original is scanned in the correct
orientation (the orientation in which the top edge of the original
appears at the top of the display), check the size and
orientation of the original placed in step 1.
(1) Check the scan size.
Check if the size of the placed original is displayed. If the
displayed size is different from the size of the placed
original, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND
SEND SIZE (page 5-56)
2-Sided
Tablet
4
(2) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the
key. If
the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the
key.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the screen of step 3.
• The placement orientation of the original is initially set to
left, this step is not necessary.
. If you placed the original with the top edge to the
• The original size set in the system settings appears as the original size.
5-38
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
• If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one
page, go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to the next step.
• If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission
will begin. Go to step 8.
Do not disconnect the USB memory until "Sending data has been completed." appears in the touch panel.
5
• If the color mode is set to [Auto], the color used in the original is automatically detected and scanning takes place in
full color, grayscale, or Mono2.
• If the file type is [Encrypt PDF], a password entry screen will appear when the [START] key is pressed.
Please enter encrypt PDF
password.
Cancel
Entry
Touch the [Entry] key to open the keyboard screen, enter a password (maximum of 32 characters), and touch the
[OK] key. The recipient must use the password entered here to open the encrypted PDF file.
To cancel encrypted PDF, touch the [Cancel] key. The format settings screen will appear to let you change the file
type. Select a new file type and press the [START] key to begin transmission.
6
If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original
and press the [START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original.
(Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
Configure
A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.
Read-End
7
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be changed
when scanning an even-numbered original page.
5-39
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
When "Sending data has been
completed." appears in the touch panel,
disconnect the USB memory.
8
Do not disconnect the USB memory while "Processing data." or "Sending data." appears in the touch panel.
• When transmission to USB memory is completed, "Sending data has been completed." is displayed. After a brief interval
the message is cleared and the base screen of image send mode reappears. (The base screen of image send mode is the
screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.)
• If the USB memory becomes full during scanning...
A message will appear and scanning will stop. The scanned data will not be stored. However, if the file format is set to
JPEG and the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox is selected, files for which scanning is completed will be stored in USB
memory.
• To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
• To cancel scanning to USB memory...
While scanned data is being stored in the USB memory, the message "Sending data." and the [Cancel] key appear in the
touch panel. To cancel the storing operation, touch the [Cancel] key.
• System Settings: USB-Device Check (page 7-30)
This is used to check the connection of a USB device to the machine.
• System Settings (Administrator): Scan Settings
This is used to set the default color mode and file format.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Scan Function
The use of PC scan mode and USB memory mode can be prohibited.
5-40
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
ENTERING A FILE NAME
The file name can be directly entered when performing a scan transmission.
• If the file name is not entered, the settings in the Web page are used.
• For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-76) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
Scan
Internet Fax
Original
File Name
Exposure
Fax
Scan:
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Auto
Resolution
200X200dpi
File Format
PDF
Color Mode
Mono2
Send:
PC Scan
Auto
Text
PDF
Special Modes
Touch the [File Name] key. A text entry screen will appear. Enter the file name and touch the [OK] key.
To check the entered file name, touch the [File Name] key in the base screen once again.
5-41
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE
The basic procedure for sending a fax in Internet fax mode is explained below. This procedure can also be used to
perform direct transmission by Direct SMTP.
When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot be
changed, the destination cannot be changed, and destinations cannot be added. To switch to Internet fax mode, touch the
[Cancel] key in the touch panel and follow the steps below.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
• Image rotation
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"(A5) or B5 size original in landscape orientation will be rotated 90 degrees and transmitted as an
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"(A5) or B5 image in portrait orientation.
Transmission
1
• Originals cannot be scanned in succession from both the automatic document feeder and the document glass and
sent in a single transmission.
System Settings (Administrator): Rotation Sending Setting
This is used to select whether or not a scanned original image is rotated before transmission.
Initially a B5 landscape original is set to be rotated and sent as a B5 portrait image, and an 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5)
landscape original is set to be rotated and sent as an 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5) portrait image.
(4)
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
Address Entry
Global
Address Search
(3)
To
Sort Address
Cc
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
1
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
For the [Address Book] key, see "BASE SCREEN" (page
5-9).
2
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
Freq.
2
Specify the destination.
(2)
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
(2) Touch the key of the desired destination.
QRSTU
VWXYZ
The
icon appears in one-touch keys in which Internet
fax addresses are stored.
etc.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
The destination is specified.
(4) Touch the [Condition Settings] key.
• After a one-touch key is touched, if the screen is changed without touching the [To] key, the destination is
automatically specified.
• In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. You can
also manually enter a destination or look up a destination in a global address book. For more information, see
"ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 5-18).
5-42
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1)
Scan
3
(2)
Internet Fax
Fax
Address Book
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
Send Settings
Resolution
200X100dpi
Address Review
File Format
TIFF-F
File
Special Modes
Scan:
USB Mem. Scan
PC Scan
Auto
Send:
8½x11
Auto
Switch to Internet fax mode and display
the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
Quick File
I-Fax Manual
Reception
The current settings for [Original], [Exposure], [Resolution], and [File Format] are indicated at the right of each key. To
change a setting, touch the appropriate key.
☞ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 5-55), SPECIFYING
THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 5-56), CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE (page 5-64), CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-66), CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT (page
5-67), SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Check the original scan size and
placement orientation.
OK
Internet Fax/Original
Scan Size
8½x11
100% Send Size
In order to set the orientation of the image to be sent, check the
size and orientation of the original that were set in step 1.
Auto
(1) Check the scan size.
Check if the size of the placed original is displayed. If the
displayed size is different from the size of the placed
original, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND
SEND SIZE (page 5-56)
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
4
(2) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the
the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the
key. If
key.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the screen of step 2.
• The placement orientation of the original is initially set to
left, this step is not necessary.
. If you placed the original with the top edge to the
• The original size set in the system settings appears as the original size.
Press the [START] key.
5
6
Scanning begins.
• If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one page,
go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to the next step.
• If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission will take place.
If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original
and press the [START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
5-43
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original.
(Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
Configure
A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.
Read-End
7
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be changed when
scanning an even-numbered original page.
• When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number can
be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report. If the job is a broadcast
transmission, this number will also appear in the key of the job in the job status screen. For this reason, making a note of
the number is useful for checking the result.
• If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop.
• Storing a mail signature
You can have preset text automatically added at the end of e-mail messages as a mail signature. This is convenient when
you wish to have a corporate policy or other preset text appear at the bottom of e-mail messages. To store the text for the
mail signature, click [Application Settings], [Network Scanner Settings] and then [Administration Settings] in the Web page
menu. (Administrator rights are required.) Up to 900 characters can be entered. (The mail signature is not included in the
maximum number of characters that can be entered in the e-mail message.)
Use "Pre-Setting Mail Signature" in the system settings (administrator) to specify whether or not a mail signature is added.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
• System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Send Settings
This is used to select Internet fax transmission settings such as the receive report setting, rotation setting, size restriction
setting, and sender information attachment setting.
• System Settings (Administrator): Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Use this setting to specify whether or not a mail signature is added at the end of e-mail messages. By factory default, a
mail signature is not added.
5-44
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND BODY
TEXT
The subject, file name, and body text can be changed when performing an Internet fax transmission. Preset items can
be selected or text can be directly entered.
• If the subject and file name are not changed, the settings in the Web page are used.
• Selections for the subject, file name, and body text are configured by clicking [Application Settings] and then [Network
Scanner Settings] in the Web page menu.
• For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-76) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
1
Touch the [Send Settings] key in the base screen.
☞ BASE SCREEN (page 5-9)
To change the subject, touch the
[Subject] key.
OK
Send Settings
Subject
2
File Name
Body Text
(1)
Cancel
Subject
Enter the subject.
(2)
(1) Touch a pre-set text key.
OK
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Direct Entry
No.01 Sub: Schedule coordination
No.02 Sub: Monthly Schedule
No.03 Sub: Minutes of planning m
No.04
No.05
No.06
No.07
No.08
No.09
No.10
No.11
No.12
1
5
3
• If you wish to directly enter the text, touch the [Direct Entry] key to open the text entry screen. Enter the text and
touch the [OK] key.
• The text in a pre-set text key can be edited by touching the pre-set text key and then the [Direct Entry] key. The text
entry screen will appear with the selected pre-set text entered. (When a destination is stored using the Web page,
up to 80 characters can be entered. However, only 54 characters can be entered in the touch panel.)
5-45
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
OK
Send Settings
Subject
To change the file name, touch the [File
Name] key.
The file name is entered in the same way as the subject.
Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
File Name
4
Body Text
OK
Send Settings
Subject
File Name
To change the body text, touch the
[Body Text] key.
Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
Material for planning meeting
5
Body Text
Clear All
Body Entry
OK
Thank you for your continuous support. We have attached scanned data,
which you have requested.
Enter the body text and touch the [OK]
key.
• To select a pre-set message previously stored in the Web
page, touch the [Pre-Set Select] key.
• To directly enter the message, touch the [Edit] key.
6
Pre-Set Select
Edit
• 1800 characters can be entered. (A line break counts as one character.)
• To clear all entered text, touch the [Clear All] key. When this key is touched, the entire body of the message is
erased immediately; not just the selected line.
• Each line of the entered text can be selected with the
keys. To edit the selected line, touch the [Edit] key.
The text entry screen will appear with the selected text entered.
5-46
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
OK
Send Settings
Subject
Touch the [OK] key.
Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
File Name
Material for planning meeting
Body Text
Thank you for your continuous support. We have attached sca
7
When storing pre-set text for the subject and file name in the Web pages, up to 80 characters can be entered.
System Settings (Administrator): The Number of File Name/Subject/Body Keys Displayed Setting
The setting for the number of subject keys and file name keys displayed in one screen can be changed to 6, 12, or 18.
5-47
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission)
The same scanned image can be sent to multiple scan modes, Internet fax mode, and fax mode destinations in a single
operation. Up to 500 destinations can be selected in one broadcast operation.
Transmission
Originals
If you frequently use broadcasting to send images to the same group of destinations, it is convenient to store those
destinations in a group key.
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 5-56)
5-48
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(3)
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Address Review
Specify the destination.
(2)
To
Cc
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
1
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
For the [Address Book] key, see "BASE SCREEN" (page
5-9).
2
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
Freq.
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Sort Address
(3) Touch the [To] key.
The destination is specified.
2
(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) until all
destinations are selected.
• To add Cc or Bcc recipients, select a recipient and touch the [Cc] key or the [Bcc] key.
• If "Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), touch the
[Next Address] key before specifying the next destination.
• One-touch keys that cannot be used for broadcast transmission are grayed out to prevent selection.
• If a Scan to FTP (Hyperlink) address is specified in a broadcast transmission, hyperlink e-mail transmission will not
take place.
• If you frequently use broadcasting to send images to the same group of destinations, it is convenient to store those
destinations in a group key.
5
10
15
Condition
Settings
Touch the [Address Review] key.
Cc
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
Address Entry
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Global
Address Search
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
Address Review
3
To
2
Freq.
Sort Address
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
4
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
Check the destinations and then touch
the [OK] key.
OK
Address Review
001 AAA AAA
002 BBB BBB
003 KKK KKK
004 LLL LLL
005 MMM MMM
006 NNN NNN
007 OOO OOO
008 PPP PPP
009 QQQ QQQ
010 RRR RRR
011 SSS SSS
012 TTT TTT
To
1
1
2
Cc
If the transmission includes Cc or Bcc destinations, touch the [Cc] tab or the [Bcc] tab to check those destinations.
To cancel a specified destination...
Touch the one-touch key of the destination that you wish to cancel. A message will appear to confirm the deletion.
Touch the [Yes] key.
☞ CHECKING AND DELETING THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-20)
5-49
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Press the [START] key.
5
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning of one page finishes, replace it with the next page and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
If Internet fax or fax destinations are included in the broadcast transmission, scanning will take place in [Mono2].
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
5-50
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
BROADCAST TRANSMISSIONS THAT INCLUDE
INTERNET FAX DESTINATIONS
When a broadcast transmission includes both scan mode and Internet Fax mode destinations, the Internet Fax mode
settings (original orientation and other various settings) are given priority. When performing this type of broadcast
transmission, note the information below.
The orientation of Internet fax mode is given priority. When "Rotation Sending Setting"
is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the image is rotated 90 degrees. For
this reason, in some cases the image may not be displayed in the correct orientation.
Original placement orientation
Send size
When the file format is set to [TIFF-S] in Internet fax mode, transmission is only
possible in 8-1/2" x 11" (A4 in landscape orientation) size.
Exposure
The Internet fax settings are given priority.
When the file format is set to [TIFF-S] in Internet fax mode and a high resolution
setting is selected in scan mode, the resolution will be changed to [200X200dpi].
Resolution
The compression mode will be changed to the compression mode set in
"Compression Mode at Broadcasting" in the system settings (administrator).
File compression mode
Color scanning
Scanning will take place in Mono2 regardless of the color mode setting.
If a broadcast transmission is performed that includes destinations for which an
attachment size limit has been set using "Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments
(E-mail)" or "Maximum Size of Data Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network Folder)" in
the system settings (administrator), the limit will also apply to destinations for which a
limit is not set. (The limitation setting of Scan to E-mail or Internet fax is given priority.)
Scan file size
Resending to unsuccessful broadcast transmission destinations
The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the
addresses failed, resend the image to those addresses.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
JOB STATUS
1
(1)
Print Job
Address
2
Scan to
Set Time
(1)
Status
Broadcast0001
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting
AAA AAA
10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting
BBB BBB
10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
CCC CCC
10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting
DDD DDD
10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting
Display the jobs completed screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to
display.
Internet Fax
Fax Job
Pages
(2)
Job Queue
1
Complete
(2) Touch the [Complete] key.
1
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
If the broadcast transmission included destinations of different modes, the same broadcast transmission key will
appear in each of those modes.
5-51
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1)
(2)
Print Job
Scan to
Address
3
Internet Fax
Fax Job
Start Time
Pages
Status
Broadcast0001
10:00 04/01 010/003 NG000000
Broadcast0002
10:05 04/01 001/001 Send OK
Broadcast0003
10:22 04/01 004/004 Send OK
DDD DDD
10:30 04/01 010/010 Send OK
Job Queue
1
Complete
1
Display details on the broadcast
transmission.
(1) Touch the key of the completed broadcast
transmission.
(2) Touch the [Detail] key.
Detail
Call
"Broadcastxxxx" will appear as the address of the broadcast job key. The job control number that appeared in the
touch panel when scanning ended appears in "xxxx".
Resend the image to the unsuccessful
destinations.
OK
Detail
Broadcast0001
002
Address
Start Time
Status
EEE EEE
10:01 04/01
NG000000
Retry
1
(1) Touch the [Failed] tab.
1
010
FFF FFF
File
4
10:10 04/01
(2) Touch the [Retry] key.
NG000000
Failed
(1)
All Destinations
(2)
• The steps to follow after the [Retry] key is touched differ depending on whether or not the document filing function is
used.
Not using document filing
You will return to the base screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Place the original and perform the
steps of the broadcast transmission.
Using document filing
You will return to the document filing resend screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Perform the
document filing resend procedure. (There is no need to rescan the original.)
• If the [All Destinations] tab is touched in (1), all destinations will be displayed. The [Retry] key that appears in the
screen can be touched to resend to all the destinations.
5-52
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A
COMPUTER (PC-I-Fax)
A file on a computer can be sent via the machine as an Internet fax (PC-I-Fax function). Internet faxes are sent using the
PC-I-Fax function in the same way as documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver for your
computer and then select the Print command in the software application. Image data for transmission will be created and
sent as an Internet fax.
PC-I-Fax
transmission
For the procedures for using this function, see the PC-Fax driver Help.
• To send an Internet fax using the PC-I-Fax function, the PC-Fax driver must be installed and then updated using the
CD-ROM that accompanies the Internet fax expansion kit. For more information, see the Start Guide.
• This function can only be used on a Windows computer.
• This function can only be used for transmission. Internet faxes received on the machine cannot be received to a computer
that is connected to the machine.
5-53
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
IMAGE SETTINGS
Settings for scanning the original are selected in the base screen of each mode. The current state of each setting
appears to the right of the key used to select the setting.
Scan
(1)
Internet Fax
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
[Original] key
Touch this key to set the scan size, send size, and
orientation of the original, and select 2-sided scanning
settings.
☞ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF
AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 5-55),
SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND
SEND SIZE (page 5-56)
(2)
Fax
Address Book
Scan:
Auto
USB Mem. Scan
Auto
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
Auto
(1)
(2)
Text
(3)
PDF
(4)
(5)
(4)
[File Format] key
Touch this key to change the format (file type) of the
scanned image file.
☞ CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT (page 5-67)
(5)
[Color Mode] key
Touch this key to select the color mode for scanning.
This key does not appear in Internet fax mode.
☞ CHANGING THE COLOR MODE (page 5-71)
[Exposure] key
Touch this key to select the exposure for scanning.
☞ CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE (page 5-64)
(3)
[Resolution] key
Touch this key to select the resolution for scanning.
☞ CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-66)
5-54
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN
ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original)
The automatic document feeder can be used to automatically scan both sides of an original.
Scan transmission
2-sided original
Front and reverse sides are scanned
Select the mode and display the image settings screen.
1
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-54)
(3)
OK
Scan/Original
Scan Size
8½x11
Specify the binding style of the 2-sided
original (book or tablet) and the
orientation in which the original is placed.
100% Send Size
(1) Touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the
[2-Sided Tablet] key.
Auto
A book and a tablet are bound as shown below.
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Tablet
2-Sided
Booklet
2
(1)
Book
A J
E
C L
G
(2)
Tablet
A B
E F
K L
(2) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation] key.
If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be
transmitted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
To cancel 2-sided scanning, touch the highlighted key so that it is no longer highlighted.
2-sided scanning automatically turns off after the transmission operation is completed.
5-55
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE
When the original is placed, the original size and the send size set in the system settings appear in the base screen as
the original size and send size.
Scan
Internet Fax
Address Book
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
Fax
USB Mem. Scan
Scan:
8½x11
PC Scan
Send:
Auto
Text
Auto
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
PDF
In the above screen, the scan size (the original size) is 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) and the send size is auto. For example, if the
scan size is 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) and the send size is 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5), the image will be reduced before transmission.
"Scan Size"
Transmission
"Send Size" is set
to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
(B5)
The image is reduced
to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5)
before transmission
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
If the size of the placed original is different from the displayed original size, specify the original size.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by paper size) (page 5-57)
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values) (page 5-59)
• System Settings (Administrator): Default Original Size Settings
Set this if you frequently use a particular original size. The set size will appear in the [Original] key.
When this setting is configured, changing the original size can be omitted.
• System settings (Administrator): Setting of Default Original Exit Place (MX-B402SC Only)
When the automatic document feeder is used, the original's default output destination can be set to the upper exit or the
heavy exit. (Except when "Size Input" or "Card Size" is selected for the original size.)
5-56
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Specifying the original scan size (by paper size)
If the size of the placed original is different from the displayed original size or you wish to change the original size, you
must touch the [Original] key and directly specify the original size.
Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and follow the steps below.
Select the mode and display the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
1
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
The original size set in the system settings appears to the right of the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-54)
OK
Scan/Original
Scan Size
8½x11
2
Touch the [Scan Size] key.
100% Send Size
Auto
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
5-57
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Specify the scan size.
MX-B402:
(1)
(2)
OK
Scan/Original
5½x8½
8½x11
8½x13
(1) Touch the appropriate original size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
AB
8½x14
Inch
8½x13
Long Size
Size Input
Specify the scan size.
MX-B402SC:
(1)
(3)
OK
Scan/Original
Original Exit
Place
3
Upper Exit
Heavy Exit
(1) Touch the original output destination.
(2) Touch the appropriate original size key.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Original Size
5½x8½
8½x14
8½x11
8½x13
AB
Check Size
8½x13
Long Size
Size Input
Card Size
Inch
(2)
• If you are sending a long original, touch the [Long Size] key. Use the automatic document feeder to scan a long
original. The maximum width that can be scanned is 19-5/8" (500 mm) (the maximum height is 8-1/2" (216 mm)).
• To specify an AB size for the scan size, touch the [AB Inch] key to highlight the [AB] side and then specify the scan size.
MX-B402-SC Only
• In the situations below, the original exit place is fixed to the heavy exit.
- When "Card Size" is selected
- When the original guide is set to 2 7/8" (74 mm) or lower (Except when "Check Size" is selected)
- When the automatic document feeder is scanning an original with an X (horizontal) value of 4 1/8" (105 mm) or
less
• When "Card Size" is selected, you cannot copy if the original guide is set to 2 7/8" (74 mm) or higher.
OK
Scan/Original
Scan Size
5½x8½
Touch the [OK] key.
100% Send Size
Auto
4
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed. In addition, when only scan
destinations are selected for scan transmission or metadata transmission, scanning will take place in Mono2.
5-58
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values)
When scanning a non-standard size original such as a card, follow these steps to specify the original size.
Select the mode and display the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
1
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
The original size set in the system settings appears to the right of the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-54)
OK
Scan/Original
Scan Size
8½x11
Touch the [Scan Size] key.
100% Send Size
Auto
2
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
Touch the [Size Input] key.
MX-B402:
OK
Scan/Original
5½x8½
8½x11
8½x13
AB
8½x14
8½x13
Inch
Long Size
Size Input
3
MX-B402SC:
OK
Scan/Original
Original Exit
Place
Upper Exit
Heavy Exit
Original Size
5½x8½
8½x13
8½x14
8½x11
8½x13
8½x14
AB
Check Size
8½x13
Long Size
Size Input
Card Size
Inch
If the [Card Size] key is touched, "X86 Y54" is set in [Size Input].
5-59
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1), (2)
(3)
OK
Scan/Original
Cancel
Size Input
X
11
(1 14)
inch
Y
8½
(1 8 1/2)
inch
OK
Enter the scan size (original size).
(1) Enter the X (horizontal) dimension of the
original.
With the [X] key highlighted, enter the X (horizontal)
dimension of the original with the
keys. When the
document glass is used, enter a number from 1" to
11-5/8" (25 mm to 297 mm).
MX-B402:
When the automatic document feeder is used, enter a
number from 3-1/2" to 14" (89 mm to 356 mm).
When a number which is from 5-3/8" (139 mm) and less is
entered in 2-Sided scanning setting, an original cannot be
scanned.
If the horizontal dimension of the original is less than
3-1/2" (89 mm), use the document glass.
MX-B402SC:
When the automatic document feeder is used, enter a
number from 3-1/4" to 14" (85 mm to 356 mm).
When a number which is from 3-1/8" (84 mm) and less is
entered in 2-Sided scanning setting, an original cannot be
scanned.
If the horizontal dimension of the original is less than
3-1/4" (85 mm), use the document glass.
(2) Enter the Y (vertical) dimension of the
original.
4
Touch the [Y] key and enter the Y (vertical) dimension of
the original with the
keys. When the document
glass is used, enter a number from 1" to 8-1/2" (25 mm to
216 mm).
MX-B402:
When the automatic document feeder is used, enter a
number from 4" to 8-1/2" (100 mm to 216 mm).
If the vertical dimension of the original is less than 4" (100
mm), use the document glass.
MX-B402SC:
When the automatic document feeder is used, enter a
number from 2" to 8-1/2" (51 mm to 216 mm).
If the vertical dimension of the original is less than 2" (51
mm), use the document glass.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Touch the [OK] key next to the [Cancel] key to complete
the setting and return to the screen of step 3.
MX-B402:
• When a number from 11-3/4" to 14" (298 mm to 356 mm) to the X (horizontal) dimension and a number from 1" to
3-7/8" (25 mm to 99 mm) to the Y (vertical) dimension are entered at the same time, an original cannot be scanned.
MX-B402SC:
• When a number from 11-3/4" to 14" (298 mm to 356 mm) to the X (horizontal) dimension and a number from 1" to
1-7/8" (25 mm to 50 mm) to the Y (vertical) dimension are entered at the same time, an original cannot be scanned.
• When the X (horizontal) value is set to 4 1/8" (105 mm) or lower and the Y (vertical) value is set to 2 7/8" (74 mm) or
lower, "Card Size" is automatically selected and the original exit place is fixed to the heavy exit.
5-60
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
OK
Scan/Original
Touch the [OK] key.
The specified size appears in the [Scan Size] key.
Scan Size
X11 Y8½
Send Size
Auto
5
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
• When the scan size is specified by numerical values, the send size cannot be specified.
• When the automatic document feeder is used, an original longer than 11-5/8" (297 mm) can be scanned (maximum width
19-5/8" (500 mm)). In this case, touch the [Long Size] key in the screen of step 3.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by paper size) (page 5-57)
5-61
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Specifying the send size of the image
Specify the send size as a paper size. If a send size bigger than the scan size is selected, the image will be enlarged. If
a send size smaller than the scan size is selected, the image will be reduced.
• The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by
numerical values.
• The send size cannot be specified when [TIFF-S] is selected for the format in Internet fax mode. (The send size is fixed at
8-1/2" x 11" (A4 in landscape orientation).)
Select the mode and display the image settings screen.
1
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-54)
OK
Scan/Original
Scan Size
8½x11
Touch the [Send Size] key.
100% Send Size
Auto
2
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
(1)
(2)
OK
Scan/Original
Specify the send size.
(1) Touch the desired send size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Auto
Manual
5½x8½
3
8½x13
8½x11
8½x14
8½x13
11x17
AB
Inch
• Depending on the paper size specified for the "Scan Size", it may not be possible to select some sizes for the "Send
Size". Size keys that cannot be specified for the "Send Size" are grayed out to prevent selection.
• To specify an AB size for the send size, touch the [AB
send size.
5-62
Inch] key to highlight the [AB] side and then specify the
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(2)
OK
Scan/Original
Scan Size
8½x11
Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.
(1) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation]
key.
129% Send Size
11x17
If this setting is not correct when sending an image with a
changed ratio, a suitable image may not be transmitted.
4
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
2-Sided
Tablet
(1)
The ratio used for reduction or enlargement of the original will appear between the "Scan Size" and the "Send Size".
5-63
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE
TYPE
The exposure and original image type can be set appropriately for the original to enable optimum scanning.
Refer to the following tables to select appropriate settings.
How to select the exposure
Exposure
Auto
When to select
This setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original.
Manual
1-2
Select this setting when the original consists of dark text.
3
Select this setting for a normal original (neither dark nor light).
4-5
Select this setting when the original consists of faint text.
How to select the original image type (Scan mode, USB memory mode and Data entry mode)
Setting
Auto
Description
The original image type is automatically selected to match the original.
Manual
Text/Prtd. Photo
This mode provides the best balance for scanning an original which contains both text and
printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.
Text/Photo
This mode provides the best balance for scanning an original which contains both text and
photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on.
Text
Use this mode for regular text documents.
Photo
Use this mode to scan photos.
Printed Photo
This mode is best for scanning printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or
catalogue.
Map
This mode is best for scanning the color shading and fine details found on most maps.
Select the mode and display the exposure settings screen.
1
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Exposure] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-54)
Read the displayed message and touch
the [OK] key.
When Fax/I-Fax address is included,
exposure setting shared is selected,
and Original Image Type is disabled.
2
This message does not appear in USB memory mode or
Internet fax mode. Go to the next step.
OK
If a broadcast transmission is performed that includes both scan mode destinations and Internet fax destinations, the
exposure settings for Internet fax mode will have priority.
5-64
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Scan mode, USB memory mode, Data entry mode
(2)
(1)
(3)
Select the exposure and original image
type.
(1) Select the original image type.
Touch the original image type key that matches the
original image type.
OK
Scan/Exposure
Auto
(2) Adjust the exposure with the
1
3
keys.
Original Image Type
Manual
5
Text
Text/
Prtd.Photo
Text/Photo
Printed
Photo
Photo
Map
The exposure darkens when the
key is touched,
and lightens when the
key is touched.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Moiré Reduction
3
Internet fax mode
(1) Touch the [Manual] key.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2) Adjust the exposure with the
The exposure darkens when the
key is touched,
and lightens when the
key is touched.
OK
Internet Fax/Exposure
keys.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Auto
Manual
1
3
5
• In Internet fax mode, the original image type and moiré reduction cannot be selected.
• To reduce the occurrence of line patterns (moiré effect) when scanning printed matter, touch the [Moiré Reduction]
checkbox so that a checkmark
appears.
When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the exposure setting can be changed each time you change
pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun.
(However, when "Job Build" is used in the special modes, the exposure can be changed each time a new set of originals is
inserted.)
System Settings (Administrator): Default Exposure Settings
This is used to change the default exposure setting.
5-65
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHANGING THE RESOLUTION
The resolution setting can be selected.
Select the mode and display the image settings screen.
1
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Resolution] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-54)
Select the resolution.
Scan mode, USB memory mode, Data entry mode
(1)
(2)
(1) Touch the key of the desired resolution.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
OK
Scan/Resolution
100X100dpi
200X200dpi
300X300dpi
400X400dpi
600X600dpi
2
Internet fax mode
(1)
(2)
OK
Internet Fax/Resolution
200X100dpi
200X200dpi
200X400dpi
Half Tone
400X400dpi
600X600dpi
In Internet fax mode, the [Half Tone] key can be touched to select halftone (except when [200X100dpi] is selected).
When the original has many gradations of light and dark such as a photo or color illustration, halftone provides a more
attractive image than regular transmission.
5-66
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
How to select the resolution
For normal text originals, 200X200dpi (200X100dpi in Internet fax mode) produces an image that is sufficiently legible.
For photos and illustrations, a high resolution setting (600X600dpi, etc.) will produce a sharp image. However, a high
resolution setting will result in a large file, and if the file is too large, transmission may not be possible. In this event,
reduce the number of pages scanned or take other measures to decrease the file size.
☞ CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT (page 5-67)
Specifying the send size of the image (page 5-62)
• When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the resolution setting can be changed each time you
change pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the resolution setting cannot be changed once scanning has
begun. (However, when "Job Build" is used in the special modes, the resolution can be changed each time a new set of
originals is inserted.)
• When [TIFF-S] is selected for the format in Internet fax mode, only [200X100dpi] or [200X200dpi] can be selected.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Resolution Setting
This is used to change the default resolution setting.
CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT
Changing the format
(Scan mode, USB memory mode and Data entry mode)
The file format (file type and compression mode/compression ratio) for sending a scanned image can be changed at the
time of transmission. In addition, if the scanned originals are divided into separate files, the number of pages per file can
be changed.
The file format for sending a scanned image is specified when the destination is stored in a one-touch key; however, you can
change the format at the time of transmission.
Select the mode and display the image settings screen.
1
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [File Format] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-54)
Read the displayed message and touch
the [OK] key.
Select a file format to apply it to
all scan destinations.
The message does not appear in USB memory mode. Go to
the next step.
2
OK
5-67
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Set the format.
● Scanning in Mono2
(1)
(1) Select the file type.
(2)
OK
Scan/File Format
File Type
(2) Select the compression mode.
Compression Mode
PDF
TIFF
None
Encrypt PDF
XPS
MH (G3)
B/W
MMR (G4)
Programmed
Specified Pages per File
Color/Gray
(1-99)
● Scanning in color/grayscale
3
(2)
(3)
(1) Touch the indicated key to select
[Color/Gray] mode.
(1)
OK
Scan/File Format
File Type
PDF
TIFF
Low
Encrypt PDF
XPS
Medium
(2) Select the file type.
B/W
Programmed
When [Color/Gray] is highlighted, [Color/Gray] mode is
selected.
Compression Ratio
JPEG
Specified Pages per File
High
(3) Select the compression ratio.
Color/Gray
High compression results in a smaller file size, however,
the image quality is slightly degraded.
(1-99)
• The [Programmed] key does not appear in USB memory mode.
• When this screen is displayed, the setting screen of [B/W] mode initially appears.
• The format setting of [B/W] mode is the file format when the color mode is set to [Mono2].
• The format setting of [Color/Gray] mode is the file format when the color mode is set to [Auto], [Full Color], or
[Grayscale].
• The file type of [B/W] mode and the file type of [Color/Gray] mode are linked. The file type cannot be set separately
for each. (When [JPEG] is selected for [Color/Gray] mode, [TIFF] is automatically selected for [B/W] mode.)
5-68
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(3)
OK
Scan/File Format
File Type
To change the number of pages per file,
enter the number of pages and exit the
format settings.
Compression Ratio
PDF
TIFF
Low
Encrypt PDF
XPS
Medium
Programmed
JPEG
High
B/W
Specified Pages per File
1
4
(1-99)
Color/Gray
(1) Touch the [Specified Pages per File]
checkbox so that a checkmark
appears.
(2) Set the number of pages per file with the
keys.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
(1)
(2)
• When a checkmark does not appear in the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox
scanned pages.
, one file is created for all
• When [Specified Pages per File] is selected, consecutive numbers are added to the created file names.
• When [JPEG] is selected for the file type, one file is created for each page (a file cannot be created for multiple
pages). For this reason, the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox does not appear.
When [Encrypt PDF] is selected, a password entry screen will appear when the [START] key is pressed to begin scanning
and transmission.
Touch the [Entry] key in the displayed screen to open the keyboard screen. Enter a password (maximum of 32 characters)
and touch the [OK] key. Scanning and transmission will begin.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial File Format Setting
This sets the default file format setting for scanner transmission.
5-69
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Changing the format (Internet fax mode)
The file format for sending an Internet fax is normally set to [TIFF-F]. If the destination Internet fax machine does not
support full mode (it only supports simple mode), follow the steps below to select [TIFF-S].
Switch to Internet fax mode and display the file format settings screen.
1
(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.
(2) Touch the [File Format] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-54)
(1)
(2)
OK
Internet Fax/File Format
Select the file format.
(1) Touch the key of the desired format.
If you selected [TIFF-F], select the compression mode.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
2
File Type
TIFF-S
Compression Mode
TIFF-F
MH (G3)
MMR (G4)
When [TIFF-S] is selected, the transmission settings are restricted as follows:
• Resolution:
The selections are [200X100dpi] and [200X200dpi]. If [TIFF-S] is selected after [200X400dpi],
[400X400dpi] or [600X600dpi] is selected, the resolution automatically changes to [200X200dpi].
• Send size:
It is always 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) in landscape orientation. If [TIFF-S] is selected after the send size is
changed, the send size is automatically changed to 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) in landscape orientation. If a size
larger than 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) is scanned, the size will automatically be reduced to 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) in
landscape orientation. When this format is included in a broadcast transmission, the image will be
transmitted to all destinations at 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) in landscape orientation.
• Special modes: When a ratio setting is selected and the original size is entered, Card Shot cannot be used.
System Settings (Administrator): Compression Setting
This is used to set the default compression mode for Internet fax transmission.
5-70
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHANGING THE COLOR MODE
This procedure is used to change the color mode used to scan the original when the [START] key is pressed.
This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.
Mode
Auto
Scanning method
Grayscale
The machine detects whether the original is color or black and white and automatically selects full
color or black and white (Mono2 or Grayscale) scanning.
Mono2
Full Color
The original is scanned in full color. This mode is best for full color originals such as catalogues.
Grayscale
The colors in the original are scanned in black and white as shades of gray (grayscale).
Mono2
Colors in the original are scanned as black or white. This mode is best for text-only originals.
Select the mode and display the color mode settings screen.
1
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Color Mode] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-54)
Read the displayed message and touch
the [OK] key.
Image will be sent in [Mono2]
if Fax or I-Fax destination is included.
A message does not appear in USB memory mode. Go to the
next step.
2
OK
When a broadcast transmission is performed using mixed send modes, the image is sent in Mono2.
OK
Scan/Color Mode
3
Auto
Grayscale
Full Color
Mono2
Select the color mode.
(1) Touch the key of the desired color mode.
If [Auto] is selected, select whether or not the original will
be scanned in grayscale or mono2 when it is detected that
the original is a black & white original. Note that if the file
format is set to JPEG, scanning will take place in
grayscale.
Grayscale
Mono2
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
(1)
(2)
• System Settings (Administrator): Default Color Mode Settings
The default color mode can be changed.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Mode
This prohibits selection of the black and white original scanning setting when [Auto] is selected for the color mode.
5-71
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE
TRANSMITTED (Preview)
MX-B402SC
If you touch the [Preview] key before scanning the original, you can check the scanned image in the touch panel before
sending the image.
* The factory default setting is disabled.
Depending on the size of the transmission data, part of the preview image may not appear in the preview screen in the touch
panel.
1
Place the original.
Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass as appropriate for the functions stored in the program.
Scan
2
Internet Fax
Address Book
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
Fax
Scan:
Auto
USB Mem. Scan
Auto
8½x11
Send:
Touch the [Preview] key to highlight it.
PC Scan
Auto
Text
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
PDF
File
Color Mode
Auto/Grayscale
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
Preview
Select transmission settings and touch the the [START] key.
3
"Originals are being read" appears while the originals are being scanned, and when scanning is finished, the preview screen
appears on the touch panel. Transmission will not take place until you touch the [Start Sending] key in the preview screen.
Check the preview image and then touch
the [Start Sending] key.
Preview
Colour
Function Rev.
4
Transmission begins.
For information on the preview screen, see "PREVIEW CHECK
SCREEN" (page 5-73).
Display Rotation
0001
/0010
Start
Sending
System settings (administrator): Default Preview
You can specify whether or not the [Preview] key function will be enabled in the base screens of the image send modes and
in the address book.
5-72
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
PREVIEW CHECK SCREEN
This section explains the preview check screen.
Preview
B/W
Sender Info
Function Rev.
(1)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Display Rotation
(6)
0001
Start
Sending
/0010
(7)
(2)
(1)
(3)
Preview image
(2)
(4)
Change page keys
[Sender Info] key
When Internet fax mode is selected, touch to display the
sender information for I-fax own address send.
This key can only be touched when the entire preview
image is displayed in the preview screen.
A preview of the scanned original appears.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and slide
it to scroll. (You can also touch the
keys to scroll.)
[Function Rev.] key
Touch to check special mode settings or scan settings for
two-sided originals.
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
•
keys: Go to the first or the last page.
•
keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
(5)
• Page number display:
This shows the total number of pages
and the current page number. You can
touch the current page number key and
enter a number with the numeric keys
to go to that page number.
Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order "Full Page", "Twice",
"4 Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in
the file, not just the displayed page.
(6)
"Display Rotation" key
This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.
(7)
[Start Sending] key
Touch to begin transmission.
• A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.
• The preview image reflects certain scanning and special mode settings.
Settings reflected in the preview image are as follows:
Scanning settings: Original, Color Mode
Special modes: Erase, Suppress Background, Card Shot, Drop Out Color, Blank Page Skip
5-73
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SPECIAL MODES
This section explains special modes that can be used in scan send mode.
SPECIAL MODES
When the [Special Modes] key is touched in the base screen, the special modes menu screen appears. When the [OK]
key is touched in the special modes screen, the selected settings are entered and the base screen reappears.
☞ Internet fax mode (page 5-75)
Scan mode, USB memory mode, Data entry mode
MX-B402:
MX-B402SC:
OK
Scan/Special Modes
(1)
(2)
Program
(4)
Card Shot
(7)
(5)
(10)
(1)
Job
Build
(8)
File
(1)
(3)
Erase
(9)
Quick File
(4)
Slow Scan
Mode
(10)
Suppress
Background
[Program] key*1, 2
(8)
☞ STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs) (page
[Erase] key
(9)
☞ ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
[Timer] key*1
(8)
File
(12)
Slow Scan
Mode
Drop Out
Color
Quick File
(13) Blank Page
Skip
[Quick File] key*1
[Business Card Scan] key*3
☞ SCANNING BUSINESS CARDS (Business Card
(Suppress Background) (page 5-97)
[Card Shot] key
(11) [Original Count] key
☞ SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO A
☞ CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION
(Original Count) (page 5-90)
[Job Build] key
☞ SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE (Job
(12) [Drop Out Color] key
☞ SCAN THE ORIGINAL DELETING THE COLORED
PORTIONS (Drop Out Color) (page 5-95)
[Slow Scan Mode] key
☞ SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode)
(13) [Blank Page Skip] key
☞ ELIMINATING BLANK PAGES FROM A
(page 5-88)
(7)
(7)
(6)
☞ WHITENING FAINT COLORS IN THE IMAGE
Build) (page 5-86)
(6)
Suppress
Background
Job
Build
(10) [Suppress Background] key
☞ SENDING AN IMAGE AT A SPECIFIED TIME
SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot) (page 5-83)
(5)
Original
Count
(5)
Timer
Scan) (page 5-94)
(Timer Transmission) (page 5-81)
(4)
(3)
Erase
Touch this key to use the Quick File function of document
filing mode.
IMAGE (Erase) (page 5-78)
(3)
Card Shot
(11)
Business
Card Scan
5-76)
(2)
(2)
Program
Timer
(6)
OK
Scan/Special Modes
TRANSMISSION (Blank Page Skip) (page 5-92)
[File] key*1
Touch this key to use the File function of document filing
mode.
*1 Does not appear in USB memory mode.
*2 Does not appear in data entry mode.
*3 B402 Only
The optional business card feeder must be attached and "Business Card Scan Option" must be enabled in the
system settings (administrator).
5-74
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Internet fax mode
The keys explained below can only be used in Internet fax mode. The other keys are the same as those explained in
"Scan mode, USB memory mode, Data entry mode" (page 5-74).
MX-B402:
MX-B402SC:
OK
Internet Fax/Special Modes
Program
Erase
File
Program
Timer
Job
Build
Card Shot
Slow Scan
Mode
Card Shot
Business
Card Scan
Quick File
Original
Count
(1) Transaction
Erase
Job
Build
File
Timer
Slow Scan
Mode
Quick File
(1) Transaction
Report
(1)
OK
Internet Fax/Special Modes
Report
[Transaction Report] key
☞ CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction Report)
(page 5-99)
Special modes can generally be combined with other special modes, however, there are some combinations that are not
possible. If a prohibited combination is selected, a message will appear in the touch panel.
[OK] key and [Cancel] key
In some cases two [OK] keys and one [Cancel] key will appear in the special mode screens. The keys are used as
follows:
Scan/Special Modes
Cancel
Erase
OK
(A)
OK
(B)
(C)
Edge
Erase
Edge
1/2
(0 1)
inch
Side Erase
(A) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the base screen.
(B) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the special mode menu screen. Touch this key when you wish
to continue selecting other special mode settings.
(C) During selection of special mode settings, this key returns you to the special mode menu screen without saving the
settings. When settings have been completed, this cancels the settings and returns you to the special mode menu
screen.
5-75
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs)
A destination, original settings, and functions can be stored in a program. When you wish to use those settings to send
an image, they can be retrieved with ease.
For example, suppose 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size documents are scanned into a file and sent to each branch office once a month.
(1) The same documents are sent to each branch office
(2) Smudges on the edges of the documents are erased before transmission
When a job program is not stored
When a job program is stored
Enter the address of each branch office.
Touch a stored program key.
Select Erase settings.
Press the [START] key.
The originals are scanned and transmitted.
Press the [START] key.
The originals are scanned and transmitted.
Considerable time is required to send the documents each
month because the above settings must be selected.
In addition, mistakes may occasionally be made when
selecting the settings, so incorrect transmissions may occur.
When a program is used, settings are selected with ease by
simply pressing the stored key.
In addition, transmission takes place based on the stored
settings so there are no chances for mistakes.
• Programs are stored, edited, and deleted using "Address Control" in the system settings. See "Program" (page
7-23) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
• Programs can also be stored in the Web pages. Click [Job Programs] and then [Image Send] in the Web page menu.
• The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can
be used repeatedly for transmission.
• The following settings can be stored in programs.
• Image send mode: Scan, Internet fax
• Destinations
• Image settings: Original scan size, original orientation, duplex scanning, exposure, resolution
• Special modes: Erase, Suppress Background, Job Build, Slow Scan Mode, Business Card Scan
• Up to 48 programs can be stored.
• Up to 500 destinations can be stored in one program.
• This function cannot be used in USB memory mode or data entry mode.
Place the original.
1
Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass as appropriate for the functions stored in the program.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 5-56)
5-76
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Select the special modes.
2
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Program] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
(1)
Retrieve the stored program.
(2)
(1) Touch the desired program key.
OK
Program
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
3
Program 1
Program 2
Program 3
Program 4
Program 5
Program 6
Program 7
Program 8
Program 9
Program 10
Program 11
Program 12
1
2
Select additional settings.
Program:Program 1
xxx@xx.xxx.com
Scan
Internet Fax
Original
Exposure
4
Fax
Scan:
Auto
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
When a program is used, the following settings can be
additionally specified:
• Image Settings: Original scan size*, send size, file format,
color mode
• Send settings
• Special modes: Timer Transmission, Card Shot, File, Quick
File, Transaction Report
* When stored in the program, this cannot be additionally
specified.
PC Scan
Auto
Text
PDF
• The screen that appears will vary depending on the destination stored in the program.
• The mode cannot be changed here.
• Functions stored in the program cannot be canceled here.
Press the [START] key.
5
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
5-77
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGE (Erase)
The erase function is used to erase shadows on images produced when scanning thick originals or books. (This function
does not detect shadows and will eliminate everything appearing in the erase area - including shadows, text and images.)
Scanning a thick book
Not using the erase
function
Shadows appear here
Shadows appear in the
image.
Using the erase
function
No shadows appear.
Erase modes
Edge Erase
Side Erase
• Shadows at the edges of the original can also be erased when the automatic document feeder is used.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
Place the original.
1
2
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 5-56)
Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.
5-78
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
3
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Erase] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
5-79
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1)
(2)
Select the erase settings.
(3)
(1) Touch the desired erase mode.
OK
Scan/Special Modes
Cancel
Erase
Select one of the 2 erase modes.
Touch the [Side Erase] key to open the following screen.
OK
Erase
Edge
Erase
Edge
1/2
Side Erase
(0 1)
inch
OK
Cancel
Erase position
for Original Side 2
Up
Side Erase
Left
Right
Same Side as
Side 1
Different Side
from Side 1
Down
4
Touch the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase
and make sure that a checkmark (
) appears.
When performing two-sided scanning, set the erase edge
on the reverse side.
• If you touch the [Same Side as Side 1] key, the edge in
the same position as on the front side will be erased.
• If you touch the [Different Side from Side 1], the edge in
the position opposite to the erased edge on the front
side will be erased.
When you have completed the settings, touch the [OK] key.
(2) Set the erasure width with the
keys.
0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm) can be entered.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Press the [START] key.
5
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning of one page finishes, replace it with the next page and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then press the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
When the erase function is used, erase takes place at the edges of the original image. If you also use a reduction or an
enlargement setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio. For example, if the erase width setting is 1"
(20 mm) and the image is reduced to 50%, the erase width will be 1/2" (10 mm).
To cancel the erase setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
System Settings (Administrator): Erase Width Adjustment
The default erase width setting is linked to the copy mode system setting, and can be set from 0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm). The
factory default setting is 1/2" (10 mm).
5-80
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SENDING AN IMAGE AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer Transmission)
This function lets you specify a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place.
Transmission begins automatically at the specified time.
Set a transmission to
take place at 20:00
At 20:00, the transmission
begins automatically
• When a timer transmission is stored, keep the main power switch in the "on" position. If the main power switch is in the "off"
position at the specified time, transmission will not take place.
• When performing a timer transmission, you must scan the original into memory when you set up the transmission. It is not
possible to leave the document in the auto document feeder or on the document glass and have it scanned at the specified
time of transmission.
• Settings selected for a timer transmission (exposure, resolution, special modes, etc.) are automatically cleared after the
transmission is finished. (However, when the document filing function is used, the scanned original and settings are stored
on the built-in hard drive.)
• This function cannot be used in USB memory mode.
Place the original.
1
2
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 5-56)
Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
3
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Timer] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
5-81
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1)
(2)
Set the time with the
(3)
(1) Specify the day.
OK
Scan/Special Modes
Cancel
Timer
If you do not wish to specify a day, select [---]. In this
case, transmission will begin when the time specified in
(2) arrives.
OK
Time
Day of the Week
10
hh.
00
keys.
(2) Specify the time (hour, minute)
mm.
Select the time in 24-hour format.
You can also directly touch a numeric display key to
change the setting with the numeric keys.
4
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
When this screen is opened, the setting will show the current time. If the time is not correct, press the [CLEAR ALL] key
(
) to cancel the operation. Correct the time in the system settings and then perform the timer transmission procedure.
☞ CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME (page 5-5)
Press the [START] key.
5
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
The original is scanned into memory. The original cannot be scanned at a specified time.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
• The time can be specified up to a week in advance.
• Up to 94 timer transmissions can be stored at once.
• If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives, the timer transmission will begin after that
transmission is finished.
• Other transmissions can be performed as usual after a timer transmission is stored.
• A timer transmission can be deleted in the job status screen.
• If a timer transmission is given priority in the job status screen, the time specification is canceled. The transmission will
begin as soon as the job in progress is completed.
☞ GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN TRANSMISSION JOB (page 5-108)
To cancel timer transmission...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
5-82
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO
A SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot)
This function lets you send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side
separately.
Scanned image
Originals
Transmission
Front
Back
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
• Depending on the card type, some cards cannot be used with the automatic document feeder.
MX-B402:
MX-B402:
Place the original face down on the document glass.
1
MX-B402SC:
MX-B402SC:
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set
the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND
SIZE (page 5-56)
Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.
5-83
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
3
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Card Shot] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
(A)
(1)
Specify the original size.
(B) (2)
(1) Enter the original size.
OK
Scan/Special Modes
Cancel
Card Shot
X
3
3
8
(1 8 1/2)
inch
Y
2
1
8
(1 8 1/2)
inch
• Touch the X (width) numeric value display key and
enter the width.
• Touch the Y (height) numeric value display key and
enter the height.
(A) To return the original size to the default size, touch the
[Size Reset] key.
(B) To automatically enlarge or reduce the image to fit the
send size, touch the [Fit to Send Size] key. If you wish
to scan the original at the entered original size, there
is no need to touch this key.
OK
Fit to
Send Size
Size Reset
4
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Y
Y
X
• You can also touch the
X
keys to change the number.
• The send size will be selected automatically based on the entered original size.
• After selecting Card Shot, you can touch the [Original] key in the base screen to change the original scan size or the
send size. In this case, touch the [Scan Size] key to display the screen for this procedure. For the procedure for
setting the send size, see "Specifying the send size of the image" (page 5-62).
Press the [START] key to scan the front side of the card.
5
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
5-84
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Turn the card over and press the [START] key to scan the reverse side of the
card.
The back of the card will be scanned using the same color mode as the front.
6
Before scanning the back of the card, you can touch the [Configure] key in the touch panel to change the exposure.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original.
(Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
7
Configure
Read-End
If you will continue scanning additional cards, you can touch the [Configure] key to change the exposure, resolution,
scan size, and send size.
The ratio cannot be specified and "Rotation Sending Setting" cannot be selected.
To cancel Card Shot...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
5-85
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE
(Job Build)
This function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic
document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. Use this function when the number of originals that
you wish to scan exceeds the maximum number of sheets that can be inserted in the automatic document feeder at
once.
When scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first. The settings that you
select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets.
Originals
Originals are
scanned in
separate sets.
Transmission
1
1
1
101
• Up to 999 pages can be scanned. Note that when the memory is being used for other jobs, fewer pages can be scanned.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
MX-B402:
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set
the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND
SIZE (page 5-56)
Indicator
line
1
MX-B402SC:
Indicator
line
Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.
5-86
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Select the special modes.
3
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
(1)
4
Card Shot
File
(1) Touch the [Job Build] key so that it is
highlighted.
OK
Scan/Special Modes
Program
Select job build mode.
(2)
Erase
Timer
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Slow Scan
Mode
Job
Build
Business
Card Scan
Quick File
Suppress
Background
Press the [START] key to scan the first set of originals.
5
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
Insert the next set of originals and press the [START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
6
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation. All scanned data will be cleared.
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original.
(Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
Configure
Read-End
7
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned.
If the memory becomes full during scanning, a message will appear and the transmission will be canceled.
To cancel the job build function....
Touch the [Job Build] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is not highlighted.
5-87
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS
(Slow Scan Mode)
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent
thin originals from misfeeding.
A
A
B
C
D
B
C
D
When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
MX-B402:
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Adjust the original guides slowly.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set
the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND
SIZE (page 5-56)
MX-B402SC:
1
If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.
Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.
5-88
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Select the special modes.
3
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
(1)
4
Card Shot
File
(1) Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key so that it is
highlighted.
OK
Scan/Special Modes
Program
Select slow scan mode.
(2)
Erase
Timer
Job
Build
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Slow Scan
Mode
Business
Card Scan
Quick File
Suppress
Background
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
5
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
When this function is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible.
To cancel slow scan mode...
Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
This is used to have scanning always take place in slow scan mode.
5-89
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION
(Original Count)
MX-B402SC Only
The number of scanned original sheets can be counted and displayed before transmission. Checking the number of
scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes.
• This function cannot be used in USB memory mode.
• The setting can be enabled separately for each mode.
Indicator
line
1
2
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
Select the special modes.
3
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
(2)
(1)
OK
Scan/Special Modes
Program
4
Card Shot
Original
Count
Suppress
Background
Erase
Job
Build
Timer
Select the original count function.
(1) Touch the [Original Count] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Slow Scan
Mode
File
Quick File
Drop Out
Color
Blank Page
Skip
5-90
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Press the [COLOR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Scanning begins.
5
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation. All scanned data will be cleared.
(A)
(B)
XX pages of original have been scanned.
Send the scanned data?
Cancel
6
(P.x)
OK
When scanning ends, check the number
of original sheets scanned and touch the
[OK] key.
Transmission will begin.
• When Job Build mode is used, the confirmation message will
appear after the [Read-End] key is touched.
• The message on the screen shows the number of sheets
scanned in (A), and the number of pages (sheet sides)
scanned in (B). For example, if both sides of one original
sheet are scanned, "1" will appear in (A) and "2" will appear
in (B).
If this step is not performed for one minute while the above confirmation screen appears, the scanned image and
settings will be cleared and the base screen will reappear. Scanning will not be completed automatically and the
image will not be reserved for transmission.
If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets...
Touch the [Cancel] key and then touch the [OK] key in the message screen to clear all scanned data. Scan settings
and destination settings will not be cleared. Insert the original sheets in the automatic document feeder again and
press the [START] key to re-scan.
When a broadcast transmission is performed, if the original count function is selected in any of the modes, the function will
operate for all destinations.
To cancel the Original Sheet Count function...
Touch the [Original Count] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is no longer highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Original Count Setting
This can be enabled to have the number of original sheets always counted. The setting can be enabled separately for each
mode.
5-91
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
ELIMINATING BLANK PAGES FROM A
TRANSMISSION (Blank Page Skip)
MX-B402SC Only
When blank pages are included in originals scanned using the automatic document feeder, the blank pages can be
detected and automatically eliminated from transmission.
Blank pages are not sent
Blank pages
Send
• This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.
• Depending on the original, some pages that are not blank may be detected as blank pages and thus not sent, and some
pages that are blank may not be detected as blank and thus sent.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
This function cannot be used when the document glass is used
for scan send.
1
Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
3
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the
keys to switch through the screens.
(4) Touch the [Blank Page Skip] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
5-92
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1)
Set blank page skipping.
(2)
(1) Select the type of blank page to be skipped.
OK
Scan/Special Modes
Cancel
Blank Page Skip
Select from two types.
To include blank pages on which the content on the
opposite side shows through, touch [Skip Blank and Back
Shadow].
OK
4
Skip Blank Page
Skip Blank and Back Shadow
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Press the [COLOR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
5
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
(A)
) to cancel the operation.
When scanning is completed, check the
number of original sheets and the
number of sheets to be sent, and touch
[OK].
(B)
XX pages of original have (P.x)
been scanned.
YY sheets of original
will be Perform the job?
Cancel
6
Scanning begins.
• When Job Build mode is used, the confirmation message will
appear after the [Read-End] key is touched.
• The number of scanned original sheets appears in (A), the
number of scanned sides in (B), and the number of sheets to
be sent excluding blank pages in (C). For example, if five
original sheets that include two blank pages are scanned by
duplex scanning, (A) will show "5", (B) will show "10", and (C)
will show "8".
OK
(C)
If this step is not performed for one minute while the above confirmation screen appears, the scanned image and
settings will be cleared and the base screen will reappear. Scanning will not be completed automatically and the
image will not be reserved for transmission.
When "Default Preview" is enabled in the system settings (administrator) and the skip blank pages function is used to scan
original pages, you can check the pages, including the blank pages, in the preview screen. For more information, see
"PREVIEW CHECK SCREEN" (page 5-73).
To cancel the Blank Page Skip function...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is no longer highlighted.
System settings (administrator): Original Feeding Mode
Use this setting to always skip blank pages when sending.
5-93
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SCANNING BUSINESS CARDS
(Business Card Scan)
MX-B402 Only
Multiple business cards can be scanned and transmitted at once.
To use this function, the business card feeder must be attached to the automatic document feeder and "Business Card
Scan Option" must be enabled in the system settings (administrator). For the attachment procedure, see "BUSINESS
CARD FEEDER" in "BEFORE USING THE MACHINE" (page 1-47).
Depending on the card type, some cards cannot be used with the automatic document feeder.
Load the business cards.
1
2
Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
3
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Business Card Scan] key.
Read the message that appears and then touch the [OK] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
4
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
This function cannot be used when the scan size is specified by numerical values.
System Settings (Administrator): Business Card Scan Option
Specify whether or not the Business Card Scan function is used.
5-94
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SCAN THE ORIGINAL DELETING THE
COLORED PORTIONS (Drop Out Color)
MX-B402SC Only
The original's colored portions (portions other than black) can be erased.
ABCD
abcd
1234
1234
5678
9
XYZ
XYZ
Original
1234
5678
XYZ
XYZ
9
Scan data with color erased
• This feature can only be used when set to [Mono2] in [Color Mode].
• When this function is selected, the "Original Image Type" setting for exposure adjustment automatically changes to "Text".
• This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.
Place the original.
Place the original face up the document feeder tray, or face
down on document glass.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
When the original is a different size than setting, set the original
size.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
1
2
Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
Select the special modes.
3
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
5-95
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
4
Card Shot
Original
Count
Suppress
Background
(1) Touch [Drop Out Color] key so that it is
highlighted.
OK
Scan/Special Modes
Program
Select drop out color mode.
(2)
(1)
Erase
Timer
Job
Build
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Slow Scan
Mode
File
Quick File
Drop Out
Color
Blank Page
Skip
Pless the [START] key.
5
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep wiil sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key.
Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
To cancel the Drop Out Color fuction....
Touch the [Drop Out Color] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is not highlighted.
5-96
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
WHITENING FAINT COLORS IN THE IMAGE
(Suppress Background)
This feature is used to suppress light background areas.
Level [+]
The lightness level at which
suppression takes place
can be adjusted.
Level [-]
• This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 5-56)
Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
3
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Suppress Background] key.
Read the message that appears and then touch the [OK] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
5-97
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1)
Select the suppress background setting.
(2)
(1) Adjust the background suppression level.
OK
Scan/Special Modes
Cancel
Suppress Background
Touch the [+] key to suppress only faint background.
Touch the [-] key to suppress faint to dark background.
OK
Light areas of the original may be suppressed as background.
4
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
1
3
Press the [START] key.
5
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
When the original is scanned in [Mono2], the suppress background function will not operate.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
To cancel the background suppression setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
5-98
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT
(Transaction Report)
A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when an Internet fax transmission fails or when a broadcast
transmission is performed. The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of
other party, time required, number of pages, result, etc.).
☞ INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN (page 5-109)
This function cannot be used in scan mode, USB memory mode, or data entry mode.
Transaction reports are printed based on conditions set in the system settings; however, you can temporarily select
different conditions for a transmission. To change the transaction report print conditions at the time of transmission,
follow the steps below.
Place the original.
1
2
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 5-56)
Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.
3
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Transaction Report] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-74)
5-99
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1)
Cancel
Transaction Report
4
(1) Select the print conditions.
OK
Internet Fax/Special Modes
Always Print
Select print conditions.
(2)
Print at Error
OK
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Do not Print
Print Original Image
• The print conditions for a transaction report are as follows:
"Always Print": A transaction report is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails.
"Print at Error": A transaction report is printed when transmission fails.
"Do not Print": Do not print a transaction report.
• When the [Print Original Image] checkbox is selected
, part of the transmitted original is included on the
transaction report.
Press the [START] key.
5
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
) to cancel the operation.
For a broadcast transmission, changes to the transaction report print conditions apply to all destinations.
To cancel the transaction report setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
• System Settings (Administrator): Transaction Report Print Select Setting
This is used to set the conditions for printing transaction reports.
The factory default setting is
.
Single Sending: Print Out All Report/ Print Out Error Report Only /No Printed Report
Print Out All Report /Print Out Error Report Only/No Printed Report
Broadcasting:
Receiving:
Print Out All Report/Print Out Error Report Only/ No Printed Report
• System Settings (Administrator): Original Print on Transaction Report
This is used to have part of the transmitted original printed on the transaction report.
5-100
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHECKING THE STATUS OF
TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS
This section explains how to check the status of reserved transmission jobs and received Internet faxes.
JOB STATUS SCREEN
The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.
Reserved transmissions and received Internet faxes are referred to as jobs.
Example: Pressing the tab in scan mode
Print Job
Address
JOB STATUS
Scan to
Internet Fax
Fax Job
Set Time
Pages
Status
1
Broadcast0001
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting
2
AAA AAA
10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting
3
BBB BBB
10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
4
CCC CCC
10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting
Job Queue
1
Complete
1
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
The job status display is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the job
status screen.
Scan
Address Book
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
Address Entry
Exposure
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
Auto
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
Auto
Text
PDF
Sending
5-101
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED JOB SCREEN
The job status screen consists of two screens: the job queue screen that shows reserved jobs and the job currently in
progress, and the completed jobs screen. To switch between the two screens, touch the job status screen selector key
((2) below).
Job queue screen
Complete screen
(1)
Print Job
Address
Scan to
(1)
Pages
Print Job
Internet Fax
Fax Job
Set Time
Address
Status
1
Broadcast0001
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting
2
AAA AAA
10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting
3
BBB BBB
10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
4
CCC CCC
10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting
Job Queue
1
Complete
(2)
1
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
(6)
Mode switch tabs
Broadcast0001
10:00 04/01 010/003 NG000000
10:05 04/01 001/001 Send OK
1
Broadcast0003
10:22 04/01 004/004 Send OK
1
DDD DDD
10:30 04/01 010/010 Send OK
(5)
Job Queue
Complete
(2)
Detail
(7)
Call
(8)
Job status screen selector key
(7)
Job queue screen [Detail] key
Job queue screen
Jobs are shown as keys in the order they were reserved.
Each key shows information on the job and its current
status.
☞ Job key display (page 5-103)
Completed jobs screen [Detail] key
This shows detailed information on the results of
completed broadcast transmissions and jobs that used
the document filing function. Select the key of the desired
job in the completed jobs screen (9) and then touch the
[Detail] key.
☞ CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS (page 5-106)
This shows detailed information on broadcast
transmission jobs and the status of jobs. Select the key of
the desired job in the job queue screen (6) and then
touch the [Detail] key.
(4)
Status
(9)
Touch this key to switch between the job queue screen
and the completed jobs screen.
(3)
Pages
(3)
(4)
(5)
Use these tabs to change the job status screen mode.
(2)
Internet Fax
Fax Job
Start Time
Broadcast0002
(6)
(1)
Scan to
[Priority] key
Touch this key to give priority to a selected job.
☞ GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN TRANSMISSION
JOB (page 5-108)
(8)
[Stop/Delete] key
(9)
[Call] key
Touch this key to call up and use a transmission or
reception job stored with the document filing function.
Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job.
☞ STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING TRANSMITTED
OR WAITING TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 5-107)
5-102
Completed jobs screen
This shows up to 99 completed transmission or reception
jobs in each mode. A description of the job and the result
(status) are shown.
Jobs that used document filing function, broadcast
transmission jobs, and received Internet fax forwarding
jobs are indicated as keys.
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Job key display
The following information is shown in the job queue keys and completed job keys that appear in the job status screen.
Direct SMTP information is also included in Internet fax transmission/reception information.
AAA AAA
3
(1) (2)
(1)
10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
(3)
(4)
Displays the number (position) of the job in the job queue.
When the job currently being transmitted is finished, the
job moves up one position in the job queue.
This number does not appear in keys in the completed
jobs screen.
(2)
(4)
Icon
(5)
Time reserved/Time started
Number of pages
Shows the number of pages transmitted/total number of
original pages.
(6)
Job type
Scan to E-mail
Scan to FTP
Scan to Network Folder
Scan to Desktop
Status
Shows the job status.
• Job in progress
Display
Status
"Connecting"
Connecting to the destination.
"Sending"
Sending data.
"Receiving"
Receiving an Internet fax.
"Stopped"
The job has been stopped.
"Error"
An error occurred while the job was
being executed.
• Job waiting to be executed
Display
Internet fax transmission
Internet fax reception
The job is waiting to be executed.
"Retry Mode"
The job is being re-attempted due
to a communication error or other
problem.
"Report Wait"
An Internet fax has been sent for
which a receive report was
requested, and the machine is
waiting for the receive report.
A day and
time is
displayed
Timer transmission job (the
specified time is displayed)
Broadcast transmission or Inbound
routing
Metadata transmission
Name of communicating party (address)
Status
"Waiting"
PC-I-Fax transmission
(3)
(6)
In the job queue screen, the date and time the job was
reserved. In the completed jobs screen, the date and
time the job was started.
Mode icon
This indicates the type of job. In the completed jobs
screen, a color bar appears next to the icon to indicate
whether the job was executed in color or black & white.
(However, the color bar icon does not appear in the key
of a job that used document filing or in the key of a
transmission/reception job that was canceled.)
(5)
For a transmission, the name or address of the destination.
For a reception, the address of the sending party.
In the case of a broadcast transmission, "Broadcast"
appears together with a broadcast control number
(4-digits).
5-103
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
• Completed job
Display
Status
"Send OK"
Transmission was completed.
"In Memory"
An Internet fax has been received
but has not yet been printed.
"Received"
A received Internet fax has been
printed or deleted in the check
image screen.
"Forward OK"
A received Internet fax has been
forwarded.
"Stopped"
The job was stopped.
"Number of
successful
transmission
destinations/
Total
destinations
OK"
Completion of a broadcast
transmission or inbound routing
operation.
If transmission to 3 destinations
was successful out of a total of 5,
"003/005 OK" will appear.
"No
Response"
An error occurred because there
was no response from the
destination.
"OK Report"
A receive report was requested for
a transmission, the transmission
was completed normally, and the
receive report was received from
the destination.
"NG Report"
A receive report was requested for
a transmission, however, the
transmission did not take place
correctly and a transmission failed
report was received.
"No Report"
An e-mail was received without an
attached file and thus printing was
not possible.
"Received"
An e-mail was received, however,
the attached file was not a TIFF-F
file or there was no attached file,
and thus printing was not possible.
"Rejected"
An Internet fax was sent from a
party that is blocked.
"NGxxxxxx"
Transmission/reception was not
successful because a
communication error occurred (a
6-digit error code appears in
xxxxxx.)
"Error"
An error occurred while the job was
being executed.
5-104
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB QUEUE IS
COMPLETED
When a normal transmission job is completed, it moves to the completed jobs screen and "Send OK" appears in the
status column.
Received Internet faxes, timer transmission jobs, and forwarding jobs are handled in the job status screen as explained
below.
Internet fax reception jobs
While an Internet fax is being received, "Receiving" appears.
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears.
When printing ends, the status changes to "Printed" and the job is completed.
Timer transmission jobs
A timer transmission job appears at the bottom of the job queue until the specified time arrives.
When the specified time arrives, the job is executed. If another job is in progress, the timer job is started when the other
job is completed.
Internet fax transmission jobs that request a receive report
After completion of an Internet fax transmission job (excluding Direct SMTP transmission jobs) that requests a receive
report, the job is placed on standby at the bottom of the job queue screen. "Report Wait" appears in the status column.
When the receive report is received from the destination, or if the report is not received within the timeout time, the job
moves to the completed jobs screen.
Reception jobs when "Inbound Routing Settings" are enabled
When "Inbound Routing Settings" are enabled, reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print setting.
☞ FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing Settings) (page 5-115)
• Received Internet fax is not printed
"Receiving" appears while the Internet fax is being received. When reception is completed, the job moves to the job
queue of the job status screen of scan mode.
• Received Internet fax is printed
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears. When printing
ends, the status changes to "Printed" and the job is completed. In addition, the job is added to the job queue of the job
status screen of scan mode. When forwarding received Internet faxes is finished, "Forward OK" appears.
5-105
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS
You can check a list of the destinations, the destinations for which transmission failed, and other detailed information on
completed jobs that used document filing function, broadcast transmission jobs, and received Internet fax forwarding
jobs. Touch the key of the job for which you wish to display information in the completed jobs screen and touch the
[Detail] key. The job detail screen (see below) will appear.
OK
Detail
Broadcast0001
Address
Start Time
Status
002
EEE EEE
10:01 04/01
NG000000
010
FFF FFF
10:10 04/01
NG000000
Retry
1
1
File
Failed
All Destinations
The job name appears at the top of the job detail screen.
To view details on the job, touch one of the tabs. The following information appears on each tab.
Tab name
Information displayed
File
Shows information on a transmission/reception that used document filing function.
To call up the file and use it, touch the [Call] key.
Failed
Shows information on addresses for which communication failed.
Address: Address name or number
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Description of failure (error)
The [Retry] key can be touched to re-attempt transmission to that address.*
All Destinations
Shows all addresses specified in the job.
Address: Address name or number
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Communication result
The [Retry] key can be touched to transmit to all addresses again.*
* Recalling is not possible for a broadcast transmission that includes a Scan to FTP address, Scan to Network Folder
address, or Scan to Desktop address.
5-106
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING
TRANSMITTED OR WAITING TO BE
TRANSMITTED
Follow the steps below to stop a job that is being transmitted or is waiting to be transmitted.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
JOB STATUS
1
(1)
Print Job
Address
2
Select the job that you wish to stop.
(1)
Scan to
Pages
(1) Touch the mode tab of the job to be
stopped.
Internet Fax
Fax Job
Set Time
Status
1
Broadcast
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting
2
AAA AAA
10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting
3
BBB BBB
10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
4
CCC CCC
10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting
Job Queue
1
(2) Touch the key of the job to be stopped.
Complete
1
(3) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
(2)
(3)
Touch the [Yes] key.
Delete the job?
CCC CCC
3
10:31 04/01
No
Yes
If you do not want to stop the selected job...
Touch the [No] key.
Printing of a received Internet fax cannot be stopped.
5-107
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN
TRANSMISSION JOB
When multiple jobs are waiting to be transmitted, the jobs are normally transmitted in the order they were reserved. If
you need to give priority to a job and send it ahead of the other jobs, follow the steps below.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
JOB STATUS
1
(1)
Print Job
Address
2
Scan to
Set Time
Select the job to which you wish to give
priority.
(1)
Internet Fax
Fax Job
Pages
Status
1
Broadcast
2
AAA AAA
10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting
3
BBB BBB
10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
4
CCC CCC
10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting
Job Queue
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting
1
Complete
(1) Touch the mode tab of the job to be given
priority.
1
(2) Touch the key of the job to be given priority.
(3) Touch the [Priority] key.
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
The selected job moves up to the position immediately
following the job in progress. The job will be executed
when the job in progress is completed.
(2) (3)
5-108
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHECKING THE INTERNET FAX ACTIVITY
LOG (Image Sending Activity Report)
IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT
You can have the machine print a log of recent image sending activity (date, name of other party, time required, result,
etc.). The Image Sending Activity Report contains useful information such as the types of errors that occurred.
The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report.
You can have the machine print the Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reaches 201,
or at a specified time (once a day only).
The contents of the Image Sending Activity Report are erased when the report is printed, and thus it cannot be reprinted.
System Settings (Administrator): Activity Report Print Select Setting
This is used to set the conditions for printing activity reports. The factory default setting is not to print.
The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to print each time the number of transactions reaches 201, or at a specified
time (once a day only).
INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN
Error types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction
report or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed.
Examples of messages that are printed in the result column
Message
Explanation
OK
The transaction was completed normally.
OK REPORT
A receive report was requested for a transmission, the transmission was completed normally, and
the receive report was received from the destination.
CANCEL
A transmission was stopped while in progress, or a reserved transmission job was canceled.
MEM. FULL
The memory became full during reception.
REJECTED
An Internet fax was sent from a party that is blocked.
NG REPORT
A receive report was requested for a transmission, however, the transmission did not take place
correctly and a transmission failed report was received.
NO REPORT
A receive report was requested for a transmission, however, a report was not received within the
timeout time.
NG LIMIT
Transmission was not possible because the file size exceeded the machine's file size limit setting.
RECEIVED
An e-mail was received, however, the attached file was not a TIFF-F file or there was no attached
file, and thus printing was not possible.
FAIL xx (xxxx)
The transaction failed due to a communication error.
First 2 digits of communication error number: Error code from 00 to 99.
Last 4 digits of communication error number: Code for use by service technicians.
5-109
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS
This section explains the basic procedures for receiving Internet faxes.
RECEIVING AN INTERNET FAX
The Internet fax function periodically* connects to the mail server (POP3 server) and checks whether or not Internet
faxes have been received. When faxes have been received, the faxes are automatically retrieved and printed.
* The default setting is once every 5 minutes.
If faxes will be received at night, keep the main power switch in the "on" position.
Internet faxes are received automatically.
Beep
A beep sounds when reception ends.
1
The Internet faxes are printed
automatically.
2
If the machine is out of paper or there is no paper that matches the size of the received fax, a message will appear in the
touch panel. Follow the instructions in the message to load an appropriate size of paper.
• System Settings: Fax Data Receive/Forward (page 7-25)
When printing is not possible because the machine has run out of paper or toner, received Internet faxes can be forwarded
to and printed by another previously stored Internet fax machine.
• System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Default Settings
These settings are used to select how received faxes are handled when the [POWER] key (
) is "off" (the main power switch
is "on"), the volume of the beep that sounds when reception ends, and whether or not received e-mail messages are printed.
• System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Receive Settings
Settings related to Internet fax reception can be configured such as the interval for checking for received faxes, duplex
reception, auto reduction printing, and storing allow/reject reception addresses.
• System Settings (Administrator): Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Name Setting
This setting is used to allow/refuse reception from stored addresses and domains.
• System Settings (Administrator): Receiving Date & Time Print
Use this to select whether or not the date and time of reception is added when a received image is printed.
5-110
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
MANUALLY RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES
If the interval for checking for received faxes is somewhat long and you wish to check immediately, you can manually
initiate reception.
Touch the [I-Fax Manual Reception] key to connect to the mail server and retrieve received faxes.
Scan
Address Book
Internet Fax
Fax
Original
Scan:
Address Entry
Exposure
Send Settings
Resolution
200X100dpi
Address Review
File Format
TIFF-F
File
Special Modes
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
Auto
Auto
Quick File
I-Fax Manual
Reception
If POP3 server settings are not configured in the Web pages, the [I-Fax Manual Reception] key is grayed out to prevent
selection.
System Settings: Fax Data Receive/Forward (page 7-25)
This setting is used to hide the [I-Fax Manual Reception] key that appears in the base screen of Internet Fax mode. When the
[I-Fax Manual Reception] key is hidden, manual reception is initiated by touching the [Reception Start] key in the screen that
appears when "Fax Data Receive/Forward" - "I-Fax Settings" is selected.
5-111
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print)
"Hold Setting for Received Data Print" in the system settings (administrator) can be enabled to have faxes received to
memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a password must be entered. When this function is enabled, a
password entry screen appears in the touch panel when received Internet faxes are retrieved.
Received data is stored.
Enter password via the 10-key.
Cancel
When the previously programmed 4-digit password is entered with the numeric keys, printing begins.
The [Cancel] key can be touched to close the password entry screen; however, the data in memory key (
) will blink
in the touch panel. The password entry screen will reappear when you touch the blinking key (
) or change modes.
When "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), a password can be
entered to display the received data list screen. If you wish to check an image before printing it, continue from step 1 on
the next page.
• The received faxes will be retained in memory regardless of whether they were received automatically or manually.
• If "Fax Data Receive/Forward" is enabled in the system settings so that received faxes are forwarded to another machine,
faxes retained in memory are also forwarded. At that time, the same password entry screen will appear as for printing.
Forwarding will not take place unless the password is entered.
System Settings (Administrator): Hold Setting for Received Data Print
Enable this setting to have faxes received to memory without being printed. This setting is also used to program the
password that must be entered to print the faxes.
5-112
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING
When "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled* in the system settings (administrator), you can check a
received image in the touch panel before printing it out. When this function is enabled, follow the steps below to print a
received image.
* The factory default setting is disabled.
When an image is received, a
confirmation prompt will appear. Touch
the [Yes] key.
The memory has received data.
Check the data?
1
No
If this message appears while you are configuring settings of
any type and you touch the [Yes] key, the settings that you are
configuring will be cancelled. If this message appears in
another mode, you will return to the base screen of image send
mode after checking the image.
Yes
Select the received image
(1)
Received Data List
Select All
Thumbnail
2
(1) Touch the key of the received image that
you want to check.
Back
Multiple received images can be checked.
AAA AAA
04/04/2010
10:28
Not checked
BBB BBB
04/04/2010
10:14
Checked
1
0123456789
04/04/2010
10:12
Not checked
5
BBB BBB
9876543210
04/04/2010
10:08
Checked
BBB BBB
0612345678
04/04/2010
10:00
Not checked
CCC CCC
04/04/2010
10:00
Checked
Image Check
Delete
(2) Touch the [Image Check] key.
• To show thumbnails of the received images, touch the
[Thumbnail] key.
• To delete an image that has been selected, touch the
[Delete] key. To print an image that has been selected,
touch the [Print] key.
Print
(2)
AAA AAA
Check the received image and then
touch the [Print] key.
Back
Image Check
04/04/2010
3
10:28
1 / 3
Display Rotation
0001 /0010
Printing begins.
For information on the image check screen, see "IMAGE
CHECK SCREEN" (page 5-114).
Print
If the screen of step 1 appears when you are configuring settings in the setting screens of any of the modes, the configured
settings will be cancelled if you view the image. After viewing the image, you will return to the base screen of image send
mode, regardless of which mode you were in previously.
System Settings (Administrator): Received Data Image Check Setting
Use this to specify whether or not a received Internet fax can be viewed before it is printed.
5-113
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
IMAGE CHECK SCREEN
This section explains the image check screen.
Back
Image Check
AAA AAA
04/04/2010
10:28
1 / 3
Display Rotation
Print
0001
(1)
(1)
(2)
0010
(3)
(4)
(4)
Information display
Preview image
An image of the selected received image appears.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the
keys to
scroll.)
(3)
(5)
(7)
"Display Rotation" key
[Print] key
Touch this key to start printing.
(6)
Display zoom key
Use this key to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
The setting applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.
Change page keys
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
•
keys: Go to the first or the last page.
•
keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
• Page number display: This shows the total number of
pages and the current page
number. You can touch the
current page number key and
enter a number with the
numeric keys to go to that page
number.
(6)
This key rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees.
The rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.
This shows information on the displayed image.
(2)
(5)
(7)
Image select key
When multiple images are selected for preview display,
use this key to change the displayed images.
A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.
5-114
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET
FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS
(Inbound Routing Settings)
Received Internet faxes can be automatically forwarded to an e-mail address, file server address, desktop address, or network
folder address. When this function is enabled, you can also have received Internet faxes forwarded without printing them.
The machine
Forwarding
Received Internet fax
When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot be
printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date & Time Print" is disabled.)
CONFIGURING INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS
All inbound routing settings are configured in the Web pages. For the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the
Start Guide.
The following explanation assumes that the Web pages have been accessed with administrator rights.
To configure inbound routing settings, follow the steps below.
Enabling the inbound routing function.
(1) In the Web page menu, click [Application
Settings], [Inbound Routing Settings], and
then [Administration Settings].
(2) Select [Enable] in "Inbound Routing" and
click the [Submit] button.
1
(2)
Users without administrator rights can be prohibited from storing, editing, and deleting forwarding tables in this screen,
and from specifying which table is used. To do so, select the checkboxes below
.
• Disable Registration of Forward Table • Disable Change/Delete of Forward Table • Disable Change of Forward Approval
When inbound routing is enabled, you can also specify whether or not you wish the machine to print the forwarded faxes.
To have all received faxes printed before being forwarded, select "Print Out All Report" in "Print Style Setting". To
have received faxes printed only when an error prevents forwarding, select "Print at Error".
After configuring the settings, be sure to click the [Submit] button.
5-115
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Storing sender addresses.
If you wish to have only faxes from specified addresses
forwarded, store the desired sender addresses. Sender
addresses stored here can be selected from a list when you
store a forwarding table.
(1) Click [Sender Number/Address
Registration] in the [Inbound Routing
Settings] menu in the Web page.
(2)
2
(2) Enter the sender address in "Internet Fax
Address" or "Fax Number" as appropriate,
and click the [Add to List] button.
The entered address will be added to the "Address to be
Entered" list.
• Specify whether the address will be directly entered
(maximum of 1500 characters) or selected from a
global address book by clicking the [Global Address
Search] button.
• To store multiple addresses, repeat this step.
(3)
(3) When you have finished adding addresses,
click the [Submit] button.
• A maximum of 500 sender numbers/addresses can be stored.
• To delete an entered address, select the address in "Address to be Entered" and click the [Delete] button.
5-116
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(2)
(3) (4)
Store a forwarding table.
Follow the steps below to store a forwarding table that
combines a specified sender and forwarding address.
(1) Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web
page menu and click the [Add] button.
(2) Enter a "Table Name".
(3) Select the line used for reception.
(MX-B402SC only)
(4) Select the sender whose faxes will be
forwarded.
• To forward all received faxes, select [Forward All
Received Data].
MX-B402
• To forward faxes received from a specific sender only,
select [Forward Received Data from Below Sender],
select the sender from the list, and then click the [Add]
button.
MX-B402SC
• To forward only data received from specific senders,
select [Forward Received Data from Below Sender].
To forward all data except data from specific senders,
select [Forward Received Data from Senders except
Below]. Select the appropriate senders from the list and
click the [Add] button.
(5) Select the forwarding conditions.
(MX-B402SC only)
3
(8)
(7) (6)
• To always forward received data, select [Always
Forward].
• To specify a day and time on which received data will
be forwarded, select [Forward on Selected Day & Time]
and select the checkbox
of the desired day of the
week. To specify a time, select the [Set Forwarding
Time] checkbox
and specify the time.
(5)
(6) Select the file format.
The format can be set separately for each forwarding
address (for each of forwarding addresses 1, 2, and 3 in
the table).
(7) Select the forwarding address.
Forwarding addresses can be selected from the
machine's address book. (Multiple addresses can be
selected.) A maximum of 1000 forwarding addresses can
be stored (a combined maximum of 100 file server,
desktop, and network folder addresses can be stored).
(8) Click [Submit].
• When selecting senders from the "Sender Number/Address Setting" list, you can use the [Shift] key or the [Ctrl] key
on your keyboard to select multiple senders.
• A maximum of 50 forwarding tables can be stored.
• Images sent in TIFF format may not display correctly in some recipient environments. In this event, change the file
format to PDF.
• For the MX-B402, If you wish to select a group of addresses for the forwarding destination, you can only select a
group that contains e-mail addresses only.
• For the MX-B402SC, up to three forwarding day and time settings can be set for one forwarding table, and a
forwarding destination can be set for each set time. To configure these settings, use the forwarding list tabs to
access each setting.
5-117
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(2)
Specifying forwarding tables to be used.
To use the inbound routing function, enable the forwarding
tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables.
(1) Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web
page menu.
(2)
MX-B402
Select the "Forward Activated" checkbox of
each forwarding table that you wish to use.
MX-B402SC
Select [Always Forward] or [Forward on
Selected Day & Time] from the forwarding
table.
4
The forwarding permission settings that appear here are
linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 3. If you
wish to use different forwarding conditions than those set
in step 3, set the forwarding permission settings
(3) Click [Submit].
(3)
To delete a forwarding table, click the checkbox next to the table name so that it is selected
5-118
and click [Delete].
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER
(PC Scan Mode)
BASIC SCANNING PROCEDURE
You can install the scanner driver on your computer from the CD-ROM that accompanies the machine, and use a
TWAIN* compliant application to scan an image using your computer.
Scanning from your computer is most useful for scanning a single original such as a photo, particularly when you want to
adjust scan settings as you scan. By contrast, scanning at the machine is most useful for continuous scanning of
multiple originals.
* An interface standard used for scanners and other image input devices. When the scanner driver is installed on your
computer, you can use any TWAIN-compliant application to scan an image.
• Scanning in PC scan mode is only possible when the scanner driver has been installed from the "Software CD-ROM"
using the integrated installer. For the procedures for installing the scanner driver and configuring settings, see the Start
Guide.
• This function cannot be used when it has been disabled using "Disable Scan Function" in the system settings (administrator).
• The procedures for selecting the scanner driver and starting scanning vary depending on the TWAIN-compliant
application. For more information, see the manual for the application or Help.
• When a large image is scanned at high resolution, the amount of data will be very large and scanning will take a long time.
Be sure to select appropriate scan settings for the original (text, photo, etc.).
As an example, the procedure for scanning from the "Sharpdesk" application that accompanies the machine is
explained below.
[At the machine]
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
When the original is a different size than the size setting, set the original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 5-56)
Scan
Internet Fax
Fax
USB Mem. Scan
PC Scan
Touch the [PC Scan] tab to switch to PC
Scan mode.
If the [PC Scan] tab does not appear, touch the
to move the screen.
This machine is in the PC scan mode.
Do not remove the original.
Scanner IP address:250.160.102.106
2
Exit
When PC scan mode is selected, only the [Exit] key displayed in the touch panel can be used on the machine; no
other keys can be used.
5-119
Contents
tab
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
[At your computer]
Start the TWAIN-compliant application
on your computer and select [Select
Scanner] from the [File] menu.
3
Select the scanner driver of the
machine.
(1) Select [SHARP MFP TWAIN V].
(2) Click the [Select] button.
4
(1)
(2)
Select [Acquire Image] from the [File]
menu.
The scanner driver opens.
5
5-120
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Preview the image.
(1) Select the location where the original is
placed.
"Scanning Position" menu:
• If the original is a one-sided original and is placed in the
document feeder tray, select [SPF(Simplex)].
• If the original is a 2-sided original and is placed in the
document feeder tray, select [SPF(Duplex - Book)] or
[SPF(Duplex - Tablet)] depending on whether the
original is a book-style or tablet-style original. In
addition, select [Left edge is fed first] or [Top edge is
fed first] depending on the orientation of the original.
MX-B402SC only
Select the location where the original exits.
If you use the heavy paper or plastic card, select [Heavy
exit].
(2) Select scan settings.
(1) (2)
"Scanning Mode" menu:
Switch between the "Preset" screen and the "Custom
Settings" screen. In the "Preset" screen, select "Web
Pages", "Photo", "FAX" or "OCR" depending on the
original type and your scanning purpose.
If you wish to change the initial settings of any of the four
buttons or select the resolution or other advanced
settings, change to the "Custom Settings" screen.
"Image Area" menu:
Select the scan area. You can also set the scanning area
in the preview window with your mouse.
(3)
6
(3) Click the [Preview] button.
The preview image will appear in the scanner driver.
If you are not satisfied with the preview image, repeat (2)
and (3).
If the [Zoom Preview] checkbox is selected before the
[Preview] button is clicked, the selected area will be
enlarged in the preview window. If the checkmark is
removed, the preview image will return to normal. Note
that if SPF is selected in the "Scanning Position" menu,
the [Zoom Preview] function cannot be used.
• For further information on the scan settings, click the
open scanner driver Help.
button in the preview image screen of step 7 to
• If the [Preview] button is clicked when scanning from the document feeder tray, only one original page will be
scanned for the preview image. If you wish to include that original in the scan, return it to the document feeder tray.
5-121
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Select scanning settings while viewing
the image.
7
[Rotate] button:
Each time this button is clicked, the preview image rotates 90
degrees. This lets you change the orientation of the image
without picking up and placing the original again. The image file
will be created using the orientation that appears in the preview
window.
[Image Size] button:
Click this button to specify the scan area by entering numerical
values. Pixels, mm, or inches can be selected for the units of
the numerical values. If a scanning area has already been
specified, the entered numbers will change the area relative to
the top left corner of the specified area.
button:
When a preview image is displayed and a scanning area is not
specified, you can click the
button to automatically set the
scanning area to the entire preview image.
• For further information on the scan settings, click the
button to open scanner driver Help.
• If the originals are placed in the document feeder tray, only the top page will be previewed. The top page will be
delivered to the original exit tray. Be sure to return the previewed page to the document feeder tray before
previewing again or scanning.
Click the [Scan] button.
Scanning begins. The image appears in your application.
Assign a file name to the scanned image and save it as
appropriate in the software application you are using.
8
5-122
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
[At the machine]
Touch the [Exit] key in the touch panel.
This machine is in the PC scan mode.
Do not remove the original.
9
Scanner IP address:250.160.102.106
Exit
Touch the [Yes] key.
PC scan in progress.
Finish PC scan mode?
10
No
Yes
5-123
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
METADATA DELIVERY
This section explains metadata delivery, which can be used when the application integration module kit is installed.
METADATA DELIVERY (Data Entry)
When the application integration module kit is installed and an image file is generated for a scan send transmission,
metadata (data indicating the attributes of the image file and how it is to be processed) can be generated based on
pre-stored information and transmitted as a separate file. The metadata file is created in XML format. By linking the
metadata with applications such as document management software, a workflow application, or an encryption server, a
sophisticated document solution environment can be built.
Scan to
Desktop
Metadata
(XML file)
Client PC that uses Network
Scanner Tool
Server
Image file
Fax server, document
management software,
workflow application,
encryption server, etc.
Scan to E-mail
Scan to FTP
Scan to Network Folder
Using the application integration module kit, information on a generated image file can be entered at the touch panel and
transmitted along with the image as an XML file.
5-124
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA
TRANSMISSION
SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB PAGES
All settings related to metadata are configured in the Web pages. (Administrator rights are required.)
To configure metadata settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Metadata Settings] in the Web page menu.
When configuring settings, be sure to enable metadata transmission.
Storing Metadata Sets
Store the items (the metadata set) that are written to the XML file that is generated during scanning. Up to 10 metadata
items can be configured in a metadata set. A stored metadata set can be selected at the time of transmission.
Addresses specified in "Address Type Allowing Metadata Entry" when a metadata set is stored can be selected as
transmission destinations at the time of transmission using one-touch keys, manual entry, and/or a global address book
search. (Addresses for which metadata entry is not allowed cannot be specified as transmission destinations.)
METADATA TRANSMISSION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP
When Network Scanner Tool is used in its factory default configuration, a file will be generated with a new file name on
the computer. When Network Scanner Tool is used as a means of sending a metadata file to a third party software
application, this setting must be disabled to allow cross referencing between the image file and XML file by means of the
file name generated by the computer. (When setting the file name in [Send Settings], to ensure that a previously existing
file on a computer is not overwritten by a transmitted file of the same name, be sure to configure the file name so that
name duplication cannot occur; for example, by including a unique extension (the date, etc.) in the generated file name.
If the file name setting is left blank, the machine will automatically generate a file name that is unique.)
• It is recommended that you use Network Scanner Tool to receive metadata. For more information, see the Network
Scanner Tool User's Guide (PDF format) on the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner Utilities" CD-ROM.
• For information on the license agreement and how to use the CD-ROM that accompanies the application integration
module, see the separate "Sharpdesk licence kit" manual.
• Using third party software applications
Various types of third party software applications exist. Some applications can start automatically from Network Scanner
Tool and some cannot. When the auto-run function of an application is enabled, Network Scanner Tool will start the
application with the ".exe" command using the file name as a parameter. Normally an application is started twice, once for
the image file and once for the XML file. For example, when Network Scanner Tool is set to start the application
"APP.EXE", the following commands are applied when the two files "IMG.TIF" and "IMG.XML" are received.
APP.EXE IMG.TIF
APP.EXE IMG.XML
5-125
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
TRANSMITTING METADATA
Follow the steps below to select a metadata set, enter each item, and perform metadata transmission.
Switch to data entry mode and display
the metadata set screen.
(1)
Scan
1
Internet Fax
Fax
Address Book
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
Send Settings
Resolution
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
Scan:
Data Entry
Send:
8½x11
Auto
(1) Touch the [Data Entry] tab.
Auto
Text
(2) Touch the [Metadata Entry] key.
200X200dpi
PDF
Metadata Entry
(2)
• If no metadata sets have been stored, the [Data Entry] tab cannot be selected. Store a metadata set in the Web
pages and then perform the transmission procedure.
• If a specific metadata set has been specified as the default set, go to step 3.
(1)
Select a metadata set.
(2)
Cancel
Metadata Set
(1) Touch the key of the metadata set that you
wish to use.
OK
Set Name:Metadata 1
2
Metadata 1
Metadata 2
Metadata 3
Metadata 4
Metadata 5
Metadata 6
Metadata 7
Metadata 8
Metadata 9
Metadata 10
Data Entry
Metadata Set
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Cancel
The keys of the items stored in the
metadata set will appear. Touch the key
of the item that you want to enter.
OK
Set Name:Metadata 1
User ID
From Name
1
2
Reply To
3
DocumentPassword
AccessPassword
BillCode1
If you accidentally selected the wrong metadata set or wish to use a different metadata set when a default metadata
set has been set, touch the [Metadata Set] key. Touch the [OK] key in the message screen that appears. You will
return to the screen of step 1. Metadata items entered to that point will be canceled.
5-126
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1)
Enter the selected metadata item.
(2)
(1) Touch the key of the value that you wish to
enter.
Data Entry
Cancel
User ID
6
4
12
OK
• When the entry values of the metadata item are in the
form of selections, the selections are shown as keys.
When a value is editable, you can touch the [Direct
Entry] key to manually enter the value.
• If the metadata item requires the entry of text, a text
entry screen will appear. Enter the required information.
Direct Entry
18
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Value 5
Value 6
Value 7
Value 8
Value 9
Value 10
Value 11
Value 12
1
2
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• To change the number of keys displayed in the screen, touch the number of displayed items selector key. Select 6,
12, or 18 keys.
• For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-76) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
Cancel
Metadata Set
Data Entry
When you have finished entering all
items, touch the [OK] key.
OK
Set Name:Metadata 1
Value 1
User ID
5
xxxx xxxx
Reply To
xxx@xx.xx.com
2
DocumentPassword
xxxx xxxx
AccessPassword
xxxxxx
BillCode1
xxxxxx
Scan
6
1
From Name
Internet Fax
Address Book
Original
Address Entry
Exposure
Fax
Scan:
Auto
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
Select image settings and any other
settings, and perform the scan send
procedure.
Data Entry
8½x11
Send:
Auto
Text
PDF
Metadata Entry
• The procedures for selecting settings and performing
transmission are the same as in the other modes.
• To make changes to entered values, touch the [Metadata
Entry] key once again. The entry screen of the selected
metadata set will appear.
• Transmission cannot be performed if the [Data Entry] tab is displayed and no metadata settings have been configured. To
perform transmission without sending metadata, switch to a different mode by touching the tab of that mode and then
perform transmission.
• Before configuring metadata settings, you can specify addresses in all modes to be used. After metadata settings have
been configured, only addresses in modes that are allowed in the selected metadata set can be specified.
• When metadata settings have been configured or an address is specified in the [Data Entry] tab, it will not be possible to
switch to another mode.
• Metadata delivery is possible using the document filing function. The [Data Entry] tab appears in the transmission settings
screen of document filing mode to allow metadata delivery. In addition, metadata delivery using document filing can be
performed in [Document Operations] in the Web pages.
5-127
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
METADATA FIELDS
The following three types of metadata are included in the XML file that is transmitted.
• Data automatically generated by the machine: This data is always included in the XML file and is automatically stored
on your computer.
• Previously defined fields:
These fields are automatically recognized by the machine and
assigned to appropriate XML tags. These fields are selectable, and
can only be included in the XML file if enabled in the Web pages.
• User defined fields:
Custom fields can be added to the XML file. These fields are selectable
and can be defined in the Web pages.
If a defined metadata field is one of the following fields, a message will appear informing you that the field cannot be
entered. Enter appropriate information in the related items of the send settings.
Name entered in
metadata field
Description
Where entered
fromName
Name of the user who sent the job. If the
name is not entered as metadata, the sender
name determined by the usual rules for
determining the sender name will be applied
as metadata.
[Reply-To]
(Sender name of selected sender)
replyTo
E-mail address to which the transmission
result will be sent.
[Reply-To]
(E-mail address of selected sender)
documentSubject
Job name appearing in the e-mail "Subject"
line, or job name on the fax cover sheet.
When the user enters a [Subject] in the send
settings screen in the touch panel, the
entered value is applied as metadata.
[Subject]
(Blank until a value is set in the send settings
screen.)
fileName
Enter the file name of the image to be sent.
[File Name]
(Only when the [Allow Custom Filenames]
checkbox is selected
in the metadata
settings screen in the Web pages.)
(Blank until a value is set in the send settings
screen.)
5-128
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
NETWORK SCANNER / INTERNET FAX*1
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
MX-B402
MX-B402SC
100 x 100, 200 x 200, 300 x 300, 400 x 400, 600 x 600
Scanning resolution (dpi) Internet Fax: 200 x 100, 200 x 200, 200 x 400, 400 x 400, 600 x 600 (200 x 100, 200 x 200 when
file type is TIFF-S) Halftone can be selected for resolutions other than 200 x 100 dpi.
Scanning speed
Interface port
Supported protocols
File formats
Remarks
Color (200 x 200 dpi)
One-sided:35 pages/min. (8-1/2" x 11"),
33 pages/min. (A4)
Two-sided:12 pages/min. (8-1/2" x 11"/A4)
Black and white (200 x 200 dpi)
One-sided:35 pages/min. (8-1/2" x 11"),
33 pages/min. (A4)
Two-sided:12 pages/min. (8-1/2" x 11"/A4)
Color (200 x 200 dpi)
One-sided:50 pages/min. (8-1/2"" x 11"/A4)
Two-sided:25 pages/min. (8-1/2"" x 11"/A4)
Black and white (200 x 200 dpi)
One-sided:50 pages/min. (8-1/2"" x 11"/A4)
Two-sided:25 pages/min. (8-1/2"" x 11"/A4)
LAN connectivity: 10Base-T / 100Base-TX / 1000Base-T
TCP/IP (IPv4)
Color:
(including grayscale)
File types:TIFF, JPEG, PDF, Encrypted PDF, XPS
Compression ratio:High / Medium / Low
Black and white:
File types:TIFF, PDF, Encrypted PDF, XPS
Compression modes:None / Medium (G3) / High (G4)
Internet Fax:
(black and white only)
File types:TIFF-FX (TIFF-F, TIFF-S)
Compression modes:Medium (G3) / High (G4)
Number of one-touch keys for
storing destinations*2:
Maximum number of keys: 999
Number of destinations that can
be stored in a group (1 key)*2:
Maximum number of destinations in one group (1 key): 500
Scan destinations:
Scan to E-mail / Scan to FTP / Scan to Desktop / Scan to
Network Folder
*1 Internet fax expansion kit is required.
*2 Total number of all destinations (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, Scan to Network folder, Internet Fax,
Fax, and Group)
5-129
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
PULL SCAN FUNCTION (TWAIN)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supported protocol
TCP/IP (IPv4)
Supported client PC
operating systems
Windows 2000 / XP / Server 2003 / Vista / Server 2008 / 7
Color modes
Full Color, Grayscale, Mono Diffusion, Mono 2 gradation
Resolution settings
75 dpi, 100 dpi, 150 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi
(The resolution can be specified by entering a numerical value from 50 to 9600 dpi. However, when
a high resolution is specified, it is necessary to reduce the scanning area.)
Scanning area
Document glass
Maximum: 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
Automatic document feeder
Maximum: 8-1/2" x 14" (A4)
5-130
Contents
CHAPTER 6
DOCUMENT FILING
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the document filing function. The document filing
function allows you to save the document data of a copy or fax job, or the data of a print job, as a file on the machine's
hard drive. The file can be called up as needed.
This chapter assumes that you are already familiar with copy mode, scanner mode, and the other modes of the
machine.
For information on procedures of copy, scanner and other modes that remain the same when those modes are used in
conjunction with the document filing function, see the chapters for those modes.
USING STORED FILES
DOCUMENT FILING
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . .
• USES OF DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• BEFORE USING DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . .
• IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING
DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH
MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEQUENCE FOR USING A STORED FILE. . . . . . 6-25
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-4
FOLDER AND FILE SELECTION SCREENS . . . . 6-27
• FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
• FILE SELECTION SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
SELECTING A FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
• JOB SETTINGS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6-7
PRINTING A STORED FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
• PRINT SETTINGS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
• MULTI-FILE PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6-8
BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING
MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
SENDING A STORED FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
• SEND SETTINGS SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING
PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
• FILE PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
• CHANGING THE PROPERTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File" . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
SAVING A FILE WITH "File" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
• FILE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
MOVING A STORED FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
DELETING A STORED FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
SAVING A DOCUMENT FILE ONLY (Scan to
HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
• "Scan to HDD" SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
• PERFORMING "Scan to HDD". . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
CHECKING AN IMAGE OF A STORED FILE . . . . 6-45
• IMAGE CHECK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
RETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE
JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6-1
DOCUMENT FILING
DOCUMENT FILING
This section provides information that you should know before using the document filing function, including an overview
of document filing, the features and functions of document filing, and points to keep in mind when using document filing.
OVERVIEW
The document filing function allows you to save the document image of a copy or image send job, or the data of a print
job, as a file on the machine's hard drive.
The stored file can be retrieved and printed or transmitted as needed.
Saving a file
Retrieving and using a stored file
Internet Fax
Send
Print
Scan
Fax
Print
Copy
Hard drive
Scan to HDD
Hard drive
Document information used in any of the modes
is saved to the hard drive as a file.
A stored file can be printed. A stored file can also be
sent as a fax or sent to another computer over a
network. A stored file can also be kept for archive
purposes.
TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING
There are three ways to save a file using document filing: "Quick File", "File", and "Scan to HDD".
Quick File
As a copy, scan send, or other job is performed, this function saves the document data to the hard
drive. Use this function when you want to quickly and easily store document data without specifying a
file name or other information.
The stored file can also be used by other people. Do not use this method to save files that you do not
want others to use, such as files containing sensitive or confidential information.
File
As a copy, scan send, or other job is performed, this function saves the document data to the hard
drive. Unlike Quick File, various types of information can be appended to the file when the file is saved
to enable efficient file management.
A password can also be established to prevent the file from being retrieved by others.
Scan to HDD
This function scans a document and stores it as a file. Like File, various types of information can be
appended to the file when it is stored.
6-2
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
USES OF DOCUMENT FILING
Quickly using a file
Example: You prepared handouts consisting of numerous pages for a meeting, however, another handout is
needed for a newly added participant.
The handout was not saved using document filing
The handout was saved using document filing
Ratio and special mode settings must be
reselected.
The stored file is simply retrieved and
printed.
The numerous original pages must all be
rescanned.
Not likely to be completed in time for the meeting...
Printing is accomplished quickly and the handout is ready in
time for the meeting!
Copy settings must be reselected and the original must be
rescanned.
As indicated above, to obtain another set of output, the
settings must be selected all over again. If you don't remember
the settings, much effort may be expended to get the same
output result as the previous time.
By retrieving a job stored using document filing, there is no
need to reselect copy settings or rescan the original.
The job can be retrieved and printed using the same settings
quickly and easily.
As shown in the example, storing a job with the document filing function frees you of the need to rescan the original and
select settings, saving considerable time.
Convenient for managing frequently used documents
Example: Managing a large number of business forms
Not using document filing
It takes time to find the form you need.
Using document filing
The required form can be easily retrieved from the
document filing list,
and document management is much more efficient.
File Retrieve
Scan to HDD
HDD Status
Ex Data Access
Search
Main Folder
File Name
s?
Daily
Back
Date
1
day form
li
Paid ho
User Name
Busi
ness
repo
rt for
ms?
trip f
orms
?
Paid holiday forms
Name 1
04/04/2010
Daily report forms
Name 1
04/04/2010
Business trip forms
Name 1
04/04/2010
Daily report forms
Name 1
04/04/2010
Daily report forms
Name 1
04/04/2010
Switch Display
All Files
2
Multi-File Print
Application forms, report forms, and other business forms can be stored on the hard drive for easy retrieval, letting you
print the number of copies you need when you need them.
6-3
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
BEFORE USING DOCUMENT FILING
This section provides information that you should know before using the document filing function.
Folders
Three types of folders are used to store files by document filing.
Folders on the hard drive
Quick File
Folder
Main Folder
Custom Folder
Quick File Folder
Documents scanned using the [Quick File] key are stored in this folder. A user name and file name are automatically
assigned to each job.
Main Folder
Documents scanned using the [File] key are stored in this folder.
When you store a job in the Main folder, you can specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name.
A password can also be set when storing a file ([Confidential] save).
Custom Folder
Folders with custom names can be created inside this folder.
When a document is scanned using the [File] key and a folder is selected, the document is stored in the specified folder.
Like the Main folder, a custom folder allows you to specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name when storing a job.
Passwords can be established for custom folders and for files saved in custom folders.
A maximum of 1000 custom folders can be created on the hard drive.
Items convenient to store
When storing a job using "File" or "Scan to HDD", it is convenient to store the items below. These settings are not
needed when storing a job using "Quick File".
User Name
This is necessary if you will be assigning a user name to stored files. User names are stored in "User List" in
the system settings (administrator). A user name is also used as a search condition when searching for a file.
Custom Folder
The Main folder is initially available as a location for storing files by "File" and "Scan to HDD". When
custom folders have been created using "Document Filing Control" in the system settings, a custom
folder can be specified as a location for storing files. A password can also be established for a custom
folder to restrict access to the folder.
My Folder
"My Folder" is specified using "User List" in the system settings (administrator). A previously created
custom folder can be selected as "My Folder", or a new folder created as "My Folder". When "My
Folder" has been configured and user authentication is used, "My Folder" will always be selected as
the destination of "File" and "Scan to HDD".
• System Settings: Document Filing Control (page 7-29)
This is used to create custom folders for document filing. A password can also be established for a custom folder.
• System Settings (Administrator): User List
This is used to store a user name and specify a folder as "My Folder".
6-4
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Approximate number of pages and files that can be stored by document
filing
Combined total number of pages and total number of files that can be stored in custom
folders and in the Main folder
Examples of original types
Full color
original
(Text and photo
example)
Number of pages*
Number of files
Max. 2500
Size:
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
Max. 3000
Black & white
original
(Text)
Max. 5500
Size:
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
Number of pages and number of files that can be stored in the Quick File folder
Examples of original types
Full color
original
(Text and photo
example)
Number of pages*
Number of files
Max. 800
Size:
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
Max. 1000
Black & white
original
(Text)
Max. 1700
Size:
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
* The indicated numbers are guidelines for the number of pages that can be stored when all pages are full color, and
when all pages are black & white.
Copying in sort mode uses the same memory area as the Quick File folder. For this reason, when too much data has
been stored in the Quick File folder, it may not be possible to perform a large copy job using sort mode. Delete
unneeded files.
The original types above are examples to make the explanation easier to understand. The actual number of pages and
number of files that can be stored will vary depending on the contents of the original images and the settings when the
files are stored.
6-5
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Automatic deletion of files
You can have document filing data in specified folders automatically deleted at regular intervals by specifying the folders
and the time. Periodic deletion of files stored in the machine helps to prevent the leaking of sensitive information and
frees space on the hard drive.
Every day, every week, or every month can be selected for the deletion cycle, and a time can be set for each selection.
For example, you can set file deletion to take place every week on Friday at 6:00 PM.
Automatic file deletion settings are configured in "Automatic Deletion of File Settings" in the system settings
(administrator).
To check the settings, print the following list in the system settings.
To check information on the deletion cycle: Print the "Administrator Settings List" in the system settings (administrator).
To check information on the folders selected for file deletion: Print the "Document Filing Folder List" in the system settings.
When "Automatic Deletion of File Settings" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), all files in the specified folders
will be deleted when the set time arrives. Take care not to store files that you wish to keep in folders specified for file deletion.
• System Settings: Document Filing Control (page 7-29)
This shows a list of the folder names for document filing.
• System Settings (Administrator): Automatic Deletion of File Settings
Configure settings for automatic deletion at regular intervals of files stored using the document filing function.
• System Settings (Administrator): Administrator Settings List
Use this to print a list of the administrator settings, including document filing settings.
6-6
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Files
When a file is saved using "File", the following information can be appended.
User Name: Name 1
File Name: Meeting handout
Password: 12345678
"Meeting minutes" folder
Saving a file with this information allows you to distinguish it from other files.
User name: Use this to specify the owner of the file. The user name must first be stored in "User List" in the system
settings.
File Name: A file name can be entered.
Folder:
Select which folder the file will be saved in.
Confidential: A password (5 to 8 digits) can be established to prevent others from using the file.
The above information cannot be specified when a file is saved with Quick File.
System Settings (Administrator): User List
This is used to store user names.
IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING DOCUMENT FILING
Note the following when using document filing:
• Files saved using "Quick File" are assigned the "Sharing" property. "Sharing" files can be retrieved and printed or
transmitted by anyone, and thus Quick File should not be used to save sensitive or confidential documents that you do
not wish others to use.
• When saving a file with "File", use the "Confidential" property. A password can be set for a "Confidential" file to
prevent the file from being used by other people. Take care to keep the password of a stored "Confidential" file secret.
• The property of a stored "Confidential" file can be changed to "Sharing" by "Property Change" when the file is used.
Do not store sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be used by others.
• Except in cases provided for by law, SHARP Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages that result from the
leaking of sensitive information due to manipulation by a third party of any data saved using the Quick File function or
File function, or incorrect operation of the Quick File function or File function by the operator that saves the data.
6-7
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODE
In copy or image send mode, the original can be saved as a file on the hard drive at the same time it is copied or
transmitted. In addition, Scan to HDD can be used to save the scanned data of an original to the hard drive without
copying or transmitting the data.
Copy mode
The original is saved as an image file at the same time it is copied.
(1)
(1) Touch the [COPY] key.
(2)
COPY
(2) Touch the [File] key or the [Quick File]
key.
DOCUMENT
FILING
IMAGE SEND
Ready to scan for copy.
0
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Plain
81/2x11
Output
1. 81/2x11
2. 51/2x81/2
3. 81/2x14
4. 81/2x11
Exposure
Auto
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
Paper Select
Original
100%
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Preview
Image Send mode
Example: Base screen of scan mode
The original is saved as an image file at the same time it is scanned and transmitted.
(2)
(1) Touch the [IMAGE SEND] key.
(1)
COPY
IMAGE SEND
(2) Touch the [Scan] tab.
DOCUMENT
FILING
Ready to send.
Scan
Address Book
(3) Touch the [File] key or the [Quick File]
key.
Resend
Internet Fax
Original
Fax
Scan:
Address Entry
Exposure
Send Settings
Resolution
200X200dpi
Address Review
File Format
PDF
File
Color Mode
Mono2
Quick File
Special Modes
USB Mem. Scan
8½x11
Send:
PC Scan
Auto
Auto
PDF
Preview
(3)
6-8
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Scan to HDD mode
The scanned original is saved as an image file. Neither printing nor transmission are performed when Scan to HDD is
used.
(2)
COPY
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(1)
(2) Touch the [Scan to HDD] tab.
DOCUMENT
FILING
IMAGE SEND
Ready to scan to HDD.
Press [Start] to scan original.
File Retrieve
File
Information
Scan to HDD
Original
Exposure
HDD Status
Scan:
Ex Data Access
8½x11
Store:
Auto
Auto
Resolution
200X200dpi
Color Mode
Mono2
Special Modes
Preview
[File] key and [Quick File] key
The "File" key and/or "Quick File" key will not appear in the base screen of copy mode or image send mode if one or both of
the keys has been changed to a different function using "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu. In this case, touch
the [Special Modes] key in the base screen of either mode. Document filing can be performed by touching the [Quick File]
key or [File] key in the special modes menu.
Using document filing in print mode
To use document filing in print mode, select document filing in the printer driver. For more information on using document
filing in print mode, see "CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS" (page 3-52) in "3. PRINTER".
Using document filing in PC-Fax/PC-I-Fax mode
To use document filing in PC-Fax or PC-I-Fax mode, select document filing settings in the PC-Fax driver. For more
information, see Help in the PC-Fax driver.
System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.
6-9
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING
MODE
Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key in the touch panel to open the base screen of document filing mode.
Files stored on the hard drive in the machine can be retrieved from this screen.
When user authentication is used and My Folder is configured, the file selection screen of My Folder will appear.
If the user that logged in does not have My Folder configured, the folder selection screen will appear.
☞ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-27)
☞ FILE SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-28)
(1)
COPY
DOCUMENT
FILING
IMAGE SEND
(4)
(2)
File Retrieve
Scan to HDD
HDD Status
Search
Folder Select
(3)
(5)
(6)
Ex Data Access
Main Folder
Quick File Folder
User 1
User 2
User 3
User 4
User 5
User 6
User 7
User 8
1
2
User 10
User 9
All Folders
(1)
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST
(5)
Mode switch keys
[File Retrieve] tab
(6)
Touch this tab to retrieve a file stored by document filing.
The folder selection screen will appear.
☞ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-27)
(3)
(4)
[External Data Access] tab
[Search] key
Touch this key to search for a file stored in a folder.
You can search using the user name, file name, or folder
name.
☞ SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE (page 6-48)
[Scan to HDD] tab
Touch this key to select Scan to HDD. Neither printing
nor transmission are performed.
The file will be stored in the Main folder or a custom
folder.
☞ SAVING A DOCUMENT FILE ONLY (Scan to HDD)
(page 6-18)
UVWXYZ
This can be selected when an FTP server is stored or a
USB memory device is connected to the machine.
☞ "DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM THE MACHINE"
(page 3-55) in "3. PRINTER"
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and
document filing modes.
To switch to document filing mode, touch the
[DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2)
(7)
(7)
When retrieving a stored file, use this to select the
folder where the file is stored.
☞ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-27)
[HDD Status] tab
Touch this key to check how much of the machine's hard
drive is being used.
The amount used is shown as a percentage.
HDD Status
Main Folder:10%
Custom Folder:40%
0
25
Free Space:50%
50
75
Quick File Folder:20%
0
25
50
100%
Free Space:80%
75
100%
6-10
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT
FILING
This section explains how to save an original as an image file using the Quick File, File, and Scan to HDD functions of
document filing mode.
SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File"
When copying, printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, print mode, or image send mode (excluding USB
memory scan mode), "Quick File" can be selected to save an image of the document to the Quick File folder.
The image can be retrieved at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate the
original.
As an example, the procedure for storing a document in the Quick File folder while copying is explained below.
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
After placing the original, specify the original size.
Copy mode:
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE (page 2-29)
Fax mode:
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 4-47)
Scanner/Internet Fax mode:
☞ Specifying the send size of the image (page 5-62)
Special Modes
Plain
81/2x11
Touch the [Quick File] key.
2-Sided Copy
Output
1. 81/2x11
2. 51/2x81/2
3. 81/2x14
4. 81/2x11
Exposure
2
Auto
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
Original
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Preview
6-11
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Touch the [OK] key.
Scanned data is automatically stored
in the quick file folder. Do not store
confidential data to the folder.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the [Quick
File] key will be highlighted.
OK
3
To cancel Quick File...
Touch the [Quick File] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted after you touch the [OK] key.
Select copy settings and then press the [START] key.
4
• Copying begins and the scanned document image is saved to the hard drive.
The selected copy settings are also saved.
• To prevent accidental saving of the document, the message "The scanned data is stored in the quick file folder." appears
for 6 seconds (default setting) after the [START] key is pressed.
The message display time can be changed using "Message Time Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
• If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning of one page finishes, replace it with the next page and press the [START] key.
Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then press the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
When a file is stored using Quick File, the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Month-Day-Year_Hour-Minute-Second
(Example: Copy_04042010_112030AM)
Stored to: Quick File Folder
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.
Only the file name and location of a file stored in the Quick File Folder can be changed.
To cancel Quick File...
Touch the [Quick File] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is no longer highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Delete All Quick Files
With the exception of protected files, all files in the quick file folder can be deleted at once.
Settings can be configured to delete all files by key operation and to have all files automatically deleted when the power is
turned on.
6-12
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
SAVING A FILE WITH "File"
When copying, printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, print mode, or image send mode (excluding USB
memory scan mode), "File" can be selected to save an image of the document to the Main folder or a previously created
custom folder. The image can be retrieved at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having
to locate the original.
As an example, the procedure for using "File" while copying is explained below.
Place the original.
1
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
After placing the original, specify the original size.
Copy mode:
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE (page 2-29)
Fax mode:
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (page 4-47)
Scanner/Internet Fax mode:
☞ Specifying the send size of the image (page 5-62)
Special Modes
Plain
81/2x11
Touch the [File] key.
2-Sided Copy
Output
1. 81/2x11
2. 51/2x81/2
3. 81/2x14
4. 81/2x11
Exposure
2
Auto
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
Original
100%
Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
(1)
File Information
Preview
(2)
Cancel
OK
Select the "File" settings.
(1) Select file information settings.
To select the user name, file name, folder, and
confidential setting, see "FILE INFORMATION" (page
6-15).
• Specifying a user name: (page 6-15)
• Assigning a file name: (page 6-16)
• Specifying the folder: (page 6-16)
• Storing a file as a confidential file: (page 6-17)
After configuring the above settings, you will return to this
screen. Go to the next step.
If you do not wish to assign a user name or other
information to the file, go to the next step.
Confidential
Password
3
User Name
User Unknown
File Name
Copy_04042010_112030AM
Stored to
Main Folder
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the
[File] key will be highlighted.
6-13
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Select copy settings and then press the [START] key.
4
• Copying begins and the scanned document image is saved to the hard drive.
The selected copy settings are also saved.
• For the procedure for placing the original, see step 4 of "SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File"" (page 6-11).
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
When a file is stored using File without appending file information, the following user name and file name are automatically
assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Month-Day-Year_Hour-Minute-Second
(Example: Copy_04042010_112030AM)
Stored to: Main Folder
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.
To cancel the File operation...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
6-14
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
FILE INFORMATION
This section explains the settings that are configured in step 3 of "SAVING A FILE WITH "File"" (page 6-13). Specifying
a user name, file name, folder, and confidential setting makes it easier to manage and search for a file. In addition, when
confidential is selected and a password is established, other people will not be able to view the file without permission.
Specifying a user name
File Information
Cancel
Touch the [User Name] key.
OK
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used
for login is automatically selected. In this case, this step is not
needed.
Confidential
Password
1
User Name
User Unknown
File Name
Copy_04042010_112030AM
Stored to
Main Folder
The user name must be previously stored in "User List" in the system settings (administrator).
(B)
(A)
Cancel
User Name
6
12
Touch the desired user name in the list
of user names that is displayed.
(2)
OK
(1) Select the user name.
18
Name 2
Name 1
There are two ways to select the user name:
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
The touched user name is highlighted.
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch
the key of the correct name.
(B) Touch the
key.
An area for entering the "Registration No." [----]
appears in the message display. Enter the
"Registration No." set during user registration. This
will allow you to select the user name.
1
Name 3
Name 4
Name 5
Name 6
Name 7
Name 8
Name 9
Name 10
Name 11
Name 12
2
2
ABC
User
All
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
The user name that you touched is selected and you
return to the screen of step 1. The selected user name
appears.
6-15
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Assigning a file name
A file name can be assigned to the file.
Cancel
File Information
Touch the [File Name] key.
OK
A text entry screen will appear. Enter the file name and touch
the [OK] key.
A maximum of 30 characters can be entered.
Confidential
Password
User Name
User Unknown
File Name
Copy_04042010_112030AM
Stored to
Main Folder
Specifying the folder
Cancel
File Information
Touch the [Stored to:] key.
OK
Confidential
Password
1
User Name
Name 1
File Name
file-01
Stored to
Main Folder
If a user name with a "My Folder" setting is selected, "My Folder" of that user will automatically be selected.
(1)
Select the folder in which you want to
store the file.
(2)
OK
Stored to:
Main Folder
2
User 1
User 2
User 3
User 4
User 5
User 6
User 7
User 8
User 9
User 10
All Folders
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST
1
(1) Touch the key of the folder where you want
to store the file.
If a password has been set for the folder, a password
entry screen appears. Enter the password of the touched
folder with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits) and touch the
[OK] key.
2
UVWXYZ
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
6-16
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Storing a file as a confidential file
A password can be set for the file to prevent others from viewing it. Set a password (5 to 8 digits) with the numeric keys.
(1)
Enable the confidential property.
(2)
Cancel
File Information
OK
(1) Select the [Confidential] checkbox so that a
checkmark
appears.
Confidential
1
Confidential mode is enabled and a password can be
entered.
Password
User Name
Name 1
File Name
file-01
Stored to
User 1
Password
(2) Touch the [Password] key.
Cancel
OK
Enter a password (5 to 8 digits) with the
numeric keys and touch the [OK] key.
As each digit is entered, "-" changes to " ".
2
Enter password via the 10-Key pad.
6-17
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
SAVING A DOCUMENT FILE ONLY (Scan to
HDD)
Scan to HDD is used to store a scanned document in the Main folder or a custom folder. Neither printing nor
transmission are performed.
"Scan to HDD" SCREEN
The following screen appears when the [Scan to HDD] tab is touched in document filing mode. Touch the keys below to
select Scan to HDD settings.
The current setting of each key appears to the right of the key.
COPY
DOCUMENT
FILING
IMAGE SEND
Ready to scan to HDD.
Press [Start] to scan original.
File Retrieve
(1)
File
Information
Scan to HDD
HDD Status
Original
Scan:
(3)
(1)
Auto
(4)
200X200dpi
(5)
(6)
Color Mode
Mono2
(7)
(8)
Special Modes
Preview
(7)
[File Information] key
[Color Mode] key
Use this key to select the color mode when storing a
document.
☞ [Color Mode] key (page 6-20)
(8)
[Special Modes] key
key
This key appears when a special mode or 2-sided
scanning is selected. Touch the key to display the
selected special modes.
Use this key to select special modes for Scan to HDD.
☞ Special modes screen for Scan to HDD (page 6-21)
(3)
Store:
Resolution
Information can be appended to a file stored by Scan to
HDD. The settings are configured in the same way as file
information for "File".
☞ FILE INFORMATION (page 6-15)
(2)
8½x11
Auto
Exposure
(2)
Ex Data Access
[Preview] key
Touch to check the image to be stored before performing
Scan to HDD.
☞ Checking the image before storing it (Preview)
(page 6-22)
(4)
[Original] key
Touch this key to set the scanning size, storing size and
orientation of the original, and select 2-sided scanning
settings.
☞ [Original] key (page 6-19)
(5)
[Exposure] key
Touch this key to select the exposure for scanning.
(6)
[Resolution] key
Use this key to select the resolution that will be used
when the file is transmitted.
When "Long Size" is specified, only resolution settings of
300 X 300 dpi and under can be selected.
6-18
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
[Original] key
When the [Original] key is touched, the following screen appears. This screen is used to change the original size and
select scanning settings for 2-sided originals.
(1)
(2)
(4)
Scan to HDD/Original
OK
Scan Size
100% Store Size
8½x11
Auto
Original
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
(3)
(1) Touch the [Scan Size] key.
If the original is a non-standard size that cannot be detected by auto original size detection, touch the [Scan Size] key and specify the original size.
(2) Touch the [Store Size] key.
If you wish to store the file at a different size than the original size, touch the [Store Size] key and change the store size.
(3) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the
key. If the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the
key.
If the original is a 2-sided original, touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the [2-Sided Tablet] key as appropriate for the original type.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
The settings are stored and you return to the Scan to HDD screen.
[Exposure] key
To adjust the exposure, touch the [Exposure] key.
Select an appropriate exposure mode for the original and touch the
When finished, touch the [OK] key.
or
key to adjust the exposure level.
(3)
Scan to HDD/Exposure
OK
Auto
Original Image Type
Manual
Exposure
1
3
5
Text
Text/
Prtd.Photo
Text/Photo
Printed
Photo
Photo
Map
Moiré
Reduction
(2)
(A)
(1)
(1) Select the appropriate original type for the original to be scanned.
(2) Select [Auto] or [Manual].
If you selected [Manual], touch the
lighter image, touch the
key.)
When the exposure is set to [Auto], the
or
key to adjust the exposure. (For a darker image, touch the
key. For a
keys cannot be used.
(A): Moirè Reduction
To reduce the moirè effect when scanning printed matter, touch the [Moirè Reduction] checkbox so that a checkmark
appears.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
The settings are stored and you return to the Scan to HDD screen.
6-19
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
[Color Mode] key
Touch the [Color Mode] key to open the color mode setting screen for Scan to HDD.
Scan to HDD/Color Mode
OK
Auto
Full Color
Color Mode
Grayscale
Mono2
The following settings can be selected for the scanning color when the [START] key is pressed.
Mode
Scanning method
Auto
The machine detects whether the original is color or black and white and automatically
selects full color or black and white (grayscale) scanning.
Full Color
The original is scanned in full color. This mode is best for full color originals such as
catalogues.
Even when the original is black and white, it is scanned as a full color original.
Grayscale
The colors in the original are scanned in black and white as shades of gray (grayscale).
Mono 2
Colors in the original are scanned as black or white. This mode is best for text-only
originals.
When you have finished selecting the mode, touch the [OK] key.
6-20
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Special modes screen for Scan to HDD
When the [Special Modes] key is touched, the following screen appears. For more information on each setting, see
"SPECIAL MODES" (page 5-74) in "5. SCANNER / INTERNET FAX".
(1)
(2)
(3)
OK
Scan to HDD/Special Modes
Erase
Special Modes
(1)
Card Shot
Slow Scan
Mode
Original
Count
(4)
(5)
(3)
[Erase] key
[Card Shot] key
This function lets you store the front and reverse sides of
a card as a single file.
[Job Build] key
This function lets you separate a many-page original into
sets, scan each set using the automatic document
feeder, and store all pages as a single file. Use this
function when there are more original pages than can be
placed at once in the auto document feeder.
The erase function is used to erase shadow lines on
images produced when scanning thick originals or books
on the document glass.
(2)
Job
Build
(4)
[Slow Scan Mode] key
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals
using the automatic document feeder. This function helps
prevent thin originals from misfeeding.
(5)
[Original Count] key
When using the automatic document feeder to scan an
original, you can check whether or not the correct
number of pages were scanned before storing the
document.
6-21
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Checking the image before storing it (Preview)
If you touch the [Preview] key and then start Scan to HDD, the screen below appears.
Before the scanned data is stored, you can check a preview of the scanned image in this screen and return to the Scan
to HDD settings screen to change settings
Reset
Preview
Color
Function Rev.
Display Rotation
0001
(1)
(1)
Start
Storing
0010
(2)
(3)
(3)
Preview image
This shows an image of the selected file.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the
keys to
scroll.)
(2)
Change page keys
(5) (6) (7)
"Display Rotation" key
This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.
(4)
[Start Storing] key
This starts Scan to HDD.
(5)
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
•
keys: Go to the first or the last page.
•
keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
(4)
Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order "Full Page", "Twice",
"4 Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in
the file, not just the displayed page.
• Page number display:This shows the total number of
pages and the current page number.
You can touch the current page
number key and enter a number with
the numeric keys to go to that page
number.
(6)
[Function Rev.] key
Use this to check special mode settings and original
settings.
(7)
[Reset] key
Use this key if you need to change settings after
checking an image or settings. You will return to the
setting screen.
Only the original settings can be changed after the
preview image is viewed.
• A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. Differs from the actual storage result.
• Depending on the size of the image, part of the image may be clipped off in the preview screen on the touch panel.
6-22
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
PERFORMING "Scan to HDD"
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Placing the original on the document glass
Portrait original
cba
Align the top edge of the
original against the side of
the document glass with
the scale.
1
Landscape original
cba
(4)
COPY
(2)
(1)
(3)
DOCUMENT
FILING
IMAGE SEND
File
Information
Scan to HDD
Original
Exposure
2
Switch to document filing mode and
select Scan to HDD settings.
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
Ready to scan to HDD.
Press [Start] to scan original.
File Retrieve
Align the right side of the
original against the side of
the document glass with
the scale.
HDD Status
Scan:
8½x11
Auto
Resolution
200X200dpi
Color Mode
Mono2
(2) Touch the [Scan to HDD] tab.
Ex Data Access
Store:
Auto
If you do not wish to select settings, go to the next step.
(3) Select the original size, exposure,
resolution, color mode, and special modes.
See ""Scan to HDD" SCREEN" (page 6-18).
Special Modes
(4) Touch the [File Information] key.
The settings are the same as for "File". See "FILE
INFORMATION" (page 6-15).
Preview
If the original is 2-sided, be sure to touch the [Original] key and then touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the [2-Sided
Tablet] key as appropriate for the original.
Press the [START] key.
3
Scanning begins.
For the procedure for placing the original, see step 4 of "SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File"" (page 6-11).
When Preview is enabled, the preview screen appears.
☞ Checking the image before storing it (Preview) (page 6-22)
A beep will sound to indicate that Scan to HDD is completed.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
6-23
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
When Scan to HDD is performed without appending file information, the following user name and file name are automatically
assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Month-Day-Year_Hour-Minute-Second
(Example: HDD_04042010_112030AM)
Stored to: Main Folder
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.
6-24
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
USING STORED FILES
This section explains how to retrieve a file stored by document filing and print or transmit the file.
SEQUENCE FOR USING A STORED FILE
This section explains the basic procedure for retrieving and using a stored file. The screens and procedures differ
depending on whether or not user authentication is enabled.
See the sequence that applies to your situation.
For information on user authentication procedures, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" (page 1-17) in "1. BEFORE USING
THE MACHINE". For information on enabling user authentication and storing user names, see "User Control" (page
7-51) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
Files stored by document filing can also be retrieved and used from the Web pages. Click [Document Operation] and then
[Document Filing] in the Web page menu, and select the folder that contains the file you wish to use.
You can also show a preview of a stored file in the web pages.
Change the mode.
COPY
File Retrieve
IMAGE SEND
Scan to HDD
Switch to document filing mode.
☞ BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING MODE (page
6-10)
DOCUMENT
FILING
HDD Status
Ex Data Access
Search
Folder Select
Main Folder
Quick File Folder
1
User 1
User 2
User 3
User 4
User 5
User 6
User 7
User 8
User 10
User 9
All Folders
2
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST
UVWXYZ
6-25
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Select the file that you wish to retrieve.
File Retrieve
Scan to HDD
HDD Status
Ex Data Access
Search
Main Folder
File Name
User Name
Back
Date
1
file-01
Name 1
04/04/2010
file-02
Name 2
04/04/2010
file-03.tiff
Name 3
04/04/2010
file-04
Name 4
04/04/2010
file-05.tiff
Name 5
04/04/2010
Switch Display
All Files
2
• Select the folder in the folder selection screen.
When the folder is selected, the files in the folder will
appear. Select the file that you wish to retrieve.
• Thumbnail images of the stored files can be displayed for
file selection.
☞ FILE SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-28)
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-30)
• The search function can be used to retrieve a file.
☞ SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE (page 6-48)
Multi-File Print
Select the operation.
Cancel
Job Settings
file-01
Name 1
8½x11
Mono2
Select the job.
Print
Send
Move
Delete
Property
Change
Image Check
Detail
Select the desired operation and configure settings.
☞ JOB SETTINGS SCREEN (page 6-31)
☞ PRINTING A STORED FILE (page 6-32)
☞ SENDING A STORED FILE (page 6-38)
☞ PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES (page 6-40)
☞ MOVING A STORED FILE (page 6-42)
☞ DELETING A STORED FILE (page 6-44)
☞ CHECKING AN IMAGE OF A STORED FILE (page 6-45)
6-26
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
FOLDER AND FILE SELECTION SCREENS
To use a file stored by document filing, the folder and file must be selected. The folder selection screen and file selection
screen are explained below.
FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN
Two different screens appear depending on whether or not user authentication is enabled on the machine.
When user authentication is not enabled
(1)
(2)
When user authentication is enabled
(3)
(1)
Search
Folder Select
Main Folder
(2)
(3)
My Folder
Folder Select
Quick File Folder
(5)
Main Folder
Quick File Folder
1
User 1
User 2
User 3
1
User 1
User 2
User 4
User 3
User 4
User 5
User 6
User 5
User 6
User 7
User 8
User 7
User 8
User 9
User 10
User 9
All Folders
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST
2
UVWXYZ
All Folders
(4)
[Main Folder] key
JKLMN
OPQRST
UVWXYZ
Index tabs
All folders appear on the [All Folders] tab.
Touch a tab to display the custom folders whose initials
(set in "Document Filing Control" in the system settings)
match the letters on the tab.
Custom folder keys
The custom folders that have been created using
"Document Filing Control" (page 7-29) in system settings
are displayed. Touch a key to display the files in that
folder.
If a password has been set for a custom folder, a
password entry screen will appear when the folder is
touched. The password must be entered.
(3)
EFGHI
(4)
Touch this key to retrieve a file from the Main folder. The
files in the Main folder will appear.
(2)
2
User 10
ABCD
(4)
(1)
Search
(5)
[My Folder] key
This key appears when user authentication is enabled.
Touch the key to display the file selection screen of "My
Folder".
[Quick File Folder] key
Touch this key to retrieve a file from the Quick File folder.
The files in the Quick File folder will appear.
☞ SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File" (page 6-11)
6-27
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
FILE SELECTION SCREEN
The file selection screen of the Quick File folder, Main folder, and custom folders is explained below.
The file selection screen can be displayed in "List screen" format or "Thumbnail screen" format. (To select the format,
see "(5) [Switch Display] key" below.)
This chapter assumes that the "List screen" format is selected.
(1)
(2)
File Retrieve
Scan to HDD
(3)
HDD Status
Ex Data Access
User Name
Back
Scan to HDD
HDD Status
Ex Data Access
Search
Main Folder
Back
04/04/2010
file-02
Name 2
04/04/2010
file-03.tiff
Name 3
04/04/2010
file-04
Name 4
04/04/2010
file-05.tiff
Name 5
04/04/2010
All Files
1
1
2
2
Display Items
8
Multi-File Print
aaa.tiff
bbb.tiff
ccc
ddd
eee.tiff
fff.tiff
ggg.tiff
hhh.tiff
All Files
Switch Display
Multi-File Print
(5)
(6)
(7)
(6)
[List screen]
[Thumbnail screen]
File keys
(3)
The stored files are displayed. An icon showing which mode
the file was stored from, the file name, the user name, and
the date the file was stored appear in each file key.
When a file is touched, the job setting screen appears.
Job icons
[Back] key
Touch this key to return to the base screen of document
filing mode.
☞ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-27)
(4)
Page key
When multiple pages exist, use this key to enter the
number of a page that you want to display. When the key
is touched, a page number entry screen appears. Enter
the desired page number (3 digits) with the numeric keys.
For example, to display page 3, enter "003".
Copy
Internet fax
transmission
Direct SMTP
transmission
Print
Fax
transmission
Scan to
E-mail
Scan to
HDD
Scan to
FTP
Scan to
Desktop
Scan to
Network
Folder
PC-Fax
transmission
PC-I-Fax
transmission
Broadcast
transmission
(5)
[Switch Display] key
The displayed file keys can be changed by job type and can
be displayed as thumbnail images. The currently selected
job type appears to the right of the [Switch Display] key. [All
Files] is initially selected. When the [Switch Display] key is
touched, the following screen appears.
Switch Display
Thumbnail screen
The first page of thumbnail images of the stored files appears.
The confidential icon ( ) will appear instead of a
thumbnail image for files stored as confidential files.
(2)
Sort Order
Date
Name 1
(5)
(1)
(4)
Date
file-01
Switch Display
(3)
File Retrieve
Search
Main Folder
File Name
(4) (1)
OK
Filter by Job
All Files
Scan
Copy
Internet Fax
Printer
Fax
Scan to HDD
[File Name] key, [User Name] key, [Date] key
Display Style
Use these keys to change the order of display of the file
keys. When one of the keys is touched,
or
appears in the key.
• When
appears in the [File Name] key or [User
Name] key, the files appear by file name or user name
in ascending order.
When
appears in the [Date] key, the files appear in
order from the oldest date.
• When
appears in the [File Name] key or [User
Name] key, the files appear by file name or user name
in descending order.
When
appears in the [Date] key, the files appear in
order from the most recent date.
6-28
List
Thumbnail
If you wish to display only the file keys of a specific job
type, select the job type from the job type display at the
top of the screen.
To display thumbnail images of the files, touch the
[Thumbnail] key. To change from the thumbnail screen to
the list screen, touch the [List] key. When finished, touch
the [OK] key.
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
(6)
[Multi-File Print] key
Touch this to select multiple files in a folder for printing.
☞ MULTI-FILE PRINTING (page 6-34)
(7)
Sort Order / Display Items
This can be used in the thumbnail screen.
The order of display of the file thumbnails can be
changed in "Sort Order".
Select "Date
", "Date
", "File Name
", "File Name
", "User Name
", or "User Name
".
The number of displayed file thumbnails can be changed
in "Display Items".
Select 2 thumbnails or 8 thumbnails.
6-29
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
SELECTING A FILE
This section explains how to select a file to be used.
(2)
Select the folder that contains the file
you wish to use.
(1)
COPY
DOCUMENT
FILING
IMAGE SEND
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
File Retrieve
Scan to HDD
HDD Status
The folder selection screen will appear. If a different tab
appears, touch the [File Retrieve] tab.
When user authentication is enabled and "My Folder" is
configured in "User List" in the system settings, the
custom folder specified as "My Folder" opens. To display
the folder selection screen, touch the [Back] key.
Ex Data Access
Search
Folder Select
Main Folder
Quick File Folder
1
1
User 1
User 2
User 3
User 4
User 5
User 6
User 7
User 8
User 9
User 10
All Folders
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST
2
(2) Touch the key of the folder that contains the
desired file.
UVWXYZ
If a password is set for the selected folder, a password
entry screen will appear.
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits)
and touch the [OK] key.
Search
Main Folder
File Name
User Name
Back
Date
1
2
file-01
Name 1
04/04/2010
file-02
Name 2
04/04/2010
file-03.tiff
Name 3
04/04/2010
file-04
Name 4
04/04/2010
file-05.tiff
Name 5
04/04/2010
Switch Display
All Files
2
Touch the key of the desired file.
If a password is set for the selected file, a password entry
screen will appear.
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits) and
touch the [OK] key.
Multi-File Print
• Touch the [Switch Display] key to display the keys of a particular mode such as copy or scanner mode, or to display
thumbnail images of the files.
The [Switch Display] key allows you to quickly find a file.
• You can touch the [File Name] key, the [User Name] key, or the [Date] key to change the order of display of the files.
• The [Multi-File Print] key can be touched to select multiple files in a folder for printing.
☞ MULTI-FILE PRINTING (page 6-34)
6-30
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
JOB SETTINGS SCREEN
When a file key is touched, the following screen appears. Touch the key of the operation that you wish to perform and
select settings.
(1)
File Retrieve
Scan to HDD
HDD Status
Ex Data Access
Search
Main Folder
Cancel
Job Settings
Back
file-01
File Name
User Name
(2)
Date
Name 1
8½x11
Mono2
Select the job.
1
file-01
Name 1
04/04/2010
file-02
Name 2
04/04/2010
file-03.tiff
Name 3
04/04/2010
file-04
Name 4
04/04/2010
Name 5
04/04/2010
file-05.tiff
Switch Display
All Files
2
(8)
File display
[Cancel] key
(9)
Touch this key to cancel the operation and return to the
file selection screen.
(3)
Delete
Image Check
Detail
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
[Image Check] key
[Detail] key
Touch this key to show detailed information on the
selected file.
When this key is touched, the following screen appears.
[Print] key
Touch this key to print the selected file.
☞ PRINTING A STORED FILE (page 6-32)
(4)
Move
Property
Change
An image of the stored file appears.
☞ CHECKING AN IMAGE OF A STORED FILE (page
6-45)
This shows information on the currently selected file (job
icon, file name, user name, store size, and color mode).
(2)
Send
Multi-File Print
(3)
(1)
Print
OK
Job Settings / Detail
File Name
[Move] key
file-01
Name 1
Folder:Main Folder
Use this procedure to change the location of a file (move
a file to a different folder).
☞ MOVING A STORED FILE (page 6-42)
(5)
[Send] key
This is used to send a stored file by fax, Internet fax, scan
send, or other method.
☞ SENDING A STORED FILE (page 6-38)
(6)
[Delete] key
Touch this key to delete a file that is no longer needed.
☞ DELETING A STORED FILE (page 6-44)
(7)
[Property Change] key
Use this key to change the property ("Sharing", "Protect",
or "Confidential") of a stored file.
☞ PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES (page 6-40)
6-31
Size:8½x11
Resolution:600X600dpi
Date:04/04/2010 11:20 AM
Color / B/W: Mono2
Data Size:40B
Pages:10
Document
Style:
Special
Modes:
Output:
File Type:
If you wish to change the file name, touch the [File Name]
key in this screen.
A text entry screen will appear. Enter the desired file
name.
The
key appears when a special mode is selected.
Touch the
key to display the special mode selection
confirmation screen.
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
PRINTING A STORED FILE
A file stored using document filing can be retrieved and printed when needed. The settings used when the file was
stored are also stored, and thus the file can be printed again using those settings. The file can also be modified before
printing by changing the print settings.
After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-30)
Cancel
Job Settings
file-01
Name 1
8½x11
Touch the [Print] key.
Mono2
Select the job.
1
Print
Send
Move
Delete
Property
Change
Image Check
Detail
Cancel
Job Settings / Print
file-01
Name 1
8½x11
Mono2
Paper Select
2
Auto
Number of Prints
1
(1
999)
Print and Delete the Data
Output
Print and Save the Data
2-Sided
Special Modes
Touch the [Print and Delete the Data] key
or the [Print and Save the Data] key.
If the [Print and Delete the Data] key is touched, the files will be
automatically deleted after printing.
If the [Print and Save the Data] key is touched, the files will be
saved after printing.
Output settings, 2-sided printing, special modes, the number of
copies, and other settings can be selected. For more
information, see "PRINT SETTINGS SCREEN" (page 6-33).
• When a long size document is stored from Scan to HDD or scan mode, the file cannot be printed. A file stored from scan
mode that included fax mode or Internet fax mode destinations in a broadcast transmission can be printed.
• If print settings are changed when a stored file is printed, the only changed setting that can be stored is the number of
copies.
• The printing speed may be somewhat slow depending on the resolution and exposure mode settings of the stored file.
6-32
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
PRINT SETTINGS SCREEN
Cancel
Job Settings / Print
file-01
Name 1
8½x11
Mono2
Paper Select
(1)
Auto
1
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(5)
Number of Prints
(1
999)
(7)
Special Modes
(5)
[Paper Select] key
key
Use these keys to set the number of copies. The number
of copies can also be selected by directly touching the
numeric display and changing the number with the
numeric keys.
[Output] key
(6)
[2-Sided] key
Use this key to select the orientation of the image on the
reverse side of the paper for 2-sided printing. To have the
front and back images oriented in the same direction,
touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key. To have the front and
back images oriented opposite to each other, touch the
[2-Sided Tablet] key. Note that the size and orientation of
the saved image may cause these keys to have the
opposite effect. If neither of these keys is selected
(neither is highlighted), 1-sided printing will take place.
(4)
Print and Save the Data
2-Sided
Use this key to select Sort, Group or Staple Sort, and to
select the output tray.
(3)
(6)
Output
Use this key to set the paper size.
(2)
Print and Delete the Data
[Print and Delete the Data] key
Printing begins when this key is touched. When printing
is finished, the file will be automatically deleted.
(7)
[Print and Save the Data] key
Printing begins when this key is touched. The file will not
be deleted after printing.
[Special Modes] key
Touch this key to select "Margin Shift", "Pamphlet Style",
"2in1", or "Stamp".
This key does not appear if the file was saved from print
mode.
6-33
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
MULTI-FILE PRINTING
Multiple files in a folder can be selected for printing.
Search
Main Folder
File Name
User Name
Touch the [Multi-File Print] key.
Back
To select files of a particular job type, touch the [Switch
Display] key, select the job type from the screen that appears,
and touch the [OK] key.
Touch the [Switch Display] key to show only files of a selected
job type.
Date
1
1
file-01
Name 1
04/04/2010
file-02
Name 2
04/04/2010
file-03
Name 3
04/04/2010
file-04
Name 4
04/04/2010
file-05
Name 5
04/04/2010
Switch Display
Multi-File Print
All Files
Multi-File Print
Select All
File Name
2
OK
User Name
Select the keys of the files that you wish
to print.
Back
Date
1
file-01
Name 1
04/04/2010
file-02
Name 2
04/04/2010
file-03
Name 3
04/04/2010
file-04
Name 4
04/04/2010
file-05
Name 5
04/04/2010
Switch Display
All Files
Touch the keys of the files that you wish to print. Touched file
keys will be highlighted to indicate that they have been
selected.
To cancel the selection of a file, touch the highlighted file key so
that it is no longer highlighted.
To select all displayed file keys except those of confidential
files, touch the [Select All] key.
The [Batch Print] key can be used to print all files of a particular
user in a folder or all files that have the same password in a
folder. For more information, see "Batch printing" (page 6-36).
2
Batch Print
2
• Multi-file printing of confidential files is not possible.
• A file in the currently selected folder cannot be selected simultaneously with a file in a different folder.
• If the job type is changed with the [Switch Display] key or the screen is changed with the [Back] key while a file is
selected, the selection of the file will be canceled.
• When the [Select All] key is touched, it will change into the [Cancel All] key. To cancel the selection of all files that
was made with the [Select All] key, touch the [Cancel All] key.
• If all files are selected without using the [Select All] key, the key will not change into the [Cancel All] key. If selection
of all files is canceled without using the [Cancel All] key, the key will remain the [Cancel All] key.
Multi-File Print
Select All
File Name
User Name
OK
Back
Date
1
3
file-01
Name 1
04/04/2010
file-02
Name 2
04/04/2010
file-03
Name 3
04/04/2010
file-04
Name 4
04/04/2010
file-05
Name 5
04/04/2010
Switch Display
All Files
Touch the [OK] key
The selected file is entered and the screen changes to the print
screen.
2
Batch Print
6-34
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
(1)
Printing a selected file.
(2) (3)
Cancel
Job Settings / Print
Number of Selected Files: 5
Number of Prints
1
(1
999)
Print and Delete the Data
Print and Save the Data
Apply the Number from Stored Setting of
Each Job.
4
The number of selected files appears in the number of selected
files display.
If you wish to use the number of copies that was stored with the
file, go to step (3).
(1) Touch the [Apply the Number from Stored
Setting of Each Job] checkbox so that it is
not selected ( ).
(2) Set the number of copies with the
keys.
You can also directly touch the numeric display and
change the number with the numeric keys.
(3) Touch the [Print and Delete the Data] key or
the [Print and Save the Data] key.
If the [Print and Delete the Data] key is touched, the files
will be automatically deleted after printing.
If the [Print and Save the Data] key is touched, the files
will be saved after printing.
6-35
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Batch printing
All files in a folder that have the same user name and password can be printed at once. When the [Multi-File Print] key is
touched, it changes into the [Batch Print] key.
Select All
Multi-File Print
File Name
OK
User Name
Touch the [Batch Print] key.
Back
Date
1
1
file-01
Name 1
04/04/2010
file-02
Name 2
04/04/2010
file-03
Name 3
04/04/2010
file-04
Name 4
04/04/2010
file-05
Name 5
04/04/2010
All Files
Switch Display
2
Batch Print
Touch the [User Name] key.
Cancel
Batch Print
User 1/
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used
for login is automatically selected.
All Files
User Name
2
Password
Delete the
Data
Print and Delete the Data
Print and Save the Data
(B)(D)
(C)
Select the user name.
(A)
Cancel
User Name
6
12
Default User
Direct Entry
User
3
OK
18
Name 2
Name 1
ABC
Change PRT.No.
1
Name 3
Name 4
Name 5
Name 6
Name 7
Name 8
Name 9
Name 10
Name 11
Name 12
2
All
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
There are four ways to select the user name:
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
The touched user name is highlighted.
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch the
key of the correct name.
(B) Touch the [Default User] key.
The user name can be selected from the factory stored
users.
(C) Touch the
key.
An area for entering the "Registration No." [----] appears in
the message display. Enter the "Registration No." set
during user registration. This will allow you to select the
user name.
(D) Touch the [Direct Entry] key.
A text entry screen appears. Directly enter the user name.
After selecting the user name, touch the [OK] key.
When [Selection of [All Users] is not allowed] checkbox and [Selection of [User Unknown] is not allowed] checkbox are
disabled in the system settings (administrator), the [All Users] key and [User Unknown] key can be selected.
The [All Users] key can be touched to select all files in the folder (the files of all users).
The [User Unknown] key can be touched to select all files in the folder that do not have a user name.
6-36
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Cancel
Batch Print
User 1/
All Files
User Name
4
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits) and
touch the [OK] key. Only files that have the same password will
be selected.
If you do not wish to enter a password, go to the next step.
Name 1
Password
Delete the
Data
Print and Delete the Data
Print and Save the Data
User 1/
Change PRT.No.
Cancel
Batch Print
All Files
User Name
Password
Print and Delete the Data
Print and Save the Data
5
To set the number of copies, touch the
[Change PRT.No.] key.
If you wish to use the number of copies stored with each file, go
to step 6.
Name 1
Delete the
Data
If a password has been established,
touch the [Password] key.
Change PRT.No.
Cancel
Batch Print
Cancel
Change Print Number
1
(1
OK
(1) Touch the [Apply the Number from Stored
Setting of Each Job] checkbox so that it is
not selected ( ).
(2) Set the number of copies with the
keys.
999)
You can also directly touch the numeric display and
change the number with the numeric keys.
Apply the Number from Stored Setting of
Each Job.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
(1)
Cancel
Batch Print
User 1/
(2) (3)
All Files
User Name
Name 1
Password
6
Delete the
Data
Print and Delete the Data
Print and Save the Data
Change PRT.No.
Touch the [Print and Delete the Data] key
or the [Print and Save the Data] key.
If the [Print and Delete the Data] key is touched, the files will be
automatically deleted after printing.
If the [Print and Save the Data] key is touched, the files will be
saved after printing.
If there are no files that match the search conditions, you will
return to the file list screen.
All files that match the current search conditions can be deleted by touching the [Delete the Data] key.
6-37
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
SENDING A STORED FILE
A file stored by document filing can be retrieved and transmitted whenever needed. The settings used when the file was
stored are also stored, and thus the file can be transmitted using those settings. If needed, you can also change the
transmission settings to modify the retrieved file.
After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-30)
Cancel
Job Settings
file-01
Name 1
8½x11
Touch the [Send] key.
F. Color
Select the job.
1
Print
Send
Move
Delete
Property
Change
Image Check
Detail
Select transmission settings.
Address Book
Address Entry
Send Settings
2
Name 1
file-01
F. Color
Resolution
200X200dpi
File Format
PDF
For information on the settings, see "SEND SETTINGS
SCREEN" (page 6-39).
PDF
Special Modes
B/W Send
3
Press the [START] key.
• A stored print job cannot be transmitted.
• These transmission methods require installation of the corresponding options.
• If any of the following special modes were included in the saved file, the file cannot be transmitted.
"Pamphlet Copy", "Photo Repeat", "2in1" for copying.
• If any of the following special modes were included in the saved file, the file can be transmitted but the special modes will
not be executed.
"Margin Shift", "Transparency Inserts", "Stamp", "Sharpness", "Centering"
• Depending on the reduction or enlargement ratio used when storing a file, it may not be possible to send the stored file
using a selected resolution setting. In this event, try changing the resolution.
However, when sending a stored file by Internet fax, transmission may not be possible even if the resolution is changed.
6-38
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
SEND SETTINGS SCREEN
The keys that appear in the send settings are explained below. For more information on each of the settings, see "BASE
SCREEN OF FAX MODE" (page 4-7) in "4. FACSIMILE" and "BASE SCREEN" (page 5-9) in "5. SCANNER /
INTERNET FAX".
Example of scan mode
(6)
Ready to send.
(1)
(2)
Scan
Cancel
Internet Fax
(7)
Fax
Address Book
(3)
Address Entry
(4)
Send Settings
Name 1
file-01
F. Color
Resolution
200X200dpi
File Format
PDF
(8)
PDF
(9)
Special Modes
(5)
(1)
B/W Send
(9)
Send mode tabs
Touch the appropriate tab to select fax mode, scan
mode, Internet fax mode, etc.
(2)
[Address Entry] key or [Sub Address] key
Use this key to directly enter an address when sending a
file in scan mode or Internet Fax mode.
In fax mode this appears as the "Sub Address" key. Use
this key to enter a sub-address and password for F-code
communication.
(4)
[Send Settings] key
This key appears in scan mode and Internet fax mode.
Touch the key to enter a subject and a file name when
performing a transmission. In scan mode, a sender can
also be specified.
(5)
key
The 3-digit search number that was assigned to a
one-touch key or group key when the key was stored can
be entered to specify a destination.
(6)
[Next Address] key
This key appears when at least one address has been
entered. Use this key when you are sending a file to
multiple destinations.
(7)
[Cancel] key
This returns you to the job settings screen.
(8)
Any of these keys can be touched to change the
corresponding settings of the file to be sent. The
settings that can be selected vary by mode.
• Scan mode
[Resolution] key
Use this to select the resolution. A resolution setting
higher than the resolution at which the file was stored
cannot be selected.
[File Format] key
This lets you select the file type, compression ratio,
and color mode.
[Special Modes] key
This displays the [Timer] key.
• Internet fax mode
[Resolution] key
Use this to select the resolution. A resolution setting
higher than the resolution at which the file was stored
cannot be selected.
[File Format] key
Use this to select the file type and compression ratio.
[Special Modes] key
This displays the [Timer] and [Transaction Report]
keys.
• Fax mode
[Resolution] key
Use this to select the resolution. A resolution setting
higher than the resolution at which the file was stored
cannot be selected.
[Special Modes] key
This displays the [Timer], [Own Name Select], and
[Transaction Report] keys.
[Address Book] key
Touch this key to display the destinations stored in the
address book.
(3)
(10)
(10) [B/W Send] checkbox
File name / User name display
This shows the icon of the file to be sent, the file name,
the user name, and the color mode (color/black & white).
6-39
This is used to resend a full color file. To send a black &
white file, select the checkbox
.
This function cannot be used for a fax or Internet Fax file.
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES
FILE PROPERTIES
A protect setting can be selected for files saved with the document filing function. This prevents a file from being moved,
or automatically or manually deleted.
Three properties are available for saved files: [Sharing], [Protect], and [Confidential]. When saved with the [Sharing]
property, a file is not protected. When saved with the [Protect] or [Confidential] property, a file is protected.
Files saved to the Quick File folder are all saved as [Sharing] files. When a file is saved to the Main folder or a custom
folder, [Sharing] or [Confidential] can be selected.
Sharing
A [Sharing] file can be changed to [Protect] or [Confidential] using [Property Change] in the Job Settings.
Protect
"Protect" prevents a file from being moved or deleted. A password cannot be established. The
appears with the mode icon in the file key of a protected file.
icon
To protect a "Confidential" file, a password is set. (The password must be entered to retrieve the file.) The
icon appears with the mode icon in the file key of a confidential file.
Confidential
CHANGING THE PROPERTY
After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-30)
Cancel
Job Settings
file-01
Name 1
8½x11
Touch the [Property Change] key.
Mono2
Select the job.
1
Property
Change
Print
Send
Move
Delete
Image Check
Detail
(1)
(2)
Job Settings / Property Change
file-01
2
Cancel
Name 1
Sharing
Confidential
Protect
Password
8½x11
OK
Select the property.
(1) Touch the key of the desired property.
When the [Confidential] key is touched, the [Password]
key can be touched.
Touch the [Password] key, enter a password (5 to 8 digits)
with the numeric keys, and touch the [OK] key.
Mono2
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
6-40
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Restrictions on changing the property
• A file that is set to "Sharing" can be changed to "Protect" or "Confidential". However, a "Sharing" file that is saved in the
Quick File folder can only be changed to "Protect".
• A file that is set to "Protect" can be changed to "Sharing" or "Confidential". However, a "Protect" file that is saved in the
Quick File folder can only be changed to "Sharing".
• A file that is saved in the Quick File folder cannot be changed to "Confidential". If the file is moved to the Main folder or a
custom folder, the property can be changed to "Confidential".
• Two properties cannot be selected for a single file.
6-41
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
MOVING A STORED FILE
Use this procedure to change the location of a file (move a file to a different folder).
After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-30)
Touch the [Move] key.
Cancel
Job Settings
file-01
Name 1
8½x11
Mono2
Select the job.
1
Print
Send
Move
Delete
Property
Change
Image Check
Detail
Touch the [Move to:] key.
Cancel
Job Settings / Move
file-01
Name 1
8½x11
Mono2
Select the folder the file is moved to.
File Name
file-01
Move to:
2
Move
• A file cannot be moved to the Quick File Folder. With this procedure, the original name is changed and the file is
moved to the specified folder. (Unlike the "Save As" command on a computer, the file is not copied to the specified
folder with the original file remaining in the original location.)
• To change the file name, touch the [File Name] key.
(1)
Select the destination folder.
(2)
(1) Touch the key of the folder to which you
want to move the file.
OK
Job Settings / Move
Main Folder
User 1
3
User 2
User 3
User 4
User 5
User 6
User 7
User 8
User 9
User 10
All Folders
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST
If a password is set for the selected folder, a password
entry screen will appear.
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits)
and touch the [OK] key.
1
2
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
UVWXYZ
The above screen shows the custom folders as an
example.
6-42
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Cancel
Job Settings / Move
file-01
Name 1
8½x11
Touch the [Move] key.
Mono2
Select the folder the file is moved to.
4
File Name
file-01
Move to:
User 2
Move
A file whose property is "Protect" cannot be moved. To move a protected file, change its property to "Sharing" or
"Confidential".
6-43
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
DELETING A STORED FILE
Stored files that are no longer needed can be deleted.
Select the file that you wish to delete and touch the [Delete] key.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-30)
Cancel
Job Settings
file-01
Name 1
8½x11
Touch the [Delete] key.
Mono2
Select the job.
1
Print
Send
Move
Delete
Property
Change
Image Check
Detail
Check the file and then touch the [Yes]
key.
Delete the file data?
2
Name 1
file-01
No
Yes
A file whose property is "Protect" cannot be deleted. To delete a protected file, change its property to "Sharing" or
"Confidential".
6-44
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
CHECKING AN IMAGE OF A STORED FILE
You can check an image of a file stored using document filing.
Select the desired file and touch the [Image Check] key.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-30)
Touch the [Image Check] key.
Cancel
Job Settings
file-01
Name 1
8½x11
Mono2
Select the job.
1
Print
Send
Move
Delete
Property
Change
Image Check
Detail
Image Check
file-01
Check the image of the file.
Back
Name 1
2
8½x11
Mono2
For information on each of the items, see "IMAGE CHECK
SCREEN" (page 6-46).
Display Rotation
0001 /0010
Detail
6-45
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
IMAGE CHECK SCREEN
This section explains the image check screen.
Back
Image Check
file-01
8½x11
Name 1
Mono2
Display Rotation
Detail
0001
(1)
(1)
(2)
0010
(3)
(4)
(4)
Information display
Preview image
This shows an image of the selected file.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the
keys to
scroll.)
(3)
(6)
"Display Rotation" key
This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.
This shows information on the displayed image.
(2)
(5)
A print file cannot be rotated.
(5)
[Detail] key
This shows the detailed information screen.
☞ FILE SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-28)
Change page keys
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
(6)
•
•
keys: Go to the first or the last page.
keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
• Page number display: This shows the total number of
pages and the current page
number. You can touch the
current page number key and
enter a number with the
numeric keys to go to that page
number.
Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image. The
setting applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.
For a print file, only an image of the first page of the
file is shown; the displayed page cannot be changed.
A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.
6-46
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
RETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE
JOB STATUS SCREEN
Files stored using File and Quick File appear as keys in the job status complete screen.
This is convenient when you need to quickly print the saved data of a copy job or quickly send a saved fax to another
destination.
1
Print Job
Job Queue
2
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
JOB STATUS
Scan to
Fax Job
Sets / Progress
Internet Fax
Status
Spool
1
Computer01
002/001
Printing
2
0312345678
002/000
Waiting
3
0312345678
002/000
Waiting
4
Copy
002/000
Waiting
Touch the job status selector key so that
[Complete] is highlighted.
Job Queue
1
Complete
1
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
Print Job
Jobs Completed
Scan to
Set Time
Fax Job
Sets
Internet Fax
Status
Computer02
11:00 04/04 001/001
OK
Computer03
10:33 04/04 010/010
OK
Computer04
10:31 04/04 013/013
OK
file-01
10:30 04/04 010/010
OK
Copy
10:13 04/04 001/001
OK
Copy
10:03 04/04 001/001
OK
Computer05
10:01 04/04 003/003
OK
Copy
10:00 04/04 010/010
OK
Spool
Select the desired file in the completed
jobs.
Job Queue
1
Complete
1
(1) Touch the key of the desired file.
(2) Touch the [Call] key.
The job settings screen appears.
Select and perform the desired operation.
☞ JOB SETTINGS SCREEN (page 6-31)
☞ PRINTING A STORED FILE (page 6-32)
☞ SENDING A STORED FILE (page 6-38)
☞ PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES (page 6-40)
☞ MOVING A STORED FILE (page 6-42)
☞ DELETING A STORED FILE (page 6-44)
☞ CHECKING AN IMAGE OF A STORED FILE (page
6-45)
Detail
3
(1)
Call
(2)
To view information on a file, select the file and then touch the [Detail] key.
6-47
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE
When there are many stored files, it may take time to find a file. The search function of document filing mode can be
used to find a file quickly.
This section explains how to search for a file or folder on the machine's hard drive.
Searching is possible even when you only know part of the file name or folder name. A folder can also be specified as a
search range.
Example: Only part of a file name is known: "Meeting"
[Hard drive]
Regular meeting Text 1
For
meetings
For individuals Quick File
Main
For meetings
When you search
using "Meeting"...
(1)
COPY
IMAGE SEND
Meeting
graphs
All folders and files that
include "Meeting" will be
listed.
Meeting graphs
Report
Regular
meeting
[Search results]
Open the file search screen.
(2)
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
DOCUMENT
FILING
(2) Touch the [Search] key.
File Retrieve
Scan to HDD
HDD Status
Ex Data Access
Folder Select
1
Search
Main Folder
Quick File Folder
1
User 1
User 2
User 3
User 4
User 5
User 6
User 7
User 8
User 10
User 9
All Folders
ABCD
Search
User Name
2
File or Folder Name
Password
2
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST
UVWXYZ
Cancel
Start Search
Touch the [User Name] key or the [File
or Folder Name] key.
If you know the user name, touch the [User Name] key and go
to "Using the user name to search" in step 3.
If you know the file name, touch the [File or Folder Name] key
and go to "Using the file name or folder name to search" in step
3.
6-48
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
(B)(D)
(C)
Using the user name to search
(A)
Cancel
User Name
6
12
18
Default User
Direct Entry
ABC
User
3
OK
Name 1
Name 2
Name 3
Name 4
Name 5
Name 6
Name 7
Name 8
Name 9
Name 10
1
2
Name 11
All
Name 12
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
There are four ways to select the user name:
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
The touched user name is highlighted.
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch the
key of the correct name.
(B) Touch the [Default User] key.
The user name can be selected from the factory stored
users.
(C) Touch the
key.
An area for entering the "Registration No." [----] appears in
the message display. Enter the "Registration No." set
during user registration. This will allow you to select the
user name.
(D) Touch the [Direct Entry] key.
A text entry screen appears. Directly enter the user name.
Searching is possible even if you only enter the first several
letters of the user name.
After selecting the user name, touch the [OK] key.
After the user name is selected, the [Password] key can be
touched. To search for files of the selected user name that
have a certain password, touch the [Password] key and enter
the password.
(It is not possible to search using a password only.)
Using the file name or folder name to
search
Enter the file name or folder name in the text entry screen that
appears and touch the [OK] key.
6-49
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Search
User Name
Cancel
Start Search
Touch the [Start Search] key.
The search results will appear in a screen similar to the
following screen. A list of the files that match your search
criteria will appear. Select the desired file from the list.
The job settings screen will appear.
Name 1
File or Folder Name
file-01
Password
Cancel
Search
File or Folder Name
file-01
User Name
Name 1
Search Again
Date
04/04/2010
1
1
4
To return to the base screen of document filing mode,
touch the [Cancel] key.
To return to the file search screen, touch the [Search
Again] key.
• When you search using [File or Folder Name], custom folders that match the search characters will also appear in
the list. When a folder key is touched, a list of the files in the folder appears. Touch the desired file in the list.
• You can also use the Web pages to search for a file. Click [Document Operations], [Document Filing], and then
[Search] in the Web page menu.
6-50
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Searching within a folder
You can specify a folder to restrict the search range to that folder. To search within a specified folder, follow the steps
below.
(2)
COPY
File Retrieve
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
DOCUMENT
FILING
IMAGE SEND
Scan to HDD
Open the folder that you wish to search.
(1)
HDD Status
Search
Folder Select
1
(2) Touch the key of the folder that you wish to
search.
Ex Data Access
Main Folder
If a password is set for the selected folder, a password
entry screen will appear.
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits)
and touch the [OK] key.
Quick File Folder
1
User 1
User 2
User 3
User 4
User 5
User 6
User 7
User 8
User 10
User 9
All Folders
2
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST
UVWXYZ
Search
Main Folder
File Name
User Name
Back
Touch the [Search] key.
Date
1
2
file-01
Name 1
04/04/2010
file-02
Name 2
04/04/2010
file-03.tiff
Name 3
04/04/2010
file-04
Name 4
04/04/2010
file-05.tiff
Name 5
04/04/2010
Switch Display
Cancel
User Name
3
Multi-File Print
All Files
Search
File or Folder Name
Password
Search within Current Folder
2
Start Search
Touch the [User Name] key or the [File
or Folder Name] key.
If you know the user name, touch the [User Name] key and go
to "Using the user name to search" in step 4.
If you know the file name, touch the [File or Folder Name] key
and go to "Using the file name or folder name to search" in step
4.
6-51
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
(B)(D)
(C)
Using the user name to search
(A)
Cancel
User Name
6
12
18
Default User
Direct Entry
ABC
User
4
OK
Name 1
Name 2
Name 3
Name 4
Name 5
Name 6
Name 7
Name 8
Name 9
Name 10
1
2
Name 11
All
Name 12
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
There are four ways to select the user name:
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
The touched user name is highlighted.
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch the
key of the correct name.
(B) Touch the [Default User] key.
The user name can be selected from the factory stored
users.
(C) Touch the
key.
An area for entering the "Registration No." [----] appears in
the message display. Enter the "Registration No." set
during user registration. This will allow you to select the
user name.
(D) Touch the [Direct Entry] key.
A text entry screen appears. Directly enter the user name.
Searching is possible even if you only enter the first several
letters of the user name.
After selecting the user name, touch the [OK] key.
After the user name is selected, the [Password] key can be
touched. To search for files of the selected user name that
have a certain password, touch the [Password] key and enter
the password.
(It is not possible to search using a password only.)
Using the file name or folder name to
search
Enter the file name in the text entry screen that appears and
touch the [OK] key.
6-52
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
(1)
(2)
Cancel
Search
User Name
Start Search
Start searching.
(1) Touch the [Search within Current Folder]
checkbox so that it is selected
.
To search only files that are in the current folder, select
the [Search within Current Folder] checkbox
.
Use this method to search for a file in a confidential folder.
Name 1
File or Folder Name
file-01
Password
Search within Current Folder
(2) Touch the [Start Search] key.
The search results will appear in a screen similar to the
following screen. A list of the files that match your search
criteria will appear. Select the desired file from the list.
The job settings screen will appear.
5
Cancel
Search
File or Folder Name
file-01
User Name
Name 1
Search Again
Date
04/04/2010
1
1
To return to the base screen of document filing mode,
touch the [Cancel] key.
To return to the file search screen, touch the [Search
Again] key.
6-53
Contents
CHAPTER 7
SYSTEM SETTINGS
This chapter explains the system settings, which are used to configure a variety of parameters to suit the aims and
needs of your workplace. The current selections that have been made for the settings can be viewed or printed out.
To quickly check where a setting is located in the system settings menu, see "System Settings Menu" (page 7-114),
"Accessing the System Settings (General)" (page 7-5), or "Accessing the System Settings (Administrator)" (page 7-32).
For the system settings for the fax function, see "System Settings for Fax (General) List" (page 7-101) and "System
Settings for Fax (Administrator) List" (page 7-107).
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Accessing the System Settings
(Administrator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
• When User Authentication is not Enabled . . . . 7-32
• When User Authentication is Enabled . . . . . . . 7-33
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Common Operation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
SYSTEM SETTINGS (GENERAL)
System Settings (Administrator) List . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Accessing the System Settings (General) . . . . . . 7-5
User Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• User Authentication Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Page Limit Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Authority Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Favorite Operation Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• User Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Settings (General) List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Total Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
• Job Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
• Device Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
• Clock Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
• Keyboard Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
List Print (User) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Paper Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Paper Type Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Auto Tray Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Custom Size Registration (Bypass) . . . . . . . . .
7-14
7-14
7-16
7-16
7-16
Address Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Custom Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-17
7-17
7-22
7-23
Energy Save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
Fax Data Receive/Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
• I-Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Printer Condition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Printer Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PCL Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PostScript Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-51
7-51
7-52
7-53
7-55
7-56
7-59
7-61
7-62
7-26
7-26
7-27
7-28
Operation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MFP Display Pattern Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Customize Key Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Home Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• My Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Preview Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Remote Operation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-64
7-64
7-65
7-65
7-66
7-66
7-67
7-68
Device Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Disabling of Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Fusing Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-69
7-69
7-71
7-71
Copy Function Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
• Initial Status Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
Document Filing Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
USB-Device Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
User Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
• Modify User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7-1
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
• Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
• Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
Image Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Operation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• I-Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-78
7-78
7-82
7-84
Document Filing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Document Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Deletion of File Settings. . . . . . . . . .
7-88
7-88
7-90
7-90
List Print (Administrator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91
Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
Enable/Disable Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93
Change Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
Product Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97
Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
Storing/Calling of System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 7-99
Sharp OSA Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX
System Settings for Fax (General) List . . . . . . . 7-101
Address Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
• Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
• F-Code Memory Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
Fax Data Receive/Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-106
• Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-106
System Settings for Fax (Administrator) List . . 7-107
Image Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-109
• Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-109
APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-114
• System Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-114
7-2
SYSTEM SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
System Settings
The system settings are used to configure a variety of parameters to suit the aims and needs of your workplace. The
system settings are also used to display or print out the current settings and status of the machine. The system settings
allow you to make the machine easier to use.
The system settings consist of settings that are used by general users, and settings that can only be configured by an
administrator of the machine. These two groups of settings are distinguished in this manual as follows.
System Settings (General)
System Settings (Administrator) *Login Required
System settings that can be configured by general users
(including the administrator). For example, the following
settings can be configured:
•
•
•
•
•
•
System settings that can be configured by the administrator.
To configure these settings, login as an administrator is
required. For example, the following settings can be
configured:
Date and time settings
Paper tray settings (paper size and paper type)
Storing destinations for the fax and scanner functions
Settings related to the printer function
Creating folders for document filing
Displaying the number of pages printed, scanned, and
faxed.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
For more information, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS (GENERAL)"
(page 7-5).
Storing users of the machine
Energy save settings
Settings related to the operation panel
Settings for peripheral devices installed on the machine.
Settings related to the copy function
Network connection settings
Transmission/reception settings for faxes and scanned
images
• Advanced settings for the document filing function
For more information, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS
(ADMINISTRATOR)" (page 7-32).
Settings for general users
Settings for administrators
• Administrator password
To maintain security, the administrator of the machine should promptly change the password after the machine is
purchased. (For the factory default administrator password, see "TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF THE MACHINE" in the
Start Guide.) To change the password, see "Change Administrator Password" (page 7-96).
*To ensure a high level of security, change the password at regular intervals.
• The above groupings of "General" and "Administrator" are used as a convenient means of clarifying the functions of the
settings. These groupings do not appear in the touch panel.
• For fax settings, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 7-101).
• Web pages
The system settings can also be configured from the Web pages. To configure the system settings from the Web pages,
click [System Settings] in the Web page menu.
In addition to the system settings, network and security settings can also be configured in the Web pages. For information
on the settings, see Help in the Web pages.
7-3
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Common Operation Methods
This section explains special operation methods that are common to all system settings.
Be sure to read this section, as the information is omitted in the explanations of some of the individual settings.
Example: Address book screen
Add New
(1)
Sort Address
(5)
All
AAA AAA
Index Switch
(4)
Back
Address Book
System Settings
Address Control
Address Type:
BBB BBB
1
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
2
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
Cancel
OK
(9)
(10)
E-mail
(6)
ABC
Search Number:
(7)
Sorting Order
Search Number
(1-999)
Address Name (Required):
(11)
Initial (Optional):
Key Name:
(2)
(3)
(1)
Freq.
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
Custom Index:
(8)
(7)
"Sort"
(8)
Index keys
(9)
(Search number entry box)
(10) [OK] key
[Back] key
Touch this to store the current settings.
Returns you to the previous screen.
(5)
(11) Scroll bar
Select box
Use this to scroll the screen up and down.
Touch the bar and slide it up or down to move the screen.
You can also move the screen up and down with the
keys.
Touch
to display a list of the items that can be
selected. Touch an item in the list to select it.
(6)
[Cancel] key
This cancels a setting and returns you to the previous
screen.
To search for an address, touch
and enter a search
number.
When a user is searched for, the icon changes to
.
(4)
Checkbox
This switches between
and
each time you touch
it. To enable the corresponding setting, touch the
checkbox so that a checkmark appears
. To disable
the setting, clear the checkmark
.
Radio buttons (
) are also used to select settings in
this way. (However, radio buttons are used to select a
single item out of several.)
Touch an index key to display the corresponding
destinations. The index keys that appear vary depending
on the "Sort" setting.
(3)
Text box
Touch this box to open a text entry screen. When you
have finished entering text in the screen, the text will
appear in the text box.
Use this to select the method of displaying destinations
and the index type.
Example: In the "Address Book" screen, the display can
be switched between the following three methods:
• Alphabetical/User index
• Display by mode
• Ascending/Descending/Number order
(2)
User 1
Register this Address to be added to the [Frequent Use] index.
Text box (numerical)
Touch this box to enter a number. Numbers are entered
with the numeric keys.
If you make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
) to
clear the incorrect number.
7-4
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETTINGS (GENERAL)
This section describes the system settings that can be configured by general users of the machine.
Accessing the System Settings (General)
Make sure that the machine is in the standby state and
then press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key on the
operation panel.
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the
following menu screen appears on the touch panel.
JOB STATUS
SYSTEM
SETTINGS
PRINT
IMAGE SEND
READY
DATA
LINE
DATA
LOGOUT
HOME
Touch the item in this screen that you wish to configure.
For detailed explanations of each of the settings, see the
following pages of this chapter.
• To quit the system settings, touch the [Exit] key in the top right corner of the screen.
• For the procedure to follow when user authentication is enabled, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" (page 1-17) in
"1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
7-5
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
System Settings (General) List
When the system settings are accessed with general rights, the following items appear. For items that can only be
accessed with administrator rights, see "System Settings (Administrator) List" (page 7-35).
• Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.
• For explanations of settings related to the fax function, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 7-101).
Total Count
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-10
■ Total Count
● Job Count
–
7-10
● Device Count
–
7-10
Default Settings
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-11
■ Default Settings
● Clock Adjust
X Clock Adjust
‹ Specify Time Zone
–
‹ Date & Time Settings
–
‹ Synchronize with Internet Time Server
Disable
7-11
X Daylight Saving Time Setting
Disable
X Date Format
[MM/DD/YYYY], [/], [Last], [12-Hour]
● Keyboard Select
English (US)
7-12
List Print (User)
Item
Factory default setting
Page
■ List Print (User)
● All Custom Setting List
–
● Printer Test Page
–
● Sending Address List
–
● Document Filing Folder List
–
7-6
7-13
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Paper Tray Settings
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-14
■ Paper Tray Settings
● Tray Settings
X Tray 1
X Tray 2*
Plain, Auto-Inch
X Tray 3*
7-14
X Tray 4*
X Bypass
Plain, Auto-Inch
‹ Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection
8-1/2" x 14"
● Paper Type Registration
–
7-16
● Auto Tray Switching
Enabled
7-16
● Custom Size Registration (Bypass)
Custom 1: X=11", Y=8-1/2"
Custom 2: X=11", Y=8-1/2"
Custom 3: X=11", Y=8-1/2"
7-16
* When a 500-sheet paper feed unit is installed.
Address Control
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-17
■ Address Control
● Address Book
–
7-17
● Custom Index
User 1
7-22
● Program
–
7-23
Fax Data Receive/Forward
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-25
■ Fax Data Receive/Forward
● I-Fax Settings*
X Reception Start
–
X Manual Reception Key in Initial Screen
Enabled
X Forward Received Data
–
7-25
* When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
7-7
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Printer Condition Settings
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-26
■ Printer Condition Settings
● Printer Default Settings
X Copies
1
X Orientation
Portrait
X Default Paper Size
8-1/2" x 11"
X Default Paper Type
Plain Paper
X Initial Resolution Setting
600dpi (High Quality)
X Disable Blank Page Print
Disabled
X Line Thickness
5
X 2-Sided Print
1-Sided
X N-Up Print
1-Up
X Fit To Page
Enabled
7-26
X Output
‹ Print per Unit
Enabled
‹ Staple*
Disabled
X Quick File
Disabled
● PCL Settings
X PCL Symbol Set Setting
PC-8
X PCL Font Setting
Internal Font, 0: Courier
X PCL Line Feed Code
0.CR=CR; LF=LF; FF=FF
X Wide A4
Disabled
7-27
● PostScript Setting
X Print PS Errors
Disabled
X Binary Processing
Disabled
7-28
* When a finisher is installed.
7-8
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Document Filing Control
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-29
■ Document Filing Control
USB-Device Check
Item
Factory default setting
–
■ USB-Device Check
Page
7-30
User Control
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-31
■ User Control*
● Modify User Information
–
7-31
* When user authentication is enabled and the logged-in user does not have the authority to configure the system settings
(administrator) (excluding factory default users).
7-9
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Total Count
This function shows the page count in each mode. Touch the [Total Count] key.
Job Count
This displays or prints out the counts of all jobs.
• Each sheet of paper used for automatic two-sided copying is counted as two pages.
• Pages printed directly from the machine such as list prints are included in the "Other Prints" count.
• The items displayed (or printed) will vary depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed.
Device Count
This is used to display or print the counts of the peripheral devices installed on the machine.
• Document feeder
Each sheet is counted as two pages when two-sided scanning is performed.
• The items displayed (or printed) will vary depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed.
7-10
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Default Settings
The default settings for operation of the machine can be configured. Touch the [Default Settings] key and select the settings.
Clock Adjust
Use this to set the date and time in the machine's built-in clock.
Set the time.
Item
Settings
Specify Time Zone
If your region is ahead of GMT (Greenwich Mean Time), select [+]. If your region is
behind GMT, select [-]. Next, specify the time difference between your region and
GMT in hours and minutes.
Date&Time Settings
Select and set the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
Synchronize with Internet Time Server
This can be used when the machine is connected to the Internet. The machine's time
is automatically adjusted to the time of an Internet time server.
Daylight Saving Time Setting
Enable daylight saving time.
Item
Settings
Daylight Saving Time Setting
Select whether or not the Daylight Saving Time Setting is enabled. If disabled, the
following settings will not be possible.
Select Setting Type
Specify whether the starting and ending day of daylight saving time are to be set
using the day of the week or the date.
Start Time
Set the starting time of daylight saving time. Set the starting month. If you selected "Day
of the Week" in "Select Setting Type", set the starting week of daylight saving time and
then the starting day. If you selected "Date" in "Select Setting Type", set the starting date.
Set the hour and minute and the UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) setting.
Completing Time
Set the ending time of daylight saving time in the same way as you set the starting
time.
Adjustment Time
Set the time that adjustment will take place when daylight saving time begins.
Date Format
The format used to print the date on lists and other output can be changed.
Item
Settings
Current Setting
The current time appears in the format set in the date format settings.
Format
Set the order of display of the year, month, and day (YYYY/MM/DD).
Separator
Select one of three symbols or a blank space for the separator used in the date.
Day-Name Position
Select whether the day name appears before or after the date.
Time Display
Select 12-hour format or 24-hour format for the time.
12-Hour Display: 12:00AM to 11:59AM/12:00 to 11:59PM
24-Hour Display: 00:00 to 23:59
If "Disabling of Clock Adjustment" (page 7-64) has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), the date and time
cannot be set.
7-11
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Keyboard Select
The layout of the keyboard that appears in text entry screens can be changed.
The keyboard layouts that can be selected are shown below.
English (US)
English (UK)
Japanese
French
German
Swedish
Norwegian
Finnish
Danish
Russian
Greek
Turkish
7-12
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
List Print (User)
Lists showing the settings and information stored in the machine can be printed. Touch the [List Print (User)] key and
select the settings.
List name
Description
All Custom Setting List
This list shows the hardware status, software status, printer condition settings, paper
tray settings, and total counts.
Printer Test Page
This is used to print the PCL Symbol Set List, various font lists, and the NIC page
(network interface settings, etc.).
• PCL Symbol Set List
• PCL Internal Font List
• PCL Extended Font List
• PS Font List
• PS Extended Font List
• NIC Page
Sending Address List
Lists can be printed of various addresses stored in the machine.
• Individual List
• Group List
• Program List
• Memory Box List
• All Sending Address List
Document Filing Folder List
This shows the folder names for document filing.
• The items that appear will vary depending on the functions that have been added to the machine.
• If "Prohibit Test Page Printing" (page 7-76) has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), it will not be possible
to print a test page.
7-13
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Paper Tray Settings
Paper tray and paper type settings are explained in this section. Touch the [Paper Tray Settings] key to configure the
settings.
Tray Settings
These settings specify the paper type, paper size, and functions allowed for each paper tray.
When the [Tray Settings] key is touched, a list appears showing the trays and the current settings.
Back
Tray Settings
Tray 1
Type
Plain
Size
8-1/2x11
Change
1
6
Paper Property
Fixed Paper Side
Disable Duplex
Disable Staple
Feeding Approved Job
Copy
Print
Fax
I-Fax
Doc. Filing
Settings of each tray
Touch the [Change] key in the above screen to change the settings.
The following settings can be configured.
Item
Description
Type
Select the type of paper that is loaded in the tray.
The paper types that can be selected vary by paper tray. For more information, see
"Tray Settings" (page 7-15).
To store a new paper type, see "Paper Type Registration" (page 7-16).
Size
Select the paper size from the list. The paper sizes that can be selected vary by tray.
The sizes that can be selected may also be restricted by the paper type selected
above. For more information, see "Tray Settings" (page 7-15).
If the desired size does not appear in the list, select [Custom Size] and directly enter
the size (only for the bypass tray). For more information, see "Tray Settings" (page
7-15).
Feeding Approved Job
Select the modes that can be used. If there is a function that you do not wish to be
used with the selected tray, disable the function.
When the "Type" is other than plain paper, recycled paper, colored paper, or a user
type, [Fax] and [Internet Fax] cannot be selected.
• If the paper size specified here is different from the size of paper that is loaded in a tray, a problem or misfeed may result
when printing.
To change the paper size in a tray, see "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
• Paper properties such as "Fixed Paper Side" are automatically set when the paper type is selected. The paper tray
properties cannot be changed in this screen.
• If "Disabling of Tray Settings" (page 7-71) has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), the tray settings
(except for the bypass tray) cannot be configured.
7-14
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Tray Settings
Paper Tray
Tray 1
Tray 2*1
Paper Type
Plain, Pre-Printed,
Recycled, Letter Head,
Pre-Punched, Color,
User Type
Tray 3*1
Size
Auto-Inch (8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 7-1/4" x 10-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"),
Auto-AB (A4, A5, B5, 216 mm x330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")), 8-1/2" x 13-2/5"
(216 mm x 340 mm), 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2"),
16K
Auto-Inch (8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 7-1/4" x 10-1/2")
Auto-AB (A4, B5, 216 mm x 330 mm(8-1/2" x 13")), 8-1/2" x 13-2/5"
(216 mm x 340 mm), 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2"),
16K
Tray 4*1
In addition to the paper
types of trays 1 to 4,
Heavy Paper*2,
Thin Paper
Auto-Inch (8-1/2" x 14"*3, 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm)*3,
8-1/2" x 11", 7-1/4" x 10-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"),
Auto-AB (A4, A5, B5, 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")*3,
216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")*3, 216 mm x 343 mm
(8-1/2" x 13-1/2")*3),
Size Input-Inch (X=5-1/2" to 14", Y=5-1/2" to 8-1/2"),
Size Input-AB (X=140 mm to 356 mm, Y=100 mm to 216 mm),
16K, Custom 1, Custom 2, Custom 3
Labels
Auto-Inch (8-1/2" x 11"), Auto-AB (A4, B5)
Transparency
Auto-Inch (8-1/2" x 11"), Auto-AB (A4)
Envelope
Com-10, Monarch, DL, C5
Bypass
*1 When a 500-sheet paper feed unit is installed.
*2 Heavy Paper: 28 lbs to 56 lbs (106 g/m2 to 209 g/m2) heavy paper
*3 The size that is automatically detected is set in "Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection" in the bypass tray settings screen (see
below).
Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection
"Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection" in the bypass tray settings screen is used to select the paper size that is
automatically detected from similar sizes when automatic paper size detection takes place.
Select one of two sizes when "Auto-Inch" is set. Select one of three sizes when "Auto-AB" is set.
When paper that is the same size as one of the paper sizes in the settings is placed in the bypass tray, the size that is
selected in the settings will be automatically detected.
Auto-Inch
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm)
Auto-AB
216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13"), 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5"),
216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")
7-15
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Paper Type Registration
Store a paper type when the desired paper type does not appear as a selection or when you wish to create a new set of
paper properties.
Up to 7 paper types can be stored.
Item
Description
Type Name
Store any name.
The factory default names are "User Type 1" - "User Type 7".
Fixed Paper Side
Enable this setting when paper with a front and reverse side is used.
Disable Duplex
Enable this setting when paper is loaded that cannot be used for two-sided printing.
Disable Staple
Enable this setting when paper is used that cannot be stapled.
The settings that can be selected vary depending on the peripheral devices installed.
Auto Tray Switching
When a tray runs out of paper during printing, this determines whether or not another tray with the same size and type of
paper is automatically selected and printing continues.
Custom Size Registration (Bypass)
If you frequently use a special non-standard paper size in the bypass tray, you can store that paper size.
Storing the paper size saves you the trouble of setting the size each time you need to use it.
Up to three paper sizes can be stored.
Touch the key ([Custom 1] to [Custom 3]) in which you wish to store or change a paper size. The following screen will
appear:
System Settings
Cancel
Custom 1
OK
Size Input-AB
Size Input-Inch
X 11
Y
8½
Inch
Inch
Select whether you wish to enter the size in inches ("Size Input-Inch") or mm ("Size Input-AB"), and then set the X and Y
dimensions of the paper.
"Size Input-Inch"
The X dimension can be set to a value from 5-1/2" to 14". The factory default setting is 11".
The Y dimension can be set to a value from 5-1/2" to 8-1/2". The factory default setting is 8-1/2".
"Size Input-AB"
The X dimension can be set to a value from 140 mm to 356 mm. The factory default setting is 297 mm.
The Y dimension can be set to a value from 100 mm to 216 mm. The factory default setting is 210 mm.
7-16
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Address Control
Address Control is used to store, edit, and delete one-touch keys, group keys, program keys, and custom indexes.
Touch the [Address Control] key to configure the settings.
• The settings that can be selected vary depending on the peripheral devices installed.
• For explanations of settings related to the fax function, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 7-101).
Address Book
Destinations can be stored in the address book for easy retrieval.
When the [Address Book] key is touched, the following screen appears.
Back
Address Book
Add New
Index Switch
Sort Address
All
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
1
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
2
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
GGG GGG
HHH HHH
III III
JJJ JJJ
ABC
Sorting Order
Search Number
Freq.
• [Add New] key
Use this to add a new address.
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
• List display
This displays a list of the currently stored addresses.
An address can be selected to open an edit/delete
screen for the address.
Storing addresses
Touch the [Add New] key in the above screen to store an address. Up to 999 addresses can be programmed.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 7-18).
• When "Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel" (page 7-79) is enabled in the system settings
(administrator) for a function, addresses cannot be stored for that function.
• To store addresses for Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder, and Scan to Desktop...
Store Scan to FTP and Scan to Network addresses in the Web pages. Store Scan to Desktop addresses using Network
Scanner Tool. A combined maximum of 200 addresses can be stored for these three scanning methods.
Editing and deleting addresses
An address can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the address.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 7-18).
Delete an address with the [Delete] key.
• If you cannot edit or delete a one-touch individual or group key...
Individual keys and group keys cannot be edited or deleted in the following situations:
- The key is used in a reserved transmission or a transmission in progress.
- The key is included in a group key.
- The key is included in a program.
- The key is specified as a forwarding destination in the "Default Address Setting" (page 7-83) or "Inbound Routing
Settings" / "Document Administration Function" (in the Web pages).
- When "Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel" (page 7-79) is enabled.
If the key is used in a reserved transmission or a transmission that is in progress, cancel the transmission or wait until it is
completed and then edit or delete the key.
If the key is included in a group, first delete the key from the group and then edit or delete the key.
If the key is specified as a forwarding destination, cancel the forwarding destination setting and then edit or delete the key. If
"Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel" has been enabled, clear this function and then edit or delete the key.
7-17
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Settings
Item
Description
Items stored in all modes
Address Type
Select the type of address to be stored in the address book.
• E-mail:
Store an e-mail address in a one-touch key.
• Internet Fax: Store an Internet fax address in a one-touch key.
• Direct SMTP:Store a Direct SMTP address in a one-touch key.
• Fax:
Store a fax number in a one-touch key.
• Group:
Store multiple addresses as a group for a broadcast transmission.
Search Number
Set a search number. The lowest available number is automatically entered. To
change the number, enter a number from 001 to 999. A search number that has
already been stored cannot be used.
Address Name
Enter a maximum of 36 characters for the address name.
Initial
Enter up to 10 characters for the initials. The initials you enter here determine the
position of the one-touch key in the alphabetical index.
Key Name
Enter the name that you wish to appear in the address book (this is different from the
address name).
Custom Index
Select the custom index in which the address will appear.
Register this Address to be added to the
[Frequent Use] index.
Frequently used addresses can be stored in the [Frequent Use] index.
Items appearing when an e-mail address is stored
E-mail Address
Enter an e-mail address (max. 64 characters).
File Format
Specify the format of the file to be generated and the compression mode for black &
white mode and color mode.
• File Type:
Set the format of the file to be generated.
• Compression Mode (Black & White): Select the compression mode for black &
white transmission.
• Compression Ratio (Color/Grayscale):Select the compression ratio for
color/grayscale transmission.
7-18
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Item
Description
Items appearing when an Internet fax address is stored
I-Fax Address
Enter an Internet fax address (max. 64 characters).
File Format
Compression Mode: Select the compression mode for transmission.
Request Internet Fax Reception Report
Select whether or not you wish to receive a reception report by e-mail after
transmission is completed.
Items appearing when a Direct SMTP address is stored
Use these three settings to set an address for Direct SMTP transmission.
In many cases, transmission is possible using method (1).
A maximum of 64 characters each can be entered in the "Direct SMTP Address" and
"Hostname or IP Address" text boxes.
(1) Using the IPv4 address of the receiving machine in the domain part of the
e-mail address
Enter the e-mail address of the receiving machine in the [Direct SMTP Address]
text box with the IPv4 address substituted for the domain.
Example:When the e-mail address of the receiving machine is
"user@sample_domain.com" and the IPv4 address is "192.168.123.45"
Enter "user@192.168.123.45" in the [Direct SMTP Address] text box.
• Direct SMTP Address
• Add Hostname or IP Address.
• Hostname or IP Address
(2) Using the host name in the domain part of the e-mail address of the
receiving machine
Enter the e-mail address of the receiving machine in the [Direct SMTP Address]
text box with the host name substituted for the domain.
Example:When the e-mail address of the receiving machine is
"user@sample_domain.com" and the host name is "HOST"
Enter "user@HOST" in the [Direct SMTP Address] text box.
(3) When the receiving machine is set to only receive e-mail from specific
addresses
Enter the specified specific e-mail address in the [Direct SMTP Address] text box.
Select the "Add Hostname or IP Address." checkbox and enter the host name or
IPv4 address of the receiving machine in the [Hostname or IP Address] text box.
Example:When the e-mail address of the receiving machine is
"user@sample_domain.com" and the IPv4 address is "192.168.123.45"
Enter "user@sample_domain.com" in the [Direct SMTP Address] text
box and enter "192.168.123.45" in the [Hostname or IP Address] text
box.
File Format
Compression Mode: Select the compression mode for transmission.
Items appearing when a group is stored
• Address:
Address
Select addresses from the address book to be stored in the
group.
• Direct Entry:
An address that is not stored in the address book can be directly
entered. Enter the address in the same way as when storing an
address for a mode. Note that when an Internet fax address is
directly entered, the compression mode and reception report
cannot be selected.
• Address Review: This displays a list of the selected addresses. Addresses can be
deleted from this list if needed.
7-19
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Storing group keys
This section explains the procedure for storing group keys.
Touch the [Address Control] key.
1
Touch the [Address Book] key.
2
Touch the [Add New] key.
3
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Select "Group" from the [Address Type]
list.
4
Set the [Group Name], [Initial], and [Key
Name] settings. (Other settings can be
adjusted as necessary.)
5
7-20
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Use the scroll bar to display the lower
part of the screen, and touch the
[Address Book] key. (Touch the [Direct
Entry] key to store an address that is not
stored in a one-touch key.)
6
7
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
Touch the one-touch keys that you want
to add to the group. (Three keys are
added in this example.)
GGG GGG
Touch the [OK] key.
8
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
EEE EEE
FFF FFF
GGG GGG
Touch the [OK] key.
9
Touch the [OK] key on the dialog box
that appears.
10
7-21
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
11
The group key registration screen appears. If you want to finish, touch [Cancel]
key to return to the previous screen.
The procedure is complete.
Custom Index
The name of a custom index can be changed for greater ease of use.
Delete the previously entered name and enter a new name (maximum of 6 characters).
The factory default names for the custom indexes are "User 1" to "User 6".
7-22
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Program
If you frequently use the same settings and/or functions to transmit to the same destination or destinations, the settings
and destinations can be stored in a program. This allows the settings and destinations to be selected by simply selecting
the program.
When the [Program] key is touched, the following screen appears.
System Settings
Back
Program
Add New
Program 1
Program 2
Program 3
Program 4
Program 5
Program 6
Program 7
Program 8
Program 9
Program 10
Program 11
Program 12
• [Add New] key
Use this to add a new program.
• List display
This displays a list of the currently stored programs. A
program can be selected to open an edit/delete screen
for the program.
Storing a program
Touch the [Add New] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 48 programs can be stored.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 7-24).
• A timer setting cannot be included in a program.
• At least one one-touch key must be specified in a program or the program cannot be stored.
Editing and deleting programs
A program can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the program.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 7-24).
Delete a program with the [Delete] key.
7-23
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Settings
Item
Description
Program Number
Set the number to be assigned to the program. The lowest available number is
automatically entered. To change the number, enter a number from 01 to 48. A
number that has already been stored cannot be used.
Program Name
Enter a maximum of 36 characters for the program name.
Address
Select the address(es) to be used in the program from the address book. Up to 500
destinations can be stored in one program.
Address Book screen
This displays a list of the currently stored addresses.
Condition Settings
Touch the [Setup] key to open the condition settings screen for an address.
Address Mode Setting
Select the mode in which the address is used (Internet fax, scan, etc.) When a mode
is selected, the settings for that mode appear.
Mode Settings
Frequently used settings can be stored in the same way as when they are selected
for a mode.
7-24
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Fax Data Receive/Forward
This section explains settings for reception and forwarding. Touch the [Fax Data Receive/Forward] key and configure
the settings.
For explanations of settings related to the fax function, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 7-101).
I-Fax Settings
These settings can be configured when the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
Reception Start
Touch this key to immediately connect to your mail server (POP3 server) and check for received Internet faxes. If you
have received Internet faxes, the faxes will be retrieved and printed.
To use this function, POP3 server settings must be configured. Configure these settings in the screen that appears when
[Application Settings] - [Internet Fax Settings] is selected in the Web page menu.
Manual Reception Key in Initial Screen
This displays the [I-Fax Manual Reception] key in the base screen of Internet fax mode.
Forward Received Data
When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another
Internet fax machine.
• To store a forwarding address, see "Set Address for Data Forwarding" (page 7-86) in the system settings (administrator).
• If forwarding was not successful because the transmission was canceled or a communication error occurred, the faxes that
were to be forwarded will return to the print queue on the machine.
• If the initial pages of a fax were successfully printed, only those pages that were not printed will be forwarded.
• Forwarding is not possible if no faxes were received or a forwarding address is not programmed.
• If "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" (page 7-79) is enabled, you will be prompted to enter a password. Enter the
correct password with the numeric keys.
To cancel forwarding...
Press the [JOB STATUS] key, and then cancel the forwarding job in the same way as a transmission job.
7-25
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Printer Condition Settings
The Printer Condition Settings are used to configure basic printer settings and settings for printing from a DOS
application. To configure the settings, touch the [Printer Condition Settings] key.
Printer Default Settings
The default settings are used to set advanced print conditions for printing in an environment where the print driver is not
used (such as printing from MS-DOS or from a computer that does not have the provided print driver installed).
When printing using the printer driver, the printer driver settings take precedence over the printer condition settings.
Settings
Item
Copies
Orientation
Selections
1 - 999 sets
• Portrait
• Landscape
Default Paper Size
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 7-1/4" x 10-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, B5, A5,
16k
Default Paper Type
Plain Paper, Letter Head, Pre-Printed, Pre-Punched, Recycle Paper, Color
Initial Resolution Setting
• 600 dpi
• 600 dpi (High Quality)
• 1200 dpi
Disable Blank Page Print
•
•
Line Thickness*1
(Disabled)
(Enabled)
0-9
2-Sided Print
• 1-Sided
• 2-Sided (Book)
• 2-Sided (Tablet)
N-Up Print*2
• 1-Up
• 2-Up
• 4-Up
Fit To Page*3
•
•
(Use Fit to Page)
(Do not use Fit to Page)
7-26
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Item
Selections
Print per Unit
•
•
(Use Print per Unit)
(Do not use Print per Unit)
Staple*4
•
•
(Use Staple)
(Do not use Staple)
•
•
(Disabled)
(Enabled)
Output
Quick File
*1 This setting is used to adjust the line width of vector graphics. Except for CAD and other specialized uses, there is
normally no need to change this setting. When "0" is selected, all lines are printed at a width of 1 dot.
*2 Paper sizes that can be used with this function are 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 14", and A4. (This function may not take
effect with some print methods.)
*3 Only effective when printing PDF, JPEG, and TIFF files.
*4 When a finisher is installed.
PCL Settings
This is used to set the symbol sets, fonts, and line feed code used in a PCL environment.
Settings
Item
PCL Symbol Set Setting
PCL Font Setting
PCL Line Feed Code
Wide A4
Description
Selections
Specify the symbol set used for
printing.
Select from 35 items.
Use this to select the font used for
printing.
• Internal Font
• Extended Font
(List of internal fonts when extended fonts are not
installed.)
This setting is used to select how
the printer responds when a line
feed command is received.
•
•
•
•
When this is enabled, 80
characters per line can be printed
on A4 size paper using a 10-pitch
font. (When this setting is
disabled, up to 78 characters can
be printed per line.)
•
•
7-27
0.CR=CR; LF=LF; FF=FF
1.CR=CR+LF; LF=LF;FF=FF
2.CR=CR; LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FF
3.CR=CR+LF; LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FF
(Enabled)
(Disabled)
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
PostScript Setting
When an error occurs during PostScript printing, these settings determine whether or not an error notice is printed and
whether or not the PostScript data is received in binary format.
Settings
Item
Description
Selections
Print PS Error
When a PS (PostScript) error
occurs during PostScript printing,
this setting determines whether or
not an error notice is printed.
•
•
(Enabled)
(Disabled)
Binary Processing
Receive PostScript data in binary
format.
•
•
(Enabled)
(Disabled)
7-28
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Document Filing Control
Document Filing Control is used to create, edit, and delete custom folders for document filing. Touch the [Document
Filing Control] key to configure the settings.
When the [Document Filing Control] key is touched, the following screen will appear.
Back
Folder List
Add New
Sort
Up
All Folders
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
User 1
User 2
User 3
User 4
User 5
User 6
User 7
User 8
User 9
User 10
• [Add New] key
Use this to add a new custom folder.
OPQRST
UVWXYZ
1
2
• List display
This displays a list of the currently configured custom
folders. A folder can be selected to open an edit/delete
screen for the folder.
Creating a custom folder
Touch the [Add New] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 1000 custom folders can be created.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 7-29).
Editing/deleting a custom folder
A custom folder can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the folder.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 7-29).
Delete a folder with the [Delete] key.
• If the folder has a password, the correct password must be entered before a file can be deleted.
• A folder that contains files cannot be deleted. Either move the files to a different folder or delete them before deleting the
folder.
Settings
Item
Description
Folder Name
Enter a name (maximum of 28 characters) for the custom folder to be created. A
name cannot be stored if it is already being used for another folder.
Initial of Folder
Enter up to 10 characters for the initials. The initials you enter here determine the
position of the one-touch key in the alphabetical index.
Password of Folder
To set a password for the folder, enter the desired number (5 to 8 digits).
Select User Name
Select the desired user name from the user list.
7-29
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
USB-Device Check
This lets you check the connection when a USB device is connected to the machine. Touch the [USB-Device Check] key
to check the connection.
The status of a USB device that is not compatible with the machine will not appear.
7-30
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
User Control
This section explains settings for user control. Touch the [User Control] key to configure the settings.
• User Control settings can only be configured when "User Authentication Setting" (page 7-51) is enabled.
• Depending on the user that logged in, it may not be possible to use the settings below.
Modify User Information
The information of the currently logged in user can be edited.
Settings
Item
Description
User Name
Edit the name of the user (max. 32 characters). This user name is used as the key
name in the login screen, the document filing user name, and the sender name. (The
user name must be unique.)
Initial
Edit the initials (maximum of 10 characters). The initials determine where the user
name will appear in the user name list.
Index
Select the desired custom index. The custom index names are the same as those in
the address book.
Login Name
This cannot be edited.
Password
Enter the password used for user authentication by login name and password (1 to
32 characters). (The password can be omitted.)
My Folder
This cannot be edited.
E-mail Address
This cannot be edited.
Authentication Settings
This cannot be edited.
Pages Limit Group
This cannot be edited.
Authority Group
This cannot be edited.
Favorite Operation Group
The favorite operation group that will be applied at login appears.
Check with your administrator for the settings of the Favorite Operation Groups.
User Number
This cannot be edited.
Deleting an account
This cannot be edited.
The items that appear will vary depending on the user authentication method that is enabled.
7-31
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
(ADMINISTRATOR)
This section explains the system settings that are configured by the administrator of the machine.
Accessing the System Settings (Administrator)
To access the system settings (administrator), the administrator must log in as explained below.
When User Authentication is not Enabled
When "User Authentication Setting" (page 7-51) is not enabled, follow the procedure below to log in.
Admin Password
System Settings
1
Total Count
Default Settings
List Print
(User)
Paper Tray
Settings
Address Control
Fax Data
Receive/Forward
Printer Condition
Settings
Document Filing
Control
USB-Device Check
Exit
Touch the [Admin Password] key.
Log in.
System Settings
Admin Password
Cancel
OK
(1) Touch the [Password] text box and enter
the administrator password.
Enter the administrator password. (From 5 to 32 characters)
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Password
Press here for keyboard.
2
(1)
(2)
This completes the administrator login procedure. The system settings (administrator) can now be used.
• User authentication is initially disabled (factory default setting).
• To logout...
Touch the [Logout] key in the top right corner of the screen. You can also touch the [Exit] key to quit the system settings.
(If Auto Clear activates, logout will automatically take place.)
7-32
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
When User Authentication is Enabled
When "User Authentication Setting" (page 7-51) is enabled, follow the procedure below to log in.
When auto login is enabled, the login screen will not appear.
When user authentication is by login name and password (and e-mail
address)
Administrator login is performed in the user selection screen. For more information on the login procedure when user
authentication is enabled, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" (page 1-17) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
6
12
18
Touch the [Admin Login] key.
Back
Device Account Mode User Selection
Name 1
Name 2
Name 3
Name 4
Name 5
Name 6
Name 7
Name 8
Name 9
Name 10
1
Admin Login
1
2
Direct Entry
Name 12
Name 11
ABC
All
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
User
User Authentication
OK
Log in.
(1) Touch the [Password] key.
Login Name
User Name
Enter the administrator password in the administrator
password entry screen.
Administrator
Password
Auth to:
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Login Locally
2
(1)
(2)
• If login name / password / e-mail address is selected for the authentication method, the [E-mail Address] key will
appear below the "User Name".
• For the factory default administrator password, see "TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF THE MACHINE" in the
Start Guide.
• This completes the administrator login procedure. The system settings (administrator) can now be used.
7-33
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Login by user number
User Authentication
OK
Touch the [Admin Login] key.
Enter the administrator password in the administrator password
entry screen.
This completes the administrator login procedure. The system
settings (administrator) can now be used.
Admin Login
• In addition to login by touching the [Admin Login] key, the system settings (administrator) can also be accessed when login
is performed by selecting a user with administrator rights from the user list or by entering a user number with administrator
rights. For more information on login procedures when user authentication is enabled, see "USER AUTHENTICATION"
(page 1-17) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
• To logout...
Press the [LOGOUT] (
) key. (Except when entering a fax number.)
(If Auto Clear activates, logout will automatically take place.)
7-34
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
System Settings (Administrator) List
The system settings that appear following administrator login are shown below. The default setting for each item is also
shown.
• Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.
• For information on the general settings, see "System Settings (General) List" (page 7-6).
• For explanations of settings related to the fax function, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 7-101).
User Control
Item
Factory default setting
■ User Control
Page
7-51
● User Authentication Setting
7-51
X User Authentication
Disabled
7-51
X Authentication Method Setting
Authenticate a User by Login Name
and Password
7-51
X Device Account Mode Setting
Disabled
7-51
● Other Settings
7-52
X Actions when the Limit of Pages for Output Jobs
Job is Completed even when the Limit
of Pages is Reached
7-52
X The Number of User Name Displayed Setting
12
7-52
X A Warning when Login Fails
Disabled
7-52
X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User
Disabled
7-52
X Automatically print stored jobs after login
Disabled
7-52
X Default Network Authentication Server Setting
–
7-52
X Display Usage Status after Login
–
7-52
X User Information Print
–
7-52
● User List
–
7-53
● Page Limit Group List
–
7-55
● Authority Group List
–
7-56
● Favorite Operation Group List*1
–
7-59
X Favorite Operation Group Registration*1
–
7-59
X My Menu List
–
7-60
–
7-61
● User Count
● Card Settings*2
7-62
X Card Reader Device Registration
7-62
*1 This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in "User Control" in the Web pages.
*2 When the HID card reader is available.
7-35
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Energy save
Item
Factory default setting
■ Energy Save
Page
7-63
● Toner Save Mode
X Print
Disabled
X Copy
Disabled
7-63
● Auto Power Shut-Off
Enabled
7-63
● Auto Power Shut-Off Timer
10 min.
7-63
● Preheat Mode Setting
1 min.
7-63
Operation Settings
Item
Factory default setting
Page
■ Operation Settings
7-64
● Other Settings
7-64
X Keys Touch Sound
Middle
7-64
‹ Key Touch Sound at Initial Point
Disabled
X Auto Clear Setting
60 sec.
7-64
‹ Cancel Auto Clear Timer
Disabled
X Message Time Setting
6 sec.
7-64
X MFP Display Language Setting
American English
7-64
X Disabling of JVob Priority Operation
Disabled
7-64
X Disabling of Bypass Printing
Disabled
7-64
X Key Operation Setting
0.0 sec.
7-64
‹ Disable Auto Key Repeat
Disabled
X Disabling of Clock Adjustment
Disabled
7-64
X Business Card Scan Option*1
Disabled
7-64
X Set Keyboard
External keyboard
7-65
All disabled
7-65
Pattern 4
7-65
Priority*2
X Initial Original Count Setting*2
● MFP Display Pattern Setting
● Customize Key Setting*3
X Copy
‹ Customize 1
File
‹ Customize 2
Quick File
‹ Customize 3
–
7-65
X Scan
‹ Customize 1
Address Review
‹ Customize 2
File
‹ Customize 3
Quick File
7-36
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Item
Factory default setting
Page
X Internet Fax*4
‹ (Same as Scan)
X Fax*5
‹ (Same as Scan)
X USB Memory Scan
7-65
‹ Customize 1
–
‹ Customize 2
–
‹ Customize 3
–
X Data Entry*6
‹ (Same as Scan)
● Home Screen Settings*3
–
7-66
● My Menu Settings*3
–
7-66
● Preview Setting
X Default Preview*2
All Disabled
X Default Preview Display
‹ Copy*2
Full Page
‹ Image Send
Scan Send: Full Page*2
Internet Fax Send: Full Page*2
Fax Send: Full Page*2
Data Entry: Full Page*2
USB Memory: Full Page*2
Reception Data: Twice
Memory Box: Twice
‹ Doc. Filing
7-67
Image Check: Twice
Scan to HDD: Full Page*2
X Received Data Image Check Setting
Disabled
X Default List/Thumbnail Display
List
● Remote Operation Settings
X Remote Software Operation
‹ Operational Authority
Prohibited
‹ View Password Entry Screen
Display in Both PC and MFP
X Operation from Specified PC
‹ Operational Authority
Prohibited
‹ Hostname or IP Address of PC
–
‹ View Password Entry Screen
Display in Both PC and MFP
7-68
X Operation by User who Has Password
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
‹ Operational Authority
Prohibited
‹ View Password Entry Screen
Display in Both PC and MFP
MX-B402 Only
MX-B402SC Only
This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in the system settings in the Web pages.
When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
When the application integration module is installed.
7-37
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Device Control
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-69
■ Device Control
● Other Settings
7-69
X AB/Inch Type Setting
Inch
7-69
X Default Original Size Settings
Copy: None
Fax/Image Send: 8-1/2" x 11"
Scan to HDD: 8-1/2" x 11"
7-69
X Setting of Default Original Exit Place
Upper Exit
7-69
X Original Feeding Mode
All Disabled
7-69
X Auto Paper Selection Setting
Plain Paper
7-69
X Detect Standard in Auto Color Mode
3
7-69
X Optimization of a Hard Disk
–
7-70
X Clear All Job Log Data
–
7-70
● Disabling of Devices
7-71
X Disabling of Document Feeder
Disabled
7-71
X Disabling of Duplex
Disabled
7-71
X Disabling of Optional Paper Feed Unit*2
Disabled
7-71
X Disabling of Tray Settings
Disabled
7-71
X Disabling of Offset*3
Disabled
7-71
X Disabling of Stapler*3
Disabled
7-71
16 - 23 lbs. (60 - 89g/m2)
7-71
● Fusing Control Settings
*1 MX-B402SC Only
*2 When a 500-sheet paper feed unit is installed.
*3 When a finisher is installed.
7-38
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Copy Function Settings
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-72
■ Copy Function Settings
● Initial Status Settings
X Paper Tray
Tray 1
X Exposure Type
Auto
X Copy Ratio
100%
X 2-Sided Copy
1-Side to 1-Side
X Output
Auto
7-72
● Other Settings
7-73
X Copy Exposure Adjustment
5
7-73
X Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios
–
7-73
X Setting a Maximum Number of Copies
999
7-73
‹ Side 1
1/2"
7-73
‹ Side 2
1/2"
X Initial Margin Shift Setting
X Erase Width Adjustment
7-73
‹ Edge Clearance Width
1/2"
X Card Shot Settings
‹ Original Size
X: 3-3/8", Y: 2-1/8"
‹ Fit to Page
Disabled
7-73
X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs
Disabled
7-73
X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy
Disabled
7-73
X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection
Disabled
7-73
X Auto Selection of Paper Tray that was Last Loaded
Disabled
7-74
X 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode for Document Feeder
Disabled
7-74
X Quick Scan from Document Glass
Disabled
7-74
7-39
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Network Settings
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-75
■ Network Settings
● IPv4 Settings
DHCP
7-75
● IPv6 Settings
Disabled
7-75
● Enable TCP/IP
Enabled
7-75
● Enable NetWare
Enabled
7-75
● Enable EtherTalk
Enabled
7-75
● Enable NetBEUI
Enabled
7-75
● Reset the NIC
–
7-75
● Ping Command
–
7-75
Printer Settings
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-76
■ Printer Settings
● Default Settings
7-76
X Prohibit Notice Page Printing
Enabled
7-76
X Prohibit Test Page Printing
Disabled
7-76
X A4/Letter Size Auto Change
Disabled
7-76
X Print Density Level
3
7-76
X Bypass Tray Settings
7-76
‹ Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray
Disabled
7-76
‹ Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray
Enabled
7-76
‹ Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select
Disabled
7-76
Enabled
7-76
X Job Spool Queuing
● Interface Settings
7-77
X Hexadecimal Dump Mode
Disabled
7-77
X I/O Timeout
60 sec.
7-77
X Enable USB Port
Enabled
7-77
X USB Port Emulation Switching
Auto
7-77
X Enable Network Port
Enabled
7-77
X Network Port Emulation Switching
Auto
7-77
X Port Switching Method
Switch at End of Job
7-77
7-40
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Image Send Settings
Item
Factory default setting
Page
■ Image Send Settings
7-78
● Operation Settings
7-78
X Other Settings
7-78
‹ Default Display Settings
Scan (fax when fax option is installed)
• Hold settings for a while after scanning has been
completed
Disabled
• Switch Automatically to Copy Mode Screen
Enabled
‹ Address Book Default Selection
7-78
Tab Switch: ABC, Address Type: All
7-78
‹ Initial Resolution Setting
• Scan
Apply the Resolution Set when
Stored: Disabled
200 X 200 dpi
• Internet Fax*1
Apply the Resolution Set when
Stored: Disabled
200 X 100 dpi
• Fax*2
Apply the Resolution Set when
Stored: Disabled
Standard
‹ Default Exposure Settings
Auto
• Original Image Type
Text
• Moiré Reduction
Disabled
7-78
7-78
‹ Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting
Disabled
7-79
‹ Scan Complete Sound Setting
Middle
7-79
‹ The Number of File Name/Subject/Body Keys Displayed
Setting
12
‹ The Number of Direct Address Keys Displayed Setting
10
7-79
‹ Disable Switching of Display Order
Disabled
7-79
‹ Hold Setting for Received Data Print*3
Disabled
7-79
7-79
‹ Erase Width Adjustment
7-79
• Edge Clearance Width
1/2"
7-41
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Item
Factory default setting
X Settings to Disable Registration
Page
7-79
‹ Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel
All disabled
7-79
‹ Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*4
All disabled
7-79
‹ Disable Registration of Program
All disabled
7-80
‹ Disable Registration of Memory Box
All disabled
7-80
‹ Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address
Search*4
All disabled
‹ Disable Registration Using Network Scanner Tool*4
Disabled
X Settings to Disable Transmission
7-80
7-80
7-80
‹ Disable [Resend] on Image Send Mode
Disabled
7-80
‹ Disable Selection From Address Book
All disabled
7-80
‹ Disable Direct Entry
All disabled
7-80
‹ Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission*1
Disabled
7-80
‹ Disable PC-Fax Transmission*2
Disabled
7-80
• Sender Name
–
7-81
• Sender Fax Number*2
–
• I-Fax Own Address*1
–
X Own Name and Destination Set
‹ Sender Data Registration
‹ Registration of Own Name Select
–
● Scan Settings
7-81
7-82
X Other Settings
7-82
‹ Default Sender Set
–
‹ Default Color Mode Settings
Mono 2
7-82
7-82
• Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Mode
Disabled
‹ Initial File Format Setting
• File Type
PDF
• Black & White
MMR (G4)
• Color/Grayscale
Medium
• Specified Pages per File
Disabled
• Number of Pages
Disabled
7-82
7-42
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Item
Factory default setting
Page
‹ Compression Mode at Broadcasting
• Black & White
MH (G3)
• Color/Grayscale
Medium
‹ Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments (E-mail)
Unlimited
‹ Maximum Size of Data Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network
Folder)
Unlimited
7-82
7-83
7-83
‹ Bcc Setting
• Enable Bcc
Disabled
• Display Bcc Address on the Job Status Screen
Disabled
7-83
‹ Disable Scan Function
• USB Memory Scan
Disabled
• PC Scan
Disabled
‹ Pre-Setting Mail Signature
X Default Address Setting
7-83
Disabled
7-83
Disabled
7-83
● I-Fax Settings*1
7-84
X I-Fax Default Settings
7-84
‹ Auto Wake Up Print
Enabled
7-84
‹ Compression Setting
MH (G3)
7-84
‹ Speaker Volume Setting
–
• Receive Signal
Middle
• Communication Error Signal
Middle
‹ Original Print on Transaction Report
Print Out Error Report Only
7-84
7-84
‹ Transaction Report Print Select Setting
• Single Sending
Print Out Error Report Only
• Broadcasting
Print Out All Report
• Receiving
No Printed Report
7-84
‹ Activity Report Print Select Setting
• Auto Print at Memory Full
Disabled
• Print Daily at Designated Time
Disabled
7-85
‹ Body Text Print Select Setting
Disabled
7-85
‹ Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Disabled
7-85
7-43
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Item
Factory default setting
X I-Fax Send Settings
Page
7-85
‹ I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting
Disabled
7-85
‹ I-Fax Reception Report Request Timeout Setting
1 hour
7-85
‹ Number of Resend Times at Reception Error
2
7-85
‹ Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments
Unlimited
7-85
‹ Rotation Sending Setting
All Enabled
7-86
‹ Printing Page Number at Receiver
Enabled
7-86
‹ Recall in Case of Line Busy
Times: 2, Interval 3 min.
7-86
‹ Recall in Case of Communication Error
Times: 2, Interval 3 min.
7-86
X I-Fax Receive Settings
7-86
‹ Auto Receive Reduce Setting
Enabled
7-86
‹ Duplex Reception Setting
Disabled
7-86
‹ Set Address for Data Forwarding
–
• Direct SMTP
Disabled
• Add Hostname or IP Address.
Disabled
• Hostname or IP Address
–
7-86
‹ Receiving Date & Time Print
Disabled
7-87
‹ POP3 Communication Timeout Setting
60 sec.
7-87
‹ Reception Check Interval Setting
5 min.
7-87
All Invalid
7-87
X Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Name Setting
*1
*2
*3
*4
When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
When the Internet fax expansion kit or facsimile expansion kit is installed.
When network connection is enabled.
7-44
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Document Filing Settings
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-88
■ Document Filing Settings
● Other Settings
7-88
X Default Mode Settings
Sharing Mode
7-88
X Sort Method Setting
Date
7-88
X Administrator Authority Setting
‹ Delete File
Disabled
‹ Delete Folder
Disabled
‹ Change Password
Disabled
7-88
X Delete All Quick Files
‹ Delete
–
‹ Delete quick files at power up (protected files excluded)
Enabled
X Default Color Mode Settings
Mono 2
X Default Exposure Settings
Auto
‹ Original Image Type
Text
‹ Moiré Reduction
Disabled
7-88
7-88
7-88
X Initial Resolution Settings
600 x 600 dpi
7-88
X Scan Complete Sound Setting
Middle
7-89
X Disable Stamp for Reprinting
Disabled
7-89
‹ Selection of [All Users] is not allowed.
Enabled
7-89
‹ Selection of [User Unknown] is not allowed.
Enabled
X Batch Print Settings
X Erase Width Adjustment
7-89
‹ Edge Clearance Width
1/2"
X Card Shot Settings
‹ Original Size
X: 3-3/8", Y: 2-1/8"
‹ Fit to Store Size
Disabled
7-45
7-89
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Item
Factory default setting
Page
● Document Output Options
X Print
‹ Copy
Enabled
‹ Print
Enabled
‹ Scan Send
Disabled
‹ Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)*1
Disabled
‹ Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)*2
Disabled
‹ Scan to HDD
Enabled
X Scan Send
‹ Copy
Disabled
‹ Scan Send
Enabled
‹ Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)*1
Disabled
‹ Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)*2
Disabled
‹ Scan to HDD
Enabled
7-90
X Internet Fax Send*1
‹ Copy
Disabled
‹ Scan Send
Disabled
‹ Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)
Enabled
‹ Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)
Disabled
‹ Scan to HDD
Disabled
X Fax Send*2
‹ Copy
Disabled
‹ Scan Send
Disabled
‹ Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)*1
Disabled
‹ Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)*2
Enabled
‹ Scan to HDD
Disabled
7-90
● Automatic Deletion of File Settings
All invalid
7-90
*1 When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
*2 When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
7-46
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
List Print (Administrator)
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-91
■ List Print (Administrator)
● Administrator Settings List
–
7-91
● Image Sending Activity Report
–
7-91
● Data Receive/Forward List
–
7-91
● Web Settings List*1
–
7-91
● Metadata Set List*2
–
7-91
*1 When network connection is enabled.
*2 When the application integration module is installed.
Security Settings
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-92
■ Security Settings
● SSL Settings
X Server Port
‹ HTTPS
Enabled
‹ IPP-SSL
Disabled
‹ Redirect HTTP to HTTPS in Device Web Page Access
Disabled
X Client Port
7-92
‹ HTTPS
Enabled
‹ FTPS
Enabled
‹ SMTP-SSL
Enabled
‹ POP3-SSL
Enabled
‹ LDAP-SSL
Enabled
‹ Level of Encryption
Low
● IPsec Settings
Disabled
7-92
● IEEE802.1X Setting
Disabled
7-92
7-47
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Enable/Disable Settings
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-93
■ Enable/Disable Settings
● Printer Condition Settings
7-93
X Disable Blank Page Print
Disabled
● User Control
7-93
7-93
X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User
Disabled
● Operation Settings
7-93
7-93
X Cancel Auto Clear Timer
Disabled
7-93
X Disabling of Job Priority Operation
Disabled
7-93
X Disabling of Bypass Printing
Disabled
7-93
X Disable Auto Key Repeat
Disabled
7-93
X Disabling of Clock Adjustment
Disabled
7-93
● Device Control
7-93
X Disabling of Document Feeder
Disabled
7-93
X Disabling of Duplex
Disabled
7-93
X Disabling of Optional Paper Feed Unit*1
Disabled
7-93
X Disabling of Tray Setting
Disabled
7-93
X Disabling of Offset*2
Disabled
7-93
X Disabling of Stapler*2
Disabled
7-93
● Copy Function Settings
7-94
X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs
Disabled
7-94
X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy
Disabled
7-94
X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection
Disabled
7-94
● Printer Settings
7-94
X Prohibit Notice Page Printing
Enabled
7-94
X Prohibit Test Page Printing
Disabled
7-94
X Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select
Disabled
7-94
7-48
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Item
Factory default setting
● Image Send Settings
Page
7-94
X Other Disabling
7-94
‹ Disable Switching of Display Order
Disabled
7-94
• PC Scan
Disabled
7-94
• USB Memory Scan
Disabled
‹ Disable Scan Function
X Settings to Disable Registration
7-94
‹ Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel
All disabled
7-94
‹ Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*3
All disabled
7-95
‹ Disable Registration of Program
All disabled
7-95
‹ Disable Registration of Memory Box
All disabled
7-95
‹ Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address
Search*3
All disabled
‹ Disable Registration Using Network Scanner Tools*3
Disabled
7-95
7-95
X Settings to Disable Transmission
7-95
‹ Disable [Resend] on Image Send Mode
Disabled
7-95
‹ Disable Selection from Address Book
All disabled
7-95
‹ Disable Direct Entry
All disabled
7-95
‹ Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission*4
Disabled
7-95
‹ Disable PC-Fax Transmission*5
Disabled
7-95
● Document Filing Settings
7-95
X Disable Stamp for Reprinting
Disabled
7-95
‹ Selection of [All Users] is not allowed.
Enabled
7-95
‹ Selection of [User Unknown] is not allowed.
Enabled
X Batch Print Settings
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
When a 500-sheet paper feed unit is installed.
When a finisher is installed.
When network connection is enabled.
When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
Change Administrator Password
Item
■ Change Administrator Password
7-49
Factory default setting
Page
See "TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF
THE MACHINE" in the Start Guide.
7-96
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Product Key
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-97
■ Product Key*
● Serial Number
–
7-97
● Internet Fax Expansion Kit
–
7-97
● E-mail Alert and Status
–
7-97
● Application Integration Module
–
7-97
● Application Communication Module
–
7-97
● External Account Module
–
7-97
● XPS Expansion Kit
–
7-97
* It may not be possible to use some settings, depending on the peripheral devices installed.
Data Backup
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-98
■ Data Backup
● Storage Backup
–
7-98
● Device Cloning
–
7-98
Storing/Calling of System Settings
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-99
■ Storing/Calling of System Settings
● Restore Factory Defaults
–
7-99
● Store Current Configuration
–
7-99
● Restore Configuration
–
7-99
Sharp OSA Settings
Item
Factory default setting
Page
7-100
■ Sharp OSA Settings*
● External Account Setting
X External Account Control
Disabled
X Enable Authentication by External Server
Disabled
7-100
● USB Driver Settings
X External Keyboard
Internal driver
X USB Memory
Internal driver
X Level of Encryption
None
7-100
● Job Priority Preference
Standard
7-100
* When the external account module or application communication module is available.
7-50
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
User Control
User Control is used to configure settings for user authentication. Touch the [User Control] key to configure the settings.
User Authentication Setting
These settings enable or disable user authentication and specify the authentication method.
When user authentication is enabled, each user of the machine is registered. When a user logs in, settings for that user
are applied. This function allows greater control of security and cost management.
In addition, even if the user information is not stored in the machine, it is possible to log in by directly entering user
information stored on a LDAP server. In this case, the login user will be the factory-stored "User". For more information,
see "Factory-stored users" (page 7-53).
• For the procedure for storing users, see "User List" (page 7-53).
• For more information on login procedures when user authentication is enabled, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" (page
1-17) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
User Authentication
When [User Authentication] is enabled, the login screen
appears before an operation is begun in any mode
except the job status screen*. You must log in as one of
the stored users. (After logging in, you can move freely
through the modes.)
* The login screen appears when a document filing file is
used or when a broadcast transmission is reattempted
from the job status screen.
Authentication Method Setting
This selects the authentication method. When using user
authentication, be sure to configure this setting first. The
items configured for users stored after the user
authentication method is set vary depending on the
selected authentication method.
Authenticate a User by Login Name and Password
Standard authentication method using a login name and
password.
Authenticate a User by Login Name, Password and
E-mail Address
In addition to a login name and password, this
authentication method also requires the entry of an
e-mail address.
• The login screen will vary depending on the
authentication method that is selected. For more
information, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" (page
1-17) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
• When "Authenticate a User by User Number Only"
is selected for the authentication method, network
authentication cannot be used.
Device Account Mode Setting
A specific user can be stored as an auto login user.
When this setting is enabled, login can be performed
automatically.
This function eliminates the bother of logging in but still
allows the settings of the selected user (network
settings, favorite operations, etc.) to be applied.
You can also allow users other than the auto login user
to temporarily log in and work using their own authority
and settings. To allow other users to log in temporarily
when [Device Account Mode] is enabled, select [Allow
Login by Different User].
For example, you can require authentication for
one-sided copying only.
• If auto login fails for some reason when auto login is
enabled, or the login user does not have
administrator rights, all system settings or the
system settings (administrator) will lock. In this
event, the administrator should touch the [Admin
Password] key in the system settings screen and
log in again.
Authenticate a User by User Number Only
This can be used as a simple authentication method
when network authentication is not used.
• To log in as a user other than the auto login user
when [Allow Login by Different User] is enabled,
press the [LOGOUT] key (
) to cancel the auto
user login state. The user authentication screen will
appear to let you log in. After using the machine,
press the [LOGOUT] key (
) to log out.
7-51
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Other Settings
Actions when the Limit of Pages
for Output Jobs
Automatically print stored jobs
after login
This setting determines whether or not a job will be
completed if the page limit is reached while the job is in
progress.
The following selections are available.
• Job is Stopped when the Limit of Pages is Reached
• Job is Completed even when the Limit of Pages is
Reached
When retention is enabled in the printer driver and print
data has been spooled to the machine, you can have the
spooled print data automatically print out when the user
who enabled retention logs in.
The Number of User Name
Displayed Setting
Use this to set the default network authentication server.
When a user logs in from the Web page or sends a print
job to the machine using user information that is not
stored on the machine, the authentication server is not
known. This setting is used to specify one of the LDAP
servers stored on the machine as the authentication
server.
Default Network Authentication
Server Setting
The number of users that are displayed in the user
selection screen can be selected (6, 12, or 18 users).
This setting also applies to the user selection screen
of document filing and the sender selection screen.
When login is performed by network authentication
using user information that is not stored in the
machine, the login user will be the factory-stored
"User". For more information, see "Factory-stored
users" (page 7-53).
A Warning when Login Fails
This setting is used to display a warning and prohibit
login for five minutes if login fails three times in a row.
This prevents an unauthorized person from attempting to
guess a password. (The number of failed login attempts
is retained even if the power is turned off.)
Locking of the operation panel for 5 minutes can be
canceled by clicking [User Control] - [Default Settings]
- [Release the Lock on Machine Operation Panel] in
the Web page menu.
Disabling of Printing by Invalid
User
Printing by users whose information is not stored in the
machine, such as printing without entering valid user
information in the printer driver or printing of a file on an
FTP server from the Web pages, can be prohibited.
When a print job is executed by a user that is not
stored in the machine, the factory-stored "Other User"
is used as the login user. For more information, see
"Factory-stored users" (page 7-53).
Display Usage Status after Login
When user authentication is enabled, this setting
specifies whether or not the page counts of a user
appear when the user logs in.
User Information Print
The following lists can be printed.
• User List
• List of Number of Pages Used
• Page Limit Group List*
• Authority Group List
• Favorite Operation Group List*
• All User Information Print
Touch the key of the desired list to begin printing.
* Cannot be printed when no groups are stored.
7-52
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
User List
This is used to store, edit, and delete users when user authentication is enabled.
When the [User List] key is touched, the following screen appears.
Back
User List
Delete All Users
Add New
Index Switch
Administrator
User
1
Other User
Name 1
2
Name 2
Name 3
Name 4
Name 5
Name 6
Name 7
ABC
Sorting Order
Search Number
All
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
QRSTU
VWXYZ
etc.
• User List
This shows the factory-stored users and the currently
stored users.
• [Add New] key
Use this to add a new user.
• [Delete All Users] key
Use this to delete all stored users. (Excluding factory
stored users.) This operation can only be performed
by an administrator.
Storing a user
Touch the [Add New] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 1000 users can be stored.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 7-54).
Editing/deleting a user
A user can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the user.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 7-54).
Delete a user with the [Delete] key.
• When auto login is enabled, "Delete All Users" cannot be used.
• The factory-stored users cannot be deleted.
Factory-stored users
The following users are stored in the machine at the factory.
• Administrator: Factory-stored account for the administrator of the machine.
• User: This is used when network authentication is used and a login name not stored in the machine is directly
entered. (This cannot be selected in the login user screen.)
• Other User: This is used when a print job is executed using invalid user information. (This cannot be selected in the
login user screen.)
For settings related to each of the users, see the following table.
User Name
Administrator
User
Other User
Login Name
admin
users
Other
Password
(See the Start Guide.)* 1
users*1
–
My Folder
Main Folder
Authentication Settings
Login Locally
Pages Limit Group
Unlimited*1
Authority Group*2
Admin
–
User*1
7-53
Guest*1
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Favorite Operation Group
Card Settings*3
Following the System Settings*1
Not set
*1 Items that can be changed.
*2 For detailed information of each of the settings, see "List of settings and factory default settings of template groups" (page 7-57).
*3 When the HID card reader is enabled.
Settings
Item
User Name
Apply User Name to Log-in
Name*1
Description
Store the name of the user (max. 32 characters). This user name is used as the key name in
the login screen, the document filing user name, and the sender name. (The user name must
be unique.)
Touch this key to enter the user name in the login name.
Initial
This determines where the user name will appear in the user list. Up to 10 characters can be
entered.
Index
Select the desired custom index. The custom index names are the same as those in the
address book.
User Number*2
Enter a user number (5 to 8 digits).
Login Name*1
Enter the login name used when authentication by login name/password is enabled
(maximum of 255 characters). (The login name must be unique.)
Password*1, 3
Enter the password used when authentication by login name/password is enabled (1 to 32
characters). (The password can be omitted.)
E-mail Address
Enter the e-mail address used in the sender list and for LDAP authentication (maximum of 64
characters).
My Folder
A folder ("My Folder") can be specified as the folder used by the user for document filing. A
previously created folder can be selected or you can create and select a new folder.
Authentication Settings*1
Select [Login Locally] or [Network Authentication] (when LDAP is enabled) for "Authenticate
to:".
Authentication Server
When [Network Authentication] is selected, select the server to be used for user
authentication from the list of LDAP servers stored in the Web pages.
Pages Limit Group
Specify page limits for the user by selecting one of the stored page limit groups. The factory
default setting is [Unlimited].
For more information, see "Page Limit Group List" (page 7-55).
Authority Group
Specify the authority of the user by selecting one of the stored authority groups. The factory
default setting is [User].
For more information, see "Authority Group List" (page 7-56).
Favorite Operation Group
The favorite operation group that will be applied at login appears. The factory default setting is
[Following the System Settings].
The setting can be changed in the [User Control] menu in the Web pages.
*1 Does not appear when "User Number" is selected for the authentication method.
*2 Only appears when "User Number" is selected for the authentication method.
*3 Not required when network authentication is used, as the password stored in the LDAP server is used.
7-54
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Page Limit Group List
This is used to store groups of Account Limit Settings. The page limits for each user are specified by selecting one of
these stored groups when the user is stored.
When the [Page Limit Group List] key is touched, the following screen appears.
System Settings
Back
Page Limit Group List
Add New
• [Add New] key
Use this to add a new group.
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 8
Group 9
Group 10
Group 11
Group 12
• List display
This shows the currently stored groups. A group name
can be selected to open an edit/delete screen for that
group.
Storing a page limit group
Touch the [Add New] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 20 groups can be stored.
For more information, see "Settings".
Editing a page limit group
A group can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the group.
For information on the settings, see "Settings".
To return a group to the factory default state, set "Select the Group Name to be the Registration Model" to "Unlimited" in
the editing screen.
Settings
Item
Description
Group Name
Store the name of the group (max. 32 characters).
Select the Group Name to be
the Registration Model
Select one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new group. When
selected, the group's settings are applied.
Function names
The names of the functions that can be configured are displayed. Set a limit for each function.
Page Limit
When [Prohibited] is selected for a mode, input and output from the mode are prohibited.
When [Unlimited] is selected for a mode, there is no limit to the number of pages that can be
input/output in that mode.
When [Limited] is selected, enter a limit (1 to 99999999 pages).
7-55
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Authority Group List
Use this to store groups of user authority settings. The authority of each user is specified by selecting one of these
stored groups when the user is stored.
When the [Authority Group List] key is touched, the following screen appears.
System Settings
Back
Authority Group List
Add New
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 8
Group 9
Group 10
Group 11
Group 12
• [Add New] key
Use this to add a new group.
• List display
This shows the currently stored groups. A group name
can be selected to open an edit/delete screen for that
group.
Storing an authority group
Touch the [Add New] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 20 groups can be stored.
For information on the settings, see "List of settings and factory default settings of template groups" (page 7-57).
Editing an authority group
A group can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the group. For information on
the settings, see "List of settings and factory default settings of template groups" (page 7-57).
To return a group to the factory default state, select [Return to Administrator Authority], [Return to User Authority], or
[Return to Guest Authority].
7-56
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
List of settings and factory default settings of template groups
Item
Description
Group Name
Store the name of the group (max. 32 characters).
Select the Group Name to be the
Registration Model
Select one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new
group. When selected, the group's settings are applied.
The factory default groups and their settings are shown below.
Admin
User
Guest
Copy
Copy Approval Setting
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Special Modes Usage
Allowed
Allowed
Prohibited
Printer Approval Setting
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
FTP Pull Print
Allowed
Allowed
Prohibited
USB Memory Direct Print
Allowed
Allowed
Prohibited
Network Folder Pull Print
Allowed
Allowed
Prohibited
All allowed
All allowed
All allowed
Color Scan
Allowed
Allowed
Prohibited
Special Modes Usage
Allowed
Allowed
Prohibited
All allowed
All allowed
All allowed
• Color Mode Approval Setting
All allowed
All allowed
Only Black & White
Allowed
• Special Modes Usage
Allowed
Allowed
Prohibited
Printer
Image Send
Approval Settings for Each Mode
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
E-mail
FTP
Desktop
Network Folder
USB Memory
PC Scan
Internet Fax Send
PC-I-Fax Send
Fax Send
PC-Fax Send
Approval Setting for Addressing
• Approval Setting for Direct Entry
• Approval Setting to Use a Local Address Book
• Approval Settings to Use a Global
Address Book
Document Filing
Scan to HDD
7-57
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Item
Description
Prints (Document Filing)
• Doc. Filing Print Approval Setting
All allowed
All allowed
Allowed
• Special Modes Usage
Allowed
Allowed
Prohibited
• Document Filing Image Check
Allowed
Allowed
Prohibited
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Approval Settings for 2-Sided Print
[1-Sided/2-Sided
Approved]
[1-Sided/2-Sided
Approved]
[1-Sided/2-Sided
Approved]
Output Approval Settings
All allowed
All allowed
All prohibited
Allowed*2
Only user authority
settings
are allowed
All settings prohibited
Sharp OSA
Approval Setting to Use a Sharp OSA
Common Functions
MFP Settings
System Settings Operational Authority
System Settings*1
Web Settings Operational Authority
Display of Device/Network Status
Allowed
Power Reset
Prohibited
Machine Identification
Prohibited
Network Settings
Prohibited
Application Settings (Excluding
Registration of Pre-set Text/Forward
Table)
Prohibited
Allowed
Prohibited
Registration of Pre-set Text/Forward Table
Allowed
E-mail Alert and Status
Prohibited
Job Log Setting
Prohibited
Port Control/ Filter Settings
Prohibited
Custom Link Setting
Prohibited
Operation Manual Download
Allowed
*1 For information on each setting, see the system settings (general/administrator) lists.
*2 All allowed except "Change Administrator Password".
Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.
7-58
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Favorite Operation Group List
This is used to store favorite operation groups and My Menu.
This setting can only be configured in the Web pages. It cannot be configured in the touch panel of the machine.
Favorite Operation Group Registration
Sets of preferred settings can be configured and registered as groups. For example, a user who speaks a different
language would normally have to change the display language each time he or she uses the machine; however, by
storing the language in a favorite operation group, the language is automatically selected when the user logs in.
Settings
Item
Description
Group Name
Store the name of the group (max. 32 characters).
Select the Group Name to be
the Registration Model
Select one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new group. When
selected, the group's settings are applied.
Copy
Initial Status Settings
Select settings for Paper Tray, Exposure Type, Copy Ratio, Duplex, and Output.
Image Send
Initial Status Settings
Select settings for Resolution, Exposure, Color Mode, File Format, and Original Image Type.
Store the default fax sender name and number.
Document Filing
Scan to HDD: Initial Status
Settings
Select settings for Color Mode, Resolution, Exposure and Original Image Type.
System Settings
AB/Inch Type Setting
AB or inches can be set for the units/values of default settings and entry ranges in each screen.
MFP Display Language Setting
Select the display language.
Key Operation Setting
Set the key input time and Auto Key Repeat setting.
Keys Touch Sound
Set the sound made when keys are touched.
Keyboard Select
Set the language that appears on the keyboard.
MFP Display Pattern Setting
Select the color pattern used in the touch panel.
Automatically print stored jobs
after login
When retention is enabled in the printer driver and print data has been spooled to the
machine, you can have the spooled print data automatically print out when the user who
enabled retention logs in.
My Menu Settings
Select the My Menu.
Preview Setting
Default Preview Display
Image Send:
Select the zoom ratio of the preview that can be displayed when an image
is received and in the memory box.
Document Filing: Set the zoom ratio of the preview that can be displayed when a stored file is
opened.
Default List/Thumbnail Display
Select whether the default display format is list or thumbnails.
Customize Key Setting
Customize Key Setting
Set customized keys for each mode.
7-59
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
My Menu List
Home screen settings must be previously stored. Select My Menu when storing a favorite operation group.
Settings
Item
Description
My Menu Name
Enter a maximum of 32 characters for the home screen name.
Select the My Menu to be the
Registration Model
Select one of the previously stored My Menu as a template for the new My Menu. When
selected, the My Menu settings are applied.
Display Title
Show a title on the My Menu.
Title
Enter a maximum of 70 characters for the title name.
Display the User Name
Show the currently logged-in user name on the My Menu.
Display the Date and Time
Show the date and time on the My Menu.
Background Image
Select the image that appears in the background of the My Menu.
Design Template
A template for the design of the My Menu can be selected from the list. A sample of the
selected template can be viewed.
Layout of Keys on Screen
The layout of the keys in the My Menu is displayed.
Key Number
Select the number of the key that you want to set, referring to "Screen Key Layout".
Key Name
The name of the key selected in "Key Number" can be changed (maximum of 48 characters).
Link Item
Specify the function that you want to use in the key selected in "Key Number".
7-60
Contents
SYSTEM SETTINGS
User Count
This displays the total number of pages printed by each user.
When the [User Count] key is touched, the following screen appears.
Bac